THE BEGINNER’S GREEK BOOK BY JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE, Ph.D. (Harv.) Professor of Greek in Harvard University Ovkovv ofrd’ 6ti dpxv iravrbi epyov ptyiCTOv, AWcos re /cal vicp /cal dira\$ orcpovv; — Plat. Rep, II. 377 a* b OSTo N ®WEsT/v colTe^e faculty . ,r LC STM. 1T l ‘BRary Mass. Boston, U.S.A. PUBLISHED BY GINN & COMPANY 1896 Copyright, 1892, By John Williams White, All Eights Reserved. 131011 Typography by J. S. Presswork by Ginn & Co., Boston, U.S.A. TO PROFESSOR WILLIAM W. GOODWIN, TOL<5 (filXoLS , rUcrOai S’ a^tcoTara) fiportov TOiV vvv, THIS BOOK IS GRATEFULLY DEDICATED. I L PEEFACE. ♦o* The Beginner’s Greek Book which is here submitted to the public is complete in itself, and is intended to furnish work for the first year’s study. In writing it I have assumed that the main object of elementary instruction in Greek is to teach the beginner to read; further, that the pupils who use this book will be fifteen years of age, on the average, when they take it in hand, that they will already have studied Latin for at least one year, and that they are to be fitted at the end of two years to read simple Attic prose at sight. This book differs in important particulars, but not essen¬ tially in its plan, from my First Lessons in Greek, first pub¬ lished in 1876. The two books make about equal demands upon the pupil during the first six months of his study. The increased size of this book is due mainly to the fact that it is complete in itself and contains the text of the first eight chap¬ ters of Xenophon’s Anabasis, with summaries of contents and notes, arranged as reading lessons. I am well aware that there is a demand in some quarters for small introductory books in teaching the elements of Greek and Latin. But the remarkable favour with which my First Lessons in Greek has been received encourages me to think that most teachers agree with me in believing that in the study of Greek at least, which is so highly inflected, it is well to lay broad and secure foundations. In order to be able to read even simple Attic prose at sight one must know the usual forms of the Greek language, its v VI PREFACE. ordinary constructions, and its general vocabulary. These three things are absolutely necessary and are of equal impor¬ tance. In presenting forms I have employed strictly the deductive method, if so large a phrase may be applied to such elemen¬ tary matters. The pupil is given a set of facts, commonly a paradigm or the like, with the necessary explanations, and is then required to observe the illustration of the general law or fact in particular instances of its use. In each of the lessons on inflexion a double set of exercises, consisting of Greek sen¬ tences to be translated into English and English sentences to be rendered into Greek, follows the facts of Grammar which form the subject of the lesson. I have small faith in the method which requires a pupil to construct the Greek para¬ digms from bits of text by a process called induction. Such a method of acquiring the forms of the language is unneces¬ sarily difficult and confusing, and cannot establish its claim to afford superior mental training. I have aimed to give only the usual forms of the language, those that will be of practical service to the pupil when he begins to read. The study of grammar should be only the means to this end. My aim in general has been to give the minimum amount of grammar. When this minimum amount has been learnt thoroughly, what else the pupil will need to know, as he reads, he will acquire naturally and easily at the time when he needs it. During the second year’s study a good grammar should be constantly in hand and constantly in use. Opinions differ as to what this minimum amount is. It is a mistake to reduce it unduly, in the hope of getting on rapidly. There is no such thing as learning Greek in six easy lessons. Its forms are numerous, apparently complex, and hard to acquire; its syntax is highly developed. The first year’s study of Greek is the hardest. If it is made too simple and easy, we merely defer to an evil day the acquisition of knowledge which should be got early, and bring confusion on PREFACE, • • Vll our pupils by setting them to read before they are properly prepared. The verb is introduced at the first and its forms are devel¬ oped alternately with those of the other parts of speech. Fifty-three of the first one hundred lessons are on the verb, twenty-nine on the other parts of speech. If this is a proper division, it is obvious that the heavy task of mastering the verb should be undertaken as early as possible. We thus also secure variety, and are able to employ from the beginning exercises for drill that consist of complete sentences. The verb is developed first by moods, later by tense systems, a method which has received the hearty approval of teachers. If the development were at first by tense-systems, the sub¬ junctive and optative moods would be introduced at a time when it would be impossible adequately to explain their uses. But when the beginner first learns the forms" of these moods, he should have the most important of their uses ex¬ plained to him. If he is taught to translate the subjunctive with may and the optative with might , as if they were inde¬ pendent moods, he gets no adequate feeling of their force, and his confusion of mind is often permanent. He should first be taught the forms and uses of the indicative, the mood of predication, in all of its tenses and voices. He can then safely undertake the subjunctive and optative, which are mainly moods of dependence. The presentation of verbal forms a second time by tense-systems furnishes the needed review of a difficult part of speech, with the great advantage of the variety secured by a new order of development. In general reviews should not be the mere repetition of earlier lessons. Only vowel verbs and verbs with themes in -8 are introduced in the exercises of the first fifty-nine lessons, with the excep¬ tion of three common mute verbs, ayw, ire//* 7 ™, aT1( l some forms of «/u; and vowel verbs which contract are not intro¬ duced until the thirty-first lesson. PREFACE • • • Vlll ■ I have not hesitated to analyze the forms of the verb, since I believe that this is the quickest and surest way in which to learn them. It is a severe strain upon the memory of the eye and ear to attempt to retain these numerous forms as separate and individual elements. But if the pupil is given a clear conception of the significance of theme, tense stem, and per¬ sonal endings, the strain is greatly relieved. He is then able to construct his paradigms by the combination of a relatively small number of facts, and is not dependent solely on his memory in recalling forms, but reclaims them by a logical process of form-building. This very process fixes them more securely in his mind. I have for the same reasons analyzed the forms of nouns of the consonant declension. The recogni¬ tion here of stem and case endings as distinct elements in combination makes the acquisition of the forms easy. Since the exercises of the lessons consist of sentences and not of phrases, in developing the forms I have had to deal also with laws of construction. Principles of syntax are presented inductively as needed. Examples are given and the general law is developed from particular instances of its use. 1 But the subject of syntax is not made prominent in the first one hundred lessons. Principles which hold good also in Latin or English or in both are taken for granted, being at most referred to in a foot-note. Moreover, single occurrences of constructions not in themselves difficult are explained by a mere statement of the fact in a foot-note. Difficult constructions have been avoided in selecting the sentences for these exercises, and with the same object in view the sentences have often been simplified. The subject of syntax is formally presented in nineteen les¬ sons at the end of the book, which are arranged alternately with lessons for reading. Each of the lessons on syntax con¬ tains three parts: first, a Greek exercise consisting of num- 1 See §§89, 173, 222, 270, 272, etc. PREFACE. IX bered sentences which, illustrate a given set of principles; secondly, statements, in the form of rules, of the laws of con¬ struction thus illustrated, each rule having prefixed to it, with comment, the numbers of the sentences which establish it as a law; thirdly, an English exercise consisting of sentences to be rendered into Greek, in which the pupil will apply construc¬ tively the principles just reached by induction. Lessons of just this constitution have never before been used, to my knowledge, in any elementary Greek book. Fourteen of the first one hundred lessons are solely devoted to the study of words and to the art of reading. These four¬ teen lessons mark a significant departure from the methods of most elementary Greek books, especially in the attention here given to the systematic acquisition of a vocabulary. The meagreness of the vocabulary of most pupils who enter college from the schools is an evil not to be ignored. There is no good reason why this evil should exist at all. The vocabu¬ lary of ancient Greek is copious; but one does not need to know a multitude of words in order to be able to read with facility. The important words to fix in the memory are the root or stem words; with these the words that are related to them in form and meaning, the two tests by which we estab¬ lish the relationship of words in etymologizing, naturally group themselves. The very great majority of Greek words are either derivatives or compounds. But the beginner’s ap¬ proach to the use of the group system must be gradual. The words used in this book, with a few exceptions, occur in Xenophon’s Anabasis, and my aim has been to select for use those which occur there the oftenest. In the eleven lessons that follow the four introductory lessons one hundred and sixty-five words are used. One hundred and thirteen are nouns, twenty-six are verbs. These nouns occur in the Anab¬ asis over thirty-five hundred times; on the average each noun occurs over thirty times. The verbs occur more than twenty- two hundred times; if equ is thrown out of the count, each of X PBEFACE . the other twenty-five verbs occurs in the Anabasis on the average some forty times. There are forty special vocabularies in this book. Each of these contains all of the words in the exercises of the lesson of which it is a part that have not occurred in previous lessons or do not occur in the lesson itself in the part that precedes the exercises. No use of the general vocabulary need be made before the fifty-eighth lesson. The words in the forty special vocabularies are collected in five lists for review. The principle of associating Greek words that are related in form and meaning is first applied in the sixteenth lesson. It is gradually made more and more prominent in the following special vocabularies and lists. No stress is laid on the relationship of Greek words to English words in these early lessons. It is silently indicated by the use of different types. Nothing is said about the connexion of Greek words with Latin words until the fifty-seventh lesson. The impor¬ tant thing to do first is to confirm the pupil in the habit of tracing the relationship of Greek words among themselves, so that when a new word is met his first inquiry will be whether it is not related to some other word that has previously occurred. Forty groups of words follow the special vocabularies. The first of these is a part of the fifty-seventh lesson. Preceding this are two lessons on the formation of words. The words in each group should first be analyzed, and should then be com¬ mitted to memory. This will now be an interesting, easy, and profitable task. The number of words used in this book will seem to be large, but the principle has been adopted deliberately. On an average there are twenty words to the lesson in the forty-four lessons covered by the five word-lists. I should not feel justi¬ fied in making the number so great, if I believed that in acquiring these twenty words the pupil would be obliged to fix in his mind twenty distinct and separate signs of ideas. PREFACE. XI Even at this early stage of his study dependence can be placed on the widely applying principle of relationship to make his acquisition of a vocabulary increasingly easier. The exercises consist of sentences, either in their original form or simplified, that have been taken, with a few exceptions, from Xenophon’s Anabasis, chiefly from the first four books. Those who have done these exercises will find it an easy task to read the Anabasis. But a more important consideration in thus basing the exercises on the work of Xenophon is that thereby we secure a more consistent vocabulary, uniformity of style, a single theme whose story can be told the pupil at the begining, and real drill on the forms of the language as actually used by a classical writer. Each sentence illustrates the principles of the lesson in which it occurs. The exercises are copious and are intended to furnish the maximum of prac¬ tice. Each consists of two parts. The second part contains English sentences to be rendered into Greek. Such construc¬ tive drill is of great value in the acquisition of a language, since it fixes forms, constructions, and words securely in the mind. These English sentences are chiefly translations or adap¬ tations from the Anabasis. For the satisfaction of teachers who may care to know the original order and choice of words, Greek renderings have been published in pamphlet form and may be had on application to the publishers. In the prefatory note to this pamphlet I have discussed the difficulties which a beginner meets in rendering English into Greek, and have offered some suggestions which teachers may find to be of service. Ten passages of continuous narrative are introduced among the first one hundred lessons. These give in simplified form the story that is told in the first eight chapters of the Anab¬ asis. The story is repeated in its original form in twenty reading lessons at the end of the book. 1 1 Teachers are referred to the suggestions given on page 302. PREFACE. • • Xll In teaching beginners, too little attention, in my opinion, is given to the art of reading. Left to himself, the beginner naturally falls into the pernicious habit, in attempting to trans¬ late the exercises into English, of reconstructing the Greek sentence after an English model. He searches first for the subject and then for the predicate, and ignoring the Greek order makes a Chinese puzzle of a simple matter. I have, therefore, early introduced directions for reading. 1 These should be followed in all the reading that is done. They are practically directions for reading at sight; and all reading should be at sight in the sense that no help from any foreign source should be used until every resource that the reader has within himself has been exhausted. The sharpest possible distinction should be drawn between reading and translating. Translation should be made the final test of the accuracy with which the pupil has read, not the means of arriving at the thought contained in the sentence. Each sentence should be read aloud in the original. From supposed lack of time we are disposed to neglect this training of voice and ear in the class¬ room. But it is an exercise of great importance. To read the sentence aloud, with proper expression, is the only natural way in which to approach its meaning. This process defines sharply the forms of the words, fixes their meanings in the mind, and presents the thought as a whole in the natural order of its de¬ velopment. I have given the pronunciation of single vowels, consonants, and diphthongs, that was used in presenting the Oedipus Tyrannus of Sophocles in the original Greek at Harvard Uni¬ versity in 1881. This differs but little from the general usage in this country, although it attempts to mark the natural quantity of the vowels with more care than is perhaps common. In two important particulars it varies from the current practice. It abandons the sound of a adopted by the Germans, but which, 1 In Lesson XVII. See also § 148. PREFACE. • • • xm with all the vicissitudes through which this combination of vowels has passed, it never had among Greeks, and gives to both a and ev the force of a true diphthong. Whatever may be said in favour of the current pronuncia¬ tion of Greek on the ground of its simplicity, it cannot be urged that it is the ancient Greek pronunciation. Not to men¬ tion other points of difference, we do not and cannot pro¬ nounce any one of the rough mutes nor £ or if; as did the ancient Greeks; we do not attempt to give the pitch indicated by the written accents, nor should we succeed if we made the attempt. Xenophon would certainly not have been able to understand his own Anabasis, if he had heard it read after the modern fashion. We might nevertheless believe the cur¬ rent pronunciation to be the best for use, if it were uniform and if it were acquired with ease and used with facility, but neither supposition is true. The only alternative to the pres¬ ent practice is the modern Greek pronunciation. If scholars should agree to adopt this, we should at once have an abso¬ lute standard and a living pronunciation. The precision and facility with which educated modern Greeks pronounce their ancient language are impressive; no less impressive is the quiet scorn with which they listen to a foreigner who attempts to read it after the fashion prevailing in northern Europe. I have not introduced colloquia into any of the lessons, although I am of the opinion that they are a profitable exer¬ cise. They can easily be added by the teacher. Any sentence will furnish material for questions and answers, and with practice pupils may be taught to manage simple conversation without difficulty. Oral practice may be had in other ways, and it will furnish excellent training for voice and ear. It may be made the means for drill on forms, short Greek and English sentences being pronounced by the teacher and ren¬ dered by the pupil into English and Greek. The oral method may be used with good results also in training pupils to follow the Greek order in reading. The sentence should be pro- XIV PREFACE. nounced aloud, one word at a time, and the class required to show step by step how the thought is evolved. It is good practice also to review the exercises of previous lessons orally. Variety may be secured by substituting from time to time work at the blackboard for oral drill. This use of the black¬ board trains the pupil’s eye, and soon initiates him into the mysteries of accentuation. The first year’s work is full of difficulties for the beginner. His teacher should smooth the way for him and enliven his task as much as possible. During the first six months the teacher should go over the grammatical parts of each lesson with his class before they undertake it and forestall difficul¬ ties. The main object of instruction during this time is to teach the pupil to read. But the teacher may do more than this without in any way interfering with his main purpose. He may give his pupils some knowledge of old Greek civiliza¬ tion. He is dealing with persons whose imaginations are lively and whose sympathies are quick. Let him tell them each day some interesting fact about the people whose lan¬ guage they are learning. The topic will naturally be sug¬ gested by some part of the lesson, and will relate to the manners and customs of the ancient Greeks, to their history, to their military system, to their political institutions, to their religious life, or to some other of a dozen themes that might be named. Young persons are quick to respond to such an attempt to lighten and enliven the work of the class-room. I am greatly indebted to Mr. Francis K. Ball for assistance in collecting materials and in reading the proofs. Mr. Ball’s correction of typographical errors has been sharp and accu¬ rate and his criticism of details suggestive and valuable. But errors of one sort or another have doubtless escaped both him and me, and I shall be obliged to any teacher who will point them out. I shall be especially grateful to any teacher who after using the book with a class will tell me in what respects he finds it not well suited to his needs. PREFACE. XV My special thanks are due to my colleague, Professor William W. Goodwin, who has generously allowed me in writing this book to make unrestricted use of his Greek grammar, a work whose great merits are well known to teachers. I have freely availed myself of his kind permission, especially in the lessons on syntax, and submit my book to the public with greater con¬ fidence on that account. JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE. Harvard University, August 1, 1892. / CONTENTS LESS. SECT. PAGE 1-4. Introductory: The Greek People and Lan¬ guage . 1 I. 5,6. The Alphabet. Pronunciation. 2,3 II. 7-14. Vowels, Consonants, Diphthongs, Pronuncia¬ tion. 4,5 III. 15-22. Breathings, Syllables, Elision... 5 IV. 23-40. Accent, Punctuation. 6,7 V. 41-53. Number, Case, Accent, Declension, Stems, Case-Endings. Feminines of the A-Declen- sion in -a or -rj . 8, 9 VI. 54-56. Feminines of the A-Declension in -a or -rj . 10,11 VII. 57-68. Person, Voice, Mood, Tense, Accent, Theme. Present Indicative Active. 12-14 VIII. 69-72. Feminines of the A-Declension in -a (short).... 14,15 IX. 73-78. Imperfect Indicative Active. 16,17 X. 79-88. O-Declension. Gender, Adjectives, Article.... 18,19 XI. 89-92. Neuter Plural Subject. O-Declension. 20,21 XII. 93-99. Prepositions. 21-23 XIII. 100-106. Future and First Aorist Indicative, Active.... 23-25 XIV. 107-111. Masculines of the A-Declension. 26-28 XV. 112-129. Classification of Consonants. First Perfect and Pluperfect Indicative Active. Redu¬ plication. Compound Verbs. 28-31 XVI. 130-137. Affinity of Words. First Word List. Word- Grouping. 32-34 XVII. 138-143. The Art of Reading. Directions. Life of Cyrus, I. 34-36 XVIII. 144-150. Adjectives of the Vowel-Declension. Direc¬ tions for Translating into Greek. 37-40 XIX. 151-162. Theme, Tense-Suffixes, Tense-Stems, Variable Vowel, Personal-Endings. Analysis of Pri¬ mary Tenses of the Indicative Active. 41-43 XX. 163-168. Analysis of the Secondary Tenses of the In¬ dicative Active. 44, 45 XXI. 169-176. Attic Second Declension. Declension of ouro? 46-48 XXII. 177-182. Contract Substantives of the Vowel-Declension 49-51 XXIII. 183-190. Present and Imperfect Indicative of el/xL En¬ clitics. 52-54 CONTENTS. xviii LESS. SECT. XXIV. 191-193. XXV. 194,195. XXVI. 196-202. XXVII. 203-209. XXVIII. 210-220. XXIX. 221-229. XXX. 230-240. XXXI. 241-248. XXXII. 249-251. XXXIII. 252-257. XXXIV. 258-264. XXXV. 265-275. XXXVI. 276-282. XXXVII. 283-285. XXXVIII. 286-294. XXXIX. 295-306. XL. 307-309. XLI. 310-312. XLII. 313-315. XLIII. 316-320. XLIV. 321-329. XLV. 330-334. XLVI. 335-337. XLVII. 338-344. XLVIII. 345-357. PAGE Contract Adjectives of the Vowel-Declen¬ sion. 54-56 Second Word List. Life of Cyrus, II... 57, 58 Middle Voice, Personal-Endings. Pres¬ ent, Imperfect, and Future Indicative Middle. 69-61 Aorist, Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect Indicative Middle . 62-64 Consonant-Declension. Case-Endings. Formation of Cases. Stems in a Labial or Palatal Mute. Accent, Gender. 65-68 Passive Voice. Indicative Passive. 68-71 Lingual Mute Stems of the Consonant- Declension. Gender. 72-74 Contraction of Vowels. Contract Verbs in the Indicative. 75-78 Third Word List. Life of Cyrus, III. 79-81 Tense-Systems. Principal Parts. Vowel Verbs. Deponents.,. 81-84 Adjectives of the Consonant-Declension with stems in -vt- . 85-87 Subjunctive Active. Future Indicative and Present Subjunctive of el/xl . 88-91 Subjunctive Middle and Passive. 92-95 Contract Verbs in the Subjunctive. 95-97 Liquid Stems of the Consonant-Declen¬ sion. Gender. 98-101 Optative Active. Present Optative of elfxL . 101-105 Optative Middle and Passive. 106-108 Contract Verbs in the Optative. 109-111 Fourth Word List. Life of Cyrus, IV... 111-114 Stems in -a- (-er)nl, d/j.1, elfu.. 274-276 XCIX. 667-669. Irregular Verbs in -MI, irj/u, Kei/j.ai, rj/j.ai 277-278 C. 670, 671. Review of Groups. Life of Cyrus, X. 279, 280 Alphabetical Index of Paradigms of Verbs. 281 672-677. Paradigms of the Six Systems of Xtw.... 282-285 678,679. Paradigms of the Future and First Aorist Systems of Liquid Verbs. 286 680,681. Paradigms of the Second Aorist and Second Perfect Systems. 287 682-687. Paradigms of the Perfect Middle Sys¬ tem . 288-290 688. Paradigms of the Second Passive Sys¬ tem 291 CONTENTS. xxi LESS. SECT. PAGE 689-692. Paradigms of the Present System of rldrjfu, StSio/ju , icrTrjfju, and SeUvvfiL . 292-295 693-696. Paradigms of the Second Aorist System of tLOtjiju , 8L8oj/ju , icrTTjfu, and Sf/co . 296, 297 697. Paradigms of Second Perfect System with¬ out Suffix.... 297 698—704. Paradigms of ol8a , (print, el/xL , eipu, irj/ju , Kelfxai, and K&drj/xcu . 298-301 Suggestions to Teachers. 302 705. Introduction to Reading Lessons. 303 Cl. 706. Anabasis I. i. 1-6, Text and Notes. 304-306 707-711. Introduction to Lessons on Syntax. 307 CII. 712-721. Subject and Predicate, Apposition, Adjec¬ tives . 308-310 CIII. 722. Anabasis I. i. 7-11, Text and Notes. 311-313 CIV. 723-726. Pronouns. 314-316 CV. 727. Anabasis I. ii. 1-6, Text and Notes. 316-319 CVI. 728-740. Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Cases . 319-322 CVII. 741. Anabasis I. ii. 7-12, Text and Notes. 323-326 CVIII. 742-750. The Genitive Case... 326-329 CIX. 751. Anabasis I. ii. 13-20, Text and Notes. 330-332 CX. 752-764. The Genitive Case. 333-336 CXI. 765. Anabasis I. ii. 21-27, Text and Notes. 336-339 CXII. 766-778. The Dative Case. 339-342 CXIII. 779. Anabasis I. iii. 1-7, Text and Notes. 343-345 CXIV. 780-782. Voices, Tenses, Causal Sentences, Imper¬ ative and Subjunctive in Commands, Exhortations, and Prohibitions. 346-348 CXV. 783. Anabasis I. iii. 8-14, Text and Notes. 348-351 CXVI. 784-788. Interrogative Subjunctive, Subjunctive and Future Indicative with ov fi-fj , Verbals, Optative in the Expression of a Wish. 351-353 CXVII. 789. Anabasis I. iii. 15-21, Text and Notes. 354-357 CXVIII. 790-794. Pinal and Object Clauses. 357-359 CXIX. 795. Anabasis I. iv. 1-6, Text and Notes. 359-362 CXX. 796-799. Conditional Sentences: Present and Past Particular Conditions. 362-364 CXXI. 800. Anabasis I. iv. 7-11, Text and Notes. 365-367 CXXII. 801-806. Conditional Sentences: Present and Past General Conditions. Iterative Tenses.... 368-370 CXXIII. 807. Anabasis I. iv. 12-19, Text and Notes.:.. 370-373 CXXIV. 808, 809. Conditional Sentences : Future Conditions 373-376 CXXV. 810, Anabasis I. v, 1-7, Text and Notes.. 376-379 XXII CONTENTS, LESS. SECT. PAGE CXXVI. 811-815. Relative and. Temporal Sentences: Conditional Relative. Table of Con¬ ditional Sentences. 379-382 CXXVII. 816. Anabasis I. v. 8-13, Text and Notes .... 383-386 CXXYin. 817-825. Relative and Temporal Sentences : Rel¬ ative Clauses of Purpose, Result, or Cause, and Temporal Clauses with £«s, ea B P beta bed /3rjra r y gamma go 3 ydfJL/m A a delta do 8eA.ra E £ epsilon met e \JTi\6v Z i zeta adze tfjra. H V eta prey rfra ® 6 theta thin Orjra I i iota pin, pique 2 icora K K Tcappa kill Ka7T7ra A \ lambda land \dfJbj38a M P mu men fXV N V nu now vv E f xi wax It 0 o omicron obey O piKpOV n 7T pi pet 7Tt p P rho run c ^ pto 2 phi graphic X X chi 5 ■ X L * * psi hips \pi o 0) omega tone to/xeya 1 j at the end of a word ; else- nounced as ng in siwy, and is called where 7» X, or £, y is pro- 6 German ch (as in buc/i). THE ALPHABET. 3 Learn the first three columns in 5. 1 Master the forms of each letter so as to be able to tecognize them at sight. Associate the name of each letter closely with its forms. Give the name of each letter in the following exercise: — 6 . EXERCISE. Kv-pos Se xjjl-Xrjv e-ywv TY)V /C€-< fia -Xrjv € 1 ? TTjV Cyrus unhelmeted with head into aa-YToi' /ca -01-CFTa-TO. » $\ ON J \ » V i-oo)v be av-Tov a-iro TOV e E\- battle went seeing him from the Hel- Xrj-VL-KOV *3ie-vo-(t)v *A-# 77 -mi -05 v - 7 T€-Aa-< cra 5 a >5 lenic-(quarter) Xenophon (the)-Athenian riding-up so-as c O he S’ i-m-o-Tij-crds checking- (his-horse) ei-7re said KCLL and O-Tl KCLL ra arvv-cLV-Trj-crai rj-pe-ro ei tl ira-pay-yeX-Xoi • to-meet-(him) asked whether he-had-any-orders Xe-yeiv i-Ke-Xev-cre ttol-ctiv to-say-(it) bade-(Xenophon) to-all l-e-pa Ka-\a Kal ra ac^a-yu-a Ka-Xa. that both the internal-omens (were)-good and the external-omens (were)-good TCLv-TGL Se Xe-ycov Oo-pv-fiov rj-Kov-ae St-a tojv Ta-£e-(ov this saying a-murmur he-heard through the ranks »/ /e/j/ 0 v « O \ l-ov-tos, /cat rj-pe-ro tls o uo-pv-pos eu-rj. o be passing and asked what the murmur meant K Xe-ap-\os et-7 rev o-tl to crvv-6r)-pLa Tra-pep-ye-Tai Clearchus replied that the watchword was-passing-along Sev-re-pov 77-877. Kal 05 i-Oav-fia-cre rt? rra-pay-yeX-Xei for-the-second-time and he wondered who gave-the-order /cat Tj^pe-To 6 tl et-rj to crvv-Orj-pa. 6 S’ d-ire-Kpl-va-TO and asked what was the watchword he answered ZET 2 Sft-THP KAI NI-KH. 6 8e Kv-po? a-/cov- for the long sounds. In case of the a, i and u sounds there is in each instance a single character, a, e, v, for both sounds. But in this book, a, i, v, when long, are marked a, i, v, except when they have the circumflex accent (23), which can stand only on long syllables. 10. There are then the short vowels a, e, t, o, v, and the long vowels a, rj, l, are called improper diphthongs. Their second vowel is called iota subscript. Their first vowel is long. 13. The diphthongs are double sounds, formed by uniting an open and a close vowel, except in m, where both vowels are close. Both vowels were originally heard, but closely united. The sound of ov, however, early became a simple one, and in a, rj, a> the t ceased to be pronounced, v, where it occurs in diphthongs, has its earlier short sound, as in ‘put? equivalent to the sound of u short in Latin. 1 The values here given are in tively more exactly represented in some cases only approximate, as, ‘desperate’ and the French word for example, e and tj are respec- ‘fete,’ t (short) in‘report.’ BREATHINGS, SYLLABLES , ELISION. 5 14. Pronounce at, a, ot as in aisle, eight, oil ) q, rj, ; av as ou in our ; ev, rjv (for which there are no exact equivalents in English) as eh-oo, eh-oo rapidly pronounced ; ov as in grawp ; vi as we. Give the phonetic value of each single vowel, consonant and diph¬ thong in the exercise in 6. LESSON III. Breathings, Syllables, Elision. 15. Breathings. — A vowel or diphthong at the beginning of a word has either the rough breathing (*) or the smooth breathing (’). 16. The rough breathing shows that the sound of h precedes that of the vowel or diphthong; the smooth breathing simply shows that the sound of li is lacking. 17. The breathing stands over the simple vowel when a small letter, but before it when a capital. Diphthongs, except a, yj, a>, take the breathing over the second vowel. 18. Syllables. —Every Greek word has as many syllables as it has single vowels or diphthongs. 19. The last syllable is called the ultima; the one before it, the penult; the one before the penult, the antepenult. 20. In dividing a word into syllables in pronouncing it, single consonants in the middle of the word and such combinations of conso¬ nants as can begin a word (to be learnt from the lexicon) are con¬ nected with the following vowel or diphthong, except that compounds formed without elision are treated as if their elements were separate words. Other combinations of consonants are divided. 21. Elision. — Elision is the cutting off of a short final vowel when the next word begins with a vowel. An apostrophe (’) marks the elision. Thus S’ for SI 22. The elided word is pronounced as if a part of the following word. Elision is often neglected in the written Greek. Pronounce each syllable in the exercise in 6. 6 ACCENT, PUNCTUATION. LESSON IY. Accent, Punctuation. 23. Accent. — There are three kinds of accent , the acute ('), the circumflex ("), and the grave Q. 1 24. The accent, like the breathing (17), stands over the vowel of the accented syllable when a small letter, but before it when an initial capital. In case of a diphthong, except a, y, a>, the accent stands over the second vowel. 25. The acute and grave accents follow the breathing when both belong to the same vowel, but the circumflex accent is placed over the breathing. 26. The accent can stand only on one of the last three syllables of a word. 27. The antepenult cannot be accented if the ultima is long, 2 or ends in -£ or -^. If accented, it takes the acute. 28. Syllables containing a long vowel or diphthong are long. But final -at and -ot are considered short in determining the place of the accent, except in the optative mood and in the adverb otKot, at home. 29. If the ultima is short, a long penult, if accented, takes the circumflex; a short penult, the acute. 30. If the ultima is long, the penult, if accented, takes the acute. 31. A short ultima, if accented, takes the acute; a long ultima, the acute or circumflex. 1 Greek accent consisted in a change of pitch, and so It had three written forms. But to us, in pro¬ nouncing Greek, accent amounts simply to stress. 2 The terms long and short are here used to denote the natural quantity of vowel sounds, without regard to position. ACCENT , PUNCTUATION. 7 32. The place of the accent on words must be learnt in part by observation. But in most words it recedes as far as possible from the end (26, 27). This is, therefore, called reces¬ sive accent. 33. A word which has the acute on the ultima is called oxytone; on the penult, paroxytone; on the antepenult, pro - paroxytone. 34. An oxytone changes its acute accent to the grave accent when followed by another word without intervening mark of punctuation. Except the oxytone forms of the interrogative rts, tl, who , what ? 35. A word which has the circumflex on the ultima is called perispomenon; on the penult, properispomenon. 36. A word which has no accent on the ultima is called barytone. 37. Proclitics are monosyllables which attach themselves so closely to the following word as not to have a separate accent. 38. Enclitics are words which attach themselves so closely to the preceding word as to lose their own accent. 39. In elision oxytone words generally lose their accent. 40. Punctuation. — The comma (,) and the period (.) are the same in Greek as in English. The colon, a point above the line (*), is equivalent to the English colon and semi¬ colon. The mark of interrogation (;) is the same as the Eng¬ lish semicolon. Observe in order the application of the principles stated in 26-31 and 34 to the accented words in the exercise in 6. 1 Pronounce each word in this exercise and name each accented word according to 33 and 35. 2 Pronounce the exercise entire. 1 Ta^icov is an exception to 27. ceives an accent from the following 2 The proclitics in this exercise enclitic -n. In such cases the prin- are els, a>s, el, 6. The proclitic el re- ciple in 34 does not apply. 8 HUMBER, CASE , ACCENT , DECLENSION. LESSON V. First or A-Declension. 41. Number. — Greek distinguishes three numbers: the sin¬ gular, which denotes one object, the dual, which denotes two objects only, the plural, which denotes two or more. 42. Case. — Greek distinguishes five cases: nominative, geni¬ tive, dative, accusative, and vocative. These have in general the same meaning as the corresponding cases in Latin; as nom. a man (as subject), gen. of a man, dat. to or for a man, acc. a man (as object), voc. 0 man. The chief functions of the Latin ablative are divided between the Greek genitive and dative. 43. In form (a) the nominative and vocative singular are often alike; in the plural they are always alike, (b) In the dual, the nominative, accusative, and vocative are always alike, and the genitive and dative are always alike, (c) The nomi¬ native, accusative, and vocative of neuter words are always alike in all numbers, and in the plural always end in -a. 44. Accent. — The accent of a noun remains in all the forms on the same syllable as in the nominative singular, or as near that syllable as the general laws of accent permit. a. The word noun according to ancient usage includes both sub¬ stantives and adjectives, and is so used in this book. 45. The ultima, if accented, generally takes the acute (see 31). But in the genitive and dative of all numbers a long ultima, if accented, takes the circumflex. 46. Declension. — There are three declensions of nouns in Greek, corresponding in general to the first three declensions in Latin, and called First, Second, and Third. 47. Stems and Case-Endings. — The stem of a noun is the common base to which in most of the forms certain endings, called case-endings, are added to form the different cases. FEMININES OF THE A-DECLENSION. 9 48. The stem of nouns in the First Declension ends in -d-. This declension is, therefore, sometimes called the A-Declension. 49. In feminines which keep the vowel of the stem long , a is retained if e, t or p precedes; otherwise it is changed to rj in the singular. 50. The nominative singular of these ends in -d or -rj. 1 51. PARADIGMS. X&pa., land (stem x w P“‘) < TTpana, army (stem orparta-) Kctf/xr], village (stem Kw/j.a-') rl/ii], honour (stem Ttytta-) Sing. N. Y. X«pd (TTpana K COJXT] Ti|lT] Gen. X“pd$ (rrpands K(Op>T|S Tlp.TJS Dat. X»pa (TTpana KCO^U Ti|AT| Acc. X»pav crrpanav Ktojxrjv Tifirjv Dual N. A. V. X«pd (TTpana Kcop.a Tijid G. D. X^paiv (rrpanatv Kw|xaiv Tifiaiv Plur. N. V. X^pai orpanai K(3|iai np,a£ Gen. Xwpwv (TTpanwv Kcofxcav Tip.cov Dat. X«ipais (TTpanats Kwpais np.ai$ Acc. X«pds (TTpanas k wp. as np,as 52. Special Rule of Accent. — The genitive plural of sub¬ stantives of the A-Declension is always perispomenon (see 44). Observe in the paradigms the cases that are alike (43). Observe in the paradigms the application of the laws of accent in 28, 29, 30, 44, 45, 52. 53. Definite Article. — The Greek has the definite article the. The forms in the feminine are: Sing. Horn, rj, Gen. rrjs, Dat. ry, Acc. Trjv ; Plur. Horn, at, Gen. tooi/, Dat. rats, Acc. Tas. a. The forms rj, at, are proclitic (37). The vocative is wanting. 1 In the First and Second Declen¬ sions the final letter of the stem and the case-endings closely unite, giv¬ ing in each instance a single syl¬ lable. The division of these final syllables into their two parts is not here made, because difficult and be¬ cause not practically necessary. But the change in form of the final syl¬ lables should be carefully noted. i 10 FEMININES OF THE A-DECLENSION, LESSON VI. Feminines of the A-Declension. 54. VOCABULARY. SUBSTANTIVES. ADJECTIVES. 2 oyopct, market-place. ijlic'pd, day. Qvpa, door. KprjvT], spring. paxi)* battle. olxCd, house, tent. cvSdvT], sling. PREPOSITION. ev, 1 with dat., in. koikt{, bad. koXt), beautiful. paxpa, long. piKpd, little, small. o(3cpd, terrible, formidable. VERBS. rfv, (he, she, it) was. ifa-av, (they) were. «x«i, (he, she, it) has. Zxpva-i, (they) have. 55. EXERCISES. I. 1. oik La /uk pa. 3 4 2. oiKiat /ilk pat. 3. oIkIc /ilk pa. 4. 7 ) 3 fUKpa OLKLCL. 5. T(OV /JLLKpWV OLKLCOV. 6. Tj/iepa ? /AaKpas. 7. r)fjLepav /laKpav. 8. rj/iepd^ ? /laKpas. 9. Tafc KaXal ? Kcop,aL<;. 10. aKTjvalv KaXalv. II. 1. 7) (pofiepa crrpaTLa. 2. f] (j)o/3€pa /jlcl^t).^ 3. (TKT/vrjy ? KaXrjf;. 4. oIklclv KaXrjv. 5. ttj^ KaXfjs ^Gopas. 6. toov KaKoov a(j>6vBovcov. 7. Ta? fiiKpas ayopas. 8. aKTjva KaXa. 9. 7) dyopa koXt] rjv . 5 10. o-ktjvtjv koXt/v. q Decline together: oi/aa piKpa, dyopa KaXy, rj of3epa paxg, r/ kclkyj o-Krjvrj. 1 A proclitic (37). 2 The masculine and neuter of adjectives will be taken up in con¬ nexion with substantives of the Second Declension. 8 Observe that the adjective (as in Latin) and the article take the case and number of the substantive which they modify. 4 Observe that the substantive may end in -rj in the sing., while the adjective ends in -a (50), and con¬ versely. 6 Observe that (as in Latin and English) the subject of a finite verb is in the nominative case, and that the verb agrees with it in number. 6 Observe that (as in Latin) the direct object of a transitive verb is in the accusative case. FEMININES OF THE A—DECLENSION. 11 56 . EXERCISES. I. 1. rj oIkLcl fii/cpa rjv. 2. ai fu/cpal oiKiai /ca\al rjaav . 3. lecucr) rjv rj affrevZovrj. 4. eyovai GKrjvas Ka\a$. 5. ai t?}? ctt panas GKrjval KcCkal rjaav. 6. ai ohciai 0vpa, seize, capture, plunder, have. 6aup.d£(i>, admire, wonder at. 0v«, sacrifice. loose, destroy. Substantives. apeTr, goodness , courage. £wvt], girdle. 0€a, goddess. ^°YX T 1> s P e cir. irv\r|, gate. croXfi, robe. v\aKr|, guard, garrison. Adjectives. 'EWi^vikt, Greek. IltpcriKrf, Persian. )rep. with gen ,,out of, from. \ 67. EXERCISES. I. 1. Xvere. 2. Ovoptev. 3. e^opev. 4c ayovcn. 5. dOpot- %€tov. 6. Ovets. 7. dpira^et. 8. Oavpa^et. 9. Xverov. 10. ay co. 11. dOpoi^ei. 12. dpira^ere. 13. Oavpa^eis. 14. e^ere. 15. Xvopev. 16. davpd^ere. 17. Xvet. II. 1. You (sing.) collect. 2. He looses. 3. I sacrifice. 4. They seize. 5. He has. 6. They admire. 7. You (plur.) sacrifice. 8. We collect. 9. They loose. 10. You (plur.) lead. 11. We capture. 12. You (dual) have. 13. We lead. 68. EXERCISES. I. 1. dOpol^opev (TTpandv. 2. ov Oavpa&ts rrjv %cbpav; 3. Xoyxfjv e%€L. 4. Xvet rrjv £ covpv . 5. ev rrj tccopp Ovopev. 6. e^ere X6y%a<; pa/cpd$. 7. ayco arparuiv o/3epdv. 8. t«? tcaXa ? (Tfcrjva ? Xvovcrt. 9. dpird^et^ rrjv acfrevSovrjv. 10. rfj 6ea diet. 11. rrjv aperrjv rrj<; 'E XXrjvifcris Qavpa- 1 0- before vowels, before con- 2 ov before a consonant, ovk be- sonants. The word is proclitic (37). fore the smooth breathing, oi>x be- The following ov is also proclitic. fore the rough breathing. 14 FEMININES OF THE A-DECLENSION . feT6. 12. e/e T(ov /coopicov ayeo tt)V arparcav. 13. al tccopLai Trv\a<} ovk e'xpvai. 14. T7)v Hepat/crjv aroXrjv \v(o. Rem. In a simple sentence, the normal order in Greek is subject , verb, object; but exceptions occur constantly. II. 1. He sacrifices in the market-place. 2. We admire the Persian spears. 3. You have a beautiful girdle. 4. He captures the Persian robes. 5. They sacrifice to the goddess in the small village. 6. He collects a Greek guard. 7. We do not seize the girdles and robes. 8. He destroys the houses in the village. 9. Does he not admire the courage of the army? LESSON VIII. Feminine Substantives of the A-Declension in -a (short). 69. Some feminines of the A-declension shorten a of the stem to a in the nominative, accusative, and vocative singu¬ lar. See 49. 70. PARADIGMS. 7 r etpa, experience (it eipa-) yeupd-) 5 6l-a, reputation (5o|d-) 0a\aTra, sea ( daXarra -) Sing. N. V. iretpa ye'^vpa 8o'|a 0a\a.TTa Gen. ire ipas ye^vpas 8o£t]S 0aXaTTT]s Dat. ireipa ye^vpa 8o|tj SaXamj Acc. ireipav ye'^vpav 8o£av 0a\aTrav Dual N. A. V. ireipti *yevpd 8d£a OaXarra G. D. ire ipcuv ■yevpaiv 8o£aiv 0aXaTTaiv Plur. N. Y. ireipai ■ye'4>vpcu So'£ai OaXarrai Gen. iretpwv ye4>vpa>v 8o£<3v OaXaTTwv Dat. ire (pais •yevpcus 8o£ais OaXaTTcus Acc. ireipas ■yetfjvpds 8o£ds 0aXdxTds a. These nouns have a in the genitive and dative singular, if c, i, or p precedes; otherwise, yj. Review the rules for accent in 27-30 and 52. FEMININES OF THE A-DECLENSION. 15 71. VOCABULARY. Substantives. ayicvpa, anchor. a\T]0€ia, truth, sincerity. ap.a£a, wagon. PcuHXaa, queen. evvoia, good-will , fidelity. paxaipa, knife, sabre. Movcra, Muse. rpairc^a, table. Adjectives. aya0T|', good, brave. Upd, sacred. o-t€vt|, narrow. XaXeini, hard, dangerous, severe. ets, 1 prep, with acc., into, to. €ir£, prep.: with gen., on, upon ; with dat., on, by, at; with acc., upon , to, against. 72. EXERCISES. I. 1. eh ttjv ayopav ayovcrt Ta? dptd%d<;. 2. eirl ttjv yecf/vpav ov/c ayet ttj v ^aalXetav. 3. ttjv ttj? ftaatXeias aXrjQeiav Oavptd^optev. 4. eirl ttj yecf)vpa (frvXa/crjv eyet. 5. ttjv lepav yoopav dpird^et^ i/c OaXaTTrjs eh OaXaTTav. 6. ttj j3a(TtXela arpanav 'YLXXrjvucrjv dOpol^et. 7. Tretpav 3’ 2 eyet?, vXa/crjv tt}? ftaaiXelds. II. 1. We destroy the bridge. 2. There was a bridge by the sacred spring. 3. I sacrifice to the Muses. 4. I have experience of the queen’s good-will. 5. They do not capture the Persian wagons. 6. He does not lead the garrison from the villages to the sea. 7. The bridges were long and narrow. 8. He is bringing the robes and girdles on the queen’s wagon. 1 Proclitic. 3 The interjection & (O) is usu- 2 The conjunction 84, but, and. ally prefixed to the voc., but some- See 21, 22. 84 is postpositive, i.e. it times it is lacking (as is generally is always put after one or more the case in English). words of the sentence. 16 IMPERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE. LESSON IX. Imperfect Indicative Active. 73. The Imperfect Indicative represents an action as going on in past time, as eXvov, I was loosing or I loosed. 74. PARADIGM. 1 Singular. Dual. Plural. Imperfect 1 4'\vov cXvofiev Indicative 2 4'\v€$ 4\\J€ tov €\v€T€ Active 3 *Xv« €\v€TT]V e'XtJov 75. Augment. — The secondary tenses (61) prefix in the indicative an augment ( increase ) to the theme of the verb as the sign of past time. 76. The augment has two forms: syllabic , in case of verbs beginning with a consonant, when e is prefixed; temporal , in case of verbs beginning with a vowel, when, if the vowel is short, it is changed to the corresponding long vowel (but a- becomes rj~), if it is long, it remains unchanged (but a- be¬ comes rj-). Diphthongs lengthen their first vowel. Augment and conjugate in the imperfect indicative active the verbs given in 66. 2 See 62, and review 26-28 and 30. Review the meanings of all the words given in the paradigms and vocabularies in Lessons V.-VIII. 77. EXERCISES. I. 1. e\vov. 2. ?] dvOpawrw «c ^ 00(0 Swpoj A. Xoyov vfjtrov dv0po)Trov 080'v 8«3pov Y. Xcryc vrj(r£ avdpcoirc dSc Swpov Dual N.A.V. Xo'yw viftra) avOpwiro) o8uj 8 Clip CD G. D. Xoyoiv vrjpa 80. The stem of nouns (47) in the second declension ends in -o-. This declension is, therefore, sometimes called the 0- Declension. 81. The first and second declensions together constitute the Vowel-Dedension, so named because all stems in the first and second declensions end in a vowel (-d- or -o-). 82. The nominative singular in the O-declension ends in -os (masculine, rarely feminine) or -ov (neuter). 2 83. Gender. — Greek distinguishes three genders: the mas¬ culine, the feminine, and the neuter. 1 The gender of a substantive is the article, 6 when masculine, tj often indicated by prefixing or an- when feminine, t6 when neuter, nexing the corresponding form of 2 See p. 9 h O—BECLEN SION. 19 84. The gender of substantives in Greek is sometimes determined by the natural gender of the object, as in English. Thus, words which designate males are generally masculine; those which designate females are generally feminine. 85. But in Greek many names of things are not, as in English, neuter, but masculine or feminine. The same general rules hold as in Latin. Names of rivers , winds , and months are masculine; names of countries, towns, islands, and trees, and of most abstract qualities are feminine. 86. The gender of substantives must often be learnt by observation. It may frequently be known from the form of the word. 87. Adjectives. —The masculine and neuter of adjectives of the Vowel-Declension (81) follow the O-declension, the feminine usually follows the A-declension. The nominative singular, therefore, ends in - 09 , -g or -d, -ov (Latin -us, -a, -um), as koAos, KaXrj, KaXov j puspos, puspa, puspov. Form the nominative singular and plural, masculine, feminine, and neuter, of the adjectives given in Lessons VI.-VIII. 88. Definite Article. — The full declension of the definite article is as follows : — M. F. N. M. F. N. M. F. N. S. N. « O < *1 9 TO D. N. A. TW TW TW P. N. ol at T(X G. TOV rrjs TOV G. D. TOIV TOIV TOIV G. TWV T»v twv D. TW TT) TW D. TOIS Tats TOIS A. TOV Tljv 9 TO A. TOVS Tas 9 TCI a. The forms 6 , g, 01, al are proclitics (37). The vocative is lacking. Decline together: 6 KaA .09 Aoyos, 6 plKpos av6p TO KCLKOV Sibpov. b. Observe that adjectives agree with the'ir substantives in gender , as well as in case and number (p, 10 3 ). The adjective, therefore, may be of the A-declension while the substantive is of the O-declen- sion, as in the third and fourth examples above. 20 O—DECLEN SION. LESSON XI. Neuter Plural Subject. — 0-Declension (continued). 89. Examine tlie following: — ovk v)v ttXolol , there were no boats, ra Stopa KaXa rjv, the gifts were beautiful. Observe that, although the subject is in the plural, the verb is in the singular (cf. p. 10 6 ). Hence: 90. Rule of Syntax. — A neuter plural subject regularly has its verb in the singular. 91. VOCABULARY. Substantives. ayycXos, o, 1 messenger. (3a(KX.€iov, palace . 2 0€o's, o, rj, 3 god. 0T|pCov, wild beast. iinros, o, ij, horse , mare. Rupos, o, Cyrus. otvos, o, wine. oirXov, implement, plur. arms. TrtSiov, plain. irXoiov, boat. 7ro'Xcp.o$, o, war. TroTapos, o, river. o-Itos, o, corn , food. a-TpaTTjYo's, o, general. (rvppaxos, o, ally. X«pfov, place , spot. Adjectives. SiaPa/ros, -rf, -o'v, 4 passable. epup,vos, -ij, -o'v, fortified. itrxupds, -d, -o'v, strong. p,6o-To's, -rf, -o'v, full. av6po's, -a, -o'v, manifest, visible. 92. EXERCISES. I. 1 . GTevr) 8 ’ rjv r) 080 ?. 2 . ov 6av/JLd£eL<;, a> K vpe, ra Boopa; 3. to %oopLov ol/cta ? ovk el^e. 4. et? nreBtov rjOpottje tov 9 dvdpdoirovs. -5. rjv paaiXeta epvpbva, iv rw 7 reBicp. 6 . al 1 See p. 18 h v either masc. or fem. are said to be 2 Commonly used in the plur. of the common gender. Compare Latin aedes. 4 That is, Stewards, Sia&ari 7 , Sta- 3 Substantives which may be &, might the sentence be ex¬ pressed ? 3 Kal . .. kcll, correlative conjunc¬ tions, both . . . and. 4 Translate this sentence in two ways. 22 PREPOSITIONS. 96. Some prepositions are used with the genitive and accu¬ sative. 97. Some other prepositions are used with the genitive, dative, and accusative, as napa, with genitive from beside, from , with dative by the side of, beside, with accusative to a position beside, unto, to; hrl, with genitive on, upon, with dative on, dose to, by, at, with accusative upon, to, against. 98 . Examine the following : —. ck rrjs Kvpa (j>v\aKrjv eya, he has a guard at the bridge. eVt rov 7 rorapov ovk rjye tov lttttov, lie did not lead his horse TO the river. a. Observe that, in general, the genitive is used with prepositions to express passing from an object, the dative being in it, and the accu¬ sative coming to it. But there are many exceptions, as, for example, the genitive with e7rt cannot, in the nature of the meaning of the preposition, express separation {passing from). It differs from the dative only in expressing closer relation. b. The prepositions express many other relations besides those of place (illustrated above), such as time, cause, etc. These other rela¬ tions must be learnt by observation. c. One use of prepositions has been illustrated above: as separate words, connected with particular cases, they show the relations of words in a sentence. Prepositions have another important use: in composition with verbs, they define the action of the verb. See 127. FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST INDICATIVE ACTIVE. 23 99. EXERCISES. I. 1. T0t9 Oeoh L7T7rov eOvov ev rrj vrjacp. 2. ol arparrj- yol rovv avOpcbrrovv rjyov eh rrjv a/crjvyv. 3. ol 7 rapa K vpw 1 cvfjLpLCL'yoL ayaOol rjaav. 4. rov 9 cmrovv ayopuev e/c rov %cop[ov. 5. ev tcS 7re$L(p rjv 0 S 09 arevrj. 6. 0809 (pavepa ayei eh rav rov 2 K vpov /ccopidv. 7 . aOpol^ei rov 9 3 avpbpba- %ov 9 errl rov K vpov. 8 . eh ro rrehlov 6 arparrjyov rjOpoi^e rov 9 avpbpbayovv. 9. eVt t&> rrorapbw rjv 6 arparrjyov. 10 . hoipov al fcwpLcu rjaav rrapa K vpov. 11 . rjaav ayyeXoi rrapa rov ayaOov arparrjyov. 12 . rj 0809 eh ro 7 reSlov arevrj /cal ^aXerrrj rjv. 13. 0 arparrjyov ra Orjpla Qrjpevei cnro Trrrrov. 14. ev rlpJrj rjaav rrapa K vpq> ol arparrjyol. II. 1. The road, 0 Cyrus, leads into a beautiful plain. 2. Cyrus had a fortified palace in the plain. 4 3. The generals led the man to the queen. 4. He led the messenger from the market place to 5 the tents. 5. The generals of Cyrus collected horses in 6 the plain. 6. The general leads his 3 allies from the Persian villages. 7. Men were visible in the plain. 8. The generals were sacrificing, in the tents, to the gods. 9. He was general of the allies with Cyrus. 1 LESSON XIII. Future and First Aorist Indicative Active. 100. The Future Indicative denotes that an action is to take place in time to come, as Xvaw, I shall loose or I shall he loosing, sometimes I will loose. 101. The Aorist Indicative expresses the simple occurrence of an action in past time, as eXvaa, I loosed. 1 Prepositional phrases and ad- 3 his. The article is often used verbs may be used attributively, like in place of the possessive pronoun, the adj. and the gen. Cf. 56, Eem. # 4 Translate in two ways. 2 Proper names may take the 6 iwi article. 6 Cf. I. 8 above. 24 FUTUBE AND FIB ST AOBIST INDICATIVE ACTIVE. 102. PARADIGMS. Singular. Dual. Plural. Future 1 \v, e£co. These forms will be explained later. Neither of these verbs has a first aorist. VOCABULARY. 105. Verbs. ava-yKa^co, force, compel. 6 t)pev< 0 , hunt. KeXevw, bid, command. Ko\at/Xot9. 4 11 . 6 GTpaTriybs rjvayicao-e tov 9 f3ap/3apov 9 GTpaTevecv €7rl KOpoz/. 12. yvcopLy 5 Be tov 9 /carcov 9 avOpaoirovs e/coXaae. 13. to?9 GTpaTpyol 9 oi arypupta^oi apicrTov ov TrepLylrovcri. 14. ou/c e/caVXvaav oi iroXepuot ttjv K.vpov GTpaTiav Ovetv. 6 15. to 09 /3ap/3apov 9 /ca)\vcrqp,ev ev tc/xtJ elvai 7 Trapa Kopo). II. The barbarians sent the man. 2. Cyrus will compel the barbarians to send gifts to the generals. 3. The enemy will capture the beasts of burden. 4. He bade the barbarians send breakfast to his friends. 5. The generals sent to the man a talent of silver as 8 pay. 6. He will command the gen¬ eral to make an expedition against 9 the barbarians. 7. Cyrus sent good wine to his friends. 8. The river carried away 10 the men’s arms. 9. The general will not punish his allies. 1 Present infinitive active, to loose. 2 Observe that (as in Latin) the indirect object is put in the dat. 3 as pay. Observe that (as in Latin) an appositive is in the same case as the noun which it describes. 4 for their friends. The person to whose advantage or disadvantage anything tends is put in the dat. This is called the Dative of Advan¬ tage or Disadvantage. 5 The dat. is used to denote the manner (as the ablative in Latin] 6 Infin. dependent upon^ aav, hindered from sacvi erally to sacrifice). 7 Pres, infin.. 8 Omit. 9 Cl 26 MASCULINES OF THE A -DECLEN SI ON. LESSON XIY. Masculine Substantives of tbe A-Declension. Review 43-45 and 52. 107 . PARADIGMS . 6 veapiUs young man (veavia-) S Sevdrjs Seuthes (2ev0a-) o iruXirijs citizen (iroAtTa-) 6 ire\TaaTT)s targeteer (7reAra(rTa-) 6 Tlepar)s Persian (Tie pa a-) Sing. N. vedvtas Sev'0T]s iro\fTT]s ireXTacrTTjs IIc'ptrTjs G. veaviou Scv'Oov •jtoXitov ireXTacrrov Ilepo-ov D. veavia 2ev0i] iroXiTrj ireXTao-Tf) lie pert] A. vcaviav SsvOrjv ‘TroXlTT]V ireXTacrTtiv Ile'ptrqv Y. veavia Sev'0T] iroXlra ircXTao-ra Ile'po-a Dual N. A. Y. veavia iroXtra ireXTaorTa Ile'pcrd G.D. veavCaiv iroXiTaiv ireXTatTTaiv Ileporaiv Plur. N. Y. veavCaL iroXiTai TreXrao-Tat ITe'pcrai G. veavnov ttoXItcov ireXTao-Twy Ilepa-cov D. veavia is iroXtTais -ircXTao-Tats ITc'po-ais A. veavias iroXiTos ireXTaa-Tds lie pads 108 . The stem (47) ends in -a-. Cf. 48. 109 . The nominative singular ends in -ds, or, by change of a to r), as in some feminines of this declension (49), in -r) s. The change occurs unless e, i, or p immediately precedes a of the stem. a. Observe, as to the final syllables in these forms, that masculines or - 7 ]Tat rpta- MASCULINES OF THE A-DECLENSION. 27 VOCABULARY. 110 . ’APpoKo'fids, Abrocomas. aK 0 VTipaTov 7T0TCLfJL0V rjv ^copiov icryypbv. 18. tov JLv(f)paTov ai 7 rrjyal ov irpoaco 1 {far from) tov %cop tov rjaav. 14. cnro tt}? Bertas TrXevpas tov TrXaiaLov ayovaiv* 07rXtTa? 7rpo? Ta Smooth mutes ir r k Lingual or r-mutes r 8 6 Middle mutes (3 8 y Palatal or x-mutes x y x Rough mutes <£ 9 x a. Mutes of the same class are called cognate , since produced by the same organ (lips, tongue, or palate); those of the same order are called co-ordinate. 115 . The double consonants are $ (for xs), \J/ (for tts), and £. 1 The gen. is used with adverbs of place. 2 See p. 42 \ 3 Cf. p. 21 8 . 4 For the order, cf. 1.4,12 above. PERFECT AND PL UPERFECT IN DIG A TIVE ACTIVE. 29 116. The Perfect Indicative represents an action as already finished at the present time, as XiXvKa, I have loosed. 117. The Pluperfect Indicative represents an action as already finished at a given past time, as iXeXvKt], I had loosed. 118. PARADIGMS. Singular. Dual. Plural. First Perfect Indicative Active 1 2 3 Xc'XuKCL Xc'XvKas Xfc'XoK€ XsXvKClTOV XeXvKarov XcXvKafuv XeXvKaTt XeXvKdo-i First Pluperfect 1 cXcXvkti cXeXvK€fi€V Indicative 2 IXcXvKTJS eXtXvKCTov €XeXvK€T6 Active 3 IXeXvKti cXeXvK€TT]V IXfXvKctrav 119. Reduplication. — The perfect and pluperfect have re¬ duplication in all of the moods as the sign of completed action. 120. Reduplication consists in the repetition of the initial sound. Verbs beginning with a consonant repeat that conso¬ nant with e, as Xua>, Xe-XvKa ; KeXeuo), Ke-KtXevKa. A rough initial mute is changed to the cognate smooth, as 6v o>, re-OvKa. 121. But in verbs beginning with two consonants (except a mute followed by a liquid), with a double consonant, or with p, the reduplication omits the consonant and consists only of e, as (TTpareva >, ecrrpdrev/ca. 122. Verbs beginning with a vowel lengthen that vowel, so that the reduplication in these verbs has the same form as the temporal augment (76), as dp7rd£co, ypiraKa. 123. The pluperfect as a secondary tense has augment (75). This is prefixed to tlie reduplicated theme; but it is omitted when the reduplication consists of e (121) or the simple length¬ ening of the vowel (122), as iXeXvKr], but earparevKr], rjpTraKrj. 30 PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE. 124. In the first perfect and first pluperfect k is added to the reduplicated theme. Form the first perfect and first pluperfect of Orjpevo), Ovoj, KeXev a>, k(d\v(o, arTparevo). 125. In forming the first perfect and first pluperfect of verbs in -£, OavpA^o ). 1 a. The perfect of dyto is rj\a,, of €\(j), e&xrjKOL, and of Trcp.% roo, 7 re- 7rop.a. 2 126. VOCABULiAKY. dri(jLo5<«), dishonour, disgrace. povXevu, plan, plot. Si-ap, plunder, sack. 8ia-cra>£a>, preserve , keep safe. SovXcvo), be a slave. em-fiovXcvco, plot against. •jratw, strike. irXrjtridtw, approach. 8id, prep., through, originally be¬ tween, asunder , Latin di-, dis-: with gen., through ; with acc., on account of. dSeX<{>ds, o, brother. ’A0rjvT)(ri, adv., at Athens. *Apra|€'p|r]s, Artaxerxes. SapciKo's, o, daric (a gold coin). Sneads, adv., justly. 8£ktj, justice, retribution, deserts. €vTa|£a, good order, discipline. KXcapxos* °> Clearchus. opKos, o, oath. irpocrOev, adv., before , previously. cnrovSif, libation, plur. truce. Tpio-xfXioi, -ai, -a, 3000 . <)>d(3os, o, fear. 127. Compound Verbs. — Compound verbs are formed by- prefixing a preposition to a simple verb. See 98 c. If the preposition ends in a vowel and the simple verb begins with one, the prep, is generally elided (21) , 3 as 8i-a/)7rd£a). The force of the preposition is generally apparent in the com¬ pound, as Si-ap7rd£o> (Latin dl-ripio), tear apart , plunder utterly (‘through and through J ), sack; 8ia-aip£ KOpe, €7 rl tov? fiapfiapovs rou? cucovTiaTa? /cal tov<; to%6- ra?. 12. /cal Bi/caicos tg3 dp/iocrtrj einfteftovXev/caTe • e^et 7 paTT]s Ktop.apx'ns OVT€ . . • OVT€ ay op a y€<{>vpa yt €X« KC0JXT] ira(a> 9f ayw yvwp.T] £a»VT] Xo'yos irapa dScX(j>o's SapeiKo's r]pepd Xdyx 1 ! ‘ircBCov ’A0rivt](rt Be" rfv, tprav Xvci) iretpa a0 potato Segio's 0aXarTa paKpo's TreXTacrTrjs dKOVTlO - TT]S Bid 0avpd£ 8iacra)£&) 0T]p€VO> - pctrro's IIcptriKo's avGpcoiros BiKaCcos 0T]pCoV piKpo's 'irqyrj 9 / airo SlKTJ 0vpa pio-0o's TrXaCa’iov apyvpiov 8o'£a 0V eiriPouXeiia) KoXa^o) oirXov ttv'Xtj 1 These words occur, with an ex¬ ception or two, in the Anabasis of Xenophon, on which the exercises in this hook are based. It is impor¬ tant to commit these words thor¬ oughly to memory. The nouns (sub¬ stantive and adjective) in this list occur more than 3500 times in the Anabasis, the verbs more than 2200 times. AFFINITY OF WORDS. 33 oraTpaTrqs 0-TpaT6V« o’€vSovT]'n]s Tore 4>oPepo's IUvOtjs (TTpaTij-yos o*ft>£w Tpairt^a o'Pos (TITOS cTpand TaXavTov TpiaKoVioi vXaKrj CTKT]Vt{ O’TpaTUorqs TtKVOV rpicrx^Xiot Xa-Xciro's 131 . An inspection of this list shows that these words are not all separate units, but that some of them are related both in form and in meaning. For example, d-Tipd£«, Ttfxnrf ; Sikcucos, 8£kt] ; 0ca, Qeos ; Stjpcvw, OtjpCov ; K«p.-apx'ns (village-ruler, apx<*>, rule'), KaSpr]; dirXtrqs, dirXov; rh'po-Tjs, IIcpa-iKo's ; iroXeflios, iroXe pos ; irpo's, 'rrpo'crGev ; o-6v8ovr], oPepds, PcuriXeia, PcuHXeiov, PacriXevo) ; paxcupa, pax^ 6/3o<; rjv (i.e. they were alarmed at what they saw), /cal rj K iXtcraa (Cilician queen) ecfrvyev (fled) eirl tt}<; dpgaga^y^ (carriage) teal oi (= those) iv tt) dyopa ecfrv- yov. oi Be ''IdXXyves (GrreeJcs) eirl Tas a/cijvw; rjXOov (went). 3. 67 rel (when) Be rjcrav 67 rl Tah tou aarpairov Qvpais, oi gev aTpaTijyol rjXOov eco-co (within), Ylpo^evo<;, Alevwv, KXeap^o?, oi Be Xo^ayol (captains) eirl rafc OvpaL 9 egevov (remained). (The generals are seized. Ariaeus comes to the Greek camp.) 0 Be 'Ap/aios ehre (said) • KXeap^o 9 gev, d) (/1 EiXXr)ve<;, 67 ret (since) t «9 (T7roySa9 eXvaev, eyet Tt)V Bi/crjv /cal TeOvrjKe (is dead), Tlpo^evos Be /cal Mez xov ev Tigy elcrnf (are). eirl toutozv (on this) S evocfrwv ’AOrjvaios ehre • KXeap ^09 gev tolvvv (then), el (if) 7 rapa (contrary to) tov 9 op/cov 9 eXve r«9 crirovBds, ttjv Blktjv e%et • IT p6£evo<; Be /cal Mevcov eirei elenv vgeiepoi (your) gev evepyerai (bene¬ factors), rjgeTepoi (our) Be GTpaTgyoi, ireg'dpare (aorist im¬ perative) avTov 9 (them) Bevpo (hither). 36 THE ABT OF READING. 142. In the following passage, such aid as the student should need is given in notes following the passage. These notes should not be used until each sentence has been read according to 140, 1 and 2. Each sentence makes greater demands on the pupil’s knowledge than he can meet unaided. But if, depending entirely upon himself, he honestly makes the effort to see what the sentence tells him, he will, first, fix securely in mind facts already acquired, and secondly, define clearly to himself the new facts (whether meanings of words, forms, or constructions) that he must now learn. Such a process cultivates the powers of observation, strengthens the memory, and is the short road to the acquisition of the power to read rapidly and with pleasure. 143. Kvpos. I. KOpo? uto? pev Aapeiov rjv, aBeX(j)b<; Be ’A pra^ep^ov. 67 rel Be vTr-boTTTeve Aapeto? TeXevTgv tov /3lov, eieeXevaev ’A pra^ep^pv real K vpov irap-elvai . 6 pev ovv ’A/orafepf^s yBrj Trap-rjv KOpo? Be OTrXira .? €%a>v Tpiarcoaiov ? ava- 5 fia'ivei diro T?j? dp^rj^ rjs avTO^(raTpd'Trr)v Aapeto? €7TOL- rjaev. 67rel Be ereNevryae Aapeto? teal efiaaLXevaev ’A pTatjep%r)<;, 6 r?}? K dpia<; aarpairr 79 Tlaaracfiepvrjs Bt,a- /3aXXei tov K vpov 7 rpo? tov dBeXcjrov &>? eTnftovXevei avTw. 6 Be crvXXapfidvei J£vpov • r/ Be pgTrjp aep^ei avTov teal 10 enro-TrepTrei iraXiv eirl ttjv dp%rfv. NOTES. 1. vlos> son. —2. vir-coirrcue: imperf. of the compound verb inr -oirrevw, suspect, apprehend, the prep, inro being equal to sub in the Latin word that corresponds in meaning, su-spicor. — tcXcutti'v: tcA-cvt^, end. With this cf. the verb reAeurcto), aor. ireXeyrrio-a (6), come to an end , i.e. die. — ptov: filos. Cf. the word bio-graphy. — 3. 'irap-eivcti: elicit the meaning from the two elements (c/. 106, I. 15). — ovv, now, not temporal, but continua- tive. — 4. r(8r], already. — t\ St^Xm SriXri 8t]'X(j) A. ayaOo'v ayaOijv aya0o'v SrjXov 8rfXr]V SrjXov V. aya0€' dya0ii dya0o'v SrjXe 8tjXt] SrjXov D.N.A.Y. dyaOta aya0d aya0w SijXw SrjXa 8rjXa> G. D. ayaOotv ayaOatv dya0otv Stj'Xoiv SrjXaiv SrjXoiv P. N.V. ayaOoC aya0a( aya0a 8rjXoi SrjXai SrjXa G. ayaOcov dya0wv dya0«v SrjXcov SrjXwv SrjXcov D. aya0ots aya0ats ayaGois SrjXois SrjXais SrjXois A. ayadovs aya0as dya0a 8r[Xovs SrjXds SrjXa /xlKpSs, small, little t piAios, friendly 1 M. F. N. M. F. N. S. N. [XLKpoS pilKpd p-LKpOV tfnXios 4>iX£a 4>£Xiov G. |XLKpOV p-iKpas piKpOV 4>iX£ov cJnXids (jnXiou D. ptlKptO p.iKpd |JLLKpcp cJuXCar cjuXi'a 4>iX£b> A. fAlKpOV p-iKpav fUKpo'v CXiov tjuXiav cfnXiov Y. p.LKp€ p.ucpa p.LKpO V CXl€ iX£a tjuXiov D.N.A.Y. piKpiO pi Ik pa (JUKpoS 4>iX£a) iX£(o G. D. JJllKpotV piKpatv piKpOlV 4>iX£oiv £Xioi (J)£Xiat iX£(ov 4>iXicov iX£wv D. (llKpOlS (ilKpais piKpOlS iX£ois iX£ovs iX£ds 4>iXia 1 Cf. the related word in 105. 38 ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL-DECLENSION. 145 . Ifc, i, p, or po precedes the final vowel of the stem, the nominative singular feminine ends in -a, otherwise in -rj. Cf. 49. 146 . The nominative and genitive plural feminine follow the accent of the masculine, as SrjXwv, iAiW, not $r)\£>v, cfnXiai (from nominative singular <£iAid), ^lXlwv, as in substan¬ tives of the A-declension. Decline dypios, 1 wild; iXevOepos, free ; lkolvos, able ; irurros, faithful. 147 . Some adjectives of the vowel-declension have only- two sets of endings, the masculine form being used for the feminine, as dA/a/xos, aA/a/xov, 1 valiant, warlike ; d/xa£irds, -ov (cf. a/xa^a) , passable for wagons; anopopdv hiapird^eiv? 9. tertw? 3e real (also) hUacov rjv e'jufiovXeveLV tco aarpairg. 10. ra yap e'jTLTrjheia ovie rjv 7 eyeiv. 11. tg3 ’Aprafepf?; 7 roXepbios rjv , Ku/3ft) 3e 7Tt<7T0?. 12. oi)/c a%Lov rjv toj OTrXzrrj Tvaieiv TOV 9 obcGTds. 13. 75 & ela/3oXrj fjv 080 ? dpia^iTos opOid icr'xypd)?. 14. ol XaXSatot eXevOepot real dXrapot rjaav* 07 rXa 3’ el^ov yeppa parepa teal Xoy%d<;. 15. rjaav ol tov J fiopov aTparicbrac a^tot gXgi> 6ep[d<$. 16. cf)iXld<; ^oopas afjet 6 recopdp^rj^ ? tou? arpar mot a?. 17. 7 rw? ra G7riTjj8eta e^opev; Rem. The special vocabulary should now be thoroughly com¬ mitted to memory. No Greek words will be needed in translating the English-Greek exercises in this book that have not already oc¬ curred in previous Greek-English exercises. The sentences which compose these English-Greek exercises are patterned more or less closely after Greek sentences that have oc¬ curred in previous exercises. In re-composing these English sentences into Greek, observe the following: — DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSLATING INTO GREEK. 1. Compose the entire sentence aloud in Greek before com¬ mitting any part of it to writing. 2. If in doubt about the construction or the order of the Greek words, search for a model. 1 The masc. of the adj. used sub¬ stantively. Cf. 129, I. 5. 2 Inf. depending on the adj. lua- voi, which denotes ability. 3 Cf. Ill, I. 13. 4 Cf. 92, 1. 12. 6 in the sight of. Cf. 110. 6 Subject of the verb fy. 7 it was possible. 40 ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL-DECLENSION. 3. If an English word or phrase occurs which has not been given in the vocabularies as a definition, recall its English equiv¬ alents. 4. Commit the sentence thus composed in Greek to writing. Observe sharply the form, accent, and spelling of each word. II. 1. The hoplites were faithful to Cyrus. 2. The road was impassable. 3. The general was worthy of honour. 4. We justly punish the bad. 5. Cyrus had plundered the fertile land of the barbarians. 6. They will lead the hoplites into a friendly country. 7. The javelin-men were both valiant and faithful. 8. He was not able to hinder the enemy. 9. Cyrus hunted wild asses on horseback. 10. There was abundant food in the villages. 11. The villages were full of provisions. 1 12. It was right to keep the arms and the horses safe. 13. But perhaps it was right to plunder the villages of the enemy. VOCABULARY. 150 . afjios, -a, -ov (tiyv), 2 * equal in weight , worth, worthy, befitting. (3e|3aios, -a, -ov, firm, constant. ■ycppov, wicker-shield. Sikcuos, -a, -ov ( 5 t/c77), just, right, reasonable. lyyvs, adv., near. • cto-poXt], entrance, pass. eXeuGepiti (eAeuflepos), freedom. iTriTrjSeios, -a, -ov, suitable, fit. 8 lo’x.vpws ('O'xupos'), adv., strongly, vehemently, exceedingly. to-cos, adv., perhaps. oIkct^s (oT«os, a house, home; cf. ohcia, a house, dwelling ), house- servant, domestic. ovos, o, r|, ass. opOios, -a, -ov, steep. TroXcptos, -a, -ov (jit c/uosj , at war with, hostile. 4 irws, adv., how? XaXScuoi, ol, the Chaldaeans. 5 Xt ppovt]o"os, rj, the Chersonese. xfXioi, -cu, -a, 6 * 1000. 1 Cf. 92, I. 6. 2 Related words that have oc¬ curred in previous lessons will here¬ after he placed, in parentheses, after the words in the vocabularies to which they are related. If two or more such words have occurred, the simpler form will be given. — &£ios is related to ay 00 in its sense of weigh. 3 In the neut. plur., ra exirr}deta, provisions (‘ things suited to sustain life’). 4 Tro\e/Luos, given in 105, is the masc. of this adj. used as a subst. 5 Borrowed English words will hereafter be printed in black-face letter. See p. 155 h 6 Cf. rpur-xLuoi, 126 (rpis, thricej. ANALYSIS OF PBIMALtY TENSES. 41 LESSON XIX. Analysis of tlie Primary Tenses of the Indicative Active. 151. Verb-Theme. —The theme of a verb is its fundamental part (63). 152. Tense-Suffixes and Tense-Stems. — From the theme are formed, by means of tense-suffixes, the different tense-stems of the verb. 153. Variable Vowel. — The final vowel of a tense-stem is said to be variable when it is -o- in some of the forms and -£- in others, indicated by "°/ e _. 154. Personal-Endings. —From the tense-stems the differ¬ ent forms of the verb are made by adding to them certain endings, which in the finite moods mark the persons and num¬ bers, and are called personal-endings. 155. There are two series of these personal-endings, one found in the active voice, the other in the middle. Each of these series includes two sets, one for primary tenses, the other for secondary tenses. 156. The personal-endings of the primary tenses in the indicative active are : — Singular. Dual. Plural. 1 -|U -(lev 2 -s or -tri -tov -T6 3 -(ri or Tt -TOV -vcri Review the paradigm of the Present Indicative Active in G5. 157. The present stem of Xv is Xe-XvKa-, formed by reduplicating the theme and adding the tense-suffix -k£\oi. 18. tou? ftapftdpovs rjpird/capiev Bid tov oXeOpov tcov aTpaTtcoTcov. 19. kclitoi e%cQ 7 ratBia tcov (TTparrjycov iv Ts/lTkrjrw. Analyze each finite verbal form in the above exercise. II. 1. We are destroying the bridges. 2. We shall collect allies. 3. He has plotted harm to Clearchus. 4. They will save the men and the horses. 5. He punishes his servants. 6. The queen will dishonour her brother. 7. The satrap will be king. 8. I have commanded the hoplites to sacrifice. 9. The hoplites will sacrifice. 10. You (sing.) have hunted wild asses on horseback. 11. You are planning harm to the allies. 12. You are plotting against Cyrus and his allies. 13. The soldiers of the enemy will approach. 14. The sol- „ diers will sack the country of Cyrus’s brother. 15. You have commanded the soldiers to plunder the wagons. VOCABULARY. 162 . aXrjOevo) (a^deia), speak the truth, tell the truth. cLvtC, prep, with gen., over against, against, instead of, in prefer¬ ence to, in return for. Aapetos, o (cf. Sapei/cds), Darius. -cu, -a (x^Atot), 1 2000. cKarov, indeclinable, 100. lirwrToXTf, letter , epistle. tJSti, adv., already, forthwith, at length. KaCTOL, conj., and yet. Xo'(|>os, o, hill , height. MfXrjTos, ij, Miletus. p.vpioi, -ai, -a, 10 , 000 . vvv, adv., now . 2 oXcOpos, o, destruction, loss. ovv, 3 conj., therefore, accordingly, consequently. iraiSCov, child. ncXoTTovvijo-ios, -a, -ov, Peloponne¬ sian. ircvTaKoViot, -ai, -a , 4 500. o-aTpaircv'tt ( aarpoiinis ), rule as sa¬ trap, rule. 1 5 Is, twice. 2 See p. 155 h 4 TreVre, five. Cf. Tpid-nJo-ioi in 8 This inferential conj. is post- 110 (rpels, three). The suffix for positive, i.e. it is always put after cardinals to denote hundreds (after one or more words of the sentence. kKar6v) is - icoaioi , as did-ic6vpav, w arpaTicoTai, i\v- aare. 5. ol/cerds /cal Xmrovs elyopev. 6. K vpos ycip errepire fit/covs o’lvov . 7. ol aaTpairai e/ce/ceKev/cecrav tov ? veavias Oveiv. 8 . els tovs ’ AOrjvalovs tovs (TTpaTLoaras fjyes. 9. hr el eXvcrau, ras airovhds, to? /ccbpas hiapirciaopLev. ANALYSIS OF SECONDARY TENSES . 45 10. aWci tL (why) 1 ov/c tfyes tov ? dvov$ /cal to? id- Xa?; 11. o 7 «/> aarpairr)^ e/ce/ceXev/cec tov 9 07rXira? haapbov? Trenireiv. 12. avvcireyuiropev rrj ftaaiXeia 1 2 tou? arpandoras ovs ( whom ) 3 4 * 6 (TTpaTrjybs el%e. 13. rr; varepala 4 eirepurre tov avdpcDirov * Apiato 9 0 (rrparyyos . 14. arpaTidoras Iv tw T07T6) el'^ere l/cavovs to? /ccopuas hiapira^eLv. 15. toz> /eo>- H'dpx r ) v Tore yyev 6 6 CTpaTrjybi ? wpo? tou? ol/ceras. 16. et irapa tov 9 op/cov 9 eXfie? Ta? cnrovbcus, rrjv BUrjv Analyze each finite verbal form in the above exercise. II. • 1. You were striking the peltasts. 2. Both generals and captains had sacrificed. 3. The queen commanded the captains to sacrifice. 4. The hoplites with Cyrus were plun¬ dering the wagons. 5. The soldiers had previously plotted against the queen. 6. I had collected hoplites and bowmen. 7. You (sing.) hunted on horseback. 8. You had broken the truce. 9. The satrap dishonoured the soldiers. 10. He had commanded the hoplites to plunder the country. 11. And the general made an expedition against the satrap’s country. 12. He had sacrificed to the goddess. 13. Cyrus plotted harm to his brother. 14. I had destroyed the boats. VOCABULARY. 168 . ’A0T]vaios, -a, -ov, 6 Athenian. dXXa, conj., but , yet . ’Aptcuos, o, Ariaeus. Pikos, o, jar (for wine). Sao-po's, o, tax, impost, tribute. Se'ita, indeclinable, ten. el, conj., if, proclitic. X°x-dyoSj o (cryco ), 7 captain. vcumjs, sailor. ttcvtc (cf. irevTaniaioi), indec., five* avos, o, crown , wreath. cTTpaTo-ireSov (orpana), 8 camp. (rup.-ir^p.'irctf (gvv, ire;U7ra>), 9 send with » toVos, o, place, region. vo-repatos, -a, -ov, following. (fuaXr), cup (broad and shallow). 1 Acc. sing. neut. of the pron. tIs, who? what? used adverbially. 2 See p. 31 3 . 8 Acc. plur. masc. of the relative pronoun os, 5}, 8. 4 Sc. vnepa. The dat. is used to denote the time when. 5 See p. 42 h ' ' 6 Cf. 'Adrjvriai (126). 7 Cf. Ao'xos, company. 8 Literally, the ground occupied by an army (ireSou, ground ). 9 v before a labial becomes /*. 46 ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION . LESSON XXI. Attic Second Declension. — Declension of ovros. 169. The O-declension includes a few stems ending in -<»>-. This (o appears in all the cases except the neuter nominative, accusative, and vocative plural of adjectives, but takes iota- subscript where the common ending has t. 170. PARADIGMS. 6 veds, temple {vecc-') tAews, propitious (t'Aecv-) Sing. N. V. V««8 M. F. fX c«s N. t'Xccov G. V€C0 fXcco t'Xcca D. VCW t'Xcw t'X«a> A. V€«V fXcuv fXtwv Dual N. A. Y. vcw t'Xeco fXcw G. D. V€to)V fXc t'Xetp t'Xca G. VCWV t'Xtcov tXecjv D. V€ vea) floopLol rjaav, 4. IXecp oi 6eol r/crav rfj ^aatKeia. 5. Toh arpa- Trjyoh ivTO? (within) 1 oXtycov rjpepcbv top puaOov e/CTrXearv 'TrepyjreL. 6. e/arXecov r\v to peaov 2 tov TrXaiaiov. 7. Tayaco? AlyinrTLO 9 pie p rjv, (f>L\o$ 8e tQ) K vpw. 8. irreihr] (when) S’ eo>? rjv, eXvaav tt]p yecjrvpav oi orrXiTai. 9. eh ttjp e &> 3 TrepL^eL 6 Kupo? top ciyyeXov tovtov. 10. 6 Tapo) vio<; tov vavdp%ov 4 Aiyv7TTio<; r\v. 11. o vedvicu^ top Xayovv tovtov ve€\t], cloud, net. oXtyos, -rj, -ov, small, little, plur. few. iroXejuKo's, -tj, -o'v (7 t6\€/jlos), of or for iant. pwpos, o, altar. SevSpov, TREE. ck-ttXcws, -wv (^|), 5 full, complete, war, warlike. cttj'Xtj, pillar, post. o-vp-TrXews, -wv (€o-os, tj, Ephesus. 0Tjo-avpo's, o, treasure. Xew$, o, people. ing in. Tapws, o, Tamos, vlo's, d, SON. 1 Cf. 92, I. 6. 2 Cf. 99, I. 3. as (Tv/..'7rA.ecos below means literally filled altogether. For av/x-nXeus, see 3 Use s, FULL. So that e«- irAccos means filled out , very full, • CONTRACT SUBSTANTIVES: VO WEL-DECLENSION. 49 LESSON XXII. Contract Substantives of the Vowel-Declension. 177 . Substantives of the A-declension whose stems end in •aa- or -ea- suffer contraction. 178 . PARADIGMS. 7] p.vd, mina (p.vaa-) 7] yrj, earth (yea-) o 'E pfiTjs, Hermes (‘E ppea-) S. N. (/xvaa) pva (yea) yrj ('E pfxeas) 'Epfwrjs G. (/ uvdas ) jjivds (yeas) yr|s ('E p/xeov) 'Eppov D. 0*i/aoi) fivq: (yh) *yfi ('Ep/xea) ‘Epjxrj A. (/ ivaav) pvav (year) yr\v ('Ep/xeav) ‘Epprjv Y. (p.vda) p.vd (yed) vrj ('Ep/xea) 'Epprj D. N. A. Y. (p.vda) |JLVd ('Ep/xea) 'Eppd G. D. (p.vaaiv) (jivaiv ('E p/xe'atv) 'Eppaiv P. N. Y. (/xvaax) |xvat ('E p/xeat) 'Eppai G. (p.va a>v) |AVWV ('Ep/xecDv) 'EppwV D. (/utvaais) pvals ('Ep/xeats) 'Eppaxs A. (fivdas) fjivds ('Ep/xeas) 'Eppas ' * 1 ' ' * • •' \' ~ r f - • 179 . Substantives of the O-declension whose stems end in * -eo- or -oo- suffer contraction. 180 . PARADIGMS. * 6 vovs , mind (voo-) rb navovv , basket (naveo-) S. N. c^ Ci < o tn (ndveov) Kavovv G. (v6ov) vov> (naveov) Kavov D. (v6cp) vu> (navecp) Kavu A. (v6ov) vovv (ndveov) Kavovv Y. (v 6ea> *E ppifj. 4. rt (what') 1 iv vd> e^e-re ; 5. o Be to /cavovv idavpia^ev. 6. /ca\ol rjaav ol 7 fkol et? TTjv *Kcrlav. 7 . ravry rrj oB(B ol 7ro\epuot irpoae^ovai tov vovv. 1 2 * * 8. ol Oeol IXew rjcrav /cal Tot? vavraLS /caXov ttXovv irapeiyov . 8 9. o n rXof)? rjv aSpXo? rot? vavrais. 10. optotoi rjcrav ovtol Oavpid^e/v* rl iv vd> e^ovatv ol (TTpanoiTai . 11 . aTropoi Tjaav iv tc 3 d'rroTrXcp fyeiv 5 ra iTriTrjheia . 12. 6 7T6pL7rXov^ 'S.i/ceXlds rfj? vgcrov pca/cpos rjv. 13. totg iv rf) yfj TrpdoToi rjcrav ol A a/ceBaip^ovioi /cal iv ttj OaXarry. 14. iv TOVTCO Be TCp TOTTCp TjV T) yTj TTeBIoV BivBpCOV (TVpL7r\eC0V. 1 Acc. sing. neut. of the inter¬ rogative pronoun t Is, ti, who? what? 2 apply their mind in the sense of ‘ direct their attention, ’ ‘ give at¬ tention.’ a See p. 83 7 . 4 Dependent on tipoioi, were like to wonder, that is ‘seemed to be wondering. ’ 5 Dependent on dvopoi. See 147. CONTRACT SUBSTANTIVES: VOWEL-DECLENSION. 51 15. T0T6 KCLTeiypV 01 T]fl€T€pOL TTpO^OVOL 7 ToXepLCp TOV 9 TOVTCOV 7 rpoyovov? /cal Kara pciv i/c Bv^avTLov Kunrcus 1 2 rjyepds yaXa ya/epa^ ttXovs, ev Be T(p yeacp 2 pcovot rjaav j3ap/3apot. II. 1. The voyage was to Asia. 2. We wonder what the enemy intend. 3. The sailors sacrificed to Hermes on the island. 4. There were trees and vines in this land. 5. The servant had five minas of silver. 6. He sent the gifts in a beautiful basket. 7. The barbarian wears a fox-skin cap on his head. 8. We made an expedition by land against the Peloponnesians. 9. Cyrus sent gifts to this man, a horse and a mina of silver. 10. On their voyage home, the soldiers plundered the islands. 11. Cyrus, the brother of Artaxerxes, sends to the bowmen ten days’ pay, five minas of silver. VOCABULARY. 182. a-Sr]\oS) -ov 3 * (drjAos)f not clear, uncertain, doubtful. aXco-rrcKT], fox-skin, fox-skin cap. 'Ao-Ca, Asia. eKcurxos, -t), -ov, each , every. ‘qX.ios, o, sun. ij|jiT€pos, -a, -ov, our. •ca/ra, prep.: with gen., down, under¬ neath; with acc., 5 down, down along, by, opposite. KaT-e'x « 6 (ward, exw)) hold down , check , control. kcoXt|, head. KW'irr], oar. AaKcSaipovios, -a, -ov, Lacedaemo¬ nian. paXa, adv., very , very much, greatly , exceedingly. po'vos, -t), -ov, alone, only, sole. 6'|aoios, -a, -ov, like, similar. irap-e'xw 6 (irapa, ^x u3 )i hold near , afford. •ircpC-TrXoos, ‘irtp£-’jrXovs, o (7rA (tt p6s, ex&>), hold to, apply. irpwTos, -t], -ov, first. o-eXrfvq, moon. SiKeXCd, Sicily. tot€, adv., then. 1 Dat. of instrument. See p. 47 5 . 2 Cf. 175,1. 6. 3 See 147. 4 The first part of the word is the inseparable prefix a- (called a- privative ), signifying negation (Lat. in-, English un-). 6 See 96. 3 See 127. 7 Cf. nepi, prep., around. See 180c. 52 PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF eifii. LESSON XXIII. Present and Imperfect Indicative of the Irregular Verb elfit, be. 183 . PARADIGMS. Sing. Present. Dual. Plur. Sing. Imperfect. Dual. Plur. 1 C(t4(0v) XPVO’WV (xpvffeais) XP^ s* voos* caTpairfivo * *A0t]vaIos * S4vSpov t'trcos vvv O-fiX^VT] d0Xov 8f]Xos * KaiTOl oIk4tt]s* 0"T|p€lOV Atyvirrios Sikcuos* KaKOVOOS* ol KOS* o-i8r]p€os d.KLVttKT]S SnrXoos tcavcov oXeGpos StKeXCa dXt]0€v« * 8«rxtXioi * Kara o\iyos 0-K€V^ dXicipos 8vvards Kare'xa) * opoios CTec^avos aXXa iyyvs KeXaivat ovos ct^Xt] aXXos ct K£^>aXrj dpGios o’TpaTd'irfSov * dXd-yurTOS * ftpl kCvSvvos s» OVV CTpCITTOS dX«TT€Kt] etcrPoXrj Kc&irt] OVTOS * cvpPovXfvco * dpa£irds * € KCKTTOS Xovyos tf sjd OVTOS * cnipir^piro * apireXos €KOTOV AaKcSaipdvios iraiStov cvpirXfios* avSpcios ekitXews* Xecos TT-apdSfiicros Tapcis avT L €X€v0€p£a* Xo<{>os irapexo * ra<}>pos d£io$* €X€v0£po$* \o\ayo€idXr] a0ovos tf €«S MtXrjros irXoos * <|>(Xios* Patr£Xeios * w pvd iroXepiKds * XaXSaioi pc'Paios fr\ povos iroXepios * XaXK£os P?kos ijXios pvpioi •n-pd-yovos Xfppovijo’os Popds ijp^TCpOS Mvcrds irpoSdTTjs xfXiot * “Y^ppov Ocpairevo) vavapxos * xpoOvpos Xpvcrcos 0tjo-avpds vavnjs * 'irpo iftovXeve /3ao-iXev(rai ami tov dBeX7]T7]p vir-fjpxe to) K vp(p • yap avTov fiaXXov rj tov ’A pTa^ep^rjv. 6 vir-rjpxov Be K vp(p real 01 irapd avT(p / 3 dp/ 3 apoi, evvoL re ovt€$ /cal 7ro\epL6LV l/cavoL 'J&XXrjvucrjv Be GTpaTiav tfOpoi- £ev ooBe. (pvXarccu; eZ^e v iv Tat? 7 roXeai. tovtcov Be tov ? < ppovpdpxov ^? e/cd e%Gt >v 7roXtopicelv. WLIX^tov yap 10 ToVe Ttaaacpepvr]^ 6 Trj<; Kapta? crarpairr)^ rjpx e 'iroXepuos coi/. 6 S’ eiroXiopfcei IS/IlXtjtov Kal icaTa yr/v teal KaTa OaXaTTav. o#t©? ovv GTpaTiav ' EtXXrjvucrjv rfOpot^ev. NOTES. 2. tJkc, teas come , had returned, imperf. of ifaw, 5e come. — f3ai\eo), love. —6. o'vres, being, nom. plnr. masc. of &v, pres, participle of el/ii. — TroX.tp.6iv, to war , by contraction for TroXepeeiv, pres. inf. of no\ep.eco .— 7. «38c: adv., thus, i.e. as follows. —-jroXwi, cities, dat. plnr. of tt6\is, hi city. — 8. <{>povpdpxov$: (ppovpapxos, 6, commander. — \ap|3av£iv, to take, enlist. — 9. «s, as, as if. — iroXiopiwiv: contracted pres. inf. of iroXiopiceco, besiege. — Mi\t|tov : the gen. is used with verbs of ruling. —10. Tjpx«: imperf. of dpx^i rule. —11. o 8 4, but he, i.e. Cyrus. 1 The relationship of words should not be traced too elaborately in the first stages of a pupil’s acquisition of a language; but etymologizing on simple lines may be begun early, is very profitable, and may be made a stimulating class-room exercise. INDICATIVE MIDDLE. 59 LESSON XXYI. Present, Imperfect, and Pntnre Indicative Middle. In the middle voice the subject is represented as acting upon himself or in some manner which concerns himself. Three uses of the middle may be distinguished: — 196. The direct middle , in which the subject is represented as acting directly on himself. Thus xptto, anoint, middle -^piopai, anoint oneself; irava), make to cease, middle make oneself to cease, cease, slop (intransitive); dir-ixw, keep away from (transitive), middle keep oneself from, desist from, refrain from ; 7 ropevo), make go, middle go, proceed, march, advance. 197. The indirect middle, in which the subject is repre¬ sented as acting for himself or on something belonging to himself. Thus dyopd^o), 1 buy, middle buy for oneself; aKev a£co, 2 equip, pre¬ pare, make ready, middle prepare for oneself; 7rapa-, 3 prepare, procure, middl e prepare or procure for oneself, make ready ; av-crKeva^uij collect baggage, middle collect one’s own baggage, vack up; peTa-Trepiro), send for, middle send for one’s own or to come to oneself, summon; \va), loose, middle loose one’s own, ransom; aya>, lead, middle lead one’s own. a. The indirect middle sometimes has a causative force. Thus Sam£co, lend, middle have lent to oneself, borrow; Oven, sacrifice, middle cause to sacrifice, take the auspices, offer sacrifice. 198. The subjective middle, in which the subject is repre¬ sented as acting with his own means and powers. Thus 7 rap-eyct), furnish, middle furnish from one’s own property; crTparevo), make war, middle make war with one’s own resources, take the field; so crv-aTpaTevopaL, 4 take the field with, join an expedition; J3ov\evo), plan, middle form one’s own plan, consider, deliberate, purpose; so crvp- jSovXevopaL, consult with. 1 Belated to ayopd. form ai is commoner than the simple 60 INDICATIVE MIDDLE. 199. The personal-endings in the indicative middle (154, 155) are : -— Sing. Primary. Dual. Plur. Sing. Secondary. Dual. Plur. 1. -|tat -[i.£0a "FI* -fteOa 2. -crat -CT-0OV -cT0€ -CTO -O-0OV -O-0€ 3. -Tat. -CT0OV -vrat -TO -v opicovs. 4 . apyvpiw 3 ra 7 rai^ia Xvcrovrat ol 7 roXiTac. 5. etra 3’ €7 ropevovro eVl tov 7 TOTapiov. 6. to apyvpiov SavelZovrat ol 7 roXirai. 7. Kt)po? 1 Pres. inf. middle, depending Upon eftovAevovro. 2 The gen. is used with verbs of separation. Cf. the corresponding use of the ablative in Latin. 3 Cf. 175, I. 11. INDICATIVE MIDDLE. 61 Be roh GTpaTrjyoi s 1 real \o%ayoh (rvfij3ov\eveT(U. 8. eh K.t\itciav ryv GTpcuriav a^erat. 9. ra^eox; Bid tov ireBlov eiropevopieOa eh /cooped*;. 10. ervv roh arpaTrjyoh /3ov\eveTai tl 2 Bl/caiov e’er ti. 11. /cal lepela 6vaerai t© 6ec 3. 12. /cal ol aXkoi e^piovro. 13. puaOov e/c7r\ecov irapel'Xfi'fo eh 3 TTjV arpaTiav. 14. K vpo; Be per air epirercu tov K.\iap%ov. 15. avaTparevaovTai %ev6r). 1 16. /xera Be tovto rrjv Ova lav 'irapea/cevd^ovTO. 17. Ty Be varepala K vpo; eVo- pevero r)pie\r)pievco<; pidXkov. 18. /cal o/cvrjpco; avvea/cevd- £ovto. 19. 7 repav Be rod E vcjopaTOV rjv /ccopw) • i/c TavTrj; ol GTpaTLMTaL rjyopa^ovro rd eTriTyBeia. 20. cnravios iravv earl, K vpo; Be irapaaKeva^eraL Bid rrjv eirtpieXeiav. II. 1. And he was proceeding on the wagon. 2. They will not deliberate carelessly. 3. He took the field against his bi other. 4. Cyrus will summon the village-chief. 5. They will bring their horses to the camp. 6. They proceed through this country to the river. 7. The bowmen send for their bows. 8. The generals are offering sacrifice. 9. You did not proceed to Cyrus. 10. And on the following day he offered sacrifice. 11. When it was dawn, the soldiers anointed them¬ selves. 12. We shall ransom our servants. 13. But on the following day they summon the generals and the captains. 14. The targeteers will purchase provisions for themselves. 202 . VOCABULARY. ctra, adv., then, thereupon. Im|«\€ia, care, thoughtfulness. ‘qp.cXijpivcos, adv., carelessly. 0v0ov 3. €06 €ircir€(j.4>0€ 3. €. a. The perfect and pluperfect middle of dya> and nip-Tro) are in¬ flected as above. The forms will be explained later. b. The perfect and pluperfect middle of c^co are eo-y^-/xat and icrxV'PW' These are inflected like XeXv-pai and i-XeXv-prjv. 208. EXERCISES. I. 1. ol Se ^AtXrjTOV 'rroXirai rjSecos eiravaavTO. 2. Ka) tov arparpyov /cal tov (TaTpdrzrjv arreirepi'^raTo. 3. eaTparevro Se KvpOS T7)V TO)V 7ToX,e/XiW °pdv. 4. 0UT09 TOV 7T/309 tou 9 /3ap/3apov 9 7 roXejiov 1 nreiravaeTai. 5. ol Se arparicbrai iirerropewTO araOpcou 9 2 7 revre. 6 . Kal ol oirXXTai evravOa averravaavTO. 7. oXiyot tcov crrpaTLCOTWv crirov 3 iyevaavro. 8. irapecncevaapjevoi rjaav eVt tov 9 iroXepiiovs. 9. ol OTfXiTai dSed) 9 TreiropevvTai eirl to aKpov. 10. Kal t&> 2 7 rapTidra 1 Cf. 201, I. 3. 3 In Greek the gen. is used with 2 The extent of time or space is verbs which signify an action of the expressed by the acc. (as in Latin), senses or of the mind. 64 INDICATIVE MIDDLE. iXvadaOrjv tov 'farirov. 11 . cr wear par evfiat iv rrj <£>pvyiq arvv K \edpx7r-) thief 6 <£t$Aa| * (0vA 0EK-) guard o fj («*?-) goat 7] 8iwpv£ (tiicopvx-) canal S. N. Y. G. D. A. XaXw|/ Xa\vj3-os XaXuP-i XaXvp-a kXw\|/ kXcott-os kXwtt-£ KXwr-a 4>vXaf vXaK-os v'XaK-i vXaK-a al| at-y-o's a£y-£ a£y-a 8u3pt| 8iwpv^-os 8iwpvx-t 8ia5pvx-a D. N. A.Y. G. D. XaXuP-c Xa\vJ3-oiv kXwtt-e kXcott-oiv vXaK-oiv aty-c aty-otv SlWpV^-E Siwpv^-oiv P. N. Y. G. D. A. Xa\v(3-£s XaXvp-cov XaXuiJn XaXvP-as kXc5tt-€S kXqtt-cov kXco\|/£ KXcSir-as 4>vXaK-€s vXaK-a>v 4>vXa£i (j>v'XaK-as aty-es aty-wv al ££ aty-as 8iwpvx-cs Suopv'x-wv 8uopv|i 8i«pvx-as a. Observe the case-endings (212) and apply the principles stated in 213, 1, 2, e, 4. Review 112-115. Apply the following laws of euphony to the paradigms _ 216* Mutes before X — (a) A labial mute before d\ay£, aAayy-os, tj, line of battle , phalanx. 219. EXERCISES. I. 1. iv Se rai$ ohciats rjcrav atye?. 2. 0copd/ca eyei 8 toi/ Ittttucov* 3. roVe &e /ajpv/ca ? eirep^e 7 rept gttovSwv, 4. ei/#a at Stcopvye'<; €L(tl, ye^vpat S' eiretaiv . 5. oi fiapflapoi eVo^et/- cai' viro /tacTTtycoi /. 4 6 . /cat ovkgtl irevre orraSia 5 StetyeTTjv to) (f)d\ayye. 7. tovto to yoopiov elyov twv Kt\t/c&)z/ cj)v\a- /ce?. 8. rapo? yap 971/ 7 rept to ycoplov kclI O 7 co\o 7 re 9 eVt T 979 avaf3o\r)dpo$, -ov, 6 receiving pay; fua 0 o(f) 6 poi, as subst., mercenaries. *O\vv0ios, 6, an Olynthian. ©vic-fri, 6 adv., no longer. ircp£, prep., around on all sides: with gen., about, concerning ,* with dat., around, about / with acc., around, about. tt\tjo-£ov (cf. nArxridfa), adv., near. irvKvos, -if, -ov, thick, close together. o-irapTov, rope, cord. o-toSiov, stade (measure of length = about 582 feet). vttcpPoXt], crossing, mountain-pass. vtt6, prep., under (Latin sub): with gen., under, by ; with dat., under; with acc., under. LESSON XXIX. Indicative Passive. 221. In the passive voice the subject is represented as acted on. Thus, Xvopai, I am loosed, iXvoprjv, I was loosed, etc. 222. Examine the following: — o o-Tparrjybs rov? oTrAtVas TripxJ/a, the general will send the heavy¬ armed men. ol onXirai vttq tov o-Tparrjyov 7re/x(ji0g(TovTaL, the heavy-armed men will be sent by the general. 1 For the order, cf. 208, I. 16. 2 Cf. 201, I. 2. 8 Cf. 181, I. 7. 4 Declined like xpvvovs (191). 6 [ua06s and , carry, gain. 6 ov and 6T/, still, further , longer. INDICATIVE PASSIVE. 69 ot iroXifxLOL ras anrov$as Xekwam, the enemy have violated the treaty. at (TirovhaX to is TroXe/u'ots XeXwTai, the treaty has been violated by the enemy. a. Observe that the object of the active becomes the subject of the passive; and that the subject of the active, the agent, when the sen¬ tence is converted into the passive, is expressed either by vtto (%) and the genitive, or, when the verb is in the perfect tense, by the dative. Hence: — 223. Rule of Syntax. — The agent is usually expressed, in the passive construction, by vtto with the genitive. 224. Rule of Syntax. — With the perfect and pluperfect passive the agent is sometimes expressed by the dative. This is called the Dative of the Agent. 225. The present, imperfect, perfect, pluperfect, and future- perfect have the same forms in the passive voice as in the middle. The remaining tenses are the aorist and the future. 226. PARADIGMS. First Aorist. First Future. S. 1. €-Xu0T]-V Xv0Tj and ire/nro) are rf)(0r]v, d^Oycropai and irrepcfrOrjv, 7rep0r}(ropca. These forms will be explained later. The first aorist and first future passive of fy 0 * do not occur in Attic Greek. 228. EXERCISES. I. 1. 7rw? XvOrjcropeOa ; 2. /cal ovtos 8rj i\v6r). 3. €7Tte- a07] VITO T(dv OL/COL 1 CLVTIGTCLCT l(DT d)V • 4. €7rl Tat? dvpaL? Tat? 2 3 A apelov irathevO^aovrat . 5. iirl rco evcovvpco^ ero^ev- 0rjcrav ottKItcll 8vo. 6. et? K acrrcoXov 7 rehiov dOpoi^ovrai, 7. ovrco h' av eaco^ovro e/celvoi 4 crvv 5 rot? Oeois etc rrdvv 6 Betvcov. 8. cocrre r]va ^(COpi(p 6 OL/C6T7 /? icTTiV, el XeXvrat. 13. pera to )v arpancorcov iXvdrj 6 Ao^ayo? rovBe rov rpoirov . 8 14. cocrre rjvay/cd^ovro cr^oXp d rropeveaOat. 15. rob abeXcjoco vi to rov BiBacr/caXov rrerraihevcrQov . 16. e/c 1 See p. 23 1 . 2 Instead of the usual order, arti¬ cle, attributive, substantive (see 56, Rem.), the article with the attribu¬ tive may follow the substantive, in which case the substantive itself may also have the article before it. 3 Sc. wing. 4 An emphatic they. 6 by the favour of. 6 Adverbial modifier of the fol¬ lowing adj., although the latter is here used as a subst. 7 through , by. 8 in the following manner. The acc. is used in many expressions with the force of an adverb. 9 Cf. 106, I. 12. INDICATIVE PASSIVE. 71 tw v /ccofjLwv 8 LripircccTTo viro Tcov / 3 apf 3 dpcov teal ( even ) rd curb TCt)V oifciMV %v\a. 17 * oi arpaTLoyTcu irpo ? tou? i roXe- pbiovs 'rropeveaOcu i/ce/ceXevvro tg 3 o’Tparrj'y o 5 . 18 . ot'i/ rjOpotaOrjaav K.t>p

povp-apxos, 4 o, commander of a garrison. 4>povpos, o, watcher, guard. XeipurocJjos, o, Chirisophus. 1 Demonstrative pronoun, refer¬ ring to something remote. Declined like &k\os (193). The rule in 174 applies also to tueivos. 2 Demonstrative pronoun, refer¬ ring to something near , declined like the article, with the demonstra¬ tive suffix -5e added to the forms. 88 e is used in referring forward to an object yet to be mentioned, ovtos in referring back to an object already mentioned. The rule in 174 applies also to 85e. 3 See 28. 4 v G. WKT-OS IXiriS-os \apir-os opvX0-os *y4povT-os D. VVKT-t eXidS-i XaptT-t opvI0-i yepovr-i A. VVKT-a IXiriS-a Xapiv opviv yepovr-a V. vvi IXttC Xapis opvis ■yepov D. N. A.Y. VVKT-6 cXirCS-e XapiT-€ opvi0-€ •yepovr-6 G. I). WKT-OIV iXiriS-OLv Xapfcr-oiv opvt0-oiv yepovT-oiv P. N. Y. VVKT-€S IXiriS-cs XapiT-es OpvI0-€S ycpovT-€S G. • VUKT-WV iXirCS-cov Xap£r-wv Opvt0-(OV ycpovT-wv D. w££ eXirCori Xapurt opvuri ■y^povo-i A. vvkt- as 4Xir(8-as XapiT-as opvX0-as •yepovT-as a. Observe the case-endings (212) and apply the principles stated in 213, 1, a, 2, b, e, f, 4. Apply the following laws of euphony to the paradigms : — 231. Mutes before X —A lingual mute before cr is dropped. 232. Final Consonants. — The only consonants which can stand at the end of a word are v, p, and s. Final «/'( 7r «) anc ^ £(*s) are not exceptions. Other final consonants are dropped. 233. N and a Lingual before X — vt, v8, vO are dropped be¬ fore c r, and preceding a, i, v lengthened to a, l, v, e to «, o to ov. a. Observe that yv£ is for vvkt-s, vvk-s (231, 215 b). Review 44, 45. 234. Gender. — (a) Masculine are all substantives whose stems end in -vt-. (b) Feminine are all those whose stems end in -8-, -6-. (c) Some words of masculine or feminine form, denoting persons or animals, are of common gender (p. 20 3 ). LINGUAL MUTE STEMS: CONSONANT-DECLENSION. 73 235. Like the above are declined: dp^oov, a pxovr-os (cf. povpap- Xos, and for the voc., see 213 d), leader, commander; pvpLas, pvpuiS-os 1 (pvpioL), ten thousand ; irais, 7raiS-os, 2 6, rj (cf. 7raxSeuco), child, hoy, girl ; crrXcyyts, crrAeyyiS-os, a ftara ; cj>vyas, cftvyaB-os, 1 6 , rj, fugitive. 236. PARADIGMS. rb pa ((TOJ/XaT-) body rb uvoga (ovopa T-) NAME rb (ppeap (|xa trwjxaT-os p€ap p€a,T-os p€aT-i T^pas T^paT-os T€paT-l D. N. A. V. G. D. p€aT-€ p€a.T-OlV T€paT-€ T€paT-OlV P. N. A. V. G. i). p€d/r-a 4>p€aT-a)v 4>peatrL Tcpar-a TCpOT-ttV Ttpatru a. Observe the case-endings, and apply the principle stated in 213, 5. (f>piap and repas, and a few others, are exceptions to the rule. 237. Gender. — Neuter are all substantives with stems in -ar-. 238. L ike crco/xa and ovoga are declined: Krrjga, Krrjgar-os, a pos¬ session; rrpdyga, tt pay pur-os, thing, matter, event, plur. affairs, troubles; aropu, crropuar-os, mouth ; arpdrevpxi, arparevpur-os (crrparevo)), army; < TvvOrjpa, a wOr; gar-os, watchword; ro£evpxi, ro£evgar-os (ro£ov), arrow; Xpgga, xpr/par-os, a thing that one uses, plur. things, wealth, money, property. 239. EXERCISES. I. 1. to3 S’ apyovri e/celvoi i^Opol rjcrav. 2. to Se a6\ov rjv crrXe yyls /ca\rj /cal %pvcrrj. 3. ovrco<; ovv i/avSvvevo-av oi apyovre pedTO<; aTopca pii/cpov icmv . 9. (f>av€pa ov/c yv y tcov (jovyahcov 67TLj3ovXy. 10. outo9 yap Aapeiov /cal UapvadTthos eaTL 7rat?, e/Lio? he dheX(j)6<;. 11. /cal atjco tot)? cjovyahas et? t^p %copav evOev elpX cfrvyds. 12. xprjaipLa yap yv ra To^evptaTa T 0 Z 9 TO^OTaz?* 13. tl eaTL to avvOypLa ; 14. aTparrjyol yap /cal Xo^ayol ov ^pypuiTcov eve/ca avv K vpcp eiropevoVTO. 15. to?9 ovv 6eol feel grateful. 3 Dat. sing, of the pronoun av, you. An enclitic form. 4 I.e. bodies. 6 See p. 63 2 . 6 Use irape'xw. KivSvv£vo> ( Avtivvos ), be in peril, run a risk. XIapvoraTis, -180s, Parysatis. o-a>TT|p£d (ff&>£»>), safety , deliverance. T€TpaKio--xfXiot,-at,-a(x^Atoi), 10 40d0. Ttypris, -tjTos, o, the Tigris. Tporj, nourishment , support. Xpiio-ipos, -ri, -ov serviceable. 7 Often called an improper prepo¬ sition. eveKa comm, follows its case, 8 Cf. iiri-&ov\ev< 0 . The underly¬ ing word is frovx-t), plan. 9 Of personal hostility, whereas irohinios carries the idea of tt6\€/xos. 10 rerpaKts, four times. CONTRACT VERBS IN THE INDICATIVE. 75 LESSON XXXI. Contract Verbs in tbe Indicative. 241. Contraction of Vowels. — Two successive vowels, or a vowel and a diphthong, within a word, are often united by contraction into a single long vowel or diphthong. Vowel with Vowel. — a. An open and a close vowel (11), in this order, form a diphthong, as ope-i, opei ; Kpea-’i, Kpe at. b. Two like vowels form the common long, as SrjXo- to, S 77 A 0 J; (fnXe - rprov, <}>iXr}TOv. c. But e-e gives ei, and 0-0 gives ov, as cfit-Xe-erov, (fnXeiTov ; SrjXo- opev, SrjXovpev . d. An o-sound (o or to) absorbs a, e, or rj, and forms to, as rZ/xa-co, tI/xcu ; Tlp.d-op.ev, rZ/xco/xei/; (fnXe-ui, iXe2 contract the final a, e, or o of the theme with the fol¬ lowing variable vowel. The only contracted tenses are the present and imperfect. Tl/xa-u) ( Tljxrj ), honour , cfnXe-o) (»), love, and SrjXo-a) (SrjXos'), manifest , are thus inflected in the indicative : — 245. PARADIGMS. Active. Middle and Passive. Present. Imperfect. Present. Imperfect. /— s. 1 . Tt)Jk( ccco) <3 4rtji.(aoj/)a>v Tt|x(cio)w-[iai eTln(ad)(o-jir)V 2. Tl(i(ctety)as €Tf|i(aes)ds Tifji(a6i)d 4rlfJi(aoy)<3 8. tih( det)<£ 4rfjJi(a€)d Tt(jL(ae)a-Tat 4TlfJi(ae)d-T0 D. 2. Ti(i,(ae)d-TOV €Ti(i.(ae)d-TOV Tin(ae)d-iX(ea>)<3 4£X(eoj')ouv iX(€(1)ov-jitjv 2. i\(eets)ets €4>tX(ees)€is 4>tX(6ei)€i 4<})iX(eov)ov 3. 4>i\(eet)et €tX(ee)€i 4>iX(e6)€i-Tai 4lX(€e)€l-T0 D. 2. 4>i\(ee)et-T0V 4lX(e6)€l-TOV <|>iX(ee)€i-iX(ee)€v-lX(66)€l-TOV 4iX( eelci-TT^v iX(ee)6£- tX ( 60 ) OV-(l€V iX(ed)ovfJi€0a 4<{hX( ed)ov-|A€0a > 2. 4>lX(ee)€i-T€ 4<{>iX( ee)€i-T€ c})iX(€6)ci-iX(€e)ci-(r0€ 3. 4>iX(eoi»)oxl(ri 4<|hX( eov)oov 4>iX(eo)ov-VTai 4<}>iX( /o)ov-vto CONTRACT VERBS IN THE INDICATIVE. 77 S. 1. 8 , nX( 8t]X(de)ov-T? auTO? 6 opoXoyel?, 1 See 76 end. at- and ei- be¬ come when augmented; oi- be¬ comes y-. ou is never augmented. 2 whether. The conjunctive par¬ ticle ei (see 168) is used not only in conditions, in the sense of if, but also, as here, to introduce an indi¬ rect question. 3 Contract form for voieeiv. ko .- kus iroUcc, do harm to. 4 Not then? Equivalent to nonne in Latin. 5 afterwards, acc. sing. neut. used adverbially. 6 yourself, Latin ipse, to be taken with the following ), a hunt or chase. Kaiccos (/faffds), adv., badly, ill. fiaXiora (uaAa), adv.,. most, espe¬ cially. p-eXeTOLto, practise. MrjSos, 6, a Mede. 0€vo<|><3v, -wvtos, Xenophon. oIkco ) 5 (oIkoj), inhabit, dwell, occupy. clitic. 1 rt . . . Kal, both . . . and. re is enclitic. For the accent of the pre¬ ceding oi (proclitic), see 186 c. 6 See p. 77 K 6 Subjective middle (198). 2 I.e. 7 raises. 8 See p. 47 6 . 4 Cf. 175, I. 8. 7 See p. 71 2 . The same distinc¬ tion holds for the advs. ovtus, which refers to what precedes, and adr, which refers to what follows. AFFINITY OF WORDS. — READING LESSON. 79 LESSON XXXII. Affinity of Words. — Reading Lesson. Give the meaning of the following words: — 249. WORD LIST. d*yopd£« * 4|ios Krfjpa iravu dSecos 6V6KO, XCvcos TrapacrKcv- TT|p£d* a € V0€V * p,dorTi| IlapuCT-aTis Tax€»s axpov s' kvravQa. * pcXtraw iravco* rcpas aXevpov €VT€V0€V * p.€Ta impaco* TCTpaKicrxf- dva.po\r| yt .iif. €TT€tpi “ perairepLirto * ire pi Xiot* avairavco * 4iriPovX'fj * MfjSos irie'^co Ttyprjs dvTwrTao*uo- liripLeXtia p,i(r0oc{>6pos* irXT]rj dpx«v * €\0P<>S Qevo<|>d>v irpd'yp.a direppoXV) av rjSccos £tiXov Ilpogcvos ■uird papPapucos* iip.eXi]p.eva)s o8e* 'ITT€pV^ V(TT€pOS * PapPapiKtos* 0avaToa> oIk€(i) * 1TVKVOS cjxxXa-yg Poattf ©■fjpd* OlKO0fcV * * iXe'co * *y€pa)V 0ppeap ytvpovpapxos SavcC^o) 0«pa| 6 X 05 SirapridT-qs 4>povpos * 8eiv6s Upeiov * ’OXvvOios p vyla. 8^1 linriKos* dpoXo’yeo) vyds 8t)\6(o * ’Iwvikos ovopa t>Xa£ * 8i8aos A6Xo\J/ KTjpv| tr ore o-Tparevpia * XtXds 8vo KtXncia* OVKCTl* cruXX oyrj XP%** cIto. K£Xi£* ovpa vyas peev rjv, ef)L\os Be rep K vpw. rovreo KOpo? eBeo/ce pevplovs Bapet/covs. 6 Be arparevpa rj6potaev drro rovreov rebv 5 xprjpLarcov, /cal eiro\epet e/c Xeppovrfaov oppeebpievos rots ®pa%L, /cal a)(f>e\ei robs f/ E Wrjvas • ware /cal %pr]p,ara eBco/cav avreo els rrjv rpocfrrjv rebv arpaneoreov ai ev Xep- povrjaco 7 ro\ets> rovro S’ av ovreos erpeepero avreo to arparevpea. ' Apiarur'/ros Be 0 SerraXos %evos rjv avreo, 10 /cal me^bpeevos viro rebv ol/col avnaraateoreov alrel K vpov eh Bta^lXtovs £evovs puaOov. 6 Be K vpos eBeo/cev avreo eh rerpa/cta^lXtovs puaOov. ovreo Be av ro ev SerraXiez avreo erpeepero arpdrevpia. Upotjevov Be /cal %oej>alverov /cal 'Zco/cparrjv £evovs ovras /cal rovrovs e/ceXevae arpa- 15 records Xapefidveev • /cal eirolovv ovreos ovroi. NOTES. 5. IitoXciwi : this verb is followed by the dat. — oppupivos: contracted from 6pp.a6p.evos, pres. part. mid.—6. wtfjeXei, assisted (wcpeXeca). —"EXXijvas: acc. plur. of ‘'ea\t)v, c, E\At)v-os, 6, a Greek. — wo-te, so that , conj., compounded of ws (proclitic) and the enclitic particle tL See 186 c.—8. uoXeis : nom. plur. of —€Tpe€To: Tps, t-Xvo-v, Xvo- pai, e-Xvo-pr)v. b. Future system, including the fut. act. and mid. Tense-suffix -, Xxktw, eXvaa, XeXvKa, XeXvpai, iXvOrjv. a. Not all verbs have all the principal parts; that is, some verbs are defective. 254. Verbs are called Vowel Verbs, Mute Verbs, Liquid Verbs, according as their themes end in a vowel, a mute, or a liquid. a. In forming the different tense-stems, the theme of vowel verbs is sometimes modified. b. Most themes ending in a short vowel lengthen this vowel in all the systems except the present, a to rj, e to rj, o to i\eco, iXrjcrc»), e<|)CXt]cra, ir€<|>£Xt]Ka, 1 ir€<})£Xr]pai, €lXrj0T]V. SrjXdo), 8t]Xwcrw, tSrfXwcra, SeSrjXwKa, SeSifXwpai, 48rjXco0r]v. ire i paw, impacTO), lire ipacra, ireireipaKa, Tre'ircCpdp.ai, €ir€ipd0T]V. Give the principal parts of the following vowel verbs, all of which are regular and complete: — dSiKeo), wrong; XoiSopcw, abuse; p.i (ixiodis'), let for hire , let; viKtxw, conquer; oIk4co, 2 inhabit; opoXo-ycw, agree; oppaw, set in motion; iroUa), do, make. 255. Many verbs, called Deponent Verbs, are never used in the active voice, but only in the middle, or in the middle and passive. i See 120. 2 See p. 77 K VO WEL VERBS. — DEPONENTS. 83 a. In most deponent verbs the principal parts are the pres., fut., aor., and perf., of the indicative middle. These are called middle depo¬ nents. Thus : — atriaoficu, blame, accuse, alTiduropcu, flTido-dp.rjv , 1 rjrid}j.ai. TyycofAai (ayw), lead, conduct, 'rjyrjo’op.ai,, rj'yricrdfJi'qv, T)yrj|ACU. Xpaopai (xp^a), use, employ, xP 1 i ? KOpo? €Te\evTrjGev ev tg3 ept- 7rpoaOev 6 7 * \6ycp SeSrjXwTat. 9. eiTa Se i^rjyov 7 tov apyovTa. 10. 7 TopevecrOau etaae 8 too? GTpaTMDTds. 11. o 3e GTpaT7jyo< ? eiretpaxyaTO Ta? K(bpid<; irepte^eiv. 12. 'jroXepLrjGet gvv tois Tobv MtXrjGLcav (p>vyd aarpairr ] 1 ov tov pucrOov eve/ca pbovov 2 vir^perrjcropiev aXka /cal t% ^aptTO?. 3 19. €T€Tipi7]ao yap vi to ’A pra^ep^ov Bt evvoiav re Ka\ TTLaTOTTjra. II. 1. He was loved by the barbarians. 2. They have been hired by the general. 4 3. The army was besieged by the enemy. 4. Miletus was besieged both 5 by land and by sea. 5. I made war against the Thracians. 6. Cyrus will besiege Miletus both by land and by sea. 7. Cyrus has honoured this (man) on account of his valour. 8. For the soldiers were not loved by the citizens. 9. He has been made satrap of this country by Darius. 10. But when Darius died, messengers were sent to Artaxerxes by Cyrus. 11. Since Clearchus has soldiers and boats, he will besiege the stronghold of the enemy. 257. VOCABULARY. okoXo v0e«, follow , accompany. curira£o|jiai, welcome , greet. paXavos, ij, acorn , date. 8id-Ko' 7 (op/cos), swear falsely , commit perjury , forswear or per¬ jure oneself. Ml\r|(rios, -a, -ov (MzAtjtos), Mile¬ sian. irapa-KcXcvop.ai, urge along, exhort. ircpi-exa), 8 surround , encompass. mcrro-nis, -tjtos, tj (7tl(tt6s), fidelity. TroXcpe'ft) (jr6\ep.os), make or carry on war. TtXcvraw, end , finish , die. viT-dy? 'iroXe^idv ovaav. 1 12 . ol avparavre^ OTrXirai rjaav fjLvpiOi /cal yi\toi . 13 . to fiev evOvpaypia % aplev rjv, to S ’ epyov dhvvarov. 14 . 8tapird^ovres ra ^copta toov iv tclI 9 q'uclcus Orjcravpcov 2 ov/c direi^opieOa. 15 . aTpaT'/jyov 8e Kvpov i7TOLr](T6 iravrcov octol et? K aarcoXov 7 re8iov dOpoi^ovrcu. 16. /cal evdv ? 'irdaiv e/3od /cal fiapftapucw ? /cal ' EWrjvt/ccbs otl ’Aprai-ep^rjs els p^a^(r\v Trapaa/cevd^erai. 17 . /clv8vv€vovt€vco, produce. tJ/iXo's, -rj, -ov, bare. wpa, period , time , season. 1 &v, odcra, vv, pres. part, of el/xi. 2 Cf. 201, I. 3. 8 I.e. having. 4 Use the plur. 6 In Greek, willing , the adj., not the adv. 6 Cf. 256, I. 13, and I. 8 above. 7 * 8 In Greek, as plotting against. Cf. I. 11 above. 9 See 147. 10 Strengthened by the prefix a-. Cf. (Tv/M-iras. 11 xupeco (cf x^pa, xcop/ov), give place, withdraw. 12 See p. 45 9 . 88 SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE. LESSON XXXY. Subjunctive Active, 265. The distinctions of time which mark the various tenses in the indicative disappear in the subjunctive and imperative and generally in the optative and infinitive. 266. When these distinctions disappear, the tenses differ only in denoting the continuance , the completion, or simply the occurrence of an action. The present tense denotes an action as continued or repeated, the perfect as completed, the aorist as simply brought to pass. 267. Only these three tenses occur in the subjunctive, and the perfect is rare. The time of the present and aorist is pre¬ cisely the same, and is generally future. But the present expresses the action as going on or repeated in the future, while the aorist expresses simply its occurrence. Thus iav KioXvy means, if he shall be hindering or if he shall hinder (habitually), but iav KcoXvarj means simply, if he shall hinder. See further the examples in 270, 272. 268. PARADIGMS. Present. First Aorist. First Perfect. S. 1 XvW Xv XcXvko) 2 XVT]S XwrflS XcXvKTJS 3 Xvvpav, let us not destroy the bridge . a. Observe that these sentences all express exhortation; that the verb is in the first pers. plur. of the subjv.; and that, if the exhorta¬ tion is neg., pr}, not , is used. Hence : — 271. Rule of Syntax. — The first person of the subjunctive (generally plural) is used in exhortations. Its negative is prj. 272. Subjunctive in Protasis. In conditional sentences the clause containing the condition is called the protasis, and that containing the conclusion is called the apodosis. Examine the following: — rjv 'iraplyoijxev ay op av, c£ere ra hnrrjheia, if we provide a market , you will have supplies. iav p*Y) ravra 7roirj(rr], airoyMpyo-opev, if he does not do this, we shall withdraw. eav viKrjo-oipLev, ryv -xflpav ov hiapiracrei, if we conquer, he will not plunder the country. 90 SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE. a. Observe that these sentences state a supposed future case vividly; that the protasis is expressed by the particle idv, 1 if, with the subjv., and the apodosis by the fut. indie.; and that when the protasis is negative it takes prj, but when the apodosis is negative it takes ov. Hence : — 273. Rule of Syntax. — When a supposed future case is stated distinctly and vividly (as if I shall go or if I go in Eng¬ lish), the protasis generally takes the subjunctive with idv, the apodosis the future indicative (or some other form expressing future time). The negative adverb of the protasis is regularly fx.rj, that of the apodosis is ov. For the force of the tenses of the subjunctive in the examples above, see 267. 274. EXERCISES. I. 1. e^opfArjcrcDfiev /cal tou? dXXoy? eVt rrjv aperyv. 2. eav purj ravra acncycry, aScKyaet. 3. rovrov ov rlp^yaopiev, eav ravra irerroiy/cy? 4 . rjv Be Tt? 3 97 / 4(25 4 * 7*975 oBov b arvo/coa- Xvy, 8La7ro\epL7jGOpLev rovrw . 6 5. rjv S' rj/ieis vl/crjawpiev , oi rjpuerepoi parry rrorapidp, ireLpacropLaL avrov /careyeiv. 13. rjv Be airy, i/cet 3 eav by contraction becomes fjv or tiv, and often appears in these forms. k&v results from crasis (p. 55 4 ) of Ka\ tiv, and if or even if. 2 shall have done, i.e. shall prove to have done. 3 anybody, nom. sing. masc. of the indefinite pron. t\s, tI, an en¬ clitic. 4 The declension of the personal pron. eyw, I, in the sing, and plur. is as follows: N. tyw, G. iyov or p.ov, D. €jioi or /lloI, A. ifxe or yue; N. npels, we, G. ryu. F. rifuv, A. ryaas. The monosyllabic forms are enclitic. With tfjiov, etc., cf. e/ii6s, my, with ryieis, etc., cf. ryaeTepos, OUT. 5 Cf. 263, I. 14. 3 S eep. 83io. 7 Verts of superiority and infe¬ riority take the gen. 8 Verbs signifying to name, call, appoint, make , may take a predi¬ cate acc. (here vpcu Smti, ravra a'coaofjueOa. 15. eav rjplv (j>i\o$ y 6 KOpo?, rlpy?* a%LOV (f)i\ov e^ofiev. 16. yv to evdvpypa y rraparfXycnov, ravra rroiyaopev. 17. rjv Be py XetpiVo^o? 'irXola ayy bcava, roi<; iv0aBe s %pyaopeda . 18. poi ianv , w arparLOirai , 6 fiapfiapos • onv 7 repyjryre pe, TrXola e^ere. II. 1. Let us, Cyrus, honour 4 our guest. 2. If he does not collect an army, his brother will be king. 3. The messenger shall have ten talents, if he does 4 this. 4. Let us besiege 4 the emporium both by land and by sea. 5. If you are brave, you will be honoured by Cyrus. 6. If he does 4 this, he will be punished. 7. Let us immediately convoke 4 a meeting of the soldiers. 8. What 5 will the soldiers have, if they conquer 4 ? 9. And let us send with Xenophon 6 the peltasts from the van. 7 10. If he does not send the money, I will borrow (it). 11. The soldiers will not approach, unless 8 the general ends their suspicions. VOCABULARY. 275. de(, adv., always, ever. dvSpc(, urge out, incite, arouse. koXws ( k€\&i>, be of service to, help, bene¬ fit, assist. 1 in respect to. 2 The gen. is used with adjs. and advs. of value. 8 Sc. n\oiois. Cf. 256, I. 4, and 228, I. 3. 4 Use the aor. 6 Cf. 181, I. 4. 6 See p. 31 8 . 7 (TT^pa. 8 1.e. if not. 9 us strengthened by the inten¬ sive particle nip, which is enclitic. For the accent, see 186 c. 92 SUBJUNCTIVE MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. LESSON XXXYI. Subjunctive Middle and Passive. 276. PARADIGMS. Present M. and P. First Aorist Middle. Perfect M. and P. First Aorist Passive. S. 1 Xva)-|jLai Xvo*a)-p.ai XeXv-fi.€vo$ (-*1, *ov) « Xv0<3 2 Xvtj Xvo-tj U US Xv0i]S 3 Xvrj-Tai Xvcrtj-Tai u U Xv0tj D. 2 Xvr]-cr0ov XvoT]-, XvQrjs, XvOrj, XvOuai, see 268 b. For con¬ traction in the forms of the aor. pass, (from XvOew, XvOerjs, XvOerj, etc.), see 241 d, g, b. 277. Subjunctive in Clauses which denote Purpose. Examine the following: — ^rjrovfiev tors ap^ovras, tva rj/xiv av/x/3ovXevo)(n, we are seeking the commanders, that they may give us their counsel. SUBJUNCTIVE MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 93 rrjv yevpav Xvcropev, Tva /at) ol iroXipioi irXyaido-oicn, we will destroy the bridge, that the enemy may not approach. tovtov ayopev Sevpo, prj kolkus ypas 7roir}cry, we are bringing him here, that he may not do us harm. a. Observe that the clause which denotes the purpose takes the subjv.; that the particle which introduces it is Tv a, that , in order that; that the verb which precedes is in a primary tense (61) ; that the neg. of the clause of purpose is /at), not, and follows the particle Tva; but that sometimes in a neg. clause of purpose /at) alone is used in the sense, that not, in order that not. Two other particles, cos and o7rcos, will occur in the following exer¬ cises, used in the same way and in the same sense as Tva. Hence: — 278. Rule of Syntax. — Clauses which denote purpose are introduced by Tva, cos, o7rvpa (f>i\oi, tovtov tov 7 roXepiov* * 4. rjv Be ttjv elprjvrjv TrocrjacbpLeOa, acrtyaXa j? Trjv ycbpav olKrjaopLev. 5. ayoXfj 5 jropevovTCU , iva p,rj r) vpa \e\vp,evr] fj, oi 7 ro\epuoi airoyooprjaoven. 9. (f>o/3eiTCU p,r) to (TTpaTevpia eVt ttjv epirjv apyrjv GTpaTev- tjtcu. 10. 7TopevcbpLe0a, iva diroairao-Ocd^ev tov fiaaiXi/cov GTpaTevpLaTos. 11. (f>oj3o< ; tov ? 7 ro\tTa? eyei p,rj at avvOrj/cat VI TO TCOV TToXcflltOV \v0COaiV. 12 . TjV Be Br) KCLl (TCO0(x)p,eV €7 TL OdXaTTaVy 7 rw? 7 rkola ej-opev; 13. tovtov, &> (TTpaTLWTcu, Tralacopiev teal /3iacr(bp,e6a iropeveaQai. 14. edv Tt 9 7 netyjTcu, 6 7 rXrjaiov 6 /3orjOrjaet . 15 . eyo) yap BeBoi/ca pirj ov tov 7 roX,e- p,ov ireiravpjkvoi ohtlv. 16 . rj Be %copa 7 roXepiid eaTiv eirucLv- Bvvov ovv carat, rjv dpieXax; re Kal d^vXd/CTW ? 7 ropevrjaOe eirl Ta €7nT7]BeLa . II. 1. I fear that the satrap will be sent. 2. Let us there deliberate about 7 this. 3. They are proceeding quickly, that they may not be separated 8 from the other soldiers. 4. I do not fear that this (man) will be made satrap. 8 5. Let us deliberate about 9 the safety of the soldiers. 6. He will send a messen¬ ger, if he arrives safely in Asia. 7. I fear that the bridges will be destroyed. 8. Let us halt, soldiers, and deliberate. 9. For the exiles will not follow with us, if we proceed to Miletus. 10. We will destroy the bridge, that the enemy may not send for the peltasts. 1 Acc. sing. neut. of the indefinite pron. t\s, t1, some , any , an enclitic. 2 Verbs signifying to do anything to a person or thing may take two accusatives. • Cf. 274, 1.10. 4 Cf. 201, I. 3. 6 Cf. 228, I. 14. e Cf. 256, I. 13. 7 Cf 274, I. 13. 8 Use the aor. ^ 7 repl with gen. CONTRACT VERBS IN THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 95 282. VOCABULARY. djicXws, adv., carelessly, incautiously. diro-onrdw, 1 draw off, separate. dpxri (c/. government, prov¬ ince. dur<^aX(5s, adv., safely, securely. d-<|>v\dKTs (of&a> ()c5o-i Tip(aa>)«-vrai 1 < rnda j, airacra), aor. pass. fl\(ew)(3 LX(ew)(5-|jLai 2 lX(q?s)i]$ 4>tX(e»7)-n 3 iX(€7j)r]-Tai D. 2 i\(e7j)rj-TOV 4>lX(e77)Tj-(T0OV 3 ^>i\(erj)T]-TOV 4>iX(e7j)rj-(r0ov P. 1 <|>i\(ea>)w-|JL£V <}>iX(ew)w-}jL€0a 2 4>iX(erj)ri-T€ 4>iX(e7j)r)-ar0e 3 lX(ea))coiX(eco)w-VTai S. 1 8tjX(^w)(3 8i]X(^a>)w-|xai 2 8tjX(^s)ois 8r]X(Jp)ot 3 8t]X() <3-vtcu See 245 a. 284. EXERCISES. I. 1. icpavyrjv 'iroiwfjiev. 2. n reipcopueOa avvepyol toc? < elvai. 3. eav Be tou? arparicordf; aBitcy, ov iropevcro- pieOa. 4. eav Be tovtovs v~ucd>p,ev, iravra rjpblv Treiroi^Tai. 5. Ta? dpid^a^ Xvaeopbev, Lva p,r) ra virotyyia ypcobv 1 crrpa- rrjyfj . 6. BeBoi/cacn purj tou? K vpov ? icaicd) ? 7 roieiv 2 7 TeipaaOe. 7. &e vl/ccopiev, oi 7 rokefuoi ecrovrau a/cevo(f)6- poi rjpLerepoi. 8 . a\\a 7787 ? Brjcopuev rrjv toov fiapfiapcov yrjv. 9. eav 8e rjTrcopieda, tl<; s rjpidiv acoOrjaerai ; 10. /coivr} Brj epco- rcopiev top /ccop,dp)(r)v rk Bgtlv r\ ^copa. 11. rovrov Be, rjv aw(f>povr)T€, rrjv vv/cra 4 Brjaere. 12. tyofieiraL p,rj ireipBovrai oi 7 roXirai /carayeiv rov 9 vydBa<$. 13. ev6v$ TropevcopueO a, co? toOto evvocovrai oi arpaTicoTat. 14. eav rj (f)d\aytj BiaenraTaL, tovto evdv<$ advpLLav 7 Tourjaei. 15. eav ovv 1 Cf. 256,1. 1. 2 Cf. 247, I. 11. 3 who ? See p. 50 \ 4 Cf 239, II. 9. CONTRACT VERBS IN THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 97 vI/cooglv ol TroXejJbiOi, ttoos Xvaopiev ttjv yecfrvpav ; 16. rj8ecos 7 tov(o/jL€V /cal OappaXecos /cToopieQa. 17. rjv tov 9 aXXov 9 cj)lXov 9 iXevOepoopbev , tou 9 3’ i^dpovs %ecpoopLeOa . II. 1. Let us free the servants. 2. We shall be honoured, if we conquer. 3. Soldiers, let us follow with 2 Xenophon. 4. With the help of 3 the gods, let us conquer the enemy. 5. You will have supplies, if you conquer. 6. Let us set forth, soldiers, against the enemy courageously. 7. I fear that the soldiers will wrong these citizens. 8. I am frightened lest he may try to do this. 9. Let us, then, make the levy in the following manner. 10. You are fearful 4 that the exiles will not accompany 5 us, if we proceed to Asia. 11. Let us call out to the general 6 to lead the targeteers against the stronghold. 12. If we free these men, I fear that the commander of the Medes will not withdraw. 285. VOCABULARY. d0v|xtd, despondency , dejection. o-jiaxet adv., without fighting. Sca>, bind, fasten , tie. Srjo'w, lay waste, ravage. eXevdepdo) (eAeu^fpos), free, liberate. 4v-vo&>no'pos, o ((tk€vT), (pcpo), carry), baggage-carrier. ( pov€w, be prudent, be wise. Xetpo'u, handle, subdue. 1 Cf. the use of varepov, 247,1.16. 2 Use v pt]Top-(»)V D. XifjL&ri p/qa-C aywcri SaCpooa ptiTop-cri A. Xi(i€v-as p.rjv-as dywv-as Sa(pov-as pr]TOp-as a. Observe the application of the principles stated in 213 a, 2 , 3, c, 4, and 216. Apply the following law of euphony in forming the dat. plur.: — 287. N before 2. — v before a is dropped, and the preced¬ ing vowel is lengthened (see 233). But before or of the dative plural the vowel remains unchanged. 288. Like the above are declined ''EWrjv, "EAA^v-os (cf. *EAA^- vikos), a Greek; gyepoiv, ffyepov-os {rjye.op.aC), leader; Kparrjp, Kpdrrjp-o';, mixing-bowl. 1 Related to &yw, in the sense of a bringing together , especially to wit¬ ness a contest, and so a contest, games. \ LIQUID STEMS: CONSONANT-DECLENSION. 99 For the gender of these words, see 292. 289. Syncopated Stems in -ep-. — Four substantives with stems in -cp-, naTrjp, /xrjTYjp, dvyaTrjp, yacrTrjp, drop e of the stem in the genitive and dative singular and accent the ultima. In the other cases they retain e and accent it, except in the voca¬ tive singular, where they all have recessive accent. The voca¬ tive singular of all of these substantives is the mere stem. In the dative plural -ep- is changed to -pa-. 290. A fifth substantive, avrjp (c/. drSpetos), follows the analogy of Trarrjp, but syncopates all of the cases in which -ep- comes before a vowel and inserts 8 between v and p. In these cases the accent is thrown back on the previous syllable, ex¬ cept in the genitive and dative singular and dual and in the genitive plural, which accent the ultima. 291. PARADIGMS. 6 7raT7j/o v p-hr-np 7] dvydrrjp t > / o avrjp (irarep-') {pt]r ep-) ( dvyarep -) (avep-) FATHER MOTHER DAUGHTER man S.N. TraTrfp jiiynip 0vydrr]p dvrfp G. iraTp-o's p.tjrp-ds Ovyarp-os dvSp-os D. ira,Tp-£ |JlT|Tp“£ 0vyaTp-£ avSp-( A. ira/rep-a |AT]Wp-a Ou-yarep-a avSp-a V. irartp pTyrep OvyaTtp avcp D. N. A.Y. TraTtp-e [J.1]T€p-€ ©uyare'p-e avSp-e G. D. iraTcp-oiv (JLT|T6p-OlV 0uyaT€p-oiV avSp-otv P. N. V. iraTCp-es p.T|T6p-€S 0vyaT€p es av8p-€S G. iraWp-wv p,T]T€p-COV ©vyaTcp-wv avSp-wv D. iraTpd-e Aeo> (275) with the acc. 4 Cf. 274, T. 15. OPTATIVE ACTIVE. 101 VOCABULARY. 294. cUtIcd, ask , demand. avcv, adv., with gen., without. 1 dpi0(jios, o, number , enumeration. avX££opai, pass, dep., lodge, be quar¬ tered , bivouac. paciXeCa (#a), kingdom. (3ovXt{ (c/. i SouAeuw), will, plan , senate. "yap-os, o', marriage. “yvpviKos, -tj, -ov, gymnastic. 4ktto8«v, adv., ow£ 0 / the way. eg, indec., six. €m-0i)p.€w, 2 desire , long for. 060 )pea), meio, witness, inspect. Kaivos, -if, -ov, new , strange. Kpi0r|, barley , commonly plur. Kpt0ivos, -rj, -ov ( Kpidr )), 0 / barley. irvpo's, o, wheat, commonly plur. TCTTaptS (c/. T€TpaKi(T-XlAiOi), FOUR, vpirepos, -a, -ov (c/. 0pels'), YOUR. LESSON XXXIX. Optative Active. 295. Besides the present, aopist, and perfect, two other tenses occur in the optative, the future and future perfect. 296. The distinction between the present and aorist is gen¬ erally precisely that found in the subjunctive (267). Thus d k(oXvol means, if he should be hindering or if he should hinder (habitually), but d KwXvaae means simply, if he should hinder. See further the examples in 299, 301, 303. 297. PARADIGMS. Present. Future. First Aorist. First Perfect. s. 1 Xvoi-p.i Xvo-oi-fu Xvcrai-p.i XcXvKoi-p .1 2 Xvoi-s Xijcroi-s Xvo"€ia-s, \iacu-s XeXvKoi-s 3 Xvoi XvO’Ol Xwreie, Avirai XeXvKoi D. 1 Xvoi-tov Xvo-oi-tov Xva-ai-Tov XeXvKOl-TOV 2 Xvo£-tt|v Xvo-o£-tt]v XiJvpav iXxxrapev, iva py ol 7roXepioi TrXyaiacreiav, we destroyed the bridge, that the enemy might not approach. tovtov yyopev Scvpo, py kolkojs ypas Troiyo’uc, we brought him here, that he might not do us harm. a. Observe that the clause which denotes the purpose takes the opt.; that the particle which introduces it is Iva ; that the preceding verb is in a secondary tense (61); that the neg. of the clause of pur¬ pose is py, and follows iva; but that sometimes in a neg. clause of purpose py alone is used in the sense, that not, in order that not. ws and 07ra)s may occur in place of iva. Hence: — 302. Rule of Syntax. — Clauses which denote purpose are introduced by iva, ws, o7ra)s, that, in order that, and iva py, wpds ay 01 avrov 9. 7 11. rcoy 3e j3apj3dpcov s eirefie- XetTo, d) 9 TroXefieiv re iicavoX eh)aav teal evvotKoos eyotev avrd). 12. Toy }/-uy T 009 cpiXovs ev 7 rotety. 9 14. /cat auy vfilv 10 fiev eXr)v av Tifiios, vficov 11 Be el eprjfios eirjv, aBvvaro 9 ay et'^y. 15. H evocpcov Be rov 9 6 r ina6o(pvXaKa 9 ? 7 iye 777709 tovto to ycopiov, 07 TC09 TOVT(p ol 7roXe'fnoi 7r pocreyotev tov vovv. 16. eVel Se eirie^ovTO vi to tcov Totjev/iaTcov koX (TGpevBovcov, erropevovTo /cv/cXcp, 12 o7rcos Ta oirXa eyotev 7 77)0 13 ray To^evfiaTwv. 17. irdCXiv rjpooTrjo-ev 6 Itvpos, v Et/. oyy ay 667^9 ^ tw e/iffl dBeX 7roXefiLo$, ifiol Se (ptXos /cal 'ttkttos ; 1 See p. 83 w. 2 See 257. 3 6e well-disposed. ex« is used with an adv. in the sense of el A with an adj., as naXobs e%ei, it is well. 4 to him, dat. sing. masc. 5 Dat. sing. fem. of outos as adv., in this way or direction. 6 The declension of the personal pron. av, thou, you, in the sing, and plur. is as follows: N. II. 1. He feared that he would not have friends. 2. He acquired good friends, that he might have helpers. 3. If you should do this, we should justly feel grateful to you. 3 4. They feared that the soldiers would not be well-disposed. 5. If you should plot evil against me, 4 you would be evil- minded. 5 6. All the soldiers feared that the enemy would plunder the camp. 7. This he did, that the rest of the Greeks 6 might approach. 8. But I was terrified lest he might lead us among 7 the enemy. 9. It would be well, if the general would convoke 8 a meeting of the soldiers. 10. And the Greeks were anxious 9 lest they should not have provisions. VOCABULARY. 306. dir-d'yca, lead away. diro-£&>, bring back in safety, re¬ store safe. d-xapCcrcDs (xdpis), adv., without thanks. intensive particle, even, at least (Lat. quidern), postpositive 10 and enclitic. 'EXXas, -aSos (cf/'EWriv), Greece. tm-p.cXlop.ai, 11 pass, dep., care for, give attention to. ?pT]fu>s, -ov, or -*»], -ov, deserted, desti¬ tute of, deprived of. en (cf. ovK-eri), adv., yet, still, further, tv (cf. eti-voos), adv., well, well off, happily. 1 The accent is lost with the elided vowel. 2 See p. 84 1 . 8 Use x&P lv an d cf. 239,1.15. 4 Cf. 129, I. 5. 6 kolk6voos. 6 I.e. the other Greeks. 7 fis. 8 Use the aor. ev-votKws 12 (ev-voos), adv., with good will, kindly. kX etw, shut, close. kvkXos, 6, circle, curve. Mcvcov, -wvos, Menon. dirior0o-<|>vXa|, 13 -aKOs, 6, rear-guard. ‘rruTTcvtt (tti(tt6s), trust, rely upon. irovT]pCd (cf. 7roj/ea>), a bad state, wick¬ edness, knavery. ttot€, adv., at some time, ever, en¬ clitic. irpo (cf. irpicra), irpuTos), prep, with gen. (Lat. pro), before, for, in preference to, in behalf of. Ttpios, -a, -ov (Tipi]), valued, hon¬ oured, worthy. 9 Use the impf. of ewoiopai. i° See p. 15 2 11 Cf. eirt-peXeta. Here belong also a-p.€\a>s, peXerda), hp.e\r]p.iv 60 S, all formed on the root pe\. 12 A word of four syllables, as the two dots (diaeresis) show. 13 omadev, adv., behind. 106 OPTATIVE MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 307. LESSON XL. Optative Middle and Passive. PARADIGMS- Present M. and P. PUTURE Middle. First Aor. Middle. Perfect M. and P. S.l \t}oC-|AT]V Xiia-o£-|jiT]v Xv KaL ™ v Gtopdrcvv 2 crTeprjOelpLev av. 12. oi Be 7 ToXepuoi eBeiaav pirj d7ro/cXeur0elev. 10 13. el acoOel/iev vn to crov, crol X^P iV & v %X 0L P ev ^ LKa ^ c ° ( ^> 14. a\V o//,a>9 0 arpaTrjyo 9 ecfroftrfOr) fir) /cv/cXcoOelrj e/carepcoOev. 15. 0 Be lAXeapxos etyofteLTO pLr) rj yecf)Vpa Xvoiro vtto tov aarpairov Tr)? cruz/ u/ui> flovXevoipirjv t / 3 Bl/ccuov zgtl /cal wpo? Oecov /cal n rpo? av0pdo7rcov. II. 1. I feared that the bridge would be destroyed. 2. The general would do wrong, 4 if he should send for the boats. 3. I struck this (man), fellow-soldiers, with my fist, that I might force 5 him to desist. 4. How, then, could J 6 force you to pro¬ ceed with me ? 5. He was terrified lest the enemy should not cease from war. 6. We rested in the plain to deliberate 7 about a truce. 7. How, then, should we proceed in safety, if it should be proper to proceed ? 8. I would not take part in the expedition, unless 8 Xenophon were present. 9. We made Xenophon our commander, that we might be brought safely 9 to Greece. 10. There was danger that the enemy would try 4 to withdraw within the night. 309. VOCABULARY. atria (cf. aWiao/iai ), blame, censure. ap-a, adv., at the same time. oiro-icXeCd), shut off, intercept. arro-Xvw, loose from , acquit. Ae'gnnros, o, Dexippus. Sew, 10 leant, need; mid., as pass, dep., want , beg, request. cKaTcpwOev (cf. eicaaTos'), adv., on both sides. Kar-Tj-yop&o, 11 speak against, charge , accuse. kvkXo'cd (kvk\os), surround, encircle, hem in. oticaSe (oIkos), adv., homeward. irXotJtrios, -a, -ov, rich , wealthy. irv£ (cf. irvKvis), adv., with the fist. paS(o>s, adv., easily, readily. o-Tcp iT] Tiji(aoi)tj> Ti(Ji(aoi)cji-TO D. 2 Tljx(aot)co-TOV Tip,(aot)w--VTO S. 1 iX(eoi)olr]-v or <{>iX(€ot)oi-}n 4>iX(eoi')oi-|xr]V 2 iX(eo»)oCtp$ <|>iX(eois)oi-s iX(eoi)oi-o 3 4>i\(eot)oiT] 4>iX.(eot)o£ iX(eoi)oi-ro D. 2 cj>tX(eot)oi-TOV tX(eoi / )oi-TT]V 4>iX(eo/)oi-iX(eoj)oi-ji€V iX(eoj)o£-(i€0a 2 cj>iX(eoi)oi-T6 4>iX(eo/)ot-o-0€ 3 «j)iX(eoi)oi€-V ^>t\ov 9 paBlco 9 dv TroiolpieOa. 10. elra Be tov 9 arparidras diryyov, r lva tmv /ca/cwv epycov 5 ^ypuoivro. 11. rravres icfroftovvTo pty 6 KXeapxos TtpLcopolro tov 9 crrpa- TLCDTaS. 12. el 07r\a exotpev, Kal ry apery dv xP ( PP ie ^ a ' 13. icf>o/3ovvTO pur) ovKeTL tc 5 arparevpiaTi 4 yyoLro. 14. tov- TOV 9 TOL»9 pU(r6o6pOV 9 Tax ® V P'l'O’OoLTO, el TTOpeVOLVTO els ryv dpxyv. 15. etyoftelro pur) ef vTroyjrlas nroiolev avyKeara KaKa 5 tou9 ''FiWrjvas. 16. dXX* el tovtols TrpoafyiXws XPP' pteOa, ypuv evvoi dv elev. 17. el Be tls 6 9 Beairorys av KoXacretas, ex&v 7 ypas viryperas, 18. aol ovk dv tov puaOov eveKa piovov viTyper 01 ptev 8 aWa Kal rys X^P L ~ T09 , yv 9 (tol dv exoipiev BtKalcos . II. 1. I feared that they would depart to 10 the boats. 2. If we should ravage their land, the enemy would be frightened, 3. They feared that the citizens would be discouraged. 4. They sent a thousand soldiers, that the enemy might not give assist- 1 the captives. See p. 83 9 . 2 Cf. 256, I. 16. 8 Verbs of judicial action take a gen. expressing the crime. 4 Cf. 106, I. 10 . 6 See p. 31 2 and p. 94 2 . 6 Cf. 274, I. 4. For the accent, see 186 c. 7 See p. 104i<>. 8 Cf 256, I. 18. 9 which , acc. sing. fem. of the relative pron. 2s, 5J, 8 . 10 7rp6s with acc. AFFINITY OF WORDS. — READING LESSON. Ill ance. 5. But if we should be worsted, we should depart. 6. We should proceed homeward, unless somebody 1 molested us. 7. The barbarians feared that they would be besieged. 8. If we should be of service to the citizens, they would feel grateful to us. 9. But when Cyrus called (me), I proceeded, that I might be of service to him. 2 10. If we should try to be co-workers with these men, they would always love us. 312. VOCABULARY. d-0vjiew (0v/uSs), be discouraged , be dejected. alxpdXwros, -ov, taken in war, cap¬ tured. cLvrj k£ -ov, incurable, irrepara¬ ble. Bio-irdrijs, master, lord. c, follow upon or after, pursue. cvjtctws, adv., easily. £t]|uoo>, do damage to, punish. Xviret o, grieve, distress, annoy, molest. irpoor-<}>i\&5s ( (f>l\osj , adv., in a friendly way toward, kindly. evSovcui> (ff(p€vS6vi]j, use the sling, throw with a sling. raxa (rax^oos), adv., quickly, forth¬ with; in apodosis with &v, perhaps. Ttpwpew, avenge; mid. avenge one¬ self on, take vengeance on. ■uin]perr]s (cf. virypeTecoj, assistant, attendant. LESSON XLII. Affinity of Words.—Eeading Lesson. Give the meanings of the following words: — 313. WORD LIST. 9 9 gyCtfV* atxpaXwTOS dvTjK€$ * aBvvaTOS* aicoXovOlw* 9 9 A. avrjp* diroxwp&a * paXavos acC aicwv* arrrcvya) * apiOpo's PatriXeCd* a0vp«a>* «/ ap.a airas* dpxn * pcuriXiKo's * dBvpCa* apaxcC * tr aimju* d(TK€4> f3id£op.ai aUrxvvt] dficXws* d'lroKXctb) * dxr'ird^ofiai pOT]0€O) * atT€W av diroKcaXvw* d(r4>aXu>s PovXt] * at-rCa* dvSpctws* diroXvw* av\££ojiai ■ydp.cs atriaopai* avcv airotrirdo) * d4>vXaKT(i)s * ■yaa-Trip l Cf. I. 17 above. 2 avr6v, acc. sing. masc. 112 AFFINITY OF WORDS .— READING LESSON. Y i n KaTa-yw * ov84* pew * irapaxaXew * ev8ovaw * Sew (need) 4inp.eXeop.ai * Kpt0ivos * iras* arwpov£w Stjow 4iriOpK€W * KTCLOpCU * ‘iraTtjp xaxa* 8iaKor ^ €Tl* XifJLrjv 1U €V * XoiSopew irXovcios V|X£T£pOS * etpTjvr] CVVOIKWS * Xoiiros iroXepiw * « 9 nV virago) * cica/repwOev * evireTws Avxaios 1TO V6 W * VTTT]p€x4w * 4l«t* £r)p,io'w XviTCW iroviiptd* virrjpexrjs * 4KK\r](rCd* £r]T€W Mevwv TTOXC 4>o{3e'w * IkttoSwv ifyep.wv * R irpo * 4>otvi£ «KWV* ri'yeop.ai, * RV irpotrd'yw * 4>VW' 4Xev0epo'w * T]TTdop.ai K ,l i TT iP irpoiXws * \apUis * 'EXXas * 0appaX4ws MtXt]v- (TK£VOdpOS * (Iwrirep* 4vvoeop.a,i* KaXws * Xa|* eX4w Review 249. Associate each starred word in 313 with some other word or words of those given in 130, 194, 249, and 313, related to it in form and meaning. Review 140, 142. Read and translate again 143, 195, 250. Read and translate the following passage: — 314. Kupo?. IV. eVet 8e eroipLos rjv Kvpos 'iropeveaOcu aSeXcptov, ifceXeva-e tov? arparity ovs Trapelvat. real tov 9 M tXrjrov TroXiopKovvTas, /cal tov? » \ \ € 7 Tl TOV fca\€i 8e KoSo'|i.T](r6: aor. of oiKoZopiu, build .— eptivc: ip.siva, aor. of p4vw, remain. — 22. TpiaxovTa, thirty. 114 STEMS IN -/cpctT7js (2a)/cpaT6(r-) rb Kpeas ( Kpeao -) mountain Socrates meat S. N. opos 2(jJKpaTT]S Kpeas G. (ope-os) opovs (^.wKpdre-os) StoKparovs ( Kpea-os ) Kpeas D. (ope- 1 ) opei (Saj/cpare-t) ScoKparei (/epea-t) Kpe'a A. opos (Sw/cpcbe-a) SwKpaTT] Kpeas Y. opos Zmk pares Kpe'as D. N. A. V. (ope-e) opei (xp^a-e) Kpea G. D. (ope-oiv) opotv ( [icped-OLv ) Kpeuv P. N. A. V. (ope-a) opt) (/epea-a) Kpea G. ope-wv opwv (uped-cov) Kpewv D. if ope-o-t Kpe'a-cri Observe the application of the principles stated in 213 a, 2, 3, 5. But note (a) that neut. stems in -eo-- have -os for -es in the nom., acc., and voc. sing.; (b) that final -cr- of the stem falls away before all case- endings, and that vowels thus brought together are contracted (see 241, -e-e giving cl, but -a-a giving -a, not -a); and (c) that such substan¬ tives as ^(OKparrj s have recessive accent in the voc. STEMS IN -o’-: CONSONANT-DECLENSION. 115 317. Gender. — Neuter are all substantives whose stems end in -c\[ro adv., without , outside of beyond the reach of. €-o8os, 4 * 4 (eVt, odds), way to, ap¬ proach. Ktpas, -dros and -«s, horn , wing. Kopv<$>ij, top, summit. KprjTrfs, -t8os, foundation, base. ir«vTT]'KOVTa (ire'yre), indec., fifty. irXiflpov, a plethrum (100 Greek feet). iroiJs, iro8ds, o, 6 foot. irvpa|us, -C8os, pyramid. SirapTt] (c/. 27ra/3TiaT7js)> Sparta. Tio-tra Xvaa-ro) it € D. 2 Xv€-TOV Xvcra-Tov i'cr-rov 3 Xv€-TWV Xvara-Tcov tcr-Twv P.2 Xv€-T€ Xvaa-Tc if 6 KXeap^e, to arparevpia Bevpo. 4. p,rj 7roir)uj. 7. a/xa t fj rjptepa tov gkottov ire pity clvtcov eVt Ta opr]. 8. eaGaTco pie elvai kclKov T 6 /cal ayaOov. 9. purj /caTa^povtjarj^ tov ayyeXoo. 1 10. T^yaa? /ca/cco? pirj Troi^ar)*;, tov<; Kopoo (frtXovs. 11. pirj /caTdXvai y? 7rpo? too? clvtkttcktkotcls. 12. 7 re/x^are 77730 ? tov dppLOcrTrjv GTpaTrjyovs /cal Xo^ayoo? ical tmv aXAcov tovs e 7 nTr]$eiov< ?. 13. ElevocjrtoVTa 7rpo7repL'yjraT6 Tot? i7r7rot? 2 * eVt to CTTpaTevpia. 14. gv Be, w Eevocpwv, ava/cotvcoGov tw 6e

v\a/crjv. 16. eao 8e ooto? ootgo /ceXevGrj, TrapeGTe et? t^o ayopav. 17. ayeTe, or avBpes \o%dyoL, too? Xo^oo? op#too?, 4 too? /xeo 5 ev dptGTepa, 6 tov ? 8’ 6 eV Sefta. 6 18. /cat et? to pi6G0v 7 too GTpaTOTreBov too? ap^ooTa? ayeTe ‘ 7rapeGT(o B * r/pLLv 8 /cal ToX/xtS^? 0 /c?}po£. 19. Ilpo'feoo? 8e /cat Meoooo eVetVep elaiv vpieTepot /xeo evepyeTat, r/p,eTepot Be gt paTTjyoi, TrepLyfraTe aoTOo? Bevpo. II. 1. Send Xenophon with me. 2. Be well-disposed to the Greeks. 3. Send the messengers here. 4. Do not destroy the bridge. 5. Send men with me from the van. 9 6. But do you, 1 See p. 107 4 . 2 on horseback. See p. 25 6 . 8 See p. 83 10 . 4 in column. 6 ot fihv ... ot Se, some . . . others. 6 So we say on the left , on the right. The dat. of x € ' l P> X ei P^ s i * 7 ? hand , is understood. 7 Cf. 175, I. 6 . 8 Some verbs compounded with 7r p6s, 7 rapa, irep/, U7T<$, take a dat. depending on the prep. See p. 31 8 . 9 Use ari/xa. IMPERATIVE MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 119 fellow-soldiers, bring hoplites. 7. Do not make us foes 1 to the Greeks. 8. And let this be the watchword. 9. But send others upon the mountain. 10. Be friends and allies, soldiers, to Cyrus. 11. But do you, Xenophon, call the (two) Lace¬ daemonians. 12. Fellow 2 -soldiers, do not wonder that 3 I am grieved. VOCABULARY. 329. dva-Koivoco , 4 consult with, confer with. dpicrrcpo's, -a, -ov, left. lircC-irtp, 5 conj., since indeed. cv-epYcrris, -ov (ev, tpyovj, well-doer, benefactor. KaTa-\v«, loose or put down, un¬ yoke, make peace. KaTa-cJ>pov€ send forward, escort. ctkottos, o, scout, sentinel. ToXfuSrjs, -ov, Tolmides. LESSON XLY. Imperative Middle and Passive. 330. The tenses occurring in the imperative middle and passive are the present, aorist, and perfect. The aorist has distinct forms for the middle and passive. 331. The personal endings in the imperative middle and passive are Singular. Dual. Plural. 2 -v \v iropevov eirl to opos. 8. eZ? HLeppovrjaov /3la s 8td tov lepov opovs TTOpeveaOe. 9. crvdTpaTeveaOe rjpuv iirl too ? (Bapfia - poo?. 10. (jrp^eaQwv otttj Bvvcltov iaTtv. 11. KoXaaOevTwv 8e vvv dfjLCOS tt )? aSt/aa?. 4 12. aZcr^pwo ovv epycov 5 a7re^oo. 13. Ta 7 rXota pur) p,6Ta7repLylrr)o-0e. 14. \e\v(T0(o 6 rj yecfrvpa. 15. pLT) CLLTLCMTTJCrOe TOV apXOVTCL. 16. TOVTOV , ft) aoSpe?, TraieTe teal /Bidaaa-0e iropeveadai. 17. ev0vpii]07]Te otl ahrfXa TravTi dv0pd)7r(p TavTa ecrTtv. 18. Ta 8’ €7nT7]8ei dyopd^eo-06, /cal av(TK€va^ea0e. 19. eZ? tt)V eco 7 6 p par] a da 0 ovv airo tovv 1 See 327 and 276. 6 The perf. imv. expresses final- 2 Cf. 328, I. 18. 3 See p. 26 6 . ity, let it be destroyed once for all; 4 See p. 91 2 . literally, let it have been destroyed. 3 Cf 263, I. 14. 7 Cf 175, I. 9. CONTRACT VERBS IN THE IMPERATIVE. 121 T 779 UapwaTiSos /ccofjLwv. 20. 7rapairrjada6cov 01 (TTparrjyol /ecu 01 \o%ayol 7 repl toiv avhpolv. II. 1. Rest in the plain. 2. Put 1 this man out of the way. 3. Call a meeting, 2 Cyrus, of the citizens. 4. Desist, 3 therefore, from this war. 5. Proceed slowly, 4 soldiers, through the plain. 6. Summon, Cyrus, the general and the peltasts. 7. Welcome the soldiers, Xenophon. 8. Summon the generals and the cap¬ tains of the Greeks. 9. Let the citizens ransom their children with money. 5 10. Let the boys be well educated. 11. Proceed with me, fellow-soldiers, against Miletus. 12. Let the citizens be collected in the market-place. 334. VOCABULARY. ahrxpos, -a, -ov (cf. alaxvvri), shame¬ ful, disgraceful, base. d££a>s adv., worthily, fitly. {3ta (cf. BidCo/xai), force, violence. Sia<{>epovT(>>s, adv., pre-eminently. 4v-0vpcopai , 6 pass, dep., have in mind, reflect. oiqi (cf. onus), conjunctive adv., wherever, in whatever way. irap-aiTcopai (cuVeoo), beg, intercede. irapa-o-KT]V€« (aiaivri'), encamp near or by. Xpn'£«> want, need, desire. LESSON XLVI. Contract Verbs in the Imperative. Review 241-243. 335. PARADIGMS. Present Active. Present Middle and Passive. S. 2 Ttp,(d6)d Tlp(aoi>)<5 3 Tip(oe)d-Tw Tip,(ae)d-tr0a> D. 2 Tlp,(ae)d-Tov Tip.(ch)d-iX(eoi»)ov 3 cj>i\(ee)€£-TG> iX(ee)6£-o-0<«) D. 2 t\(ee)€i-TOV iX(ee)€t-i\(ee)€£-TWV (J>iX(ee)€£-cr0G>V P.2 lX(ee)€l-T€ iX(ee)6i-lX.(eiX(€e)€C-v 336. EXERCISES. I. 1. jjur] 7 ro\e/i6LT6 aBtrcov TToXe/jLov. 1 2. ToXfJLard) /cal 6 lBtcorr]<; 7ropeveaOai. 3. eo#o? rjyov nrpos TaTrLTrjheia . 2 4. ovtco , rroi6LT€, real crvcrKevaaacrde. 5. OappOVVTCOV oi ottXltcu . 6. dpLtXXacrOe, co avBpes, iirl to a/cpov. 7. /caXet too? Aa/ceScupLoviov ? Bevpo. 8. artyevBovdre, w avBpes, /cal To£eveT€. 9. too? apyov ? prjirore puaOovaOe . 10. rjyepiova (ILT6LT6, octo? 3 <£tX/a? tt}? %(t)pd<; aird^et. 11. ipcora Be avrovs t/oo? 4 eve/ca iarparevaav eV’ e/46. 12. rjyov, m Apa/covne , ottov rov Bpopov 7re7roir)Ka<;. 13. too? Se yepov- Ta?, co XevOrj, olkoi ea. 14. /47//C6T4 cnrcuTelre rov puaOov. 15. Kparec tcov ala^pcov imOupUMv. 5 16. tco Xo^aycp fiociTe ayeiv too? 07rXiTa? 67rt too? 7 roXe/ttoo?. 17. ?//4a? e’/e t^? ^copa? e’aTe to. eVon/Seta. e^etv. 18. yjpiqpara purj ktclgOcov oi ircuBes. 19. ?;/4a? too? Ko/joo <£/Xoo? /ca/ccos iroieiv pcrj 'ireipaaOw, 20. eZ? t?)o e« oppuacrOe e/c Xeppovrjaov. 21. /47/- /ceT4 <£o/3oo, &> KXea/r^e, //,?/ /cv/cXcoOfjs eKarepcoOev. 22. aXX’ 1 An acc. may repeat the idea already contained in the verb. This is called the cognate accusative, and may follow intransitive as well as transitive verba 2 See p. 55i 3 w/m, nom. sing. masc. of the general relative pron., for is, ^rts, 2 ^ 4 c/. 308, I. 2. 3 Seep. 907. CONTRACT VERBS IN THE IMPERATIVE. 123 vfjL 6 i$ [lev, w avBpe? (TTpaTrjyoL, tovtcov 1 67TLpLe\elcr0e t ol Be aWoi 7 ropeviaOcov. 23. purj aOUpbelre, w avBpes arTpancoTcu, on 1 2 rjpbLV piev ov k elal 3 ro^orat, Tot? Be iroXe^ion ? irdpetaiv. 24. oc7Tt9 4 * 6 67 nOvpbel, iretpcur 6(0 vhcav' ical Q ec Tt? 7 Be XprjpLaTcov 8 eTTidvpLel, KpaTelv ireLpa/jOw. II. 1. Ask Cyrus for boats. 9 2. Do not do this, Clearchus. 3. Always fear the gods. 4. Thus, therefore, Cyrus, make your levy. 5. Call the general from 10 the rear. 6. Conquer the hoplites with Clearchus. 7. Try to do well by 11 your friends. 8. Besiege the stronghold by land and by sea. 9. Let the general be honoured by the citizens. 10. Let Clearchus lead the right wing 12 and Menon the left. 11. Let him lead the heavy-armed men slowly to the camp. 12. Call out to the general to bring the army here. 13. Try, Seuthes, to be a helper to your friends. 14. Fellow-soldiers, do not give assistance to the satrap. 15. Confer, Xenophon, with Socrates, the Athenian, about your journey. VOCABULARY. 337. a-Sixos, -ov (S/ktj), unjust, wicked. dp.iWdop.cu, pass, dep., race, struggle. air-aiT&o, ask from, demand. ap-yo's, -ov , 13 not working, idle. ApaxoVrios, 6, Dracontius. Spo'pos, o, run, race, race-course. €iri- 0 vp£d , 14 desire. Xpjia, live. 6 app&a> (cf. QappaXcws'), be bold or courageous, take heart. t 8 iwTT]s, -ov, an ordinary or private person or soldier , private. KpaT€«, control, be superior, master, overcome. |xi]kIti {phi «Ti), no longer. IxtfiroTe (phi tot 4), not ever, never. 6'ttov (cf. far}, faces), conjunctive adv., wherever, where. To\p.dw, venture, dare, have the courage. 1 Cf. 305,1. 11. 2 because. 8 After ov the enclitic dal retains its accent. See also 188 c. 4 whoever. Cf. I. 10 above. 6 Contracted form of (deiv. 6 also, further. 7 See p. 90 8 . 8 Cf. 293, I. 15. 9 Cf. 293,1. 9. Cf. 247, I. 6 . 11 to tew, do well by. Cf. 247, I. 11. 12 Cf. 256, I. 1 . 18 Contracted from h-*py6s (tyyov). 14 Seep. 101 2 . 124 ABJECTIVE STEMS: CONSONANT-DECLENSION. LESSON XLYII. Adjective Stems in -v- and -ea- of the Oonsonant-Declension. Review 258. 338 . PARADIGMS. /xe\as (fie\av-) evtiaipwu (evdaipov-) 1 black fortunate M. F. N. M. F. N. S. N. jwXds |xeXaiva (jieXav cv8aC|X(dv cvSaipov G. (u'Xavos |icXaCvi]S plXavos ev8a(|xovo$ D. |xc\avi (icXaCvxi (jieXavi €vSa(|iovi A. pcXava peXaivav jxe'Xav tvSaljiova cvSaifioy V. jxe'Xav fjLe'Xaiva (leXav cvScupov D. N. A. V. IJLeXavc p.eXcuva fxeXavt cv8a(|M>v« G. D. (jteXavoiv fuXatvaiv (icXavoiv cvScupovoiv P. N. V. p.e'Xav£S (liXcuvai (icXava cvSatpoves cv8aCfxova G. [jLcXdvwv pcXcuvuv |uXdvv I). fieXatri fxeXaCvais jxeXap(ov, A high-minded , haughty, arrogant. 1 ev-Sa'i/uLwv (Saljucov), of good fate or fortune. 2 See p. 85 k 3 Root yvu, yvo, know. Cf. yv&fi-o, v6os (where y is lost, as in Lat. nosed), iv-voeu, eif-voos, cti-voia, ev-votKws, ko.k6-voos, vvofia, ‘ that by which one is known’ (cf. Lat. no- men). 4 Related to -a\rjavrjs, clearly seen, in plain sight, visible; opuaXrjs, level; rj? e^ovat tov$ 6eov$. 7. ecm ti? ovt©? a? ovv e/co\aaav oi Oeol tou? virepcfipovas toutou?. 10. eiriaTevov Be avTw oi aTpaTtcojat tt>? 9 eTrt/covprjpa t% ^toVo? 6 * 7 rpo rcov 6(j)0aXp(ov eiropevero. 18. rj tov *ApTa%ep%ov dpyr) TrXrjOei 7 pev %( 0 pd<; /cal dvOpcbircov ia^vpa rjv, tois Be prf/ceai tcov oBm v daOevrjs. 19. evTavOa eiyov iravTa tcl eiTiTrjBeia oaa 8 eanv ayaOd, iepeia, atTOV, o lvovs 'rraXaiovs evcoBet ?. II. 1. But the birds were black. 2. All were senseless. 3. But this 9 was true. 4. These are not ignorant. 5. The people 10 in this country were all blacks. 6. The Chersonese was a fair and flourishing 11 country. 7. Thence the Greeks proceeded to prosperous 11 villages. 8. The soldiers were not yet out of sight. 9. For it was not safe to be among 12 the trees. 10. It was already mid-day, 13 and the enemy were not yet visible. 11. There Cyrus had a palace, and a park full of wild beasts, which he used to hunt on horseback. 12. But there were also other villages in this plain, full of supplies, 14 along the river 15 Tigris. 1 Of. 263,1.11. 2 The gen. is used with adjs. ex¬ pressing power, as with verbs of ruling and leading (see p. 83 8 ). 8 The gen. is used with adjs. ex¬ pressing sensation or mental action, as with the corresponding verbs (see p. 63 8 ). 4 See 187 a. 6 something. Cf. 281,1. 1. 6 protection against the snow. The attributive gen. here expresses the object of the action. This is called the objective genitive. 7 Dative of respect , a species of the dat. of manner (see p. 26 6 ). 8 Cf. 263, I. 5. 9 Use the neut. plur. 10 Use the plur. of dvOponos. 11 Use ev8a'ifx.coy. 12 iu ; 13 pe0aXp,ds, o, eye. iraXaio's, -a, -o'v, ancient , old. iravTa-irao-i (ras), ady., all in all, altogether , wholly. TraTpwos, -a, -ov (irar^p), ancestral, hereditary. irXfiOos, -cos (c/. trk-fjp-qs), fulness, ese- ZenZ, number, multitude. o-to'Xos, o, armed force, expedition. Xi«v, -ovos, tj, 2 snow. LESSON XLYIII. Infinitive Active, Middle, and Passive, 345. The forms of the infinitive are as follows: — Present. PUTURE. First Aor. First Perf. Fut. Perf. Active. Middle. Passive. Xvciv Xdc-i\(e / €£i')€£v 8 tjX(o6iv)ovv Tip(ae)a-(r0at iX(e€)€i-r]-v t4>a-fwv 2 4>a-Tov 4>a-T€ c<|)Ti-o-0a or c4>t)-s «<|>a-TOV *4>a-TC 3 4>rj-a-Tov 4>curi e^a-njv <4>a-(rav a. The theme is a- (Latin fa-ri ), which is lengthened to in the sing. All the forms of the pres, indie, are enclitic, except Review 186, 187. 349. Subject of the Infinitive. Examine the following: — rj(rl K Xeapxov rjyeiaOai, he says that Clearchus is leading the way . Mcvcov i-mOv/icL 7 t\ovt€iv, Menon desires to be rich. rjarl KAeapyov yyctaOai, he says that Clearchus is leading the way. (frrjarl Kvpov Orjpevaaa, he says that Cyrus hunted. 1 See p. 108 *>. 2 See p. 83 7 . INFINITIVE ACTIVE , MIDDLE , P. 4 SSIFP. 129 KfXeva KXtapxov fjyeto-Oai, he orders Clearchus to lead the way. ri ovv KeXevo) dpas iroirjo-ai, what, then, do I hid you do f a. Observe that in all of the last four examples the inf. is the object of the principal verb, but that in the first two it represents the words of an original speaker and its tense corresponds in time to the same tense of the indie, (the speaker said: KAe'apyos rjyeiToa, K vpos eOrj- pevae ), whereas in the last two examples, where the inf. is the obj. of a simple verb of commanding, this distinction of tense does not exist, but both ffyeiaOcLL and 7 roLrjdaL refer to the future. This is the use of the pres, and aor. also in the subj., opt., and imv. See 267, 296, 321. Hence: — 354. Rule of Syntax. — The infinitive in indirect discourse * is used as the object of verbs of saying or thinking, or equiva¬ lent expressions. Each tense of the infinitive represents the corresponding tense of a finite mood. 355. Rule of Syntax. — The infinitive, when not in indirect discourse, may be used as the object of any verb whose action directly implies another action or state as its object. The present infinitive when thus used expresses continuance or repetition, the aorist the simple occurrence of the action. Observe sharply the force of the tenses of the infs, in the following exercises. 356. EXERCISES. I. 1. rd yctp eTnrrjBeLa ov/c ecrriv 1 e^eiv. 2. MiBdv rov 2 drvpov Qr)p£Vd(riv. 3. dW' avay/cy iarlv tjBtj 7 ropev- eaOcu, 4. erj yjprjpara KTrjaaarOai? 5. ol Be aWoi etpacrav j3ov\evv\a/crfv, co? Btavoehai rrjv ryetyvpav Xvaat T lao-acfrepvr)*; t?}? vvktos. 18. H evo(f)covTO<; Be /caTrjyoprjaav (fraowcovres 3 aBucr\0rjvai vtt avTov. 19. r/pco- T7)(T€ v 6 Kvpo? avrov , 'OpioXoyeh 4 ovv epte aBucelv ; II. 1. They said that Cyrus was loved 5 by the Greeks. 2. He said a Greek had been shot. 6 3. Try, Cyrus, to make use of these. 7 4. We, fellow-soldiers, must do this. 5. And they bid him keep the sheep safe. 6. Why should 8 we de¬ stroy the bridge? 7. I advise you to put this man out of the way. 8. They were trying to conquer the enemy. 9. But the general compelled the Greeks to proceed slowly. 10. I not only 9 struck the man, but also forced him to proceed. 11. He said that the Lacedaemonians were taking the field against Tissaphernes. 357. VOCABULARY. dvctyict] (cf. dvayndfa), necessity, con¬ straint. agioa (d|ioy), deem worthy , deem proper , demand. apa, interrogative particle ; joined with ov (dp ov) it implies the answer yes. 8ia-vo&>pai, 10 pass, dep., be minded, intend, purpose. M£8as, Midas. ‘irtjos, -if, -ov (ttovs), on foot ; dat. sing. fem. neCfi as adv., on foot. < ir\ouT€ft> (cf. irAovaios), be rich. SaTupos, o', the Satyr Silenus. 1 See 309. 2 For the const, after verbs of plenty and want, see p. 107 1 . When Seo/iai means request, it may take a gen. of the person and an acc. of the thing (here the inf.). 8 Pres. part, of cpdaKw, say, allege, tprjfil having no part, in Attic prose. 4 This verb takes the inf. in indi¬ rect discourse. 5 They said, K vpos s instead of -os, but this does not affect the accent. The gen. plur. follows the accent of the gen. sing. c. Most substantives in -vs retain -v- and are regular, like i;(0vs. d. Oxytones and perispomena with stems in -v- have v in the nom. acc. and voc. sing. 359. Gender. — Feminine are all substantives with stems in -t- with nominative in -is. Neuter are all those with stems in -i-, -V-, with nominative in -i, -v. 132 STEMS IN - 1 -, -v- : CONSONANT-DECLENSION. 360. Like 7t6\l? 7 irevTeKdlBeKd Tnj^eoov, 8 \6y%r)v Q eyov. 10. 77 KdTdfidaig rjv el? to ireBiov. 11 . iv Be ToS TpLTOp aTdOpLtZ K VpO$ i^eTd(TLV TTOieiTdl Tci)V 'RWijvoov Kdl tS)V fidpfidpeov iv rw 7 reBltp 7 repl p,e aaTpd7rrj, Tr)V Te K vpov Bvvd- fuv Kdl %dopav e%ei<; Kdl ttjv adVTov u dpyj)V crcdfet?, rj Be ’A pTd$jepi;ov Bvvapfa aoi avpp.d'xps 15 icrTiv. 1 Compounded of the prep, ava, up, and the root /3a which appears in Balra), go. So 5i d-Paais and Kard- f3aans. 2 according to. » Cf. 319, I. 12. 4 Predicate gen. of possession. 8 Cf 274,1. 4. 6 carried. 7 Cf. 319,1. 17. 8 cubits , a cubit being about the length of the fore-arm. 9 Here, point or spike. 10 Cf. 256,1. 4. ii Seep. 70 2 . 12 See 188b. “Seep. 281. 14 of yourself, gen. of the reflex¬ ive pron. 15 Here the adj. (tv/a-h ax os i ~ ov - The word given in 91 is the masc. of this, used as a subst. PARTIC1PLES ACTIVE. 133 II. 1. Tissaphernes plots against the cities. 2. There are fish in these rivers. 3. For Cyrus sent the tributes from the cities. 4. You have a city, you have money, you have men. 5. There was a road to the ford. 6. There Cyrus made a review and enumeration of the Greeks. 7. The spears and the ranks of the soldiers were in sight. 8. He collected his Greek force in the following manner. 9. The soldiers of Tissaphernes were withdrawing from the towns. 10. If you make use of the Greek force, you will easily conquer these barbarians. 362. VOCABULARY. Sopv, SopaT-os, to, spear. tviavTo's, o, a year. KaTavTiircpa*, adv., over against , opposite. Mcucpwv, -wvos, a Macronian. oIko~So|U» (oTkos ), 1 build, construct. iravrotos, -a, -ov (ir as), of all sorts. irevTC-Kat-ScKa, in dec., 15. HapScis, -ctov, plur., Sardis. Tpcts, THREE. rpCros, -tj, -ov (rpeis), third. Xpovos, o, time. LESSON L. Participles Active. 363. The forms of the participles in the active are: — Present. Future. First Aorist. First Perfect. Xvuv Xvcruv Xvo-ds XcXvkms a. For the declension of Avwv, see 262. Avow, about to loose, is declined in the same manner. 364. PARADIGMS. \iaas (AutrovT-), having loosed \e\vK(is (AeA u/cot-), having loosed M. F. N. M. F. N. S. N. V. Xvtras Xvcrdtra Xvcrav XcXvKtOS XcXvKvta XcXvko's G. Xvo-avros Xt>o-aiXcouaa, iX&>v, contracted <}>iX<5v, <(>iXoviXovv; 8i)Xoa>v, 8rjXoovv, SijXowra, SqXovv. Review 241, 242, 243. 367. The contracted forms are declined as follows: — M. p. N. M. F. N. S. N. V. TL|iWV Tifiwra TijltSv 4>iX(3v 4>iXoviXovv G. TlpLWVTOS rtfiwcnrjs TlJJLcSvTOS 4>iXovvtos lXov(TT]S 4>iXovvtos D. Tl|lWVTl Ti|i,o>o-fl TIJIWVTI iXovlXovVTl A. TIJlWVTa TijAokrav TIJJIMV (jnXovVTa iXoviXovv D.N.A.V. TlfJLWVTt Ti|iokrd TlflWVTC lXovVTC iXoviXovvtoiv <{uXovcrcuv tjnXovvTOiv P. N. V. tIjju3vt€s TLjj.w(rai TLfJUUVTa 4>iXovvtc$ cjuXovcai 4>iXovvra G. TljlwVTttV Tijxaxrwv TlJJlttfVTWV 4>iXovVT«V iXovvt«v D. TiflttMTl Tifjiwcrais Tifjiwo-i 4>iXovcri 4>oXovo-ais <}>iXov(ri A. rljjLwvras Tijitaards rln»vra 4>e,XovvTa5 4>c.XoviXovvTa a. Sr )Awv (contracted from SrjXooiv) is declined like iA IXei to v j3a(n\evovTa *ApTa$€p£r)v, she did not love Artaxerxes , who was king. irrl tov irorapov wopevovTca , om to cvpo5 7 roiovPTa iiraipelv, top Be aBucovPTa ou/c eiraipelp. II. 1. Parysatis loved Cyrus more than Artaxerxes, who was king. 2. He sent those who would rescue 5 the queen. 3. He courted those who were rich. 4. With the help of 8 the gods we will try to punish the wrong-doer. 7 5. But he called those also who were besieging Miletus. 6. Those who dwelt along 8 the sea were brave. 7. For /, Clearehus, am the one who bade the soldiers strike Dexippus. 8. Aristippus, the Thessalian, who was 9 guest-friend to Cyrus, asked (him) for pay. 10 9. Here there was a prosperous city, twenty para- sangs distant from the sea. 10. He says that this commander always punishes wrong-doers. 374. VOCABULARY. ' ApCromros, 0, Aristippus. d-TaKTCtt (c/. Talis), 11 be out of order. Sco-Sexa ( Svo , 5e/ca), twelve. eiraivtw, approve, commend , praise. eiriKovp&a, lend assistance. 0€tto\os, o, a Thessalian. 1 of themselves , gen. plur. of the reflexive pron. See p. 83 9 . 2 Here intransitively, be distant. » Seep. 63 2 . 4 See p. 25 2 . 6 See p. 24 4 . fiaKapuTTo's, -li, -ov, deemed happy , enviable. irapcurdyyT]s, -ov, parasang, Persian road-measure = about a league. TpujpiiSi *«®s, tj, war-vessel , trireme. Xa\os, o, the river Chalus. 6 aiv. 7 See 246, and cf. I. 16 above. 8 irapa with acc. 9 1.e. being. 10 Seep. 100 2 . 11 Seep. 61*. PARTICIPLES MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 137 LESSON LI. Participles Middle and Passive. 375. The forms of the participles in the mid. and pass, are: — Present. Future. First Aor. First Perf. Fut. Perf. Middle Passive \vo-fjuvo-s Xvo-pcvo-s Xiv Xll0£VTCOV D. XvOcuri XvGeCcrais Xv0£l(Tl A. XvOcvTas Xv0£(iX(eo)ov-fi€vo s, -tj, -ov; St]X(oo)ov-fjLcvo-^, -t], -ov. 138 PARTICIPLES MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 378. Uses of the Circumstantial Participle. Examine the following: — rovs fiapfiapovs vlK^aavre^s otKaSe iiropevovro, when they had con¬ quered the barbanans, they proceeded home. aBucrjOels airov err aura, I struck him because I had been wronged. €7 ropevovro tyjv ^uipav dp7rd£ovTe's, they advanced ravaging the country. Xy^opevoL £wori, they live by plundering. €7 TOpCVtTO €7Tl TYJV 7roA.IV TaS OTTOV^aS 7TOLTJ(r6p,€VOo? Btei iovo ?. 5. ecrTpareveTO Brj ovtco ? etja7raTrjdei<;. 6. vvv e%eC, prep., on both sides of: with gen., about , concerning; with acc., about. apicrraco (apiGTov) , breakfast. *EM/rjcriro vtos, 6 , the Hellespont. l|-aiT€w (atrea»), ask from, demand ; mid. beg off, save by entreaty. iir-ciTci (671-1, At oC), adv., there-upon, there-after , moreover. 0avaTOS, o (cf. 9ava.T6a)'), death. Koip.a |i£ 7 d\Xi jjieydXw rroXXw -iroXXrj iroXXw A. ixe-yav jj.e7dX.rjv jxeya rroXvv rroXXrjv rroXv V. (AC'ydXc jj.€-ydXr] jj-e^a D. N.A.V. fxeydXco jj,€*ydXd jxeydAco G.D. jj.€-yaXotv (xe-yaXcuv Ixe^aXoiv P. N.V. jjLe'ydXoi p.€7v [xeydAcov iroXXwv iroXXwv iroXXwv D. fj.e'yaXois jjie-ydXcus jj.e'yaXois rroXXois iroXXais iroXXois A. jic-yaXovs fie-yaXas jj-cyaXa iroXXovs rroXXas rroXXa 386. EXERCISES. I. 1. /cal 7 raw rjBv to f rrd)pa rjv. 2. rpa^vg yap rjv rfj (jxovf /3 K Xeap-^os, /cal e/co\a^ev del tV^zTptw?. 3. ivravOa rjv 7rapd8et(TO' ? irdvv p,eyas /cal /ca\o<;. 4. /cal 7 ro\t 6 l 3 o<; 7ro\v$ rjv. T. Kupco eTrepirev rj lAiXtacra % p/jpuara iroWa ei$ t ?/!' aTpandv. 8. /raTa , lie at anchor, be moored. opvKTo's, -if, -o'v, dug, artificial. irXeOpiaios, -a, -ov (i irXtdpov ), of a plethrum, a hundred feet. TroWaKis (tto\vs), adv., many times, often , frequently. irwpa, -aTos, drink. o-Kr]vew ( 0 -/C 77 V 77 ), encamp , be en¬ camped. v'Scop, 1 -aTos, to, water. <|>o>vii' (cf. s po-os ■ypd-ds V€-WS D. (BaaiXc-'i) pacriXei Po-t ypd-t VT]-'t A. PacriXt-d Pov-V ■ypav-v vav-v Y. Pao-iXev Pov ■ypat? vav 1). N. A.V. Pao-iXe-c pd-6 ■ypa-c VT)-€ G. D. PatriXc-oiv Po-OlV ■ypa-otv ve-oiv P. N. Y. (/IGcnAe-es) PacriXeis Po-es *ypa-€S VT]-€S G. PatriXc-wv Po-tSv ■ypa-tov V6-WV D. Pa 9 6 7 revTa/cocri- ov?. 12. TavT7]<; eve/ca Trjs nrapohov KO /009 Ta? vav$ pere- TrepLyjraro. 13. rjaav 8’ avroi? l/cavol /36e$ anroOvaai to> A il too crwrrjpL. 14. Kal 7 rapa peyaXov ftaaiXecos rrraprjv T icrcTa$epv'Y)<$ Kal 6 rr)^ /3acnXeco<; yvvatKos dheX^o^^ Kal aXXoi II epaai rpel<;. 15. rjyelro he Tbs ttjs yvvaucbs $a- crtAeoos. 8 said, third sing, of the second aor. ehrov, I said , inflected like the impf. DIPHTHONG STEMS: CONSONANT-DECLENSION. 145 *E Xkrjvcov ep/irjvev ? e(j)rj tov Ticrcraffiepvovs aSe\(f)bv &vv T 0 Z 9 TLepacus elvat. 19. ivravOa 0 ©paf e^cov lirirea 9 &>9 Tpia- kovtcl rjvTopLoXrjo-e 777)09 ^aat\ed. 20. el 8e Tt9 vpioiv adv/xel otl r)puv p,ev ovrc elcrlv imrels, Tot9 Se 7roXe/xiot9 7 roXkol irapeiGiv , ivOvpLr/drjTe on ol pvpioi t7T7ret9 ooSei/ 1 aXXo ^ pLvpiol eicnv dvOpcovroi. II. 1. The ships lay at anchor by 2 the tent of Cyrus. 2. It was evident that the 3 king was near. 3. He sent the inter¬ preter to 2 the generals of the Greeks. 4. The expedition 4 will be against the great king. 5. Chirisophus also, a Lacedae¬ monian, was on board 5 the ships. 6. Let us plunder the king’s country. 7. The horsemen often hunted these wild animals. 8. For Cyrus sent to the king the tributes from the cities. 9. They asked the village-chief 6 for sheep and goats and cattle and asses. 10. And Xenophon through an interpreter de¬ manded back the horses. 11. There is a fortified palace of the great king in Celaenae at the sources of the river Marsyas. VOCABULARY. 392. dv-cpwTao), 7 ask, inquire of, question. dvTi-Trapa-(TK€vd£o|icu, prepare one¬ self in turn. airo-0€u), sacrifice in payment of a vow, offer a votive sacrifice. avTopoX&a, desert. yuvr], ij, 8 woman, wife. fK-yovos, -ov, born or sprung from ; in-yovov, as subst., offspring. ?roipos, -ov, or -rj, -ov, ready , pre¬ pared. Zeus, o*, 9 Zeus, highest of the gods. dir\££<«> (ottAov)* arm. ILXo'iro'vviio-os, tj (cf. U.€\OTrovvi]ffios ) Peloponnesus. irepo*££<0 (lie par]s'), speak Persian, irepo-urri (ireperl((a), adv., in Persian. Tropica), furnish, provide. (TTpaTO-ircSeuw ( en¬ camp. vewc 6 s, ywouA, yvvaiKa, yvvai J dual, yvvouKs, yvvaiKoiv J plur., yvvaines , yvvaiK&v, yvvaij-l, yvvcuKas. 9 Irregularly declined: Zeus, Aids, All, Ala, Zeu. I 146 AFFINITY OF WORDS. — READING LESSON. LESSON LIT. Affinity of Words. — Reading Lesson. Give the meaning of the following words : — 393. WORD DIST. dy Voitov * Pa0os * eireiTa * Kopvrj lraxalo '9 aSixos * {3a0vs * e’m0vp.£a* Kpavo9 TravTairao-i * ato-xpo's * Pao-iXcv's * eViKOvpew * KpaTe'co * iravroto9 * aKpoiroXts * pc'Xos emKOvpT]p.a* Kpeas irapay to * aXt]©^ * p£a* €pp.T]V6VS * Kpr]irt9 irapaiTeop.ai * aXXws * Povs €TOip.OS Xr(£op.ai * ■jrapao-ayyTjg dp.iXXdop.ai ■ypavs * ev8aip,<«)v* XC0O9 ‘irapao’KTjveo ) 4 dp.(ju ywri evepyeTTjs * Xo'xo9 * irarpuo9 * dvdpatris * Sao’vs evpos p.aKapicTT09 o8os* pe'yas * HeXoirdvvTj- dvcptoTato * 8iatj>€povT«s £aa> p.eye0O9 * o- 09 * dvTi7rapao"K€u- So'pv Zeds p.e'Xa9 irevTeKaCSe* a£op.ai * ApaKo'vnos tjSvs * p.TJK€Tl* Ka* d£u)to* Spo'p .09 ijp.£Pp * vav9 * 7rXe0piaio9 * ap^os * ei'Koo-i ©eTTaXos VVKTttp * irX40pov * apuTTaa) * tl€ios Ix^s oXKa9 irX 0 VT€ft> * dpTOs 'EXXrjo’irov- KaTaPao -19 * dp.aXT]9 TT0'Xl9 * ao-0€Vris TOS KaTaXvw * tt vU OITT) * iroXXaKi9* d(TTV ev0vp.6op.ai * KaTavTiire- omorOev * iroXv9 * daXrjs * eviavro's pa9 OTTX££tO* iropefa* draKT€(o * e|aiT€a) * KaTaavrj9 oirov * iropi^a) avTo'01 e^eo-rt * Karapove«* opp.6a> 1T0V9 * avrop.oXea) e|eTao-is K6pa9 opo9 irpo'PaTov d$avT]9 6^(0 * Kiveco dpVKT09 ‘irpo'ire'p.irw * acfjpwv * eVaivea) Koipaco OVITtt * irpoo-KW^eo a\|/£v0iov eiretrrep* KoXoa-oraC o4>0aXp.o9 irvpap.(9 AFFINITY OF WORDS.—READING LESSON. 147 trufia (TToXoS tcXos rpirjprjs T]|Xl * SapSas crTpaTO'ircSevw * Tur€pvT]S TptTOS * tjjwvrj * SaTvpos ScuKparrjs ToXpdb) v'Stop XaXos r|s pa>v * Tpaxvs VTr€p<|>p<«)V * oncoiro's to£is * Tpcts * V\|/T]Xo's * xpii \t°> SirapTT] * Tti\OS TpiClKOVTa * Vlj/os * Xpo'vos Review 313. Associate each starred word in 393 with some other word or words of those given in 130, 194, 249, 313, and 393, related to it in form and meaning. Review 140, 142. Read and translate again 143, 195, 250, 314. Read and translate the following passage : — • 394. KGpos. V. ivrevOev etjeXavvei araOpiovs 67 rra rrapacrdyyds irevTrjKOVTa /cal Bvo 6t? 7 toXlv ol/covfxevijv. evravOa /cvelrai 7 rapa K vpov r) rod JZiXlkcov ftacriXecos yvvrj, /cal avT(p eBco/ce %pijpbara 7roXXa. rfj Be arpana rore arreBco/ce 5 Kopo9 puaOov rerrapcov pLrjvcov. eZ^e Be rj J^iXto-aa /cal < pvXa/ca rcbv 'FjXXtjvcov /cal rcbv /3apf3dpcov. eZ^e Be to p,ev Be^iov rcbv 'EXXrjvcov Alevcov /cal 01 avv avrcp, to Be evdbvvpiov KXea/ 0^09 /cal 01 e/cetvov , to Be piiaov oi aXXoc arparrjyoi. eOecopei ovv 6 Kopo 9 7 rpbbrov puev rov 9 /3ap/3dpov 9 , etra 15 Be too9 ''FiXXrjvas. el%ov Be iravres /cpdvr] y^aX/cd /cal darriBas. h ret Se rrdvra 9 eOecbpijae, irep'^rd^ eppbrjvea 7 rapa TO09 arparrjyov 9 rcbv E XXrjvcov e/ceXevaev eTu^co- prjcrai oXrjv rr\v (paXayya. rcbv Be /3ap/3dpwv (po/3os 7roXo9 rjv /cal rj re K iXicraa ecpvyev inrl rf}? appiapba^r]^ 148 AFFINITY OF WORDS. — READING LESSON. 20 /cal ol ev rfj ayopa ecf)vyov • ol Be ^EXX^e? avv yekcon 67rl to? (r/crjvas rfxOov. r\ Se K/Xtcrcra. rrjv XapLTrporrjra /cal Tvyv Ta%LV rod arparevpiaro ? eOavpLaaev . evrevOev ei^eXavvei Bid rrjs Qpvylds /cal rrjs A v/caovlas araOpiovs o/croo rrapaadyyds rrevrrj/covra. rrjv Be A v/cao- 25 vlav Birjprraaav ol "EWrjves go? i roXepulav ovaav. evrevOev K vpos rrjv ElXicraav els rrjv K iXirclav anrorrepurei • /cal (rvve7repiyjrev avrfj Mevcova /cal rovs e/celvov. K vpos Be pLera rwv aXXcov e^eXavvei Bid EamraBo/clas araOpiovs rerrapas irapauayyas ei/coai /cal rrevre 77730 ? A dva, 7 roXiv 30 oi/covpievrjv, pieydXrjv /cal evBalpiova. NOTES. 1. eirra, seven. — 2. atjuKveiTCu: cupucveoficu, arrive. — 4. dir>cSa>Kc: air6 in composition often signifies what is due. — 5. T€TTv: gen. plur. masc. — 6. cfuTrjv, herself\ acc. sing. fem. of the reflexive pron.—’Ao-irevSiovs, Aspendians. — 7. Review 141, 2.—9. Kvpov: cf. 356, I. 11. —12. 01 trvv avTw, those with him. See p. 83 9 and cf. ol itceivov, ol £v ry ayopi, in lines 13 and 20. —14. irpwTov : acc. sing. neut. used adverbially. —16. do-ir£8as : aair'is, -180s, a shield. — 17. tmxb>pT]o/3e-p6s, fearful, from <£o/3o-s, fear. e. The final vowel of a verb-theme may be lengthened before a con¬ sonant, as d£uo-p,a, dignity, from d£io-a>, think worthy ; Trolr)-\p (stem kXutt-), thief, from the root kActt (399), steal ; , guard. 403. Many substantives are formed with the suffixes : — -o- (nom. -o-s, masc. or fern., or -o-v, neut.) and -a- (nom. -a or -rj, fern.). Thus: — Aoy-o-s, word, root Aey (399), speak. - (, save). -rwp (nom. -rwp, masc.), as pri-rwp (399), orator, theme ep-, pe- (ep-u, I shall say). -to- (nom. -tt)-s, masc.), as a pa-T-fi-s (401 a), 1 robber, theme Aj?5- (a?/- £oyai , plunder) ; to^o-tti-s, bowman, stem ro £ o - (t6^o-v, bow). 405. The action is expressed (in primitives only) by the suffixes: — -Ti- (nom. -tl-s, fern.), as vla-n-s (401 a), 1 faith, root vid (veld-a, per¬ suade). -o-i- (nom. - justice, stem Sikcuo- (Sisaio-s, just). -id- (nom. -id, fem.), as iAevOep-ia (401 c), freedom, stem eA eu6epo- (e’A evdepo-s, free). -€, judge). LESSON LYI. Formation of Words (continued). Formation of Adjectives. 411. The following are the commonest suffixes forming primi¬ tives : — -v- (nom. -v-s, -€La, -v), as nti-v-s, sweet , root a5 (399), sweet. -€), as x a P l ' ei ' s t graceful, Stem x a P lT ~> X a P l ~ (xapt-s, grace). 416. The following suffixes cannot be so distinctly classified as those given above : — -o- (nom. -o-s, -a or -rj, -o-v, or -o-s, -o-v), as Aonr-6-s (399), remaining, root Ait, leave. -ijxo- (nom. -ipLo-s, etc.), as aAic-ipo-s (401 c), valiant , stem oA/cd- ( aAK-f] , prowess). -, frighten, stem (po/3o - ( (poQo-s, fear ) ; Kpare-u, be master of, stem Kparea- ( updros, power). -o-o), as 5 ov\6-u, enslave, stem SovAo- (5oCAo-s, slave) j £Aev9ep6-u, free , stem cA evOepo- ( iAevdepo-s, free). -6v-o), as PacriAev-w, be king, stem fiaaiAev- (/3acnAeu-s, king) ; /3ouAeu-a>, plan, stem BovAd- (QovAt), plan). -a£o) (for -a5-ta>), as avayKafa, compel, Stem avayKa- (avaynr), necessity )', ipyd(ofj.ai, work, stem epyo- (fpyo-v, work). -ijo) (for -id-ioo), as nepaifa, speak Persian, stem Uepad- (nlpan-s, Per¬ sian) ; iAiTLfa, hope, stem eA7rt8- (e’A? ri-s, hope). -aivo) (for -av-u*}), as ff7nj.alva, signify, stem crri/xar- ( ar)p.a, sign)', %aA€- Traivw, be angry, stem xaAe7ro- (xaAe7r 6-s, severe). -vvpo- 7 roios, lyre-maker (-7rotos, maker, is not used separately). 426. The initial vowel of the last part of a compound noun may be lengthened, e.g. a, e, or o may respectively become rj or d, rj, or o>, as crrpaT-^yds, general (ayos, leader) ; Ao^-ayos, captain (Ao^os, com¬ pany)', KaT-rjyopos, accuser (Kara, against, and ayopevo), speak,)', €7r- wvvpos, named for ( ovopa, name). 427. When a noun stands as the last part of a compound, its final syllable is often changed, as <£iAo-Ttp,o5, honour-loving (rZp.r}) ; epb), bear, fero ; KaXico, haul, calo ; yivos ( race ), kin, genus; xnv, goose, anser ; p-ti't^p, mother, mater; Se'ica, ten, decern ; 0vpd, door, foris, etc. We thus discover a second important guiding principle, to be added to the direction given in 137 : — 434. hi acquiring a Greek vocabulary , associate with the Greek words that belong together in a group the related Latin and English words. The bearing and importance of the directions given in 137 and 434 will be made clearer by an inspection of the following typical group. Analyze the Greek words in the group, referring to Lessons LY. and LVI., and point out the case-ending (47, 212) or personal-ending (154), the suffix, the stem, and the preceding stem, theme, or root on which it is formed, noting carefully changes of form (399, 400, 401). In denominative verbs (417) it will be sufficient to point out the end¬ ing and the preceding stem. In compounds, name first the parts that compose the word. Many suffixes will occur in the groups in the following Lessons which are not given in Lessons LV. and LVI. The number of suffixes both in Greek and in Latin is very great, and the brief lists in Lessons LY. and LVI. give only the most important. The meaning of suffixes, moreover, sometimes shifts; and the distinction of suffixes as forming primitives or denominatives (397) is often not applicable. The facts, however, stated in Lessons LY. and LVI. generally hold good, and these Lessons exemplify the proper method of analysis. Simple (396) Greek words printed in black-face letter are generally formed on a stem derived directly from a root or from an ultimate theme. But simple words which are formed ou a stem derived from a stem that either appears in some preceding word or may easily be assumed, and compounds, are generally printed in light-face letter. This distinction is not made in case of the Latin words. 2 1 The following law holds for mutes: tt and will generally ap¬ pear in English respectively as f and b ; k, y, and x, as h, k, and g ; and t, 5, and 6, as th, t, and d, hut there are many exceptions. 2 Only the most important Latin words are given. For a more ex- WORD—GROUPING. 157 Compound verbs are omitted, unless important for the develop¬ ment of the group. "Many other words are omitted, because their connexion with the group in each case is obvious. Matters of especial difficulty are explained in the note that follows the group. 435. R. ay, ag, drive, lead, weigh. ay-o), drive , lead , bring, carry, weigh; ay-cov, -uv-os, o, a bringing to¬ gether, esp. to witness a contest, hence, contest, games; uywvl(o-p.ai, con¬ tend; ay-po-s, 6, field (place where flocks are driven); dyp-io-s, -a, - o-v, ranging the fields, wild; dy-o'-s, 6, leader; arpur-nyo-s, 6, general; , think worthy ; d^Loo-fia, -ar-os, to, dignity ; a^io-cTTpaTriyo-s, -o-v, worthy to command. ag-o, move, lead, drive ; cogo ( co-ig-o), drive together, part, co-ac-tu-s ; rem-ex, -ig-is, m., rower (‘oar-driver’); ac-tu-s, -us, m., impulse, act; ag-men, -in-is, n., train, army on the march; ag-er, -gri, m., field; ag- ili-s, -e, ad)., easily movable, quick; ax-i-s, -is, m., axis. acre, acorn, axle ; agony, eni-agonist, s£ra£-agem, esc-egesis, par- agogic, dem- agogue, ped- agogue, syn-agogue, axiom. Note. — nye-o-p-ai shows the same lengthening of the stem ayo- that appears in arpar-vyb-s, etc. The rough breathing is irregular. — The root appears reduplicated (399) in dycvy-ij, etc., and increased (400) in &£-wv, etc. (ay+ cicXcio-a KtKXeifJicuor k4kX€io-|acu ckXcCctOtjv KfXevco, order, KeXcvcrco ciccXeucra kck^Xcuko. K6K€X€ucr(Jiat €K€Xevtr0T]v 442. In other vowel verbs the final vowel of the theme remains short in some of the forms, but is lengthened in the others. Thus: — 8€ drop 0 - in the fut. and contract. Thus reAeW, reAe'-eo, reAcD. The fut. has thus the same form as the present. 4 Used mostly in compounds, esp. lir-aivew, bestow praise on, applaud. 160 VERBS: PRESENT SYSTEM; FIRST CLASS. 443. EXERCISES. I. 1. Hev/a? ra Av/cata eOvae. 2. dvoroptev Be fiovs. 3. /ca- A-ecra? Trape/ceXeveTO toc? ''FiXXrjcn 1 TropevecrOai. 4. K vpos Be avy/caXeads 2 tov$ arpaTLcords Xeyet wBe. 5. tmv Be crvvov- tco z / 3 TravTcov del /caTeyeXa . 6 . /cal rou? aX^09 &e ey eXacre /cal elirev^ 'AXXa Xeyets, co veavta/ce, 11 ovre a^apzcrra. 12 18. rfptets evt/ediptev fiacnXed eirl ral$ dvpats avrov /cal /carayeXacravre 9 ainqX- OopLev. 1 ^ 19. fl\\’ oyae »9 0 KXeap ^09 ou/c direcnraaev airo tov TTOT apLOv to Be^tov /cepas. 20. toz/ /aez/ /caXcb 9 irotovvTa eizat- vovptev, top 3’ aBucovvTa ov/c eiratvovptev. II. 1. He drew his 14 sword. 2. And they bound the guide. 3. Tow will applaud me. 4. But his 15 father called Cyrus. 1 For the case, cf. 256,1. 13. 2 Before a palatal (114), v be¬ comes 7 nasal (p. 2 s ). For the force of the prep, in composition, cf. at/iiras (264). 3 ovtuv is gen. plur. of the parti¬ ciple &v. . 6 where. 6 Note the two parts of the word. So arise the meanings, 1) unyoke the baggage-cattle, i.e. halt , and 2) make peace, in sentence 13 below. 7 Kanos and epyov. Cf. avv-epyos (285). 8 Seep. 83 3 . 9 The meaning of 8exop.ai can be inferred from the context. 10 eiirov, said, a second aor. 11 Cf veaviGKos with veavias. 12 a-xapiGTOs , -ov, cf. x“/ns> °-X a P l ‘ (TTOOS. 13 't]\Qov, went, a second aor. 14 See 197. ™ Seep. 23 3 . COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 161 5. The army halted for 1 breakfast. 6. We shall call the sol¬ diers together there. 7. And he ordered the exiles to take the field with Clearchus. 8. And they completed their jour¬ ney and halted. 9. The other soldiers applauded Clearchus. 10. Xenophon will intercept the cavalry. 11. This man will laugh at his opponents. 12. When he had offered sacrifice, he called the soldiers together. From this point groups of related words are substituted for the special vocabularies. Make a careful study of these groups, analyzing the words according to the principles stated in Lesson LYII. Then commit all the Greek words to memory. 444. E. ti, pay. t£-o>, pay, value , honour; ti-v-w, pay for, mid. make pay for (197 a), punish; ano-rlv-w, pay back, mid. make pay back, punish ; ys, value, worth, price, honour, esteem ; d-ripo-s, -o-v, without honour, dishonoured; aTipafa, dishonour; e v-Tipo-s, -o-v, in honour, honoured; ivripws, adv., in honour; pe-w, help, avenge, mid. avenge oneself on, take vengeance on. timo-cracy. Note. — The meaning of the root, pay, branches in two directions: 1) set a price on, value, honour; 2) pay a price for, pay a penalty .— ri/iwp6-s is for Tipa-fopo-s, 2 the stem fopo- carrying the idea of watchful. Cf. 6pd-w, see. LESSON LIX. Comparison of Adjectives. 445. There are three degrees of comparison of adjectives in Greek, as in Latin and in English. 1 irpbs with acc. 2 The oldest Greek alphabet had a letter f, called digamma, Siyappa (double gamma), from its form, equal to Latin u consonantal, Eng¬ lish w. This letter was lost, but traces of it appear in many Greek words. 162 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. Positive. Comparative. Superlative. SIkcuos ( Sikcuo-'), just, iaxvpSs (lo-xvpo-), strong, TTKTTOS (7TWTO-) , faithful, 7 roXefuos ( 7 ToXe/iLO-'), hostile, a T]8lov Y. ti'Slov D. N. A. V. ijStov-e G. D. tjSldvoiv P. N. V. T]8tov-€$ } rjSiovs TjStov-a, rjStci) G. ijSldv-wv D. T]8to) at the end of the theme unites with x&> ( a PX’)> begin., rule, ap|«, vp£ a ' 459. A lingual mute (r, 8, 0) before cr is dropped (231). Thus: — (, eo7reucra ; nepda (irepd-'), destroy, iripaw, enepaa. All of the verbs cited above belong to the first class (440). Conjugate the fut. and first aor. systems of any one of these verbs. 460. Some labial mute verbs form the present stem by add- ing -T°/e- as tense-suffix to the theme. Theme. Pres. Stem. Fut. First Aor. kXsittoo, steal, K\eir- /cAe7TT°/ e- KXeif/o) eK\e\pa KOTTTU), cut, KOTT- KOTTT°/e- KOXpCO €KOlpd c TKeirropLai , View, ej3\a\f/a KaXvTTTcc, cover, /caAu/3- KaXvTTT 0 /e- KaXvif/cv e/cdXvif/a dawTca, bury, Td(p- 6 m tt 0 / e- 6d\f/(D edaif/a KpinrTU), hide, KpV(p- Kpvirr 0 /e- Kpvxf/cc e/tpvipa piiTTw, throw, P l( P~ plTTT°J 6- piif/co epphpa 1 2 * * a. The final labial of the theme becomes coordinate (114 a), /? and c f !> changing to n before r of the tense-suffix -T°/ e ., as (iXair-Toi for /3\.a/3-T(i), koAvtt-to) for kolXv/3-to), Odir-Toi for Tacf>-T<±>, s Kpxnr-T(n for Kpv/3-T(D, pilT-TOi for pl(f}-T CO. 461. These verbs belong to the Tau or Third Class. 462. EXERCISES. I. 1. r/p^aro^ to GTpdrevfjLa iropeveaOai. 2 . too? Xirirov^ iraVTa ? e/cXetjopuev. 3. ol Be Btoo^avre^ ra^v 5 eiravovro . eirepLyfre pie ’Apiaios, n tigto? mv K vpco /cal vpuv evvovs. 5. tov 9 Be avBpas e/ceXevov Oayjrat. 6 . rjXtov Be vecpeXrj e/cdXv^jrev. 7. toutou? too? avBpa ? cf/rjcrl /cXe^ac 6 ra XPT 1 In the sense of gather, used by Attic writers only in compounds, as iK-\eyca, pick out, select. 2 initial p is doubled when, by inflexion or composition, a simple vowel is brought before it. 8 Transfer of aspiration. See p. 1621. 4 See 198. 6 Neut. of the adj. used adver¬ bially. e Cf. 356, I. 2. MUTE VERBS; VERBS OF THIRD CLASS. 167 ptara. 8. ol ^EXX^e? rats pLa^alpat^ 1 e/cotyav ra yeppa. 9. ra 8e aXXa els rov rrorapdov piyjrcopiev. 10. K vpos ea7T6V(T6 rrdcrav rr)V o8ov /cal ov 8terplyf/ev. 2 11. cruXXefd? 3 crrpdrevpba erroXtop/cet M iXrjrov /cal Kara yrjv /cal Kara 6a- Xarrav. 12. ovroi ov fiXa-^rovatv rjpud^ Tropevopbevovs. 18. ra xp/jpuara, w vedvlcr/ce, per) /cXei/r^?. 4 14. /cal ovk eerri 5 6 7 ropevecrOai, el per) rovrovs diro/cbylropbev. 8 15. 8ta- /coyfrao 8e ov paSiov 7 ear at rov 9 Xo^ou?. 16. r) ^tcov arre- Kpvyjre /caX ra orrXa /cal tol »9 dvOpcoirov^. 17. ev6a 8r) K vpo<; e8eiae pirj fiaaiXevs /cara/coyjrp ro ' EjXXrjvi/cov. 18. dXXa 8tarpt\jrco, bva o/3cbvraL ol dyyeXot per] ov 8 Ta? ( 77 rov8d<; 7TOb7]ad>pbe6a. 19. ire pity d$ rov ep/irjvea irapd rov<$ cTrparrjyov 5 e/ceXevae TropevecrOai. 20. /cal 7 rapa rrjv yeepv- pav rov T Lyprjros irorapbov Trepb^ai /ceXevovat cf.wXa/c/jv . 21. e8lo)/ce pbev aevocjicbv airo rr/s pii-Tir)-s (404), cf. Kwprj. 11 See 379, and cf the fifth exam¬ ple in 378. 12 reAevra-io-s, -a, -o-v , from the stem of the subst. reAevr 77 . For the meaning, cf re A os (318), reAevrd-a (257). 13 eK-KtS-ITTCi). 14 irapd with acc. N 168 MUTE VERBS; VERBS OF FOURTH CLASS. boy bid 1 this. 10. He orders them to find out 2 what the hin¬ drance 3 is. 11. To beat off 4 the enemy was a necessity. 12. The army will slaughter 5 the oxen and asses. 13. He col¬ lected an army by means of 6 the money. 463. R. apx, be first. apx-w, be first, — in point of time, begin, in point of station, rule ; part, as subst., apx^v, -ovt-os, 6, ruler; vn-apx-u, be a foundation or beginning ; dpx-ip -vs, beginning, rule ; apxa-'io-s, -a, -o-v, from the beginning, ancient, old ; apx-iic6-s, - 77 , -6-v,fit for rule; apx-o-s, < 5 , leader; vn-apxo-s, 6, subordi¬ nate commander, lieutenant; av-apxo-s, -o-v, without leaders; avapx-la, -as, lack of leaders, anarchy ; ’lnn-apxo-s, 6 (' hmo-s, 6, h, horse), commander of the horse; p.ov-apxo-s, 6 (p.6vo-s, alone), one who rules alone; povapx-id, -as, monarchy ; vav-apxo-s, 6 ( vav-s, h, ship), admiral; vavapxe-w, be admi¬ ral; ne'id-apxo-s, -o-v (ne'16-o-p.ai, obey), obedient to authority; nei9apxe-&, obey ; noAv-apx-la, -as (ttoAv-s, much, many), government of many ; (ppovp- a PX°-s, o ((ppovpo-s, 6, garrison-soldier), commander of a garrison; nup.- apxv-s, -ov (kco/u-ti, village), village-chief. archaic, archaeo -logy, archives, arch-angel, arch -bishop, archi- episcopal, arch e-type, an- archy, hier- archy, tetr-aichy, etc. LESSON LXI. Future and First Aorist Systems of Mute Verbs (continued). — Mute Verbs of the Fourth Class. 464. Many palatal mute verbs form the present stem by adding -t°/ e . to the theme, k or ^ unites with the i of this present tense-suffix, forming with it rr. y unites with the t, forming generally tt, sometimes £. Thus : — Theme. Pres. Stem. Fut. First Aor. KrjpliTTot, proclaim, KnpVK- KnpVTT 0 / e- Krjpv^co iK-fipv^a (pvAaTTw, guard, (pvXaK- (pvXaTT 0 / e- (puAa^co ecpvAal-a TapaTTw, disturb, rapax- raparr 0 / e - rapa^co irapa^a aWarTcc, change, aXXay- aXXaTT 0 / e - aXXd^co ijXXa^a ■tTpaTTw, do, 7r pay- irpaTT 0 / e- irpa^tti 67rpa|a tAttw, arrange, ray - rarr 0 / e - ra^ca erafa aAaAdCw, raise the war-cry, aXaXay- aXaXa£ 0 / e - aAaAd£op.ai 7 ^AaAo^a 1 Cf 356, I. 2. 2 i Be Bddpa KOpo? eXeyero irepuylraL 5 pLeyaXoirpeird)?.- 10. to Be e^co 6 Tet^o? fiacnXecos (fovXa/crj cf)v\d^ei. 11. tlvl 7 av 6ed)V Ovcov 8 /cal ev^o/ievo? 8 /caXd/s Trpd^as acoOelrjV ; 12. e/ceXevae Be tovs crTparrjyovs awra^ai too? ''JZXXrjva?. 13. rjXaXa^av ol "FiXXrjves 7re\- raaTal. 14. eycb OeXco, w avBpes, Biaftifidcrai vpias, av ipiol rdXavrov puaOov iropLcrrjre. 15. o 8 * 'Opovras, vopilaa^ eroi- piov 9 elvai b tov 9 t7r7re«9> 7 packet e7riGToXr)V 7 rapa fiacrLXed. 16. 7rw9 av ovv eycb /3tacrai'pLi]v 9 vpua<; crvv epuol erra/coXov- 1 See p. 83 8 . 2 Verbs in -ifa with themes in -18- make their fut. in -1 ea> instead of (ra), and contract. So vop.i-iu>, vojxict). This is called the Attic Fu¬ ture. 8 See p. 71 2 . 4 Cf. 343, I. 17. s See 354. 8 Cf. 228, I. 3. 7 Dat. sing. masc. of the inter¬ rogative rls. Cf. 308, I. 2. 8 See p. 104 10 and 379. ® See p. 10414. 170 MUTE VERBS; VERBS OF FOURTH CLASS. Oelv ; 17. rceXevei he avrov tm aTpaTrjya) av/nrefJL'^rcu airo \ov arTO/jidTOS avhpa^. 18. avTLTa%dp,evoi tovtols 1 ivl/care avv rot? #eot?. 19. aU’ caro tovtoov tw v %prjpiaTcov avXXe- Grparevpia eiroXepiei rofc ®/oa£t. 20. 6 he K \eap%o$ hieTTpa^cLTO irevre p,ev GTparrjyov^ irapelvat, eiKoat he Xo%d- ryovs. 21. etceXevaev avrovs crvcr/cevao-apLevovs /cal e^oirXi- aapLevovs iropeveaOcu ei$ to nrpoaOev. 22. vvv rj ev/cXeco? TeXevrrjcropLev rj kclXov epyov epyacropieOa too? f/ E XXrjva? o-cbaavres. II. 1. We will guard the acropolis. 2. And after this they raised the war-cry. 3. Let us plunder the city and the palace. 4. He sent heralds to arrange 2 a truce. 5. Cyrus will pursue them with triremes. 3 6. He took his post behind the soldiers. 7. But this disturbed Clearchus exceedingly. 8. For I thought you were 4 both friends and allies. 9. Those with 5 Xenophon packed up their baggage 6 and proceeded. 10. For if we shall delay, the enemy will be more courageous. 11. He made proc¬ lamation to the Greeks that they were to pack up their bag¬ gage. 7 12. These, then, were the exploits of the Greeks 8 in their march inland with Cyrus. 468. R. F«p 7 , work. epy-o-v, r 6, work , deed; apy-6-s,-6-v (contracted from a-epy-6-s), without work, idle; ev-epye-Trj-s, -ov, well-doer, benefactor; evepyere-w, do a kind¬ ness; evepy e-ala, -as, kindness ; Kaicovpy-o-s, 6 (contracted from KaK6-epy-o-s, KanJ-s, bad), wrong-doer ; KaKovpye-w, do harm to ; aw-epy-6-s, -o-v, working with ; epya(o-p.ai, do work, labour ; irav-ovpy-o-s , -o-v (for 7r av-e-opy-o-s, tt as, all), that will do anything, villainous; iravovpy-la, -as, knavishness; vir-ovpy- o-s, -6-v, serviceable , conducive to. work, wright, wrought ; en-ergy, organ, L\(ov paarov ecrrtv d^vXa/cja Btapirdcrai. 10. 7roX,Xo5 6 1 For the distinctions of meaning among different comparative and superlative forms of the same posi¬ tive, see the general vocabulary. 2 k*k6s has also regular forms. See 448. 3 A neut. plur. used as an adv. 4 Also compared regularly, niKpS- repos, ulxpiraTos. 6 The dat. is used with compara¬ tives to denote the degree of dif- ference. So here, greater by much, i.e. much greater. 172 IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. fieifav rjv 7] ftorj. 11. 7 TeipaaovTCU /cal vpfiv /cal rjplv ra fieXTLara 1 avpifiovXevaai. 12. j3e \.tlov elvac ecjorj 6 arpaTrj- 709 d'rraXXdrTeaOai. 13. e^optev Be /cal yjrv^a^ avv rot? 6eol<$ afLeivovas rdbv j3apj3apoov. 14. Totyapovv /cpdriaroL Brj virrjpeTai 7ravro<; epyov K vpcp rjaav. 15. iarpaT07reBev- ovto Be e/caarore aTre^ovre^ dXXijXcov irapaadyyrjv /cal pbelov. 16. rjaav B ’ ot ravTrj diriroi puelove 9 ptev tgov Uepac/cdov, 2 Ovpio- eiBearepoi Be iroXv . 3 17. ov voptl^co dvBpl /caXXlov eivai /cTrjpua ovBe Xapurporepov dperrj 9 /cal Bi/caioavvrj 9 /cal yevvaiorrjTOs . 18. arpaTLMTai 7rXelov<; rj Bia^tXioi earparcnreBevaavTO irapd K Xedp%(p. 19. cjolXov 9 Be /caXbo 9 KeKoapajpcevov 9 pteyiarov /coapLov dvBpl evopu^ev. 20. KXeap^w eV tg3 arparev- pian LTnrels TrXeiovs rj Terrapd/covra , tovtoov Be ol TrXelaroi fdpa/ce 9 . 21. ravra diraXXa^oopLev, lya do 9 7r\et<7TOt 4 puev rjpicbv ev too? 07 rA,ot 9 doaiv, do 9 eXa^iaroi Be a/cevo(j)opcbac. 22 . 0 U 7 T 0 Te 7 a/) /xe£oz> cnreaTpaTOTreBevovTO ol fiapfiapoi tov 'E XXrjvacov e^rj/covra araBlcov. II. 1.. These are the 5 bravest of the captains. 2. There are many Persians nobler than Ariaeus. 3. The barbarians were very expert bowmen. 4. For it is much 6 easier to withdraw. .5. What do you think to be fairest and fittest? 6. We should be more serviceable, 7 if we should have our arms. 7. There were very many wild asses in the plain. 8. The freedom of the cities is the 5 greatest proof of this. 9. It is best for us, Chi- risophus, to proceed at once to the height. 10. They were not less 8 than ten thousand stades distant from Greece. 11. But I think you are better and braver than many barbarians. 12. Xenophon thought that thus the honour would be greater. 13. For all the sons of the noblest Persians are educated at the king’s court. 1 See p. 122 b 2 Sc. 'lirrrojv. 3 See p. 179 2 . 4 qiiam plurimi. wj or on may be prefixed to the superlative to strengthen it. 6 Omit. e Cf T. 16 above. 7 worth more (see p. 91 2 ). 8 Cf. I. 22 above. LIQUID VERBS; VERBS OF FOURTH CLASS. 173 471. R. Kpa, cer, do, make. aiiTo-Kpa-Tccp, -op-os, 6, rj (auros, self), being one's own master ; KpaT-os, -e-os, r 6 («pa+ t), strength, might; Kpar4-a>, be strong, be master ; kpcittwv, -ov (for Kper-lcvv), comp., stronger, better ; Kpar-icTo-s, -v), -o-v, sup., strong¬ est, best; iy-Kpar-ps, -4s, possessed of power; em-npar-ris, -4s, master of; iiriKpare-ia, -as, mastery ; iray- k par -lo-v, t 6 (jnas, all), complete contest, the pancratium. Cer-es, -er-is, f, Ceres (‘goddess of creation’) ; cor-p-us, -or-is, n., body ; cre-o, produce, create; cre-sc-o, come into being; in-cre- mentu-m, -i, n., growth. hard, auto-cia.t, aristo- cracy, demo- cracy, demo- crat, etc. LESSON LXXII. Future System of Liquid Verbs. — Liquid and Vowel Verbs of the Fourth Glass. 472. Verbs whose themes end in a liquid are called liquid verbs. 473. The future of liquid verbs is formed by adding the tense-suffix -c°/ e . instead of -, pevels, pevel, etc.; v4pu (theme vep-), distribute, fut. vepoo, vepels, vepei, etc. These two verbs belong to the First Class. 474. Many liquid verbs belong to the Fourth Class (466). 475. X of the theme unites with i of the present tense-suffix forming with it XX. Thus : — Theme. Pres. Stem. Future. ayy4\\u, announce, ayye\- )8aAAw, throw, j8aA- are Aa> 476. When the theme ends in v or p, i is transferred and unites with the vowel of the theme to form a diphthong. Thus: — 174 LIQUID VERBS; VERBS OF FOURTH CLASS. Theme. Pres. Stem. Future. KTtlvto, kill, KTCV- KTClv 0 J e- KTCVU) Trcpa'ivci), accomplish, ircpav- TTepaiv°J e- TTCpavS) (rrjpaivu, show by a sign, aypav- aripaii' 0 / e- ar]pavS) tc'ivcc, stretch, T CV~ TCLV°J e - TCVS) (paivo), show, xaAcira'ivoc, be angry, Xa^eirav- Xakciraiv 0 / e- Xo-Xciravu 477 . But if the vowel of the theine is i or v it becomes long when i of the suffix -t°/ e . is transferred. Thus: - Theme. Pres. Stem. Future. t K\tvw, cause to lean, k\iv- K\iv°/e- K\ivas Kpivoo, distinguish, KplV- Kplv 0 /e- Kpivtb alcrx^ew, shame, aiax vv ~ ai(TXVV°/e- al instead of Kano, kX aw instead of k\ atoi. Conjugate the future system of (fjaivo) in 678 2 . Conjugate also the future system of any other of the liquid verbs given above. 479 . EXERCISES. I. 1. rrjv a^itiv ercaarcp vefiovfiev. 2. evravOa fievo) rjfiepas kirra. 3. nrapayyeXel viropbeveiv. 4. 7 rorepov ravra aTrayyeXo) rj pbevelre; 5. 6 rt 3 8e iroiTjaei, ov Stacrrjpiavel. 1 Some verbs have, in addition to or instead of a fut. in - 3 avrcov anro/crevel , robs 8' 3 e/c(3a\el. 13. apa 8e rfj r)pepa rfj craXmyyi 4 aypavel. 14. 7T€pavd) ra oeovra . 5 15. T iaaa (/j.ev-), remain, aor. Zp.eiva ; areXXu) (ereA-), send , aor. ioTtiXa", cpOelpoo ( shame, aor. fjax^ra. arffAa'ivoi) (arrumav-'), show by a sign, aor. iar)fj.r]va ; xaXeiraivoi) (x<*herr av-), be angry, aor. exaX errrjua. KTeivw («Tei/-), kill, aor. e/CTCu/a; vepioo (re^u-), distribute, aor. eveipa", reivw (rev-), Stretch , aor. 6T etva J k pivot ( Kpiv -), distinguish, aor. e/f plva. a. /3d\X(x) (475) forms a second aor. (437). This will be explained later. b. The aor. of Kaco (478) is l/cawa ; of k\ aw, IkX avaa. Conjugate the first aorist system of atv« in 679. Conjugate also the first aorist system of any other of the liquid verbs given above. FIRST AORIST SYSTEM OF LIQUID VERBS. 177 482. EXERCISES. I. 1. 8 to epteivav rjpLepdv ev tw irehiw. 2. (3aaiXel 7 rpa)- ro? rjyyetXa ravra. 3. pa 8 i( 0 ^ ravra 7 rdvra eirepdvapiev. 4. 8 te(f)deipav yap too? arpandord ?. 5. /cal tovs birXtrds i/ceXevae puelvat. 6 . av 8 e irpdiTos diro^rjvai 1 yvbbpirjv. 7. arpand/ra^ eareiXe rov x oprov tcavaovra ?. 8 . /cal Oapuva rraprjyyetXev 6 [Eievocfrcbv too? r/ EA Xrjvas inropLevetv. 9. i/c rovrov Sei /ocpwv ecrreiXaro eVl nrbXepuov. 10. eav 8 e ay- pL^vr ) 2 rat /cepdri, ava/cevd^ecrOe. 11. /cara/cavacopiev Ta? a/tafa? ^? eyop^ev. 12. /cal el 'rrapayyeiXeiav , to crTpdrevpia TrXrjcnd^oi av. 13. epcetvav Se /cal ol irapa rrjv OdXarrav ol/covvres ev 2o\ot? /cal ev Tcrcrot?. 14. l/cavol ecrovrat ra re 7 rapa fiaaiXecos 3 to?? ''YlXXrjaLV dirayyeTkai /cal ra 7 rapa rcbv f E XXrjvcov /3acnXel. 15. Kopo? 8 ' aire/cpivaro, ’ A/covco ’Afipo/copidv e^Opov av 8 pa eirl ra> Yjvtyparr) irorapicp elvat . 4 16. /cal Kdpo? drro/cr elvat Xeyerat aoTO? rfj eavrov 5 X 6L P L rov apx°vra. 17. K Xeapxos /cpzvcis d 8 ucelv rov rov M evwvos arpartcorrjv irXrjyas ept/3dXXet. 18. rovrov ? diro/cpivaaOe o rt 6 /caXXtcrrdv re /cal apicrrov e^ere. 19. /cal orw^ 8 o/cei toot’, ecprj, dvaretvdrco rrjv xetpa • /cal dvereivav arravres. 20. ev0v<; ovv 6 ’Bevocfycov a > {a > shine, show. T]|xC, show by words, say ; a-o-K-«, say, allege ; a-tri-$, -e-cos, tj, asser¬ tion ; 7r pS-cpaoi-s, -e-cos, 7], allegation, pretext ; irpcKpa.aiCo-iJ.cu, set up as a pretext j a-npocpaaia-TO-s, -o-v, not offering excuses ; airp0(paaiaTit>s, (av-€po-s, -a, -o-v, in plain sight, clear ; cpavepws, adv., evidently; a-cpav-^s, -is, invisible, hidden; acpavifa, make hidden, blot out; 8ia-a-os, -e-os, t 6 (cos, cpccT-6s, t6 (<£co + t), light. fa-rl, say; fa-t-e-o-r, confess; m-fi-ti-ae, -drum, /., denial; fa-bula, -ae, f, story ; fa-ma, -ae, f., report; fas, n., divine law. uan, banns; ew-phemism, pro-phesy, ^>ro-phet, phase, em-phasis, phenomenon, dia phanous, epiphany, /iiero-phant, phantasm, phos- phorus , photo -graphy. Note. — For ? 3 /cpanara paydpeda. 10. eXeyov Be tpav ; 14. ovre KivBvvevcravTe<; ovre irovrjo’avTes tcov aXXcov irXeov rlpy- oeade 7 arpanoyrdiv biro Kvpov. 15. ol B ’ f/ E XXrjve? dacfya- Xco? eiropevovio to Xotirov t% rjpepd ?. 16. /cal j3oa /cal /3ap/3apLfcd)<; /cal ' EXXr)VL/cb), fut. 5t5a£a>, teach ; SxScGk- aAo-s, 6, teacher. — 8£k-ti, -ns, way pointed out, custom, right, justice ; H-Siko-s, -o-v, unjust; a5 Ik cd s, adv., unjustly ; aSuce-w, he unjust; adiK-ia, -as, injustice; S'lKa-io-s, -a, -o-v, right, lawful; duta'iccs, adv., with justice; SikcuS-tti-s, -tit-os, t], justice ; ducaio-avvr], -rjs, justice ; SiKafa, give judgment ; diKaa-rn-s, -ov , one who gives judgment , dicast. — StCk-vv-ju, fut. 5et| w, show , point out; Sety-pa, -ar-os, to, something to show with , sample. doc-e-5, teach ; di sc-o, learn ; in-dex, -ic-is, m. and /., one who points out; iu-dex, -ic-is, m. and /., judge, juror ; causi-dic-u-s, -i, m., pleader, advocate ; dic-o, dedicate ; dic-o, say, speak. teach, token ; didactic, syn- die, para- digm. Note. — 5t-5a- is for theme 8i5ax-. The theme of 5et/c- vv-yi is 5e//c-. The forms of these verbs will he explained later. 1 Verbs signifying to conceal, like 2 See p. 104 14 . those signifying to ask , demand (p. 8 Use the perf. pass, partio. 100 2 ), may take two object accs. 4 toil more. REVIEW OF GROUPS. — READING LESSON. 181 LESSON LXTI. Review of Groups, — Reading Lesson. Review the groups of related words in 435, 444, 455, 463, 468, 471, 480, 483, 486. Review 140, 142. Read and translate again 394. Read and translate the following passage : — 10 15 20 487. K vpos. VI. evrevOev e^eXavvei Bid rf)s K CNucldaaav rropevcrecrOai eav pur] K vpos avrols %prjpLara vma^vrjrai. ravra ol arparrjyol l^vpcp drrrfyyeXXov. 6 B ’ viricryvelrai dvBpl e/caarw rrevre apyvpiov pbvas. ro pcev Brj rroXv rod *E XXtjvl/cov O 1 /TC 09 eirelcrOrj. M evcov Be, rrplv BrjXov elvai ri rroirjcrovcnv ol aXXoc arpanedrai , 7 rorepov eyjrovrai K vpco 7) ov, avveXe^e ro avrov crrpdrevpia tmv aXXcov /cal eXe^e rdBe. ”KvBpes, etiv pLoc rre/aOrjre, ovre KLvBvvevaavres ovre rrovrjcravres rcov aXXcov rrXeov rlpufj- crecrOe arpancorcov vr to K vpov. tl ovv /ceXevco rroir/craL; vvv Belrai Kvpos erreaOat rov 9 ''TLXXrjva? errl (BacnXea * eyed ovv (f)7]pu vpids %prjvai rropeveaOat rrplv Br/Xov elvat 6 tl ol aXXoi r/ lLXXr)ve<; drro/cpivovvrai K vpco. a/covcravres ravra rreiSovrai /cal Bia^alvovcn rov E v<^parr\v rrorapiov rrplv rov 9 aXXov 9 drro/cpivacrOai. KO /509 Be avrot 9 rrepu- 182 REVIEW OF GROUPS.—READING LESSON. yjrds TXovv ehrev , ’Ecurav . . . ■u'n-io-xvrj- rai : the soldiers said, oi) iropevaop-eQa, eav pi] K vpos ypiv XPVP aTa vTTiax^yrai, unless Cyrus promises us, etc. — 13. eim, per¬ suade. So below eav poi 7 T€i(xQ?ire, if you ivill obey me, first aor. pass, in the sense of the mid., persuade oneself obey. —irplv 8r}Xov clvcu, before it was manifest. After an affirmative sentence, irpiv, before, before that, takes the infin. — 15. ov: the proclitic ov (37) takes the acute accent at the end of a sent. — 20. xp^vai: pres. inf. of the impers. verb xpr, it is needful , one must. bpus is the subj. of iropeveadai. — 25. ep.ol pLcXifcci, I shall see to it, third pers. sing. fut. indie, of the impers. verb peAet, it is a care. — 29. in 680. a. Note the exceptions to the principle of recessive accent (32), Xlttov, Xnreiv, XnreaOaL, Xlttojv. Conjugate also the second aorist system of any other of the verbs given below. 491. The following verbs of the first and the fourth classes form second aorists : — Theme. Future. 2d Aor. Stem. 2d Aor. &ya>, lead, ay- ayay 0 / e - ijyayov yiy uofiat, become, ysv- yevj) (To pat. yev° 1 e- iyev6pr]v €x«, have, hold, , throw. 0 aA- fiaAa> /3aA°/e- e&a\oi/ Kpa{w, cry out, Kpay- Kpay° / e - €Kpayov a. The theme is reduplicated in rjyayov (ay-ay-). b. The pres, has reduplication (the first letter of the theme being repeated with i) and the theme-vowel is dropped in yiyvo/xai (for yL-yev-o-fJuu) . In the fut. the theme assumes e (yeve-). c. The theme-vowel is dropped in eayov (for e-o-ey-ou). e£o> is for crc^co, and in cry^croo the theme crey- becomes aye-. 184 SECOND AORIST. — VERBS OF SECOND CLASS. d. 7rt7rT(ji) (for 7ri-7r€T-o)) is formed like yuyvopai. tirerjov is for an original h rerov (found also in Doric). For irecrovpat (for 7rer-creo/xai), see p. 174 h 492. Some verbs with short themes ending in a mute or v form the present stem by adding the variable vowel '°/ € . to the theme and lengthening its short vowel (a to rj, t to a, V to €v). Thus: — Theme. Pres. Stem. Fut. Aor. T-fjKci}, melt, TaK- ttjk 0 / e- T-fi^co err]£a Aenra>, leave, Aiir- Aeiir°/e- A ehf/co eXiirov ireldcc, persuade, iriO- ireiO 0 / e- irelaco eireura (pevyu, flee, q>v y- , sail, Ov- 7rAu- e° / e- (for pew 0 / e .) pevaopLai a. v is dropped between two vowels. b. The lengthened form of the theme is kept in the fut. and first aor. 493. These verbs belong to the Strong-Vowel or Second Class. 494. EXERCISES. I. 1. 7 rol (pvyovres acoOijaofieOa ; 2. Spoyao? eyevero rot? CTTpCLTLGOTCUS 67rl Ta? (TKTJVCK;. 3. TTjV yiOVCL Tlj/C€L 6 rjXlOS. 4. kcu eyevovro ol avptiravre^ oarXlrat ptvpioi Kal ytXtoi. 5. e’£ airpoa^ofcrjTov 1 yap avroh eveireae ro 'JLXXtjvlkov. 6. /cal tl Set ere Xtirelv ttjv bmcrOofyvXaKtdv; 7. ecfrvyov yovv 7Tpo? ifC€Lvovs KaraXtirovres rjp.ds- 8. Kal ra TrXelcrTov 2 a£ia 3 e^ovres ciTreirXevcrav. 9. ravra Xe£ds eiretae tovs avSpas. 10. ev6a at Stoopv^e's eta tv, enro rov Tt'ypyros iroraptov peoverat. 11. real iptfiaXcov avv rots e^aKoaiois vhea rovs /3ap/3dpov$. 12. ecpacrav Kal eptfiaXelv^ 7 Tore eh 1 Sc. Tp Sirov. 2 Cf. 274, I. 15. 3 Cf. 380, I. 2. 4 Aor. See 354. SECOND AO BIST. —VERBS OF SECOND CLASS. 185 avrovs paai\ucr)v arpandv. 18. dXXa 77*oXXa9 7Tpocj)dcr6a ? K vpos el^ev, cva vpbas evQd8e dvaydyot. 14. €kXl7t6vt€$ to? OL/cia$ eepvyov 6ttl ra opr). 15. 6 yap Tiacraefyepvrjs iv rfj 7rpcoTT) (tvvoSg) ovk e(j)vy€V. 16. to 8e arpdrevp,a 6 ctltos i'lreKt'irev. 17. ol nTeXraaral rwv EXX .rjvoov SpopiM 1 eOeov 7 T /009 Too? /3ap/3dpov 9 . 18. t «9 8e rd^ec 9 ec? ra TrXdyia irapayayoov ipufiaXelv ovk, iroXpiycrev. 19. rov 9 Mua-oz /9 avv rfj Trapovar) 8vvdp,et raireivov^ vpAv irapdcr^OLpu av. 20 . ovk epuecvav rov 9 o'rrXird 9 , aU’ dvaKpayovres eOeov eirl to arparoire8ov. 21. ^evocf>d)vra 8e 6 viraama-r ^/9 e^mz/ t^z> dcnri8a direXirrev. 22. e8otjev avraj crKrjrrrbs ireaelv^ €t9 Tr/z, 7 rarpcpav oIklclv. 28. Kal rov 9 tw^ 'EXX??^^ arpa- rrjy ov7 KtXtcnxa ecpvyev 67TL rrjs dpp,ap,d^r) 9 , /cat ot e/c TJ 79 ayopas 4 KaraXt- 7TOZ/T€9 Ta WWfl 6(j)VyOV. II. 1. For Cyrus became my 5 friend. 6 2. And provisions failed. 8. He fled with all his host. 4. He led a multitude of men against you. 5. When they heard 7 this, they were persuaded. 6. Within the night 8 fear fell also on the Greeks. 7. Thereupon truly a great tumult arose. 8. But all left 7 the road and fled. 9. This he did that he might inspire all men with fear. 9 10. He led the Greeks into the country of the barbarians and fled. 11. The inhabitants 10 abandoned this city. 12. But I fear that he will lead us into the country of the barbarians. 13. But Menon had the left wing of the Greek (force). 14. They raised a shout and struck their shields against their spears. 1 Cf 228, I. 14. 2 His thought was, a-Krtirrhs e7re- aev (354). SoKea) is here used per¬ sonally, a thunder-bolt seemed to him , etc. 8 Cf. 361, I. 9. 4 See p. 83 9 . 6 to me. 6 |Aos. 7 Aor. partic. 8 Cf. 308, I. 15. 9 inspire (irapexu) fear in all men (simple dat.). i° See 371. 186 NUMERALS. 495. R. -n-iO, fid, bind. ir€i0-w (theme md-), bind to oneself, persuade, mid., let oneself be bound, obey ; verbal tt eia-reo-v, one must obey; a-ireid-ys, -es, disobedient ; arreLde-cc, disobey ; Treld-apxo-s, -o-v (R. apx, 463), obedient ; 7r eidapxLca, obey authority, defer to ; h-kt-to'-s, -y, -6-v, that does obey, trusty, faithful; tugt6- th)-s, -yr-os, y, faithfulness; ti-iru tto-s, -o-v, not to be trusted, faithless ‘ aiuare-u>, distrust, suspect ; airiGT-id, -as, suspicion j itut-ti-s, -e-cos, y, trust, confidence ; -mo-rev-cc, have confidence in, believe. fid-e-s, /., trust, faith; fld-u-s, adj., trusty; fid-o, trust; foed-u-s, -er-is, n., league. BIND, BOND, BAND, BUNDLE, BODY, BED. LESSON LXVIII. Numerals. 496. The cardinals, ordinals, and numeral adverbs which occur are the following: — Cardinal. Ordinal. Adverb. 1 els, pia, e'v, one irptoros, first aira£, once 2 8vo, two 8«vTepos, second 8 (s, twice 3 rpets, Tpta TplTOS rp£s 4 TCTTttptS, T€TTttpa TCTapTOS T€TpaKlS 5 irevT* irepirTos 1T€ VTCUCIS 6 CKTOS c^aKis 7 C f CTTTa e'pSopos CTTTaKlS 8 OKTW 07800$ OKTQKIS 9 evvea i'vaTOs cvcuus 10 SeKa 8« Karos SCKOKIS 11 cvScKa cv8£Karos CVSCKOLKIS 12 SwScKa SwStKaTOs SwSeKaKis 13 TpurKaiSfKa Tpiros Kal SeVaTos 14 T€TTaptV D. evC €VI TptO-C T€TTapart A. cva ptav € V Tpets rp£a T^TTapas r^TTapa 188 NUMERALS. a. With a plural substantive Suo is often used indeclinably. b. The cardinal numbers from 5 to 100 inclusive are indeclinable. The higher cardinal numbers in -tot and all ordinals are declined like adjectives of the vowel-declension. c. The compounds ouSeis (ovSe and els), prjBe is (prjBi and els), none , no, nobody, nothing, are declined like els, as onSets, ovBepta, ovSev; ovSe- vos, ovSe/xtas, ov8evo-5e/ca (5eVa, ten), twelve; fov-Ttpo-s, -a, -o-v, second; 8i-a, prep., orig. between , asunder, then through; 8(*xa, adv., in two parts; dixafy, divide in two; 8£-s, adv., twice , in composition also 8i-; Zkx-xAiol, -ai, -a (xbuo/, thousand), two thousand; 8i-p.oipla, -as (p.o?pa, -as, lot, portion), double share; 81 -tttjxv-s, -v (tt?\X v ~ 5 i -ewy, 6, Cubit), of two Cubits ; dl-TrXedpo-s, -o-v (jrXedpov, t6, plethrum), of two plethra ; Sl-ttAoo-s, -rj, * o-v (R. ir\a in trip.TrXn^i fill)•> filled twice, two-fold, double; 8i-TrXdcno-s, -d, -o-v (R. 7r\a in ■nip.nX.nu^ fill)* two-fold; tii-cppo-s, 6 ( in 675. 500. The first perfect and first pluperfect are found in vowel verbs, in many lingual mute verbs, in many liquid verbs. 501. For modifications of the theme in vowel verbs, see 254 a and b, 441, 442. 502. A lingual mute is dropped before -Ka. Thus : — ap-rrafa (apira?)-'), plunder, ripTraKa] vo/ulfa (yo ( ui5-), think, vevopuKa.', iroplfa ( 7 T 0 piS-), furnish, TrendpLKa. 503. Verbs of the second class (492, 493) have the strong form of the theme. Thus : —• 7r6i0w (md-'), persuade, ireTreiKa; 7rAeo > (VAt»-), sail, 7re7rAeu«a. 504. Some liquid themes suffer no change before the tense suffix. Thus: — ayyeWoo (ayyeA -), announce, jjyye\Ka. * 505. Monosyllabic liquid themes change e to a. Thus : — (ereA-), send, ecrTaXKct ; (pdeipcc ( (pdep -), destroy, ecpdapKa. 506. v is dropped in a few liquid themes j if not dropped it is changed to y nasal. Thus : — Kptvca (^Kpiv-f distinguish, KeKpuca ; reivoc (rey-), Stretch, reVa/ca (505); ? 5 iroXeprjcrwv toIs ®pal;LV. 21. el ra? Girov'bas XeXv/caatv ol /3ap/3apoi, virep ypdov payovvTafi ol OeoL 22. direaTaX/ca too? dyye- Xovs /cal cruv avTois onXiTas Sta/coaiov ?. 23. eVei Se T6T6- XevTy/cev 6 Kt)po? ; ciTrayyeXXeTe 'Apialw otl ypels vi/ccbpev T6 /SacnXed /cal ovSels eTL yplv payeTai. II. 1. His 7 wife has persuaded him. 2. But Clearchus has strongly insisted. 3. He has provided the army with sup¬ plies. 8 4. They had corrupted the heavy-armed troops. 5. The Greeks have laid waste the country of the barbarians. 6. We had thought the bowmen 9 were 10 ready. 7. He has not with¬ drawn the right wing from the river. 8. We had repulsed the bowmen and peltasts. 9. I have judged these men 9 to be in the wrong. 10 10. He was alleging that he had been a slave at 1 Spa, equivalent to the Lat. in¬ terrogative enclitic particle -ne. 2 Cf. 308, I. 2. 8e? is impersonal, there is need. 3 itself, Lat. ip sum, to be taken with the following subst. Cf. 247, £.16. 4 See 354. 6 With iroXepriawv, cts if intend¬ ing to war, with the avowed inten¬ tion of warring. 6 Future of /aaxopxt, formed like that of reAea.’. See p. 159, 3. 7 Use the article (p. 23 3 4 ). 8 Rephrase the sent., furnished supplies to the army, using both a direct and indirect object. 9 See 350. i° See 354. 192 PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS. Athens. 11. I had passed the order along to all to arm them¬ selves. 12. But the rest of the soldiers have thrown stones 1 at the man. 13. We had made an invasion into the country of the Carduchi through the mountains. 509. R. v€|j., nem, allot. yep distribute, portion out, pasture; vo'n-o-s, 6, that which has been allotted, custom, law ; v6p.-ip.o-s, -y, -o-v, customary, lawful; ayopa-v6po-s, 6 (ayeipoo, collect, ayopa, meeting -place'), one who makes rules for the market , market-master ; a-vopo-s, -o-v, without law, lawless ; avop-id, -as, lawlessness; avT6-vo/uo-s, -o-v ( avr6s , self), under ones own laws, independent; ohW avno 9 JL curra avrw G.D. VWV wv avTOiv avratv avTotv P.N. UH-eis V[i,€lS cr4>tis avToC avraC avTa G. T]JAlOV VjiWV cr(5v avrtov avTwv avrwv D. VJJLIV avTois avrats avrois A. r'|ids £ V[L(XS ds avrovs avras • 9 am 1 Rephrase the sent., have thrown at the man with stones, and see p. 47 6 . PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS. 193 512. The following forms of the personal pronouns are enclitic (38) : — pov, poi, pe' } aov, (tol, o-ej ov, ol, t Review 186, 187. Examine the following: — OVTOS €7ro\£pr)(T€V ipol', this TfldU made dJCIV 071 7710. ipol ov col tovto apiaKu, this pleases me, not you. €7rt (to 1 iyivovro ol avSpcs, the men came into your power. 513. If the pronoun is emphatic (187 b), and in general after prepositions, the enclitic forms of the pronoun retain their accent, and in the first person the longer forms Ipov, ipot, ipi, are then used. Examine the following: — ra Se fTKevy dnaWdiwpev, let us abandon the baggage, av t€ yap "EWrjv el Kal rjpeis, for you are a Greek and so are we Greeks. 514. Rule of Syntax.—The nominative forms of the per¬ sonal pronouns are omitted unless emphatic. If emphatic, they are expressed. Examine the following: — i(riv eTraKoXovOonrL, they fear that the barbarians will follow them. evoiTjcrev avrov (raTpd7rrjv,he made him satrap. 515. Rule of Syntax. — The forms ov, ol, e, etc., of the pro¬ noun of the third person are generally indirect reflexives in Attic prose, i.e. they are used in a dependent clause to refer to the subject of the principal verb. To supply the place of a pronoun of the third person the oblique cases of a vto-, second perfect yeypaa. It has the inflexion of the first perfect system. Conjugate the second perfect system of Xcltto) (521 c) in 681. a. Note the exceptions to the principle of recessive accent (32), AcAomtcwh, Ac A.oortos. Conjugate also the second perfect system of any other of the verbs given below. 520. The second perfect rarely occurs in vowel verbs. 521. The following changes of the vowel of the theme occur: — a. c becomes o. b. a is sometimes lengthened to a or rj. c. Verbs of the second class (492, 493) have the strong form of the theme, but with ol for a. 522. Some verbs aspirate a final labial or palatal mute of the theme, changing tt or /3 to and k or y to x- 523. The changes just named are illustrated in the following verbs, which are arranged according to classes: — &yu ( 07 -), lead, ?ix a > Siwkw (5/wk-), pursue, $e 8 ia>xaj irepiroo (irf/uLir-'), send, 7 rerropcpa] rpeiru (rpe7T-), turn , Tcrpotya J Tpi&o) (jpifi-, rpifi-), rub, TfTpicpa. \elirw (Aitt-), leave, \e\onra ; t^ku (ran-'), melt , tctijko 1 J (ray-), arrange, rerax« J (palyoo (vyy ecf)r] aoTod? XeXoiirevai to yooplov. 6. iroXXax /3l/3Xov< ? yeypatyev ooto? 6 avr/p. 7. ev Be tjj TroXepiiq 2 BiaT6Tpicf>ev f)p,epd<; 7 ro\\d?. 8. XaOpa Be toov GTpaTicoTWV eireTropityei Kopo) ayyeXov. 9. too? 5e /3apj3dpovvy-rj, -rjs, flight , banishment; 4>vy-a-s, -ad-os, 6 , one who has fled , exile , refugee. fug-a, - ae , /., flight; fug-i-o, flee; fugi-t-Iuu-s, adj., fugitive. bow ( 'bend ), bow (the weapon ), bight, bout, buxom. LESSON LXXII. \ Eeflexive, Eeciprocal, and Possessive Pronouns, 526. The reflexive pronouns are iyavrov, eyavrrjs, of myself; creavrov, aeavTrjs (contracted aavrov, aavryjs), of yourself iavrov, iavrrjs, iavrov (contracted avrov, avrrjs, avrov), of himself herself itself. 527. PARADIGM. S. G. D. A. Ijiavrov, -t}s efiavTw, -f) IjjiavTov, -rjv creavTov, -rjs (TtaVTW, -T) creavTov, -rjv cavTOv, -rjs, -ov cavTw, -fj, -w cavTov, -rjv, -0 P. G. ri|xwv avTwv, -civ rifi-civ avTcov, -<3v € aVTCOV, -civ, -<3v D. rjn.iv avTois, -ais vfxiv avrols, -ais cavTois, -ais, -ots A. rj|ias avTOv's, -as v|xas avTOvs, -as eavTovs, -as, -a 1 The speaker said, 7 reVo^a. See 354. pnojyouNS. 199 a. The reflexive pronouns are formed from the stems of the. per¬ sonal pronouns (511) compounded with a vtocoj/ avriov, acjitaiv olvtols, -ats, crcf) as avrovs, -as, for iavrivv, etc. Examine the following.: — ai7nrev£L cttl tyjv iavrov cn9 rovrov 7 airios ecrrtv. 10. e/36cov Be aXXyXoL? pbrj Oelv Bpopucp aXX y ev ra^ei erreaQat. 11. e/ceXevcre Be rov<; arparijyov 9 crvvrar I;at e/caarov rov 9 eavrov . 8 12. rovrov yap 6 ep -09 7 rarrjp i/ceXevaev vrrrj/coov elvao ipLol. 13. /cal TOt 9 rjpberepoi 9 arpa- nu/rais 0 avros (f>6f3o , loose , pf. mid AcAu-jUai, but fut. pf. AeA v-cro/xai. 536. EXERCISES. I. 1. tovtovs 8’ 6(f>rj eyyv? aXXrjXcov ecrrpaTOTrebevcrOai. 2. 'XprjfJLaTa 7 roXXa rceKTrjaOe. 3. ovrco yap 8iecriraaTO ra arparevpara. 4. rjpels Hv^avrlov 1 a'rroKercXeLaopeOa. 5. inro rov Xporrov 8e8rj(reTai 6 avrjp. 6 . 7 repl r ovtcov avv rfj arpa- na fieftovXevvTaL. 7. /cal vvv reOvpac 7 repl avrov rovrov. 8. i/3e/3ovX6VTO KOpo? 7 tco? av rrjv pa^rjv ttololto. 9. eyyv? 7 rov iarparOTreSevTO fiaabXevs. 10. reareairaapat enro rov L7T7TOV. 11. 0v8ev €T6Te\6(TTO 0VT6 2 6/XOt 3 OUT6 2 dUft) Ov8e VI? 12. viro8e8epevoi hcotptbvro ol errpar loot at. 13. oi 8e 8100- %avT€S rcov liTTrecov ra^v rreiravaovrat. 14. 7 roXXa/cts yap vv/cTcop iropevopevos aireairaapat airo rwv 7ref&m. 15. /cal ai irvXai bcercXecvro /cal eirl rbov ret^cov oirXa icfralvero. 16. avrjp ayaOos Aa/ccovL/cbs KAecowpo*; rerb^evrai 8ta ri}? d<77rt8o9. 17. real ol rcov f E XXrjvcov arparrjyol rcerceXevapevot elalv brrXira 9 ay aye tv. 18. 'iraparceKeXeva pe6a T 0 Z 9 f/ EX\? 7 , have one’s heart on, desire; imOvp-'ia, -as, desire, longing; ev-Qvpo-s, -o-v, of good heart, cheerful; evQvpi-o-pat, be cheerful; irp6-Qupo-s, -o-v, with mind intent, ready, willing; irpoQdpos, adv., willingly; a-irp6dvpo-s, -o-v, not eager ; irpo90p-(d, -as, readiness, eagerness; irpoQvp.4-o-p.ai, be eager; pa- Qvpo-s, -o-v (i>a-5io-s, easy), with mind at ease, indifferent, lazy; paOvp-ia, -as, laziness; fa90p4-cv, live in idleness. 538. R. 2 0u, fu, smoke, sacrifice. 0v-cd, offer, sacrifice; 0u-tt|p, -vp-os, 6, sacrificer; 0u-8ns , -es (ofa, smell), sweet-smelling ; 0v-p,o-v, r6, thyme. fu-mu-s, -l, m., smoke; fu-n-us, -er-is, n., funeral rites; fu-ll-go ,-in-is, soot; fi-mu-s, -i, m., filth; foe-du-s (for foui-du-s), adj., filthy. dust; thyme. 1 on account of this, use tvena to translate on account of. 2 See 354. 8 by more (persons). 204 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. LESSON LXXIV. Demonstrative Pronouns. 539. The principal demonstrative pronouns are ovros, avrrj, tovto, this, o8e, rjBe, ro8e, this, and ckcivos, e/caV??, ckcii/o, that. Review 172. a. o8e is inflected like the article (88) with the enclitic demonstra¬ tive suffix -Se added to the forms. b. £k€lvo dSeXei emaroXbv nrapa fiacnXed Xeycov ore rj% ei €X< 0 V I'/rrreds nroXXovs. ravrrjv rr\v em r aor. subjv. For the mood, see 278. — 24. ctvai : the infin. expresses purpose. — TaxOeis: first aor. pass, partic. of tAtto). — 27. tov irpos 6p,e iroX.6p.ov: cf. tov naeiv in 1. 8. — 28. e'Xa|3ov: cf. Aafidv in 1. 13. I Translate the following passage into Greek: — 546. He marches thence through Arabia. In this region the land was a level plain, full of wild creatures of all sorts, wild asses, ostriches and gazelles. The horsemen some¬ times chased these wild animals. The asses it was not easy to catch; for they ran much more swiftly than the horses. The flesh of those that were captured was like deer-meat, hut more tender. An ostrich nobody caught, and those of the horsemen that had given chase quickly gave up; for the crea¬ ture easily escaped, using both its feet and its wings. Pro¬ ceeding through this land they arrive at the river Mascas, of a plethrum in width. Here there was a great uninhabited city, the name of which was Corsote. They remained here three days, and procured supplies. Thence Cyrus marched thirteen stages through a desert, ninety parasangs, with the river Euphrates on his right. But across the Euphrates, before the army reached Pylae, there was a large and prosperous city, Charmande by name. From this the soldiers purchased their provisions, crossing over on rafts. 1 PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF MUTE VERBS. 209 LESSON LXXYI. Perfect Middle System of Mute Verbs. Conjugate the perfect middle system of Xuttu), ayw, and ttuOco in 683-685. 547. The concurrence of consonants in the stem and end- ings gives occasion to many euphonic changes. These take place according to the following principles : — 548. A labial mute before p changes to p ; with a forms ^ (215 a); before a lingual is made co-ordinate (114 a). a. When ppp would thus result, one p is dropped, as 7 rep7ro), send, pf. 7r€7T€/x/xat (for ire.7rep7r-puat). See 205. 549. o- between two consonants is dropped. 550. A palatal mute before p remains or becomes y; with Xocjiov. 10. rjtcTai to arparevpia /card pteaov to twv TroXepblwv, otl e/cei fiaaiXevs eanv. 11 . nraw oXlyoL apuj) avTOV kcltcl- XeXei’^rovTat. 12 . too Be avBpl 3 tovtw rjBe 009 'ireireiapiai. 18. 7TOt 7T0T6 T6TpapLpL6VOL €L(j\v 01 ''ILXXrjVeS Aral TL €V VW eyovaiv; 14. ooto? Se eVeVa/oTo eVt too evwvvpcw tov imri- kov 4 apywv. 15. /cat tco^ oitXwv Tot? aTpaTid>Tai<$ ttoXXcl eirl dpia^wv rj/CTO /cal VTro^vylwv. 16. ea/cepiptat et 5 /cpetTTOv iaTi Ttaaacjyepvrjv rjyepibva e%eiv. 17. e/c TavTr)? t% 7roXeoo9 Tot? f/ EXX, 7 ;crtz/ r/yepLwv eireTrepbiTTO , oVoo? Sm t^? iroXepild 9 y^wpa? ayoi auToo?. 18. avvrj/coXovOovv Be /cal aXXot Ileyj- crcoz' TeOwpa/ciapievot e/ 9 6 Tpta/coatov 9 . 19. rfXavvev eVt to 09 Mez'ooz'o? GTpaTiWTas, oocrr’ e/celvov<; €/c7re7rXrj^0ai^ /cal Tpe- Xeiv 67rl to, oirXa. 20. el%ov Be 7ravTeotvlfcov<; /cal /cvrjpuBas /cal ton? darriBa 9 e/c/ce/ca- Xvptpievd ?. 21. vjrep yap ttj 9 /cwpirjs yrjXo(f)6 ’ o £ 8 dveo-TpapLpLevoi elalv oi dpicpl /3aatXed. 22. vopit^eTe ev TrjBe Trj rjpiepa epue T€ /caTa/ce/co\/rea^at /cal vpa? ov 7ro\u epuov 9 vaTepov. A6. rj oe bta twv opewv 0009 tfou 7r/oo9 ap/CTOV TeTpappievr] els KapBov^ovs ayei , 24 . evTevOev Be Kvpos e^eXavvet GTaOpcov eva irapaadyyd 9 T/oefc avvTeTayptevw too GTpaTevpiaTL. 1 Subj. of iirereraKTo , if/ie execu¬ tion of this. See 352. 2 Clearchus, dat. of the agent with iTreTre/j.\l/o. See 224. 3 (7/. 517, I. 20. 4 Depends on &px<»v, which is an appositive to oSros, as commander of the horse. 5 C/. 247, I. 4. e < 7 /. 498, I. 12. 7 The infin. after # * 7 ? s > workmanship, art, ways and means ; T^x v ~ LK d-s, -6~ v > artistic, artful; rexviK&s, adv., artfully ; Tex^a^co, use art, employ cunning. — rarrevycov s ns diro^vyot ; 11. epcorcb/iev 4 e/cetvov rL 5 fiovXerat ypiiv 6 ^pyaOaiJ 12. to? 'rrapayyeXXei /cal rL lari ro crvvOypia; 13. Tt 8 Bel fiaaiXea alrelv yptas ra 07rA,a.; 14. avpt(3e/3ovXevpLe6d croc rL %py 'TTOieiV. 15. eav vi/cwcri, rL Bet avrovs Xveiv ryv yecpvpav ; 16. ev ttoLol 9 irpayfiacriv rjcrav 01 r/ ~EiXXyves ; 17. K vpov d/cov- rL^et ns 'iraXrco inro rov otyOaXuov /3taLcos> 18. K vpos dire- /creivev avBpa Ue'pcryv /cal erepov riva rcov virapywv Bvvd- erryv. 19. ev6a By piepos n rys rcov TLepcrcov evra^Lds rjv OeacraaOat. 20. rL /ccoXvet /cal ra a/epa yptlv^ /ceXeveiv K vpov 7rpo/caraXapL/3dveiv; 21. 7 roLa Bvvapiei avpip^dyco ^pyaa- p,ei>oi s ptaXXov av /coXacraicrOe rovs AiyvirrLovs rys vvv ervv epbol oven 79; 10 22. epcora rbv ayyeXov irocry T /. 9 11 ean ydopd y ev pieaeo rov TLypyro 9 /cal rys Bicopv^os- 1 The infin. is dependent on the verbal suhst. airopia, difficulty in re¬ maining. 2 With airocpvyoi. See 300. 3 See p. 104 10 . ^ See 271. 5 Cognate acc. (p. 122*) with Xprjadai. 3 Cf. 361, I. 13. 7 The irregularly contracted form of xpaecrflcu. Cf. 380, I. 14. 8 Cf. 167, I. 10. 9 See p. 25 4 . 10 Sc. dwapews, and see p. 179 h 11 See 186 c. As is here equiva¬ lent to the art., how great a land. 214 INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. II. 1. What does he say to this ? 2. Why do we remain ? 3. Let us inquire who said this. 4. Somebody was near with a great force. 5. Of what sort were the men in this land ? 6. What will the rest of the soldiers do ? 7. What shall we have, if we conquer ? 8. And he asks what the disturbance is ? 9. What opinion have you about the march ? 10. How many soldiers have you in your division ? 11. Who ordered the generals to bring heavy-armed men ? 12. And for what reason should you abandon the servants ? 13." He will ask how many days I stayed in Byzantium. 14. How many did the companies of the heavy-armed men amount to ? 561. B. irtp, per, press through. impo) (for Trep-iw), pierce; irtp-ovti, - 77 s, tongue of a brooch, pin; ve- povd-a, pierce; 5i-up.-irep-es, adv., through and through; nepd-cc, pass through, cross; impa, -ds (for wep-ia), trial, proof (‘probing’); iretpd- o-p.ai, try, attempt; d-iretpo-s, -o-v, not having tried, without experience, unskilled; ep.-Tretpo-s, -o-v, acquainted with; ip-irelpcos, adv., by experi¬ ence; irop-o-s, 0 , means of passing, ford, means, way; ep.-rropo-s, 6, one who travels, merchant; ipirdp-io-v, to, trading-place , market; dSoi-iropo-s, -o-v (686s, way, road), going by land; ddonropi-w, go by land; dvrl-iropo-s, -o-v, on the other side of the way, opposite; d-iropo-s, -o-v, without ways and means; airope-co, be without ways and means, be perplexed; dirop-id, -as, lack of means, embarrassment; Rov-irdpo-s, -o-v (/3 ovs, ox, cow), ox¬ piercing ; Sva-TTopo-s, -o-v, hard to travel; Svairop-ld, -as., difficulty of pass¬ ing; eV-iropo-s, -o-v, easy to travel through; evvop-ld, -as, facility of obtain¬ ing ; vaval-Tropo-s, -o-v (vavs , ship), that can be traversed in ships, navigable; Tropev-w, make a way for, make go; tt opev-r6-s, -i\, - 6-v , passable; 8uor- 7 rdpeuro-s, -o-v, hard to get through; nopeo-reo-s, -a, -o-v, that must be traversed; irope-ld, -as, a going, journey, march; voplfa, cause to go, carry, bring, supply ; irep-a, adv., through, beyond; iripd-v (prop, acc.), On the further side ; dvri-irepav or dvri-ivipas, KaT-avruripav Or Kar-avTiirepas, adv., over against; -n-epa-io-s, -a, -o-v, on the other side, opposite; vepaid-u, carry to the other side, transport; Trepalvoc (for irepav-iu), bring to the other side, bring to an end, accomplish. perl-tu-s, adj ., experienced; perl-culu-m, -I, n., trial, risk, danger; por-ta, -ae, f, gate; por-tu-s, -us, to., harbour; porti-cu-s, -us, /., covered walk; par-o, make ready; par, adj., equal; peren-die, adv., on the day after to-morrow. FARE, FAR, FERRY, FRITH, FEAR, FRESH, FRISK ,* eTO-pirical, pirate, pore, m-porium. PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF LIQUID VERBS. 215 LESSON LXXYIII. Perfect Middle System of Liquid Verbs. 562. Liquid verbs suffer in the main the same changes in the perfect middle system as in the first perfect system (504-507). But if v is not dropped (506), it is changed, to tr before p. Thus : — ct 77 eAAo> (ayyeX-'), announce , tjyye\/nai. See 504. airVipo} ( (/3aA-), throw , fie^Xri/nai. See 507. Learn the paradigms of o-reAAo) and atva> in 6S6, 687. Observe that o- between two consonants is dropped (549). 563. EXERCISES. I. 1. Octvpa^co otl ovhapov KOpos 7 retyavrcu. 2. e7rl toos fiapfiapov s mu? avrecrTaXTO. 3. /cal Kairvos eirecpavro ev KcopLcus ou irpocrw. 4. rjpeis he ravra 1 ttoXlv arroKeKpipeOa. 5. rjyepoov ovhels rjpiv eirecfxzvTO. 6 . /cal epcora el 2 aTTOfce/cptvTcu . 3 * 7. (fravepci he ovhepia ire^avrat eiTifiovXrj. 8. 7 rpos ravra aTTOKefcpivrat oi '^EXX^z'es. 9. /ce/cpcrat cos ahucoov 6 to arpdrevpa drroXtirdov.' 1 10. iraprjyyeXro h'e Tots I'lrrrevcrL Oappovat 5 hioofcetv . 6 11 . avv^Spoace rcov ote- airappevoov rov s 7rXecVTOi/s. 12. KXeap^os Se tocs aXXocs rjyelro Kara ra 7rap7jyye\peva, oi S’ ecrrovro. 13. 7repl v, - ovt-os, 6, javelin , dart; cuc6ut-lo-u, r 6, javelin , dart; aKourifa, hurl the javelin ; anduri-o-i-s , -e-a>s, javelin-throwing ; clkoutkx-tti-s , - ov , javelin-thrower ; aK-p/rf, -fjs, point, edge, highest point; dic/x-fj-u, adv. (acc. of aKfx-n), on the point, just; aKp.d(w, be at the highest point; alxfitf, -ys (for aK-tfx 7?), spear-point; aixu-d^coro-s, -o-u (a\is, o, horseman ; Lirirev-w, ride j 'nrirtid , -as (for imref-ia'), Cavalry ; TtOp-wiro-v, to Qt ir rapes, four ), team of four horses abreast , chariot and four. — d£-v-s, -e?a, -d (ok + T)TIVI (tfTIVl, OTW A. ovTiva TjVTlVa tf O Tl D. N. A. WTIV6 WTIV6 (tfTlVC G. D. olvTlVOtV olvTlVOlV olvTlVOlV P. N. OITIV6S al'rives aTiva, aira G. (tfVTivwv, dra>v (tfVTIVWV (tfVTlVWV, OTCDV D. otoTMTl, OTOIS alo-Tir), w ’ Opovrd, eartv 6 tl ae rjBl/crjaa 2 * ; 12 . KXeajCr )£09 ptovos ecf)pbv€i ola Bel tov apyovra? ol S’ aXXot airetpot rjaav. 13 . BrjXcbaovatv oiovs vopti^ovatv eivat rou 9 €V rfj xd>pa ovras dvOpboirovs. 14 . /cal ap^t/cbs eXeyero eivat KXett/0^09 009 Bvvarov 4 e/c tov tolovtov rpoirov otov /cd/celvoij et^e* ^aXeirbs yap rjv. 15 . oacov Be Brj /cal otcov av eXirtBcov eptavrov arepijaatpit, el ae tl /ca/cov eTrtyetprj- aatptt irotelv, ravra b Xe£(o. 16 . BtaOecopteOa oarjv ptev %cbpav /cal otav e^ovatv, 6V0U9 Be Oepairovra 9, ocra Be /crrjvrj, %pvaov Be, eaOrjra Be. 1 The inf. may depend on ad¬ jectives or substantives, especially on those which denote ability or fit¬ ness or the contrary. Cf. 560, I. 4. 2 Is there any lorong that 1 have done you? For the accent of eanv, see 188 a. 0 n is a cognate acc. Cf. 485, I. 13. 3 Sc. povc?v, subj. of Se? (352). 4 (so far ) as (it was ) possible. 5 ravra repeats the preceding in¬ direct question. V 220 FIRST PASSIVE SYSTEM. ] II. 1. Xenophon asks what we are doing. 2. And with her he sent soldiers whom Menon had. 3. And they ask him how large the army is. 4. But I will tell how many and what sort of ships he has. 5. But tell us what you were doing. 6. He orders the general to bring whatever force he has. 7. It is time to say what you think to be best. 8. Ask what he says to this. 9. There, alongside the road, was a spring at 1 which Midas is said to have caught 2 the satyr. 10. And to him Cyrus sent gifts that are regarded precious at court. 3 11. Here was a very large and beautiful park that had 4 (in it) all that 5 the seasons produce. 573. irpo, pro, before. irpo, prep., before, in front of, in behalf of; QpovpJ-s, 6 (for irpo-fop-o-s, cf. Space, watch over, see), one who watches in defence of, guard; cppovp4-u, watch, guard; cppovp-apxo-s, 6 (R. apx, 463), commander of a watch; ( ppovp-io-v, t 6, guarded post, garrison; irpo-Ttpo-s, -a, - o-v, comp., former, previous; tt poTtpa-lo-s, -a, -o-v, on the preceding day ; irp-£v (for npo-iov), conj., before, until; irpo-aw, by metathesis and assimilation t r6p-pw, adv., forwards, in advance, far off; irpooi, contr. irpcp, adv., early; -n-pw-To-s, -77, -o-v, first; TTpceTfv-ce, be first; irpav-rjs, -4s (for irpa-fa-v-ns), bent forward, headlong ; -irpcp-pa, -as, proic; npepp-ev-s, -4-ws, S, man at the bow, lookout. pro, prep ., before; prae, prep., before; pr-ior, adj., former; prls- cu-s, adj., of old; prls-tinu-s, adj., primitive; prl-mu-s, adj., first; por-ro, adv., forward; pro-nu-s, adj., bent forward; prl-uu-s, adj., individual, peculiar . FOK, FORE. " m LESSON LXXX. f First Passive System. Review the first passive system of Xvoo in 677. I 574. For modifications of the theme in vowel verbs, see 254 a b, 441 with a b, and 442. 1 iwl with dat. 2 Aor. inf. Cf. 356, I. 2. ' d 8 irapa dacriAe?. 6 irdvra 8cra. 4 Partic. of 4xco. FIRST PASSIVE SYSTEM. 221 575. Before -0e- a labial or palatal mute becomes or remains co-ordinate (114 a), a lingual mute becomes a. Thus : — (rpeir-), turn, irpe(p9r]V ] piirTw (pl(p~, pi (Ae 7 ~), say, iX^x^nv irpurTW (irpdy-), do, iirpax^v \ raparru (rapax~)i disturb, irapaxOv 1 ' > var too (jay-), arrange, erax9ri v ’ avayicdfa (avayKad-), Compel, T]vayKaa9T}v ; fiia^opai (0ia8-), force, e0ta- (a 77 eA-), announce, nyye\9r]v reivw (rev-), stretch, iradrjv \ Kpiva) (npiv-), distinguish, eicpid-pv’, 0d.\\cc (0a\~), throw, e0\-i]9r]v. 578. If v is not dropped, it remains unchanged. Thus : — alcrxivu (ai(rx vv ~), shame, rj (TX' ,v ® r l v > ’’repaivoo (irepav-), accomplish, eVe- pdv9r\v ; (paivoo ((pav-), show , i(pav9r]v ; x a ^ 67rat,/co (x a Xeirav-) , be angry, e’xa- A € 7 tK,eiv, d\V hrepekelro 6 tl rroaqaei fiacri - Aeu?. 20. heekevere Be rov 9 ^EXA^z/a?, &>? z/o/ao? 4 avroh eh piayTjv, ovreo raydrjvai • eraydrjcrav ovv €7rl rerrapcov. II. 1. I was compelled to pursue. 2. And corselets will be furnished them. 3. But the soldiers were sent to 5 the king. 4. The Greek cavalry were routed. 5. And Clearchus was excessively troubled. 6. But the baggage was thrown into the river. 7. How should we best make an advance ? 8. They advanced four stages in this manner. 6 9. We felt ashamed before both gods and men 7 to abandon them. 10. The soldiers were drawn up 8 and forced to proceed. 11. But the command¬ ers were persuaded by the general to send the captives away. 12. But the enemy fled in fear 9 that they would be shut off. 13. If these should be worsted, nobody would be left. 14. And he enjoins on these to send him 10 the money, if he himself safely escapes. 1 Cf. 356, I. 11. 6 Dat. of rpSiros. Cf. 305, I. 16. 2 Cf. 572, I. 8. 7 cf 479, I. 10. 8 See 354. 8 A or. partic. 4 Sc. eo-riv. 9 Aor. partic. of 5dda>. See 379. 6 ws. See the Greek-Eng. Vocal?. 10 g ee 528 . VEBBAL ADJECTIVES. 223 580. R. s, 77, scarceness , Jac& (‘straining’); airdv-io-s , -a, -o-v, scanty ; o-iravifa, lack , need; irev-o-jiai (for aire-v-o-fiai), strain or exert oneself toil, be poor ; ircv-Cd, -as, poverty ; -jjt-os, 6 , day-labourer , poor man; ireiva, - 77 s (for irev-ta), hunger , famine; *eivd-u>,be hungry; iro'v-o-s, 0 , labour; ivi-irovo-s , - 0 - 1 /, laborious , painful; novi-ca, work hard; irovr]-p6-s, -a, -6-v, troublesome, bad; vov-npus, adv., nnY/i difficulty; ■nap.-irdvripo-s, -o-v (iras, 544), wholly bad; •ird-crx.-w (for na-d-aK-u )'), be drawn tight , experience , suffer; ttclG-os, -e-os, to', expe¬ rience, accident; d-nadps, -is, without experience of free from; ^So-xa^s, -es (^5os, pleasant ), experiencing pleasure; ^hviradi-u, live pleasantly , 6e luxurious ; irddrj-^a, -ar-os, to', anything that is experienced , misfortune. spa-t-iu-m, -i, n., space, room; pa-ti-o-r, 6ear, suffer; spe-s, spei, /*., hope; pro-spe-r-u-s, ad?\, according to hope , favourable; pen-ur-ia, -ae, f, destitution; pann-u-s, -I, m., piece 0 / cloth; pal-la, -ae, f, mantle. SPAN, SPIN, SPINDLE, SPIDER, SPEED, SPADE, Spasm, pathos, aiiO- pathy, iiomoeo-pathy, anii-pathy, a-pathy, s?/m-pathy. LESSON LXXXI. Verbal Adjectives. 581. Verbal adjectives are derived from the themes of verbs and are generally equivalent to passive participles in meaning. Their stems are formed by adding the suffixes -7-0- and -T 60 - to the theme. Thus Av-to-s, Av-tt}, Av-to-p, loosed, capable of being loosed, Av-re'o-s, Av-rea, Av-rco-p, to be loosed. 582. The theme has the same form as in the first aorist passive, but a final rough mute is made smooth before -to? and and -reo?, i.e. it becomes co-ordinate (114a). Thus: — Troiect), do, first aor. pass. iiroL^dnv, verbal iroiririos ; iropevopai, advance, eiropevdrjv, iropevrios 7re'p7ro>, send, iirip.(pQy} v y TrefJLTrrios ) dav/xdfa, wonder at, idavpaadrjv, Oaupaards ; Treida), persuade , mid. obey , iirelcrOnv, ire tarios ; 5 ictiKw, pursue, iStcox^vr, Siooktcos ; aAAarTcw, change, rjWdxOyv, aWaKTeos ; \iycc, say , 4\ex9r)t'i A curios J dpiirrca , dig, wpvxOyv, opvKrds. Examine the following: — dAAat vrjes /x€ra7re/x7TTeat eio-ip, other ships must be sent for. u>, think, believe; 8ok-i|ao-s, -o-v, approved; doKi/uafa, test, examine ; hom^a-aid, -as, test, examination. dec-et, impers., it is seemly, it behooves; dec-us, -or-is, n., grace, glory ; dec-or, - or-is , m., comeliness; decor-u-s, adj., seemly ; dlg-nu-s, adj., worthy. dogma, doxo -logy, hetero- dox, ortho- dox, para- dox. 1 in the nick of time. Sc. xp^ov. 5 Every measure must be taken , 2 Use the neut. plur. i.e. we must do everything. 6 Cf. I. 8 above. 7 Cf. 373, I. 6. 226 SECOND PASSIVE SYSTEM. LESSON LXXXII. Second Passive System. Review 437, 438, 489. 587. The stem of the second aorist passive is formed by adding the tense-suffix -e- to the theme. This suffix is length¬ ened to - 7 ]- throughout the indicative, and in the other moods before a single consonant in the ending. As a secondary tense the second aorist passive has augment in the indicative. It has the inflexion of the first aorist passive. 588. The second future passive adds -o-°/ e . to the stem of the second aorist passive, with the tense-suffix -e- lengthened to -rj-. It has the inflexion of the first future passive. Conjugate the second passive system of crre'AAw in 688. a. An e in the theme generally becomes a. Conjugate also the second passive system of any of the verbs given below. 589. The following verbs of the first four classes occur in the second passive system. 7 pacpci) (jypx(p-), write, iypd in the sense of gather , count , is used only in compounds in Attic prose. In the sense of say (‘tell off’ one’s words, tell) it has the first aor. pass. 2 Usually in the sense of the mid., turn oneself, turn, with intrans. meaning. 3 See p. 166 3 . 4 See p. 166 2 . SECOND PASSIVE SYSTEM. 227 aWaTTv (aAAay-), change, yAAdyqv) (nrs'ipo) (< Tirep -), SOM), i(nrdpr)v ; (TcpaTTcu ((repay-), slay, iaepaypu ; ? avrois 67 reefidvr] ptef dXXcov. 2. /cat ol ^KXXrjves arrpaefievres els pLayrjv Trapea/cevd^ovro. 3. /cal tcom 'EAAr/z/coz/ /care/comjcrdv rives ev rep rreSicp. 4. 6t 7ro- pevOelr/ e7rl robs arpandoras, etcirXayeiev civ. 5. u7T6/o 7a/? r?;? Koopwgs yrj\.expos r) v ’> ^ °v dvearpa^orjaav ol dptefol /3aat- Xed. 6. errXrjyri biro rov ocfoSaXpubv (3ialcos • 7. r/ Opuos 8e teat Xe^ov, ecjorj , e’/c t/mo? 3 errXrjyrjs. 8. ou/c at> ec?7 Oavpiaarov el Sta/correir} rjpbdov r) cpdXay^-. 9. icfoavrj /covtopros oocrrrep vecjoeXr] Xev/aj. 10. eav oe tc 4 crcfoaXf), ov arravlaet roov (SorjOijcrov- rcov . 6 11. rrj 8e varepala ov/c ecfoavgaav ol rroXepuoi, ovSe rfj rpirrj. 12. ov 7 roXXco G 8e varepov ol Xo^ayol /cara/comj- crovrai. 13. emfiovXevei K vpep, /cal rrpoaOev rroXepbpaas KaraXXayels 8e. 14. /cal e/3ovXev6pteda auv rovrocs orreos av racfielrjaav 1 ol roov 'E XXrjvcov ve/cpol. 15. evravda ol rreXraaral e8lco/cov pte^pi ro Se^tov av Sieenrdprj. 16. rrplv yap 8rj /caraXvcrat s ro crrpdrevpta rrpos apicrrov, fiacnXevs eefodvr). 17. &)? S' ?) rporrr) eyevero, Siecrrrdprjaav /cal ol Iv vpov e^a/cbatoL els ro Sido/ceiv 9 oppujaavres* 18. el ptevrot 7 rXelovs crvXXeyelev, KtvSvvevaeiev av StacfrOaprjvat 7 roXv rov err paredptar 0?. 19. iroXXa 8e irpoftara /cal aiyes /cal /3oes 1 In compounds, the form of the second aor. is irrkdyriv, as iKirkrtTrco, strike out of one’s senses, astound , second aor. e^TrAdynv- 2 In the sense of the mid., show oneself, appear , whereas the first aor. pass. (578) has its regular pass, force, be shown. 3 in consequence of ichat, i e. why. 4 Cognate acc. with a(pakfi. Cf. 485, I. 13. 3 Cf 308, I. 2 . e Cf 470, I. 10. 7 The direct form of the ques¬ tion was, 7 r<£? h.v racpeiTjcrav. See p„ 104 u . 8 Cf. 487, line 13, and note. 9 Cf. 563, I. 15. 228 SECOND PASSIVE SYSTEM. II. 1. And those outside 1 were cut down. 2. If they should be reconciled, the war would come to an end. 3. Mithridates again appeared with a thousand horsemen. 4. You were not hurt at all. 2 5. How 3 he persuaded Cyrus will be described elsewhere. 6. The barbarians turned 4 and fled. 7. And the snow had melted 5 on account of the spring. 8. In the after¬ noon 6 a cloud of dust was seen. 9. The soldiers came together 4 and deliberated. 10. Show yourselves 5 the bravest of the captains. 11. They said that the companies had been cut down 7 by the Cilicians. 12. If the army should be scat¬ tered, it would be destroyed by the enemy. 8 591. R. \€-y, leg, gather. \ty-b), gather, count, tell, say ; A €k-t6-s, -l], - 6-v , selected ; aird-AeKro-s, -o-v, selected , picked; inl-XeKTo-s, - o-v, selected ; Ae/c-reo-s, -a, -o-v, to be said ; Xoy-o-s, o , word, saying, reason; ano-Aoye-o-/j.ai, say in defence; r) 6 KOpo?, eVz to) t?}? ’A prepuSo*; fieopod) Treiaas epee merra rraXov eSeotcds pool real eXa/3e9 7rap’ epoov ; real rav6' dopooXoyeo 6 'Opovra^. T/ ow, eef>r) 6 KOpo?, dSoKyOels vtt epoov vvv to rpirov eVz/3ouXeuez9 yuot ; e7 ret o enrev o Upovra? otl ovbev abi/cyt/eos, ypeo- 10 ryerev 6 K vpos avrov , 'O/zoXoryefc ouzz 7repl epoe a8o/co$ yeyevyerOao ; 'OpooXoycb , eeprj 6 * Opovra 9 , dvay/crj yap eartv. e’/e tovtov rraXov rjpedryaev 6 KOpo?, v Etz ow azz yevooo rep ipoep aSeXefxp nroXepooos, epool Se <^>/Xo 9 /eaz 7 tlcttos ; 6 Se arerepivaro, OvS' ez’ yevoopoyv , w KOpe, crot 15 7 ’ azz 7T0T6 eVz So^aopoo. 7T/J09 ravra KOpo? ez7re toz9 rrapoverov, f O /zezz avyp too- avra poev TreroLy/ce , rooavra Se Xeyeo • vpoeov Se erv rrped- T 09 , c5 KXeap^e, arroefryvao ryv yvevpoyv. KXea/ 0^09 Se ez7re rdSe • Xvpo/3ovXeveo eyed top dvSpa tovtov e/croSedv 20 rooelerOao cd 9 rayoerra, &>9 poyrero Sey tovtov epvXdrrecrOao, aXXa eryoXy rj ypolv rovs (f)i\ov 9 ezz irooetv. ravra S' eXe- fyozz zeal oz aXXoz. /zeTa ravra e\a/3ov tt/s £(ovr)<; roi ’O povrav eVz Oavarco airavres • ezra Se iljfjyov avrov 230 REVIEW OF GROUPS.—READING LESSON. ol TeTay/jbevoL. eVet 8e eo? rrjv ’Aprairarov cr/crjvrjv elarj- 25 yQr\ tov TuaroraTov tcov K vpou atcigirTov^wv, /nera ravra ovre ^oovtcl ’Opovrav ovtg TeOvrj/cora ovBels elSe 7rco7roT€ • ra0o? 8e ov8eb > irooiroTe avrov idvr). NOTES. 1. t L: cognate acc. —2. on ov8«v: sc. t)81k- qae from the preceding ques¬ tion. Orontas said, Ov8ev hYvrqcas, you did me no wrong. Like t'i above, ouSeV is a cognate acc. — 4. dSiKovfxevos: the participle expresses conces¬ sion (379). — said u Yes.' n — 7. Kal ravTa, this also. — 9. on ovSev a8iKTi0€is: sc. imdovAevei avrw from the preceding question, and compare oTt ovSgv above.—14. ovSe, not even. — o-oi' ye: the enclitic ye emphasizes col. — 20. Seri: for the mood, see 278. So if following. — 22. ttjs toovris, by the girdle , gen. of the part laid hold of. — 23. Iirl OavaTco, for death, i.e. as a sign that he was condemned. — 26. tcOvtikoto, : perf. partic. of OvrjcKw, die. — ovSeCs: see p. 202 2 . — ctSe: third sing, of the second aor. indie. el8 ov, saw. Translate the following passage into Greek : — 593. There was in the .army a certain Orontas, a Persian, who had already twice warred against Cyrus, but had been reconciled. First, at the orders of the king, he warred with him, holding the acropolis in Sardis; and afterwards he brought the Mysians together and ravaged his territory. Now he plotted against him the third time. Cyrus gave him 1,000 horse, and bade him check the enemy who were burning the forage before them. Orontas, thinking everything is ready for himself, writes a letter to Artaxerxes, saying that he will desert. By chance Cyrus got possession of this letter and arrested Orontas, and summoning some of the Persians and the Greek generals brought him to trial. He at once con¬ fessed that he had wronged Cyrus. On this Cyrus asked him, “ Are you willing then again to become my friend ? ” He answered, “Not even if I should become (so), Cyrus, should I ever again seem to you (to be that).” Then those present expressed each his opinion, and all advised Cyrus to put the man out of the way, as a traitor. After that he was led into the tent of Artapates, and nobody ever again saw him alive. VERBS OF THE FIRST CLASS. 281 LESSON LXXXlV. Verbs of the Variable-Vowel or first Class. 594. The present stems of verbs are formed from their themes in seven different ways. We therefore distinguish seven classes of verbs. 595. Variable-Vowel or First Class.—Verbs of the First Class form the present stem by adding the variable vowel -°/ e _ to the theme. See 440. 596. This is the most numerous of all the classes. The most of the verbs in this class are regular , i.e. they present no peculiarities of formation, but they may at the same time be defective, i.e. they may lack some of the principal parts. See 253 a. Review 254 with a b, 255 with a b. 597. Give the principal parts of the following vowel verbs of the First Class, all of which are regular and complete : — (3ov\eva), plan; 0€pcuretKo, serve,' Oroeino, hunt; KivSvveuoo, run a risk , dare ; ircuSeva), educate ; Traino, make cease ; kcoXvw, hinder. arra/rda), deceive; law, 1 permit; IpwTaw, ask a question; ToXpidco, ven¬ ture. atT€a), ask for; dKoXov0€, 2 seek; Kcmpyopea), 3 accuse; Kivew, move; Xvirew, grieve; voe'w, observe; 'iroXep.ew, fight; n-cvea), toil; eXew, help. d|ido>, think fit; £t)juo'oi >, 2 fine , punish. 598. The following are middle deponents (255 a) : — Stopeopcu, present , 8a>pT]cro|iai, €8copr)o-dp.i]V, SeStopripai. dcaopai, gaze at, behold, Gedtropcu, cOedo-apriv, T€0€dp,ai. KTaopai, acquire , get, KTTjo-opai, €KTT]crdp.r]v, k€ktt]p,(h. 4 1 See p. 83 8 . So eaco, iaaca, eiaaa, AaKa, eidfj.au, eiady]v. 2 See 121. 3 Augmented and reduplicated as if a compound verb. See 128. 4 An exception to 121, 232 VERBS OF THE FIRST CLASS. 599. The following are passive deponents (255 b): — dp.iXXdop.ai, contend, 4v0vp4op,ai, reflect , ^TTdojjiai, be inferior , dp.iXXr]Vopai,, 4v0vp,rjo-opai, TjTTTfo-opai, T]|xCXXr]|xat, 4vTe0vp.Tjfi.ai, TjTTTfpai, ijpi\\r{0TfV. 4vc0v|i.t|0tjv. T]TTTf0TJV. Review 441 with a b, 442. 600. There are some mute verbs of the First Class which present no peculiarities of formation, i.e. are regular. Thus : — 1. apx«, be first, begin, rule, mid. begin , apfjw ijp|a Tfpypai r(pX 01 l v 2. ppc'xw, wet , pass, get wet, 4'ppc£a PcPpcypai 4Ppc'x0T]v 3. 4X4 y\ T)\cy|a 4XijX€'Yp.ai 1 TjX4yx0 T lv 4. Xc-yw, say, speak, tell, relate , X4£co 4'Xe£a Xc'Xc-ypai 2 3 4X4x0t]V 5. o-ttcvSm, hasten, O’TTCVCTft) ctrircvcra 6. • Sc'xopai, receive, Scijopai 48e£dpt]v ScScypai 484x0tiv 3 7. cv'xopai, pray , ev£opai cv^apij v 4 9 8. 4>04yyopai, make a sound , shout, c{>04-y£opai 44>0c-y|dp,T]v 4'4>0ryp.ak 6 601. EXERCISES. I. 1. Kal ovSel 9 ert ov8apov Q i(f>6ey^aro. 2. ra 8ev8pa oi f/ E Wrjve? 6 ko7ttov , airev^ovre^ i/c rod ycoptov co? Taytcrra 'iropevOrjVcu. 3. rjv 7 8e Kal outo? Kal 6 ^ coKpari 79 tcov apo- (f)(ov Be roes gt par loot ais nrape/ceXevero • W A vBpes, vvv eirl rrjv 'EWaSa. vo/ii^ere apuWacrOaL. 8. Tlpo^evov /ca\ecrd<$ epcora el rravres enropevOi^crav eirl to arparorreBov. 9. /cal %ev0rj eBcop/jaaro (friaXrjv re dpyvpav /cal rd'mBa d^tav Be/ca pevoov? 10. 6edaaa6e old r) /caracrracres r]puv eerrac ttjs arpa- Tias. 11. /crr\Gopeai e/c rovrcov ovopea pueya /cal Bvvapuv pieydXrjv /cal ^p/jpeara 7 roWa. 12. rwv puev yap vi/ccovrcov to apyeiv , 3 rwv Be rjTTcopbevcov to BovXeveev eerriv. 13. dyo - pav Be rrapelyov tg3 gt parevpeari, /cal eBe^avro robs f/ E\\? 7 - vas> 14. peera Be rovro tt)v OvGidv rjv ev^avro 'irapea/cevd- £ovto. 15. t)v Be A a/ceBatpLovlovs re tovs rrapovras rrjs e^airar^s 4 rlpLCDprjG copied a 5 /cal rrjv 7 toXlv Biapirdawpiev , evOvpLeecrde a earai evrevOev, 16. /cal ol 'TTpeG^vrarot rcov GTparrfycdv ElevocfrtoVTa tjtlcovto , otl eBlco/cev enro rfjs right hand; 8e^6-o-ixou, take by the right hand, welcome; virep-d^io-s, -a, -o-v, above on the right , above. dig-itu s, -i, m., finger; dex-ter, adj., on the right, handy, skilful. toe, tongs ; dactyl, date (the fruit), pan- dect, dock-yard, synec¬ doche. LESSON LXXXV. Verbs of the First Glass (continued), 603. In stating the principal parts of a verb (253) the second tenses, if they occur, are given, either in place of the corresponding first tenses, or in addition to them if both occur. 4 604. Some verbs of the First Class, chiefly mute verbs, form second tenses. Thus : — 1. ay (a, lead, bring, oJ-oi r\yayov 5 r]X a u‘YK Lai r{x® T l v 2. alcove*, hear, axovo-opai 0 T|Kou c-ypatj/a yeypa£a 6 4'arya and 4 'arypai IwxOrjv 9. ir€p/irX a ir€}JL\|/W 4'irep.\]/a ir€Trop4>a ireireppai €Tr€pc|>0T]V 10 . (TTp4a 4'crTpapp.ai 7 4(TTpdT]v and 11 . Tpc-ira), turn, bend, divert, 4(rrpe0riv 8 Tp&J/a> 6Tp€\j/a and TcVpotfja TtTpappai 7 CTpairriv 40 and eVpairov 9 €Tp40T]V 12 . rp4w, nourish, support, 0p4\|/(i> ii e'0pe\|/a T£0pappai 7 €Tpd4>r]v and 13. Tptpw,i 2 rub, 40p60T]V 8 Tpf\|/b> 4VpI\|/a T^Tpicjja TCTpippai cTpCpirjv and €Tpt0TJV 13 1 The root of the word is a err. tirofjLCLi is for creTTOfjLcu J k: €coocf>cov. fJLevTOj, ej3ov\ero /coivf) fier avrwv ttjv Tropeiav r ,iroieiaOai , vo/jll^cov o#t&>? acrejoaXearepov elvat . 6 3. ravr 1 See p. 191 6 . 4 See 491 d. In tct r«/ca the 2 udeu takes the syllabic aug- theme irer- (me-) has the form mo-. ment. See p. 83 8 . 6 I.e. came to his senses. » See 491 b. 6 See 354. VERBS OF THE FIRST CLASS. 237 aKOveravres ol arpanoorai dopyl^ovro Icr^vpcbs tw K Xedpxp. 4. eVel Se avveyevovro aXXTjXois, eSo£e /cara ras Kcbpids dacfoaXh ? elvai 1 to? razees ctktjvovv. 5. Kay bo 2 3 Se, eZ t/i.et? eOeXere e^oppiav eirl ravra, eirecrOai vplv fiovXopiai. 6. o Se SiXavos SeSot/ce pur) yevqrai^ ravra /cal /carapLelvrj rj arparia. 7. icpeLTTovro Se rcov rroXepiLWV crvveiXeypievoi rives* 8. /cara- (T^iaopiev ras rrvXas, el perj e/covres dvoi^ere. 9. eyed S’ e’£e- rpdcfyrjv op^avos rrapd M rjSo/ccp rep vvv /3aaiXei. 10. evravOa eSofe Kpdriarov elvai rovs eiropievovs iroXepilovs (fooftrjcrai. 11. eiricrrevov piev Kypo> at 7roXeis eirirperropievai , irriarevov 0 ot avopes . 1^. 0 oe oy/e em pauvpuav erparrero, aXX arro rovrcov rcov %pypiarcov avXXe^as arpdrevpia e'rroXepiei rois %pq%L. 13. 01 Se arpancbrai avXXeyevres /3ovXevovrai el /card yrjv %pr) rropevOr/vai. 14. av ovv 1 rpos 6ewv crvp,fiov- Xevcrov i)puv 6 n aoi Bokci KaXXicrrov Kal apicrrov elvai. 15, Kal yap Brj ecos 7 roXepios rjv rois AaKeBaipiovlois 7 rpos rovs ’A Orjvalovs, rrapepuevev. 16. rjv yap ^rj^lacovrai eVe- a0ai, vjieis Bo^ere ainoi elvai. 17. Biair ejjnrcov eKeXeve rovs cfolXovs rois ra eavrcov crcopiara ayovaiv 4 Xrrnois ifi/3dXXeiv rovrov rov ^iXov. 18. Kal eBei rovs Irnreas ev rfj OaXarrrj rovs ittttovs dvaarpe^ravras 7 raXiv avco rrpos rov /3cofiov ayeiv. 19. aKovaas ravra Eevocfocov, KararrrjBijads airo rov 17T7TOV , doOeirai 5 5]c orrjplBdv eK rrjs ra^ecos. II. 1. Cyrus thinks Abrocomas will do 6 this. 2. And he endeavoured to restore the exiles. 7 3. Proxenus arrived 8 with fifteen hundred hoplites. 4. The other (things) he has divided up among the generals and captains. 5. Many days were wasted here. 6. Well, 10 if you like, stay in command of 11 the army. 7. It seemed best, therefore, to Clearchus to meet 1 See 354. 2 1.e. Kal See p. 55 4 . 3 Cf. 281,1. 1. 4 See 369. ‘Middle; See 197. « See 354, 350. 7 those that had been exiled (371). Use the perf. 3 Cf. 454, I. 4. 9 See p. 25 2 10 aAAa. 11 in command of, 2x1 with dat. 238 VERBS OF THE SECOND CLASS. Tissaphernes. 8. The Greeks pursued with might and main. 1 9. To me, then, it did not seem best to bring the soldiers together. 10. They encamped each time a parasang 2 apart. 3 11. But the soldiers did not open the gates. 12. And he inscribed upon 4 the offering both his own name and that of Proxenus. 13. But they were supported by the cattle which they had. 608. B. o-ex, hold, have. e'x-w (for crex- &>), have, hold; t-, holding out, unflinching , cruel; o-xri-pa, -ar-os, to, way of holding oneself, form; eXiirov X4Xonra XeXeipp.ai cXcC^Oijv 1 with might and main, Kara 3 being distant from (&7T€x«) one Kparos. another. 2 Cf 373, I. 11 . 4 ini with dat. VERBS OF THE SECOND CLASS. 239 2 . ireiOw ( 7 n 0 -), persuade, mid. obey, ire Co-co eireura ireireiKa and ‘ire'ireiarp.ai iren-oiGa 1 6ime(8op.cu (0t5-), spare, europ.cu e<|>ei€vYa) ( 0 i» 7 ~), flee, 4 >cv£op.cu and efjnryov irt^tuya eu£ovp. run , Oevcropai 5 6 2 . v&o (z/y-), swim, vcvo-ovjiai 4 evev pour, 9 k'\ea K€\VKa 10 Ke\vp.ai €XV0T]V 1 Intrans., with the force of a pres., trust. 2 See p. 196 K 3 Rare in Attic prose. 4 See p. 174 1 and p. 159 2 . 3 See p. 159 2 . 6 See 441 h. 7 The short form of the theme is used against the rule (503), hut is increased by e, as in some verbs of the first class (605). 8 Used in the act. sense, flowed. 9 For x evaa ' 0T]V 2. pdirra) (j8a$-), dip, dip in, paijsc* c(3ai|/a Pe'Pa|jLfxai 4pd<{>t]v 3. pXaTrrw (/8Aa/3-), injure, pXd\|/co c'p\at|/a Pe'p\a4>a Pe'P\afjL|jLai tp\d(j)0T]v and ipXdpT]v 1 Use the aor. partic. 242 VERBS OF THE THIRD CLASS. 4. 0dirrci> (tcc^-), 1 bury , 0d\|/o> 4'0a\|/a T£0appai £rdrjv 5. KttXviTToi) («aAuj8-), cover , Ka\v\|/b> €Ka\uv|/a K£K(xXvpp.ai £KaXv<|>0i]v 6. kX^ITTCO (/cA€7T-), steal. k\ei{/(D eKXe\}/a K£KXo4>a K£KX£pp.ai £KXdm]v 7. KOITTCO (/C07T-), CM£, Ko\]/a> tKOxJ/Cl K£Ko4>a K€KOfJL|XCU €KOTrT|V 8. kptJtttw (Kpucp-), hide , Kpv\|/a> £KpUxj/a K£Kpvppai £KpV0T]V 9. ptiTTw (picp-), 2 throw, pt\|/w 4'ppitj/a 4'ppla 4'ppippai £ppf0r]v and 10. £ppta 4'o*k appai £(TK(X )v 7 roXiv ol avOpwiroi. 5. dXX' eire/paro xprjcrOcu Tot? tcov drroicpv'jTTopievwv 3 % prjpLaaiv . 6. ivravO' im'Kt'Krei ytiov a7rXeTO?, ware drre/cpv^e /cal ra onrXa /cal rou? av0pco7rov <>. 7. aXX ’ i'jroiovvro yecf)Vpd<; i/c rwv (fyocvt/ccov ol rjaav e/cire - 7TTft)«:oT6?, tou? £e /cat e^e/coirrov. 8. al yap yvval/ces, ptirrovaai Kara rwv rrerpwv ra rratSla, elra /cal eavra 9 eVt- / carepplTrrov , /cat ol avBpes waavrws. 9. iljarrLvrjs yap dve- Xap.'^rev ol/cld ivrjpbpLevr) rco v iv &e£ta. 4 10. vpias yap eycoye, w Xeiplaocfre, a/covco rov 9 AarceSatpiovlovs 5 ev0u$ i/c rralhwv 6 1 See p. 166 3. 2 The theme is lengthened to pl(f)- in all of the systems except the second pass. Cf. Tpifiw, 604, 13. 3 Middle (197). 4 Sc. OLKicav. • 5 In apposition (p. 25 8 ) with i/mas. 6 from boyhood. VERBS OF THE THIRD CLASS. 243 /cAeirreiv 1 poeXerav? 11. /cal rwv ve/cpwv rods 'irXelarovs evQairep eireaov e/caarovs edayjrav. 12. a/ce^raaOe 8’ el ov rovro /cal powporarov lanv. 13. /cayw vpas rods 'AOrjvatovs 3 d/covw Betvods elvao 2 «Xe7TTetu 4 * ra Biffioaia. 14. aavovvrai l/cavol rffias wfaXeiv. II. 1. But the soldiers will slaughter the oxen. 2. I will consider what we must answer. 3. The Greeks had cut down all the trees. 4. He purposed to bury the dead. 5. The water did not touch the hay. 8 6. He gave orders to set on fire the houses on the left also. 7. But he himself stole the property that we earned by hard work. 8. They told us what had hap¬ pened, 9 and bade (us) bury the dead. 9. We must 10 either beat off the enemy or be separated 11 from the other Greeks. 10. For they hurled great timbers from above, so that it was difficult to remain. 11. After the (exchange of) pledges, straightway the Macrones helped in cutting down the trees. 12. They kept throwing 12 stones into the river, but 13 did the Greeks no 14 harm. 1 See 355. 2 See 354. 3 Cf. 10 above. 4 Cf. 572,1. 8. 6 Cf. 482, I. 14. 6 how (i.e. in what state ) they are. Cf. 305, I. 2. 7 Sc. Tivat. 8 Verbs signifying to touch are followed by the gen. 9 what had happened , ra yei>6- /j.eva. 10 Use ava-yKT]. 11 Use the pf. infin., and cf 553, I. 19. 12 kept throwing , use the impf., to express continuance, and cf I. 3 above. 13 Use ouSe. 14 Cf 601, I. 16. 244 VERBS OF THE FOURTH CLASS. 615. R>. poX, uol, will, wish. (3ov\-o-fiai, will, wish; PovX-if, -rjs, will, plan, consultation; im-BouA-f), - rjs , a planning against, plot; aufx-BovArj, -t)s, a planning together, advice; gv/x-BovA-o-s, 6 , adviser; BovAev-w, plan; PeX-T-ftov, - ov , gen. -ov-os (stem BeA-ro-), comp., better (‘ more desired ’); PcX-t-utto-s, -tj, -o-v , sup., best. uol-o, will, wish; uol-un-ta-s, -atis, f, will, choice; nolo (non uolo ), be unwilling; malo ( magis uolo), prefer. WILL, WELL, WEAL, WEALTH, WILD. LESSON LXXXVIII- Verbs of the Iota or Fourth Class. Review 464, 465, 466, 474, 475, 476, 477, 478. 616. The verbs of this class are very numerous. 617. The following verbs have themes ending in a palatal: — dXXd£« 1. dAXaTTw (aAAcry-), change , rjXXa|a Tj'XXa^a 2. KtjpvTTw ( KripvK -), proclaim, KTjpvgou €Ktfpv|a KCKrjpvxa 3. Kpa£b> (itpay-), cry out , eKpa-yov KtKpd'ya 1 4. opvTTw (opvx~) , dig, 6pv£pv£a opwpvxa 1 2 5. TrXrjTTco (jrAriy-), smite, ‘irXrffjco €irXr]|a 'ir€TrXr] , ya 6. irpaTTw (ir pay-), do, act, •irpd|a) cirpd|a ir€irpa*ya 4 and Trcirpdxa 7. TapaTTw (rapax-), disturb , rapa£vXd£co 4vXa|a ir€vXaxa rfXXa'Yp.ai ■qXXaxSilv and i]XXd'yr]v K€ KljpV'Yp.CU IktjpvxOtiv opcopvypcu "P t bt® T l v TT€-irXr]yp.ai iTrXrfyriv 3 Tr€Trpdyp.ai lirpax^'nv TtTapa'Yp.ai erapdx0T]V Ttraypiai 4tcix0t]v ‘ir£vXa-yp.ai cvXdx0ilv 1 With the force of the present. 2 See p. 209 \ 3 See p. 227h 4 Generally intrans., have fared. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CLASS. 245 618. The following verbs have themes ending in a lingnal: — 1. d0pcu£a> ( adpoid -), collect, dOpoCcrco r'0poicra rjOpoiKa rj0poicrp,at •q0pOlO-0T]V 2. dpird£a> (apwaS-), plunder, dpirdcrco ripiracra ■qp'iraKa rfp'iracrp.ai Tjpird (jdavixa 5-), admire, 0aup.dcrop.ai 2 c0aup.acra reOauptatca 40aup.acr0i]V 6 . vopd£a> (vo/xjS-), think , vop.iw 3 4vdp.icra vevo'p.iKa V€Vo'p.icrp,ai 6VOp,l£a> 4 (o-a>5-), save, crwcrco iVcocra crccrcoKa o-ta-wpai 5 and credT]v are formed on a theme cra>-. 246 VERBS OF THE FOURTH CLASS. 7. irtpcuvco (-repay-), accomplish, irepavw eir4pava ireircpcurpcu €TT€paV0T]V 8. (areA-) , put in order, equip, send, a£va> (av<3 !t)va irttjja'yKa and ‘ire<))curp.cu eav0r]v and aVT]V 2 * 4 12. 06£p« (cpdep-), destroy, 4>0epu) 60eipa €0appai 60apT]v 13. XaXcirafvw (xaKeiray-) , be angry, XaXeiravcS 4xaX«rT]va 4xaX€'irav0T]V 3 620. The following verbs have themes ending in a vowel: — 1. kcuo (nav-), burn, Kavco) eKavtra KcxavKa KCKavjiai 4ko.v0t]V 2. kXoo) (/cAau-), weep, K\av pcopteOd ere 7 roielv. 3. ravra Xefd? arreareuXe tou? ayyeXovs /ceil ervp avTocs X.eipLop opOioiq tol9 1 See p. 197 1 . 5 Equivalent to ol o-TpaTiwrai. 2 See p. 227 2 . See 371. 8 In the sense of the active. 6 Mid., be on one’s guard against , 4 Cf. 479, I. 10. with acc. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CLASS. 247 7 roXeplovs rjpas, /cal rjpels avncf)vXarr6pe0a. 9. e/c/cXxvov* cnv oi /3ap/3apoi /cal cpevyovaiv. 10. rj re aaXTriyi; icj)0ey- £ aro , /cal dXaXa^avres eSeov eirl robs avOpooirovs. 11. oi Be K apBovyoi 7 rvpa 7 roXXa e/cciov kv/cXco enrl rcbv opecov. 12. o Bb /carecj)vyev els to eavrov arpdrevpa, /cal ev0 bs iraprjy- yeiXev els ra oirXa. 13. * AXXecfrr), vpels, m avBpes arpa- rrjyol, tovtols drro/cptva (for Kpa-y-iw), cry out, call aloud ; Kpavy-Tj, -rjs, outcry. cal-o, call together; Kale-ndae, - drum , /., day of proclamation, Calends; con-cil-iu-m, -i, n., meeting; nomen-cla-tor, -or-is, m., one who calls by name; cla-mo, cry out; cla-ru-s, adj., clear; clas-si-s, -is, class. hale, haul, hal -yard; ec-clesiastic. LESSON LXXXIX. Verbs of tbe Nasal or Fifth Class. 623. Some verbs form tbe present stem by adding a suffix containing v to the theme. These verbs belong to the Nasal or Fifth Class. 624. This suffix may be -v°/ e .. Thus : — 1. SoCkvco (Sa/c-), 1 bite, 8rj|opai 2 cSaKov SeSiyypai ISrixtoflv 2. eXavvw 3 (eAa-), drive, set in motion, intrans. ride, drive, march, 4X<3 4 rjXacra IXrjXaKa 5 eXrj'Xapai riXaG-qv 3. Kapvco (nap.-), labour, be sick or weary, Kap.ovp.ai 2 * CKaptov K€Kp/r]Ka 6 4. irtvco (tt i-), drink, irtopai 7 eiriov ire-ircoKa 8 ireVopai eiroGrjv 1 Some verbs of this class length¬ en a short vowel in the theme, on the principle of verbs of the second class (492, 493), in other systems than the pres, and second aor. 2 See p. 159 2 . 8 ihavvw is probably for eAa-w-w, by transposition of v and v. 4 Formed similarly to the fut. of TeAe&j(p,159 3 ). Thus iXdaw,iXda},iXw. 5 See p. 209 1 . 3 See 507. 7 (610, 6 ). See also p. 159 2 . 8 The last three principal parts are formed on a theme 7 to-, as if there were a pres, now (cf. Lat. poto). The quantity of the final vowel of the themes (m-, no-) of this verb is variable. VERBS OF THE FIFTH CLASS. 249 5. tI|xvo> (reyii-), cut, T€(JLO CT€|JLOVand T€Tp.T]KQ, 1 T€T(XT](JLai €T|XT]0T]V 2 erap-ov 6. t£vw (ti-), pay back, expiate, mid. make pay, punish, 3 6Ti be hated or hateful, incur hatred, air-€X0‘na 7 rfXT]p.p.ai «Xri<})0t]v 3. Xav0dva> (Aa0-), 6 escape the notice of, mid. forget, Xiitrw t'XaOov X4Xrj0a XcXrjo-piai 4. p.av0av<0 (fxaO-), learn, |j.a0Tjo(3elro to airex^dvecrPai^ roh o-Tpcm&mu*?. 9 . ol Be aXXoi arparrjyol BiaXaxovres ra? /c(opid<; enropevovro e/ca- (ttol tov 9 eavTcov ex^vre 9. 10 . ovtol eh ^apBeis dt/covTO . 11. ravrrjv &e ryv racjipov flacriXevs enrolet , eireiBy enruvOd- vero K.vpov TrpoaeXavvovra . 5 * 12 . ervyxavov 3 Xeycov otl nroXXal /cal /caXal eXnrlBe 9 ypuv elcrt a(orr)pld<{. 13 . /cal n repl tovtcov vnre(rx 6T ° piot /3ovXevcrecr0aL. Q 14 . dXX ’ et/ca- r) Bidncovra 7 or^e Xocfray yevoptevot^ evOa eiroXtop/covvro ol r/1 &XXr}ve<;. 19. BeSot/ca yap ptrj, av dirai; ptaOcopuev dpyol £r)v, erriXaSdopteOa tt)<; oi/caSe oBov . 5 II. 1. I got a little 6 sleep. 2. A division of the hoplites happened to accompany 7 him. 3. And they will arrive at their tents about supper-time. 4. I learn that 8 the mountain is not impassable. 5. The king did not perceive the design against himself. 6. He marched through this plain four stages. 7. The envoys rode away when they had heard 9 this. 8. He himself rode up 9 and asked, Why do you summon (me)? 9. There Cyrus’s head and right hand are cut off. 10. I have promised you ten talents. 11. When he had ridden past 10 all, he ordered them to present arms. 12. When the general had learnt 10 this by inquiry, he took 9 the cavalry and rode forward. 629. R. iro, po, drink. iro-ro-Sj 6, a drinking, drinking-party ; iro-ro-v, t 6, that 'which is drunk, dnnk; ito-ct-i-s, -e-ws, f], a drinking, drink; av/x-irbcn-o-v, to, drinking-party, symposium; ? et? pid^yv Trapea/cev- acrpuevos. ev6a By n roXo? rapa^o^ eyeveTO • avrc/ca yap eBo/covv ol ''RXXyves /cal Travres Be ara/CTOi ? artylaiv eiri- 15 7 TeaelaOai. K vpos Be /caTairyByaa^ diro tov appcaro? iracn irapyyyeXXev 6^o7rXl^ecr0ai. ev6a By avv nroXXy cnrovBf) o-vveraTTOvro, K Xeap^os pcev to Be^cov /cepas tov 'l&XXyvircov e^cov 7rpo ( tlOcoj for rtdrjpL). Cf. icf)[\eL (245). b. For the contract forms of the subjv., see 241 b d. c. In the pres. imv. act., tlOcl (instead of tlOcOl) is formed as if from a contract verb in -eto. Cf. (f >tXa (335). d. The act. participles rivets (for tlOcvtC) and 6eioj3ov evOecr) rocs aXXocs . 8. ov/cerc e7rerc- Oevro ol 7 ToXefuoc rols f/ E XXrjcn, BeBoc/cores fir) airorfir)6elr)- aav. 9. /cal ev ra^ei Oepcevoc ra 07rXa dvefievov ol arparr)- yol /cal Xo^ayoc. 10. rovs fiev orcXiras avrov e/ceXevcre fieivac, ras dairiBas rrpos ra yovara Oevras . 11. rovs yap /cvvas rov 9 %aXerrovs ras fjfiepas BcBeacrcv. 2 * 12. ras Be fiaXavovs rwv (frocvt/ccov f rjpaevovres rpay/jfiara airerlOe- aav. 13. rots reXevralocs eireOevro, /cal aire/crecvav revas • 14. ravra crvvOefievoc rjplarcov ol ''ILXXrjves- 15. d/covcrav- T6S Bk ol 07ricr6o(f)vXa/C€S (prjOrjcrav efiirpocrOev aXXovs em- redeadae 8 rroXefilovs . 16. /cal rravcrdfievoc dfi/porepoc Kara ^cbpav eOevro ra orrXa. 17. /cal awrcOefieOa rr)V vv/cra , 4 rjv Xd/3cofiev to a/epov , to ywpiov (frvXdrreiv. 18. afia Be opOpcp rrapr)yyecXev 0 K Xeap^os els ra^cv ra o'rrXa rcOeaOac rovs r/ E XXi)vas> 19. 7 rdvras ovreo BcarcOels arrerrefirrero Mare avreo fiaXXov cj)lXovs ecvac 5 rj /3acrcXeL. II. 1. The hoplites grounded arms. 2. They feared that the Greeks would attack them during the night. 3. He will inflict punishment on them. 4. We will attack the enemy’s cavalry. 5. We ordered arms near the general’s tent. 6. They grounded arms beside the river. 7. I fear that he may take 6 me and inflict punishment on (me). 8. They set before them, 1 Cf. 308, I. 15. 4 Construe with -|u, give ; irpo-Vitiw-fxi, give over, surrender, betray ; TrpodS-rri-s, -ov, betrayer, traitor; /xi 8i8atrKw 5 6 (5t8ax-)> teach , e8£8a£a 8eSCSax.a ScSiScryp.ai e8i8ax0Tiv 4. €vpurK(i> (eup-), find, discover , « 9 ft €vpT| 0 TJ-UpOV T]VpT]Ka rjvptipai T)Vp€0T)V 5. 0vrf, although few of them have any inceptive meaning. 643 . EXERCISES. I. 1. avayvovs rr\v eiriaroXrjv ava/cotvovTai ^(o/cparet? 2 2. /cal L7T7roi rjXwcrav eis 13 ec/cocrt, /cal r) a/crjvr) eaXco. 3 . /cal TovTco aTreOaveTijv. 4. av ye ovre yiyvoocnceis ovre pie/avijaat. 1 The theme a\- has the form a\o- in all systems except the present. 2 See p. 83 8 . a is lengthened to a in the indie. edAwv and y\wv are of the -pu form. 3 Ind. iyvwv, eyvws, eyvw, etc.] imv. yvtodt, yp&TO), etc.] 3d pi. yvovrwv; inf. yvGjvai. Other moods acc. to 694. 4 See 441 b. 6 For 8i8o.x-(tko», x being dropped before r), a%LOL elat ra ea^ara nraOelv 1 ; 6. K Xeap- X°S> <*> dvBpe$ r/ EiXXr)ve<;, e^et ryv Bl/cyv /cal reOvy/cev. 7. real TroWoiK; €TLTpCO(T/COV /CO,l i/CpaTyaaV Tft ) v E XXyvcov yvptvy- rcov . 2 8 . twv 7 reXracrTwv Ti? avyp ’Adyvyai cjida/cet BeBov- Xev/cevat. 9. 'jravres ol cfeiXot /cal crvvTpaTre^oi airedavov pLaxp^evoL VTrep K vpov. 10. S evo(f>d)VTO$ s Be /caryyopycrdv Tives cf)dcr/covT€<; iraieaQai vir avrov. 11. /cal evOvs eyvcoaav irdvres on eyyvs 7 rov eo-rparoTreBeveTO fiacnXevs. 12. el Be tl aXXo fteXriovf ToXpidrco /cal 6 IBicorr 79 BiBaa/ceiv. 18. evOa By aTre/cpivaro K Xedvcop on irpoaQev av airoQdvoiev y ra oirXa 7 rapaBolev. 14. ovB' aXXo 9 Be twv 'ViXXyvcov ev ravry rf} pax ]7 67 radev ovBels 5 ovBev. 15. puera Be tov toov aXXcov Odvarov aTparyywv rlpbcopyOel ? vn to /3a(nXeco<; aireOapev. 16. /cal rcaiei fiaaCXea Kara to arepvov /cal nrpcoa/cei Bid rov Ocopd/cos. IT. e/c tovtov 'ire/parai M iOpiBarys BiBacr/ceiv &>? airopov eern crcoOyvat. 18. /cal avvayayovre 9 rov<; eaXco- /cora<; rjXeyxov ryv kv/cXw irdcrav x c opdv. 19. aXXa 'rroXXa ? 7rpo. 10 not rightly. 262 REGULAR VERBS IN -MI, itTTTjfii. 644. R. *yv«, gna, gno, know. ■yi-yvaj-o-K-tt, know, think ; ■yvti»-|i'q, - 77 s, thought, opinion ; yveS-jusy, - ov-os , 6, one that knows ; a-yv&pwv, -ov, gen. -ov-os, without knowledge, senseless; ayvw/jLo-avvr], -ys, ignorance ; o-vo-jia, -ar-os, t6 (for o-yvo-pa, with pro- thetic o-), that by which one is known, name; dvopdfa, call by name; hvopaa-ri, adv., by name; av-dwp-o-s, -o-v, without name, nameless; eii- covupo-s, -o-v, of good name or omen; vo'-o-s, contr. vovs, 6 (for yvo-fo-s), power of thought, mind; voe-cc, observe, think out; a-v6y-To-s, -o-v, not understanding, foolish; &-yvo-ia, -as, ignorance; ayvoe-w, not know, not recognize; apcpi-yvoe-oo, think on both sides, be in doubt; eii-voo-s, -oo-v, kindly disposed; evvoia, -as, good-will; €vvo-ik6-s, -y, -6-v, well-disposed; evvoiKus, adv., with good-will or affection; natti-voo-s, -oo-v (/ca/f0av0q0t]v and 0our0cura 647 . Verbs that form the present and second aorist systems by adding the personal endings directly to the theme (632) belong to the Theme or Seventh Class. The tense stems of these verbs, other than the present and the second aorist, are formed like those of verbs in -w. Thus: — 1 . t£0t]jjli (0e-), put, set, place, Otjo-tt €0r]Ka 7 T^0eiKa 8 TeOcipai €T€ 0 T]V 9 2. S£8a>|n (do-), give, cScoica 10 ScSuica SeSojuu 2 c 8 o' 0 t]V 3 . ayapai (07a-), admire, r| , yae? /cal ehrov on cbpa WKTO(f>v\aKa$ KaOiaravat. 9. koX €0acrav iirl tg3 1 dvvafxai, iiriaTapiaL, Kp^/xa/xa i ac¬ cent the subjv. and opt. as if there were no contraction, 8vvup.ai, dvval- (xrjv, 5vvai.o, etc. Cf. 691. 2 The intrans. forms are earrjv and eo-TTjKa. All of the middle forms also, except those of the first aor., may have the same intrans. force. 3 For an irregular (121) a-e-aT-qua, the rough breathing representing the first aXrfv, els rrjv ptd^rjv KaOtararo. 18. ael eycoye rjyapuqv rrjv arjv v? iSvvaro kclXXlgtcl. 15. aXX' ev eTno-TaaOcav otl ov/c diro- BeSpafcdcnv. 16. eftovXevovro oVcd? av kclXXlgtcl 8ia/3aiev . IT. /cal ovt 6 aveXecrOai ovre Oa^ai avrco e&vvapLeOa. 18. Ik Bk tovtov Kal ol aXXoL dvaGTavTes 7rvp ckclov Kal e^pf- ovto. 19. o Se epj'iupL'irXas airdvTcov ttjv yi/copurjv air err epurr ev. 20. 67 reo-TT] 6 KOpo? avv to?? nrepl avTov dpLGTOL ? Kal ei/BaipLoveaTaToi?. II. 1. And accordingly Cyrus went up on the mountains. 2. Chirisophus, the Lacedaemonian, rose and spoke as follows. 3. He halted the soldiers. 4. He advanced, halting now and then. 5. They kept filling the leathern bags with grass. 8 6. He mounted his horse and rode away. 7. They set the houses on fire. 8. He was not able to sleep. 9. You must cross the river. 10. He collected an army that he might be able to defeat the king. 11. And they raised them up. 12. But at that time these cities had revolted to Cyrus. 649. K. cTa, sta, set, stand. t-orTT]-|xi, set, make stand; o-Ta-ou-s, -e-cos, rj, a standing, band, faction; iirl-cnacri-s, -e-cos, t], a stopping, halt; teara-crracrc-s, -e-cos, r], an establishing, state, condition; , \v(opm, and A voipi, Xvoiprjv in 672. c. In the pres. imv. act., SetKvu (instead of Bcikw-Ol) omits -6l and lengthens the final vowel of the stem. d. The act. participles Scikvus (for SeiKwvrs) and Svs (for Svvrs) are inflected Sciki/u?, SetKvucra, Sukvvv, gen. Set kvwtos, SetKvutnys, SeiKvwros, etc. Compare the paradigm of Avo-as in 364. e. The second aorist middle does not occur. 651. Verbs that form the present stem by adding ~w~ to the theme belong to the Nasal or Fifth Class (623). If the theme ends in a vowel, the suffix is -vw-. Thus: — 1. 8 c ( kvv|jli (5 euc-), point out, show, S«(£w cSctga 8&ciy|xcu 48c(^9i|V VERBS OF THE FIFTH CLASS IN - vvfu . 267 2 . &€if‘Yvu|u (C^T -)* 1 5 oin, yoke, |€v|a» «^€^a 3. [ifryvviu (a« 7 -), 3 mz'ic, mingle, |j.f£u> e(u£a 4 . oXXvjw 4 5 6 (oA.-), destroy, lose, dXw wXecra 5 and oXoSXcKa 7 c5Xop.r]V 6 oXcoXa 5 . o|xvu|h (op.-'), swear, d|JLOv(i.ai 8 wpocra 9 djJuojJioKa 7 6 . < jrr{-yvu|u (Tra-y -), 1 /ix, freeze, cinjfja ireTnyya 11 7 . o*Kc 8 dvvv(ja (c/ce 5a-), scatter, (TKcSco 12 eo-K€ 8 av(o, bring forth , bear, produce, 4>vvi;Ka 17 ?4>vv 16 1 The theme is lengthened, as in verbs of the second class (492), in other systems than the second pass. 2 Rare in Attic prose. 8 The theme is lengthened in other systems than the second pass. Cf. Tpi&co of the first class (604,13), which has the theme lengthened in all of the systems except the second pf. and second pass. 4 For oA-vv/j. 1 , by assimilation. 5 The theme assumes e in the first aor. and first pf. systems, as in some verbs of the first class (605), but without lengthening (441). 6 In the mid. and in the second pf., the verb has the intrans. mean¬ ing, perish, be lost. 7 See p. 209 \ 8 See p. 159 2 . 9 The theme assumes o in all of the systems except the pres, and fut. (cf. a\iaKopai, 642,1), but with¬ out lengthening (441). 10 See 441 b. 11 Intrans., be fixed , be frozen. 12 Formed like the fut. of eAatW (624, 2). 13 For the last three principal parts, see 441, 441 a. 14 The first aor. is trans., the second aor., intrans. 45 See 442. 16 Intrans., was born. 17 Intrans., be born, be by na¬ ture. 268 REGULAR VERBS IN -MI, Bet/cvvpbi. 653. EXERCISES. I. 1. Gvpcpdyvvdabv dXXrjXov ?, /cal vikwglv oi ''EiXXrjves /cal Bbco/covabv. 2 . i/c 8k tovtov aXXob avicrravTCU) €7rc3ec - fcvvvre? oia iarlv rj diropia. 3. /cal avepcos ivavrio 9 eirvet TTTjyvvs tou? dvOpdoirov ?. 4. diroBeb/cvvvTab oi p,avT€L<; irdvies ryvoopLrjv otl ovBapbfj pbdyr) earai. 5. tou? avBpas avrov 9 0 C 9 copiWTe diroXcoXe/caTe. 6 . 7roWd tcoz/ viro^vybcov aircoXeTo vi to Xipbov. 7. BL/caiov 1 9 . II. 1. They point out the tracks of the horses to the sol¬ diers. 2. Hereupon he expresses his opinion. 3. They dis¬ closed their plan to the soldiers. 4. He wishes to show his justice. 5. I joined the king in your camp. 6. The wind is freezing the beasts of burden. 7. Let somebody express his opinion. 8. When he heard this, he sank down in 4 shame. 9. After him another stood up, pointing out the folly of the man. 10. For the seers declare that there will be a battle. 11. The peltasts are straggling from camp. 3 Their oath is, vyr/ai/ieGa. See 354. 4 in t6 with gen. 1 See p. 224 2 . 2 Causal. See 379. VERBS OF THE EIGHTH CLASS . 269 654. R. ivy, iug, bind. tvy-6-v, to, yoke; Siro-(vy-io-v, to, beast under the yoke, beast of burden ; gevy-vii-fH, yoke, join, fasten; £ev*y-os, -e-os, t 6 , yoke of oxen, etc., team; (euy-r]Ad-TT)-s, -ov (iAavvw, drive), one who drives a yoke of oxen, teamster; £evyr]AaT€-cv, drive a yoke of oxen. iug-u-m, -i, n., yoke; iu-mentu-m, -%, n., beast of burden; con-iunx or con-iux, -iug-is, m. and /., husband, wife ; blgae, -drum, f, span of horses; iuxta, adv., adjoining, near; iung-o, join. yoke ; sy-z ygy. LESSON XCTI. Verbs of tbe Mixed or Eighth Class. 655. A few verbs form the tense stems of their various systems (see 252, 490, 519, 587, 603) from essentially different themes. Thus: — 1. alpew ( atpe -, eA-), take, seize , mid. take for oneself, choose, cuprjcrco eI\ov 1 fjfpTjKa flpripai Tjpe0T]v 2 2. etirov (c7r-, ep-), said, 8 €ptO eiiro v 4 cIpi^Ka 5 el'pt]p.ai eppr|0T|v 1 3. *PX°f uu ( € PX*> eA v9-), go, come, T]\0OV 7 4\r]\v0a 8 * 4. l(r0Ca-yov eSri'SoKa 8 e8T]'8e(rp.ai 11 ■^8e'(r0T]v 5. o'paa) (opa-, id-, 07r-), see, cnj/opcu e!8ov 12 e'o'paica 13 and ccopapai and e'wpaKa ooppai W<|)0TJV i See p. 83 8 . i 2 * See 442. 3 The pres, and impf. are sup¬ plied by A eyw (600, 4), (prjfxi (348), and other verbs. 4 For €-fe-feiro-u. The theme ar- is for an original car- (p. 161 2 ). This is reduplicated (c/. 491 a) in forming the tense stem of the second aor. (490), /re-faro-, e-aro-, by con¬ traction eiiro-. 6 See p. 235 4 . The theme ep- be¬ comes pe- by shift of the letters in the last three principal parts. 3 See p. 166 2 . 7 ^A dov is for nAvdov. 8 See p. 209 1 . 9 The theme ed- assumes also the forms eSe- and eSo-. 10 A fut. formed irregularly with¬ out or. 11 See 441 a. 12 For e-pido-v. The theme *5- stands for an original fid-. 13 See p. 83 8 . edpaKa and ecopa- n£pa) (? BwcopueBa, /cal copiovs Bel /caracfra- yelv. 7. Tfl Be eTUTrjBeia coveiaBai Kpelrrov 11 e/c rr)< ? ayopas* 8. Aral ol ovoi TrpoeBpapuov. 9. che\#(mTe? Se Tpez? crTaOpLovs dcf)L/covTO 7T/509 to M^Sld? /caXovpievov 12 T 6 t^ 09 . 10. 7roXXoU9 Se irvpovs /cal /cplBas cfrepeL to 'rreBlov. 11. Tavrgv Bg rrjv irapoBov K vpos Te Aral crTpana TraprjXBev. 12. raOra S’ eliraov els rrjv eavrov %copdv dirrfXavvev . 13. /cpea ooz; eorBl- ovres ol arpan^Tac Bteylyvovro. 14. 7rporj /3ovXeadai 13 eXBelv. 15. evTavBa /cal tov ey/cetyaXov tov (f)OLvi/cos 7r pcoTov ccpayov ol GTpaTiu/Tai. 16. ov/c airoire- fyevydaiv • e^co yap Tpcrjpeis ware 14 eXelv to e/celvwv irXoiov. 17. ol S’ e/ceXevov avTOVs epL(f>ayovTas iropeveaBai. 18. to. 1 The theme assumes e (c/. 605). 2 Sometimes in the form evtjK-, with inserted nasal, as in verbs of the fifth class (626 a). 3 A first aor. formed irregularly without a. 4 See p. 209 \ 6 A second aor. of the -pn form. See 646. 6 See p. 83 3 . 7 See p. 251 K 3 Cf. 284, I. 11. 9 Of. 482, I. 14. 10 The subj. of iarrlv refers to to tinep tov \6€p, fer, bear. €p-w, bear, bring ; dia-cpdpco, bear apart , differ, part, dicnpepuv, -ovaa, -ov, differing; diacpepovrus, adv., differently from others, peculiarly, surpass¬ ingly ; op-d, -as, a carrying or taking; p.iado-cpopd, -as (puaQd-s, wages), wages received, pay ; 4>op-o-$, 6, what is brought in, tribute ; (pope-a, keep bringing, carry habitually, wear ; yeppo-op-€-u-s, -e-ws, 6, bearer, carrier; ap.8t) s, fragrant), have an odour brought to one , smell. fer-o, bear; fer-ti-li-s, adj ., fruitful; luci-fer, adj., light-bringing; for-s, for-ti-s, /., chance; f5r-t-una, -ae, f, chance; fur ,fur-is, m., thief. BEAR, BURDEN, BIER, ttf/ieeZ-BARROW, BIRTH, BAIRN J para-^iheTO.-alia, Christo- pher, dfa-phoretic, meta- phor, pTios-phorus. LESSON XCYII. Second Perfect System without Tense-Suffix. 659. A few verbs have second perfects and pluperfects formed without tense-suffix, after the analogy of verbs in -/u, the personal endings being added directly to the reduplicated theme. Thus, Zarapev, we stand, reOvaan, they are dead. Commit to memory the second perfect system without tense suffix of Zarypa in 697. a. The indicative singular is lacking. b. The participle ear cos (for e-ora-cos) is inflected eoTw?, eorwcra, taros, gen. eortoros, toruio^s, eorcoros, etc. 660. Other verbs have forms in the second perfect system without suffix. Thus : — 1. (3cuvo> (/3a-), go (646, 1), indie. Pe&an, subjv. £e£ S>air]v, imv. t edraOt, inf. t eOvavai, partic. redveds (with e for a, and uncontracted). 3. Se'Sia (8t-), fear, 1 8e8(.fjL€v, 5e5tre, 8e8i'aor, iSeSleiv, iSediffav, SUhjv. SeShj, deSlaxri, opt. 8e8ie'ir], imv. SeSiQi, inf. 8 eSievai, partic. SeSicvs. 661. Here belongs also the irregular verb in -juu, 618a ( 18 -, etS-), know, a second perfect with present force, formed without reduplication, the plup. (as impf.) being rj 8 r) or rjSav, fut. eio-o/uu. Commit to memory the paradigm of 618a in 698. 1 This second pf. with pres, force is related to 5ei'5a>, fear, first aor. % 8 ei to) v oevopcov • ow ^yap rjv dac^aXes ev rot? BevBpots ecrrdvai 7rXetov 2 rj rov eva \6yov. 8. o 3e Tou? 7rpoBLa/3ef3d)ras Xa/3cbv oi^ero. 9. /cal ravra 7 Touel BeBico 9 /i?) airoOavp 6 t 7 r 7 ro 9 . 10. el viro Aa/ceBatpLO- vlols yevotvro ol arpandiraL, 'iravros av rrpoearairjv 3 rov arparedpear 09 . 4 11. 07T&)9 Be elBrjre els olov ep^eorOe aydrva, eyo) vptas elBco 9 BtBd^co. 12. 7 rapecm Be 6 Garpdrrr i 79 /3ovXo- ptevos elBevai rt 'irpayOrjcreTai . 13. to) 8e avBpl TrelaopLat , 5 tm elBrjre otl /cal apxecrOai eirlarapLat. 14. avBpes arpa- ndyrai, rdbv ’ Ap/caBcov ol ptev reOvacnv , ol Be Xotirol eVl Xocjroi) rivos TroXtop/covvrat. 15. /cal C09 rrpoOvpborarots ovatv vpilv X^P LV °^ e KOpo 9. 16. /cal ^divras nvas avrdbv irpov- OvpLTjOrjpLev 3 Xa/3elv avrov rovrov eve/ca , 07r&>9 rjyepLoaiV 6 elBocn ryv x^pdv xpyo-aLpLeOa. H* eXOcov B * e/celvos Xeyet otl afei avrov 9 irevre ypeepdov 7 ec ’9 %a>pioz/ o0ez/ oyjrovrat 6aXarrav • ei 3e pty , reOvdvat e'rryyyeiXaro. 18. 0 3e pedvrus BeBtcos pey yevyrai ravra e/c/pe'pet els to Grpdrevpea rovBe rov Xoyov. 19. /cal eV tout&j tw XP° V( P yXOev 'Ap^ayopas 6 *Apyetos rrrecjievydbs, /cal Xeyet on redvaatv ol dvOpcoirot. II. 1. Tor we know where 8 they are gone. 2. I wish, to know how many are dead. 3. He wept a long 9 time standing. 4. But he at once drives away those standing round. 5. Cyrus kept finding 10 many pretexts, as you also well know. 6. For 1 Cf. 579, 1.1. 6 s e e 609, 2. 2 a greater number , the subj. of 6 Qf. 611, I. 8. fonfau. 7 cy 637, I. 2. ® See p. 251 h ® oVr?. ^ See p. 83 ». 9 Use ttoA^s. 0/ 614, II. 12. v 274 IRREGULAR VERBS IN -MI, fayii, el/JLt, elfu. know well that I should prefer freedom. 7. Know well that they will follow you and will try to imitate (you). 8. For he knew this. 9. Whether, then, I shall do what is just, 1 I do not know. 10. I am not willing to go, fearing that he may take me and inflict punishment on (me). 11. For you know that Xerxes has the middle of the Persian army. 12. They said that the generals knew this. 663. P. Fi8, uid, see, know. €t 8 - 0 -V ( t)|j.l {(pa-), say, fut. aor. etj^cra. Cf. Lat. fa-ri. 2. €t|xC ( co - -), be, fut. eVopai . 3 Cf Lat. es-se. 3. dpi (t-), go . 4 Cf. Lat. i-re. 4 elpu has the force of a fut., especially in the pres, indie., am going, i.e. shall go. 1 just {thinas). 2 See 483. 3 See 269. IRREGULAR VERBS IN -MI, (frypU, eipU, elfii. 275 Commit to memory the paradigms of (jjrjpi, 1 dpi, and dpi in 699, 700, 701. Review 348 a, 184, 185, 186, 187, 188. 665. EXERCISES. I. 1. dXX’ iCkia$ viropvrj- para /cal iriarew^. 11 . u/-zez 9 &e ou/c ^re et9 r?)z/ ydpav. 12. /cal ovSev 8 pevToc ov8e tovtov iraOelv ecpaaav. 13. ra Se 7rXoza 'Aj3po/cdpd<; irpocbov /care/cavaev , zW /lzt) K9j009 &za- (3alrj. 14. z/Oz/ /z-ez/ oz/z/ ccTtcre, /caTaXnrovTes rovSe rov avSpa • varepov 8e ndpeaTe 7rpo rjv f) /caraftacns yv els to 7 reSlov. 16. /cal eVel eadXircy^e, 7rpo/3aXX6pevot ra 07rXa eiryeaav. 17. /cal 01/ (fracrcv levac, eav pep TZ9 avTois %prjpara 8c8co. 18. ?}z/ 3’ dTro'ylry^iacovrac oi aXXoc, aircpev diravre 9. 19. TeXo? 3 e ez 7 T£, Kal vvv e^earcv vplv 7 Tiara Xa/3elv Trap ’ ypobv rj pyv (jnXlav Trape^ecv vplv 1 The partic. as is never used in Attic prose, but instead of this (pouTKoav occurs. 2 See 354. 8 See 354. The unexpressed subj. of the infin. (350) is the same as 5 Concessive use of the partic. See 379. 6 for going. Construe with ovk iyiyveTo, and cf. 524, I. 15. * See p. 83 ( 8 Construe with vadeiv, and cf. that of (final . In the phrase irpbs 601, I. 16. cicAvor, -rrp6s means against. 9 In apposition (p. 25 3 ) with 4 Cf. 560, I. 10. y wploi/. 276 IRREGULAR VERBS IN -MI, et/u, elfu. ttjv yurpav real a86\co€v etc., be; part. ecu, olaa, 6u, gen. out-os , etc. (stem out-), older form i-wu, etc. (stem e-our- for ea-our-); ova-la, -as (for ouT-iti), property (that which is), being, existence; i^-ovaia, -as, possibility, power (cf et-evri, it is free to one, it is allowed); avu-ouala, -as, a being together; er-a^w (from a stem er-o- for a-er-o-), examine, test (see if a thing is) ; e^-erafe, examine closely, inspect; e^ra-ai-s, -e-cos, y, examination, inspection, review; 4'r-v-jxo-s, -o-u (er-v- for a-er-u-), true, actual ; €t-oi-|ao-s, -y, -o-u or -o-s, -o-u (It- for a-er-), real, ready, prepared ; eroi/jcws, adv., readily; 4vs (for ea-v-s), real, true, good; neut. contracted as adv., el, well. s-u-m (for es-u-m), be, inf. es-se; ab-sen-s, adj., absent; prae-sen-s, adj., present; s-6-n-s, adj., the real one, guilty, criminal; er-u-s, -i, m., master, lord. am, art, is, are, sooth, sin ; etymo-Zogr?/, e\x-logy, ev-angelist. Note. — The group of Greek words is remarkable as showing in nearly all of the words a complete loss of the root. The Latin words all preserve traces of it. 1 Agrees with y/aas to be sup¬ plied as subj. of irape^eiu and aira- \eiu. 2 Use exoo. 3 Use air6. 4 See p. 63 3 . IRREGULAR VERBS IN -MI, %u, /cel/ACU, rjfiat. 277 LESSON XCIX. Irregular Verbs in -MI (continued), lyj/ju, Keifica, fjixca. 667. Other important irregular verbs in -/xt (664) are the following: — 1. foi|n (!-), send , T|'(ra> ifKa 1 cIkci 2 cIjAtH €i0r]v 2. Ketfxai (/cei-), lie , be laid , fut. Keuroficu. 3. ifjjLai (V-)? 3 commonly in the compound form tcdOn^ai in Attic prose. Commit to memory the paradigms of Lrj/u, Kei/xat, and KaOrjfjm in 702, 703, 704. 668 . EXERCISES. 1 Compare the first aor. forms of Tidriibu and d'ldwiuu, 636 e and 639 e. 4 Cf. 129, I. 10. 5 to a great height. Sc. 656u and 3 a of the theme is retained only in the forms ^ crrat , V™, and not always here. 2 See p. 83 3 . cf. 219,1. 6. 6 See 188 a. 7 Cf 106, I. 10. 8 See p. 224 2 . 278 IRREGULAR VERBS IN -MI, frjfu, Kelfiat, ti/jlcu. eavrov (TTpaTevcrafievov ?. II. 1. Straightway they rushed into the boats. 2. And many were lying outstretched. 3. But they let their dogs loose at night. 4 4. The snow concealed the arms and the men as they lay asleep. 5 5. If you will make known the one who let the ass loose, 6 you shall receive a reward. 6. But when the trumpet sounded, they charged upon the enemy. 7. They surprised the guards sitting about a fire. 8. He says he will never abandon his friends. 9. But having said, “ I see the man,” he rushed at him. 10. They let them go when they had served 7 breakfast to them. 11. The enemy were encamped in 8 the open road. 12. They were eager to intrust to him money, cities, their own lives. 669. Keifiai, lie. Kci-|iai, lie ; Koi-p,a-«, lay to rest; kw-jjlo-s, o, banquet (where the guests reclined); Kw-\n\, -rjs, dwelling-place, village (‘resting-place’); Kcvfj.-dpxv~s , -ov (R. ap\, 463), village chief; Kupv-Tri-s, -ov, villager; Kc5-p.a, -ar-os, to, deep sleep. ci-ui-s, -is, m., citizen; tran-qui-llu-s, adj., quiet; quie-s, -etis, a lying still, rest; quie-sc-o, keep quiet , rest. 1 See p. 28 h 4 ras vvKTas. Cf. 239, II. 9. 2 The intin. kuoOcu retains its accent in compounds, i.e. the ac¬ cent is not recessive. 6 See 371. 6 as they lay asleep, use the partic. 7 Use the partic. 8 Use iiri with dat. 3 Sc. avrovs as sub], of atyievai. ,«* r%- REVIEW OF GROUPS .— READING LESSON. 279 LESSON C. Review of Groups. — Reading Lesson. Review the groups of related words in 638, 641, 644, 649, 654, 658, 663, 666, 669. Review 140, 142. Read and translate again 630. Read and translate the following passage : — 670. K vpos. X. /cal ov/cgtl rpla rj rerrapa ardSia 8ceL^6Tr)v to) c f)d\ayye dir dXX/'jXcov rjvi/ca iiraidvi^ov tg oi f/ EXX?;z/e? /cal 7 rporjpyovTO dvrioi ievai toc? 7 toXgpllol^. co? S’ e’£e- KvpuaLve tl *n}? 'EXX^za/ci)? tydXayyos, to gttlXgl'itoplgvov 5 rjp^aro Bpopiw Oglv • /cal apia icf/Oiy^avTO irdvTGs olovirep tgo *E vvaXicp eXeXi£oucrt, /cal 'irdvres 8 g eOeov . nrplv Se ro^evpia e^ucvelaOai, i/c/cXivovaiv oi fidpftapoL /cal cfrev- yovai. /cal ivravOa 8rj i8ico/cov oi f/ EXX? 7 z/e?. Kz)po? S’ opcov too? r/ E XXrjvas vl/c&VTas to /caO ’ aoTOu? 10 /cal 8id>/covTa$, rjBdpevo ? /cal 'irpocr/cvvov pLGVo<; ij8r] co? (3acn - Xeo? vito to)v apicp avTov, ovo co? g^ij^ot] olgo/cglv , aXXa (TVVGaTrGLpdpLGVrjV G^COV T7]V TO)V GVV kaVTG) G^a/COGLCOV ittttg'cov Ta^cv g7tg^lgXglto 6 tl ttol^ggl fiacnXGVs. ooto? 8g pLGaov e^coz/ Try? avTov (TTpaTids opiws g^go e’yeWro tov 15 Kopou Gvwvvpiov /cipaTOs . eVel Se ouSel? auTco ipid^GTO G/C TOV aVTLOV , GTTG/CapLTTTGV CO? 6t? KVtcXWGLV. GvOa 8i] KSpo? iXavvGL azmo? * /cal ipiftaXcov ervv toc? k^a/coaioL^ vi/ca toO? 7r/oo /3acrtXeco? TGTaypiGVovs /cal ec? cfrvyrjv gt pGyjfGv. co? S’ z; Tpoirr) iyGVGTO , BtaaTTG/povTaL /cal oi JXvpov k^a/co- 20 crcot ez? to 8ko/cglv oppLTjcravT e?, 'irXrjv nraw oXcyoL apL<$> avTov /caTGXGL(j)6r]Gav. ervv tovtols 8g mv /caOopa fiacrL- Xea* /cat euoo? ou/c rjVGG^GTO, aXX glttcov Lov avopa opco , UTO gtt ai/Tov /cal iraiGL /caTa to GTGpvov /cal rLTpcoa/cei 280 REVIEW OF GROUPS. — READING LESSON. Bid tov 0(opa/co<;. 'kcliovtcl S’ avrov d/covri^ei t £9 7 ra\rS 25 vtto tov 6(f>0a\/jLov ftiaioo? • /cal ivravOa pua^opievoi /cal j3acri\ev<; teal Kt >pos koX 01 avrovs virep e/carepov , ottogol piev T(bv dpicfn /3ao-i\ed direOvya/cov Kr^crta? Xey ei • ol apiGTOi tmv Trepl avrov e/ceivro eir avrd). ovtgk ? ovv 30 ireXevTrjaev 6 K vpo<;, NOTES. 3. 4|eKvfj.aivE ti ttjs 4>aX.ayyos, a part of the phalanx surged for¬ ward. — 5. oloVrrep, just as. — 6. jrplv. . . e|iKV6i: Present System, § 672 282 Future System, § 673 . 283 First Aorist System, § 674 . 283 First Perfect System, § 675 . 284 Perfect Middle System, § 676 . 284, 285 First Passive System, § 677 . 285 ot8a: Paradigm, § 698 .. 298 ttcCGw: Perfect Middle System of Lingual Mute Verbs, § 685 . . 289 ot&Xu : Perfect Middle System of Liquid Verbs, § 686 . 290 Second Passive System, § 688 . 291 r t\ialvw: Future System of Liquid Verbs, § 678. 286 First Aorist System of Liquid Verbs, §679 ....... 286 Perfect Middle System of Liquid Verbs, § 687 . 290 «|>T]|iC: Paradigm, § 699. 298 281 282 INFLEXION OF VERBS. 672. Present System of \va> , loose. Active. Present. Imperfect. S. 1 Xva> e-Xvo-v 2 Xv£lS £-Xv£-$ o 3 > 3 Xv£l i'-Xv€ •rH D. 2 Xv£-TOV £-Xv€-tov o • rH 3 Xve-tov £-Xv€-TTJV d HH P. 1 Xtjo-fjtev £-XvO-^€V 2 Xv£-T€ €-Xv€-T€ 3 Xvovcri € -XvO-V Present. S. 1 XvG) % 2 Xvrjs CD £ 3 XVT| o PI D. 2 XvT]-TOV pi •1—5 3 XvTpTOV 2 ao P. 1 XvG)- [1€V 2 XvT|-T€ 3 XjjGKTl S. 1 Xvoi- (U . 2 Xvoi -s a 3 3 XtJOL . 5 : D. 2 Xvoi- TOV cc 4 ^ P-< 3 Xvoi- ■TTJV O P. 1 Xvoi- |i.£ V 2 Xvoi -T£ 3 Xv 0 l€-v S. 2 Xv€ a 5 > 3 Xvc-tio 4 ^ C 3 D. 2 Xvc-tov a; ft 3 Xv€-T«V a w P. 2 Xv€-T€ 3 Xvo'-VTCOV Infin. Xveiv Partic. Xv«v, -ovo-a, -ov Middle and Passive. Present. Imperfect. Xvo-fjiai I-Xvo'-iatjv Xv€l €-XvOV Xv€-Tai €-Xv€-TO Xii€-o-0ov €-Xv€- Xv6-o-0ov Xv6- Xv(ro-(JLai e-Xvtra £-Xv 3 Xv(T£l Xv • pH 3 Xvcrrj Xvo-t]-tch o C D. 2 Xvv Infin. Xv(T£lV Xli 3 XcXukc 4-XeXvKet XcXu-tcu e-XtXv-To c3 D. 2 XeXvKa-rov C-X€XvK€-TOV XeXv-o-0 ov 4-X4Xu-a-0ov O •rH 3 XeXvica-Tov 4-XeXvSC€ TT]V XeXv-cr0ov 4-XeXv-(r0i]V rt (—1 P. 1 XcXvKa-jjLev 4-XcXvKC -jJL€V XeXij-}ji€0a 4-X€Xv-fi.€0a 2 XcXvKa-Tc 4-XeXvke-TC XeXv-cr0e 4-X4Xv- • rH 3 XcXvkt) u T n o S D. 2 XcXvktj-tov XcXv-fjLevw (-a, -w) TJTOV 0 •r—i O 3 XcXvKTJ-TOV U •qrov 05 P. 1 XtXvKW-JACV XcXv'nevoi (-ai -a) eu|X€V 2 XeXvKTpTC u T]T€ 3 XeXvKaxn. (( cotri S. 1 XcXvKOl-|U XcXv-jjievos (-t|, -ov) tt'rjv 2 XcXvKOl-S U €tl]S • © 3 XcXvkoi u el't) • rH D. 2 X€Xvkoi-tov XeXv-|Ji^v« (-a, - w) cItov or ctrjTov ft 3 XcXvkoC-ttjv u etrqv ctifTi^v o P. 1 XcXvkoi-jxcv XeXv-p.6 voi (-ai, a) djJLCV €IT|(J.€V 2 XtXvKoi-re U ctT6 6l'l]T€ 3 X«XvKOl€-V u ctcv etrja-av S. 2 X4Xv -o-o © > 3 XeXv-trO© el D. 2 XcXv-o-Oov © ft 3 XeXv-cr0«v a i—i P. 2 X4Xv-o-0€ 3 XcXv-crOwv Infin. XtXvKC vai XcXv-(r6ai Partic. XcXukws, -KUia, -KOS XeXu-pcvo-s, -tj, -o-v INFLEXION OF VERBS. 285 Perfect Middle System 677. First Passive System of Xuco (continued). of \iw. Mid. and Pass. Passive. Future Perfect. First Aorist. First Future. S. 1 \€\v 3 \e\v(Ti -TCU 4-Xv0tj Xv0T| > • pH 3 Xv0r| o eJ D. 2 Xv0T]*TOV •r—i D 3 XvOtJ-tov 2 cc P. 1 Xv0ai-|X€V 2 Xv01]-T€ 3 \v0wo-i S. 1 X€Xv D. 2 XeXvo-oi-trOov Xv0£l-TOV or Xv0€U)-TOV X\j0t]'o-oi-cr0ov Gj •4-3 Ph 3 XtXv 3 XnO-q-Tto 4-> c3 fH D. 2 Xv0TJ-TOV a> ft 3 Xv0rj-Tavw avov-|xai €'4>T]Va €-cf>'qvd-fjn]V 2 cj>av€is 4>av£t £-<}>Tjva-s £-<}>r|va) © > 3 4>av£i-Tai €-T]V€ €-T]Va-TO D. 2 <}>avet-Tov av€i-Tiva-o-0ov 3 a,V€l-TOV <|>av€l-avov-|xcv avov-jie0a i-cj>Tfva-jji€V €-r]vd-|Ji.€0a 2 4>aV€LT€ <|>av€i-T]Va-T€ €-r|va-avovcrt avov-VTat £-TJVa-V €-<|>Tjva-VTO S. 1 4>rfvco <{>T)vw-|Jiai • 2 Tivr| • H 3 cJjTjvtl <|>ifvt]-Tai o P D. 2 T]VT]-TOV 4>rjvT]-T]VTJ-TOV TjVT]*O'0OV P m P. 1 -JJL€V t(vT]-T€ 4>T]VT]-Cr0€ 3 <}>T]V<«)(ri t]Vw-vTai S. 1 avo£r]-v oravot-|u <{>avo£-|AT)v 4>rjvai-p.i c|>T]vai-p.T]v 2 avoiT]-s avoi-s avoi-o t]'v£ia-s, r]vai-o avoir) cf)avoi avot-TO r]V€ie, (privai T]Vai-TO > D. 2 avoi-Tov c|>avot-r|vat-TOV rjvai-o-0ov P. 3 avo£-TT]v (j>avo£-o-0T]v 4>i]va£-TT]V avoi-|A€V avoi-}j.€0a r{vai-n€V t|u]vcH-fi€0a 2 avot-T£ avot-ri'vai-T€ T|vai-(r0£ 3 4>avoi€-v 4>avoi-vTO cj>r]V£ia-v, (fi-fivaie-v <|>T]'vat-VTO S. 2 rjvov <|>Tjvat CD > 3 4>T]Va-TW r]vd-r]va-TOV T]'va-T]va-rjva-o-0€ 3 T]Va-VTCOV <|>T]vd-o-0a>v Infin. av£?v av£i-cr0ai 4>ifjvai 4>riva-(r0ai Partic. 4>avc3v, -ovavov-jJi€VO-s (Jjrjvds, -cura, T]vd-Jl£VO-S. -ovv -■n. -o-v -av -T], -0*V INFLEXION OF VERBS. 287 680. Second Aorist System of AetTrco (Ai7r-), leave. 681. Second Perfect System of Aei7rw (aj7t-), leave. Active. Middle. Active. Second Aorist. Second Perf. Second Plup. S. 1 e-Xtiro-v 4-Xi'iro-|i.T]V Xe'Xoiira l-XcXofrirr] 2 c-Xiirc-s 4-X£irov Xc'Xonra-s e-X€Xoiirr]-s a5 > 3 €-\iir€ l-Xfarc-To XeXoi'ire c-XcXoiim D. 2 l-Xiuc-TOV I-XCttc-o-Gov XcXoCira-Tov l-XeXoiTTC-TOV o 3 i-Xlir^-TT]V €-Xnr€- •rH 3 Xtirjj XC7nj-Tai XeXofirrj o id D. 2 X£ttt]-tov Xi'inj-o-Oov X€Xo£ht]-tov P •r—i 3 Xiir»i-Tov Xun]- D. 2 Xtiroi-Tov X£irot- 3 Xiir€-T« Xmt4-o’0w c3 T>. 2 X£it€-tov X£ir€-v a HH P. 2 X£lT€-T€ X£ir€- T]TOV, etC. T€T€\€-cr-jx4voi <3 |x€V, etc. T€T€X€- eItov, etc. T€T€Xe-(J--|A€VOl fitfAEV, etC. TiTt\i- T€T€Xe-(r0ov T€T€X€-OT0-0ov XtXcijA-fxeOa Xe'XeI-0£ XcXcipi-ixevoi eta-C Pluperfect. e-XeXeCja-htjv 4-XeXeu|/o l-XeXenr-ro e-Xe'XeuJj-Oov €-X€XeC-0T|v IXcXeifx-fxcOa £-Xe'Xeu|>-0£ XcXetjJL-jJicvoi T]-0OV XeXe£(|>-0WV XeXekJj-Oe XeXe£<}>-0cov XfXficjj-Oai X€X€l|A-JJl€VO-S, -T], -O-V Future Perfect. XfiXfhJ/o-iAcu, etc. XfiXfixJ/of-jiTjVj etc. X£X££4f£-(T0at XfiXEuJ/O-fAEVO-S, -■»!, -o-v INFLEXION OF VERBS. 289 684. Perfect Middle System 685. Perfect Middle System of Palatal Mute Verbs: of Lingual Mute Verbs: & 7 &> (cry-), lead. vreidca (7rt0-), persuade. Middle and Passive. Middle and Passive. Perfect. Pluperfect. Perfect. Pluperfect. S. 1 T)y-fA(U j|'Y-Flv ire-imcr-p. cu €-'ir€im 4-3 D. 2 ■ifx-Gov Tfx-®°v Tr€ir£l-(T0OV l-ireim-crOov O 3 T1X“0OV TT€7rei-(r0ov l-‘jr€1T€£-O‘0T]V £ P. 1 Tj-y-ficGa T|Y - H L€ ® a -ir€7r€ior-p.€0a €-‘rr€'ir€i €^ T °v, etc. •n-€'im(r-|ji^vc 0 ctrov, etc. ft O P. ify-pivot eljxev, etc. ‘ircircicr-p.^voi etpicv, etc. S. 2 fa ‘jr€ , irei- 3 t)X-0co 'ireire C-o-00) c3 D. 2 •qX-Gov ireim-o-Gov f-( 03 ft 3 r(X-0wv irCTm-crGcov a hh P. 2 tfx- 0 « irejm-a’06 3 rjx-0wv Tr£ire£-(r0a)V Infin. ilX-0ai ‘irt'irct-trGai Partic. T1Y-|A€V0-S, -tj, -o-v ircireKT-ixcvo-s -rj, -o-v Future Perfect. Future Perfect. Indie. Opt. Infin. Lacking. Lacking. Partic. 290 INFLEXION OF VERBS. 686 . Perfect Middle System of Liquid Verbs: otcAAco (areA-), send . 687. Perfect Middle System of Liquid Verbs: (paivh) (< pav -), show. Middle and Passive. Middle and Passive. Perfect. Pluperfect. S. 1 €CTTaX-|Jiai 4(TTc£X-|ir]v 2 ccrraX-crai etTTaX-oro • 3 ctrTaX-rai tCTTaX-TO > •pH D. 2 e cr TaX-0 ov €o-to,X-0ov te o 3 €o-TaX-0ov 4cTT(xX-0T]V P P. 1 4av-0ov av-0ov •jr€d(T-|i.€0a Trc<}>av-06 Tr£4>ado--Jl.T]V Lacking. 4-1T€aV-TO 4-ir€<|>av-0ov 4-*ir€aV-0€ TT£4>acr-(JL€VOl rcav Perfect. ire^atr-jicvos cS, etc. 7T£<|)ao--p.€v(o tyrov, etc. •jr€a(r-(ji€vot cojxev, etc. 6 +3 C3 Pa O s. D. 4orTaX-fi.€vos €tt]V, etc. 4crraX-fi6vw cTtov, etc. ecrraX-fuvoi ctficv, etc. • pH fH a S. 2 3 D. 2 3 P. 2 3 tv ir€a(r-|x4voi etfiev, etc. Lacking. *ir€dv-0a> 7T€cf)Q.V-0OV ir£dv-0ft>v ir€av-06 ir€dv-0a)v Infin. Partic. 4crTc£X-0at 4a*TaX-ji€vo-s -tj, -o-v Future Perfect. Tr€<|>dv-0ai ir€(j)ao--fi€vo-s, -rj, -o-v Future Perfect. Indie. Opt. Infin. Partic. Lacking. Lacking. INFLEXION OF VERBS. 291 688. Second Passive System of ( 3 crraXeiT] 3 3 T£-0T]- 3 Tl-0€ -TO) Tl-0€-«T0O) •rH 4-=> D. 2 t£-0€ -TOV t£-0€-ot0ov f-i 03 1 3 TI-06-TWV TI-06-CT0WV P. 2 TI-06-T6 r£-0€-/u (5o-), give. Active. Middle and Passive. Present. Imperfect. Present. Imperfect. s. 1 Si-Sa>-|n 4-8 £-80 w 8£-8o-|xai £-8l-8o'-|J.T]V 2 8£-8a>-s 4-8£-8ous 8t-8o-o-ai 0 b 1 0 00 1 00 1 > 3 8£-8a>-ori 4-8 £-800 8£-8o-Tai 4-8£-8o-to • r^ ce D. 2 8£-8o-tov 4-8£-8o-tov 8£-8o--vTai S. 1 8t-8o£rj-v 81-801- Fiv 2 81-80ITJ-S 81-801- 0 • • »— t D. 2 8£-8o-tov 8£-8o-o-0ov ft 3 8l-8o-TCOV 8i-8o'-o-0cov a P. 2 8 £-80 -T£ 8£-8o-o-0€ 3 8i-8o-vtwv 8i-8o-v Infin. Partic. 8i-8o'-vat 8i-8ovs, -oficra, -o'v 8£-8o-cr0ai. 8i-8o-|ji€vo-s, -t|, -o-v 294 INFLEXION OF VERBS, Verbs in -MI. 691. Present System of (o-ra-), set , make stand. Active. Middle and Passive. Present. Imperfect. Present. Imperfect. S. 1 l'-0TT)-fW t-(TTr)-V i-crra-fAdi f-CTTa-flllV 2 I'-crq-s K-O-TTJ-S i-o-ra-trai f- 3 t-CTTTJ-O-l ^-CT-TTJ i-CTTa-Tai f-o-ra-TO •pH o3 I). 2 l-(TTa-TOV t-(TTa-TOV i'-(TTa- 3 SfilK-VV-OTl €-8€£k-VV te D. 2 8€(k-VV-TOV €-8€£k-VV-TOV o •rH 3 SfilK-VV-TOV 4-SflK-VV-TTjV a ►H P. 1 SfilK-VV-JlfV €-8€lK-VV-|JL£V 2 8£(k-VV-T£ €-8€£k-VV-T€ 3 StlK-VV-CUTl e-SfiiK-vv-o-av Present. S. 1 SfilKVVG) 2 SftKVV-QS > • rH 3 SeiKVVTJ o D. 2 SeiKVVTJTOV pj •r—5 3 SeiKVVTJTOV 3 m P. 1 SfiKvvcojjiev 2 SftKVvrjTe 3 SeiKvvcoci S. 1 SflKVVOlJAl 2 SflKVVOlS o5 3 SeiKvvot > • rH -r^> D. 2 8£IKV VOITOV a -1-3 P. 3 8€IKVVo£tT]V O P. 1 8eiKVvOl|A£V 2 SfilKVVOlTfi 3 SeiKVvoiev S. 2 SfCK- vv a3 > 3 SfilK- VV-TCO • rH D. 2 8 € £k- p o h 1 p p o P4 3 8filK- VV-TttV a hH P. 2 SftK- -VV-T€ 3 8€tK- -VV-VTWV Infin. SeiK- vv-vai Partic. SciK- -vvs, -vora, -vv Middle and Passive. Present. Imperfect. 8 €iK-vv-fiai €-S£lK-VV-fl,T]V SfiiK-vv-o'ai €-8££k-VV-0'0 SeCk-vv-tcu €-8€£k-VV-T0 8€IK-VV-}JICU StlKVVTJ SeiKVVTjrai 8€IKVVTJ 3 6-06-TO 6-So-to •rH 4-3 Co D. 2 6-06-TOV C-0€-O-0OV 6-So-TOV 4'-8o-o-0ov O • rH nd 3 6-06-TT]V €-0€-(T0T]V €-8o'-TT]V e-So'-o-Ot^v « t—1 P. 1 €-0£-[JL€V €-0£-|JL€0a €-8o-}A6V c-8o'-|Ji€0a 2 €-0€-T€ £-0€-OT0£ 6-8o-T6 €-8o-(T0€ 3 e-06-o-av €-0€-VTO 6-So-o-av 6 - 80 -VTO S. 1 0<3 0W-JJLCU 8(3 8<3-|j.ai . 2 0T) S etf 8 •rH 3 0rj-Tcu 8 tp 8(3-Tai g D. 2 0rj-TOV 0TJ-O-0OV 8c5-tov 8(3-o-0ov P •r—a 3 0T|-TOV 0TJ-O-0OV 8<3-tov 8(3-o-0ov H-! 3 02 * P. 1 0(3-|X6V 0 w-}i€ 0 a 8(3-JJL£V 8 (o-|jL€ 0 a 2 0rj-T€ 0 rj-o‘ 0 £ 8(3-t6 8 ( 0 - 0-06 3 0(3o-i 0(3-vtcu 8 ( 00*1 Sw-vtoi S. 1 0€(r]-V 0££-JJ.T]V 8 o£t]-v 8 o£-jjir]V 2 0 «£t]-s 061-0 8 o£t]-s 801-0 <33 3 06 Ct] 061-TO Soft] 8 oi-to .s D. 2 0 €i-tov or 0 €£t]-tov 0£l-O"0OV 8 oi-tov or 8 o£t]-tov 8 oi-o- 0 ov 4-3 ft 3 0€£-TT]V 0€lT|'-TT)V 0££-O-0T]V 8 o£-tt]v 8 oiT|-Tr]v 8 o£-o- 0 tjv o P. 1 06l-|A6V 06M]-}JieV 0£(-|JL£0a 8oi-(16V 8 o£t]-(JI€V 8 o£-[i€ 0 a 2 0€l-T6 0 €£t]-T€ 061 - 0-06 8 ot-T 6 8 o£t]-T 6 8 oi-o -06 3 0 eie-v 0 e£r]-(rav 061-VTO 8 oi€-v 8 o£r]-o*av 8 oi-vto 03 > S. 2 0€-S 00V 80 -s Sov 3 0 e'-ro> 06-0*00) 80 -TO) 8 ocr 0 o) 43 c3 D. 2 06-TOV 06-O-0OV So'-TOV 8 o'-o- 0 ov ft 3 06-TO)V 06-O"0O)V 8 o'-to>v 8 o'-o- 0 o)v a t—i P. 2 0^-T6 0 €-O* 0 € 8 o'-T 6 8 o'-o -06 3 0€-VTCOV 06-CT-0O3V 8 o'-VT 0 )V 8o-o-0 o)V Infin. 0 eivai 0 €'-o* 0 ai Sovvai 8 o-o* 0 ai Partic. 0 c£s, 0 £«ra, 0 £-v 0e-(i,6vo-s, 8 ovs, Sovcra, 8 o'-v 8o-|16VO-S, -TJ, -0-V -T 1 , -o-V INFLEXION OF VEBBS 297 Verbs in -ML 695. Second Aorist 696. Second 697. Second Perf. System System Aor. System without Suffix Of'l(TTTlfju((TTa-), set. of duw, enter. Of iarriixL (ara-), set. Active. Active. Active. Second Aor. Second Aor. Second Perf. Second Plup. S. 1 4'- 3 yt €- .£ 3 (TTXJ Svr\ ( « €- 3 (TTt|-TCO 8v-tw e-CTTa-Tco "el D. 2 CTTrj-TOV 8v-tov €-(TTa-TOV o> ft 3 crrrj-Tcov 8v-t«v c'-o’Ta-Twv a P. 2 cmj-T€ 8v-T€ c- CTTa-T€ 3 O-Ta-VTWV Sv'-VTWV C*-CTTa-VTCi)V Infin. (TTT]-Vai 8v-vcu c-cTTa-vai Partic. crrds, wt (<*>«-)» sa V • Active. Active. Second Perf. Second Pluperfect. Present. Imperfect. S. 1 otSa rj'Sr] or rj'Sav €<|>T]V 2 otrfs £r|(r0a or ecjnjs o5 > 3 otSe fl'Sci or TjSciv t] axov £<{>aXT]V M P. 1 fcrficv ■qo-jicv 4>ap.ev €a|l€V 2 l'(TT€ •n°-T« ax£ €<}>aT€ 3 Itrcwri ijo-av or 'pSecrav curl e'4>acrav Second Perfect. Present. S. 1 cl8w a • 2 el8r)s 4>T]S 0} is 3 cIStj 4>t i o D. 2 €t8l]TOV 4>rjxov •r-» o 3 ttSrjTOV 4>t}tov 2 00 P. 1 dSu^JLCV <|>c3fxev 2 etSrjTc <|>T)T€ 3 elSukri 4>(3afr)v 2 cIScCtjs <})atT]$ • as 3 ctSeCi] 4>aCr] £ +3 D. 2 clSeirov <|>atxov or <)>aCi]Tov ft 3 ctSeinjv a(xrjv 4>aiT]TT]V O P. 1 clSetfuv or e I8e v 4>at)ji£v CUT)|1€V 2 etSeiTC flSfitlJXC 4>aiT€ aiT]T£ 3 clScicv €lSeit](rav 4>ai€V 4>au]crav S. 2 fcr0i 4>a0C or <)>CL0L t> 3 to-Tw 4>axa> • rH D. 2 tcrrov 4>axov f-i a> ft 3 torrwv axa>v a P. 2 1axc 3 farTCOV 4>avra)v Infin. cl&vai (bavai <• 1 Partic. etSojs, c 18 via, elSo's, gen. ctSoxos, etc. INFLEXION OF VERBS. 299 Irregular Verbs in -MI. 700. efyu (e<7- ■), 6e. 701. ('-)> go. Active. Active. Present. Imperfect. Present. Imperfect. S. 1 el|i£ if or t]v etp.1 ■tja or rj'eiv 2 ct lijo’Oa d f[eis rfeicrOa o5 > 3 c • 2 XI s trjs o £ 3 7 T1 h o £ D. 2 rjTOV Htjtov £ •r-a 3 tfrov Xryrov £ CZ2 P. 1 cSjjicv I'cujxev 2 ? TJT€ Ht]T€ 3 cocri I'cocri S. 1 cI't]V Hoijn or toiTjv 2 cHt]s Hois • 3 eft] Hoi p> •1—1 4-=» D. 2 cHtov or cHtjtov Hoitov CS pH 3 €l'Tt]V 6tr]TT]V Io£tt]v o P. 1 ct|JL€V €l'T][X€V Hoificv 2 dre €fr]T€ HoiT€ 3 dev €\!r]o-av Ho icv S. 2 lV0i H0i a> 1> 3 € ft 3 € 3 i/ijo-i t'«i tVrcu fETO eIto • rH D. 2 IJctov ifeTov l£O*0OV f£(T0OV eItov e!o*0ov o • rH 3 forov t€TT]V ?€(T0OV l£O*0T]V eI'ttjv EUT0TJV £ P. 1 fc€|XCV tep.ev te|XE0a t£p.E0a 6i|X€V El|JLE0a 2 ?ETE t'fiTE SectOe f£CT0£ eIte eIo-0e 3 ido*i fco-av lEVTai ¥eVTO sto-av eIvto Present. Present. S. 1 t(3}X ai * CO (ofjtai • 2 % ? ns U © t> 3 tfi trjrai T) TJTCll •4-3 O £ D. 2 tfjTOv trj 3 KEtTCU EKEITO Ka0T]Tat EKIX0TJTO KaOipn-o • pH D. 2 KEICT0OV 6KEKT0OV Ka0Tpr0ov EKa0ipr0ov Ka0T](r0ov o • ^H Fa 3 KEUT0OV EKEMT0TJV Ka0r)cr0ov EKa0r| o CD b X * Ka0r] • pH D. 2 KEOKT0OV Ka0oto-0ov o3 4-5 Q. 3 K£Ol 3 KELCT0CJ Ka0r(cr0(i) • ^H 4-5 Co D. 2 KEICT0OV . Ka0T] ft 3 KEICT0WV Ka0T]'cr0wv a P. 2 K£l0T€pca: acc. dual, subj. of Trapeivai (350).—5. irapwv tTvy\ave, was , as it happened , (already) there. See p. 250 3 . — 7. liroCria-t, had made , aor. in a subordinate clause with plup. force. This use of the aor. is especially common after temporal conjunctions like ind, etc. Cf. ire\evTriC\ov: Tissa- phernes was in fact the bitter enemy of Cyrus at this time, and Cyrus probably made him accompany him because he feared to leave him behind. — 11. apxovra: in appos. with ‘Zeulav, which is the second object of —15. s shows that the purpose was that of Artaxerxes. —18. o 8e, but he, i.e. Cyrus. — 20. t[v 8vvi]rai: cf. 648, I. 3. — 21. Kvpco: see p. 84 h — 23. irapa PcurtXeoos, from the presence of the king , used attributively after raiv, the subst. for persons being omitted. The expression is brief. In full it would be Bans 5e tcov irapa fiaaiAzi (dat.) a(f>lKve?TO irapa fiaaiAecios (gen.). Cf. 494, 1.24. — 24. irdvTas: plur., because of the distributive force of Bans. For the regular agreement, see 568. — 26. Pappapcov : cf 305, I. 11. 306 READING LESSON. [jl€lv re IkolpoI etrjcrav Kal evpolkoo*; eyoiev avTco, TV)V §€ 'EWrjVLKTjV SvVCLfJUV TjOpOL^EP W? /xaXlCTTa 6 iSvparo ETrLKpviTTOfLEPOs, ottojs otl oLTrapaaKevora- 30 top Xa /3ol /3aSe ovp inoLELTO ttjp ctuXXo- yrjp. birocrds el^e <^uXa/ca9 ip tolls ttoXectl Traprjy- yeike tols (j)povpdp-^oLS eKacrTOLS Xa pfiaPELP apSpas HEXonoppyjaLOvs otl tt\elcttovs Kal /^cXtiotoi/s, cos ettl(3ov\evoptos TL(T(Ta(j)Eppovs Tats 7roXeo-t. /cat 35 yap rjcrap at *looPLKal ttoXels TLcraacfyippovs to a p- yCLLOP EK /3a(TL\EO)S SeSojU-Ct'at, TOTE S’ OL(f)EL(TTTjKE¬ LT ap npbs K vpop naaaL nXrjp MtX^rov. — 28. tos . . . ImKpwTo'nevos, as secretly as possible, lit. concealing his act (mid., 197) as much as possible (as most he was able). — 29. on airapa- o-KtvoraTov, as unprepared as possible (p. 172 4 ). — 31. v\aKas: the antec. is incorporated into the rel. clause (569). If the word stood in the princi¬ pal clause, we should have t&v (pvXaxuv, depending on typovpipxois. — 33. ws . . . iroXeon: on the ground that Tissaphernes was plotting against the cities. When a circumstantial partic. (379) belongs to a subst. that is not connected with the main construction of the sentence, the two stand together in the genitive absolute. The corresponding usage in Lat. is the ablative absolute. The partic. is here causal, and is shows that the reason is that assigned by Cyrus. Without is the reason would be given on the authority of Xenophon, the narrator. — 34. Kal yap, and (the reason was plausible ), for , etc., Lat. etenim. — 35. -qo-av ... to apxatov, the cities of Ionia had originally (cf. rb TpWov , 498, I. 10) belonged to Tissaphernes (cf. 361, I. 5). The impf. fjaav is used with to apxaiov of a time prior to the main action. — For the situation of Ionia and of Miletus, one of its chief cities, see the map. Review 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98 entire. Make a special study of the prepositions in this Reading Lesson (om', 20 ; a.ir6 , 6 ; els , 8, 13 ; 36 ; eV, 31 ; iiri, 17, 19 ; irapa, 23, 26 ; irp6s, 14, 24,37), carefully consulting the General Vocabulary. Note the case which follows the preposition, the meaning of the preposition demanded by the context, and the nature of its relation (98 a) to the rest of the sentence. It is sometimes difficult to state the last briefly. Prepositional phrases are without exception either adjective or adverbial. LESSONS ON SYNTAX. Introductory. 707 . Syntax treats of the correct arrangement (owra£is) of words in sentences. 708 . Every sentence must contain two parts, a subject and a predicate. The subject is that of which something is stated. The predicate is that which is stated of the subject. a. The subject is a substantive or an equivalent expression, with or without modifiers, or a pronoun expressed or understood. The predicate is a finite verb, with or without modifiers, or a finite verb followed by a predicate adjective or substantive. 709 . That upon which the action of the verb is exerted is called the object. The object may be either direct or indirect. The direct object is in the accusative; the indirect object is in the dative. a. Verbs which may have a direct object are called transitive ; those which cannot are called intransitive. 710 . An adjective qualifying a substantive is either attribu¬ tive or predicate. An attributive adjective is directly joined with the substantive without the intervention of a verb. A predicate adjective is connected with the substantive through the medium of a copulative verb. a. The term predicate adjective includes all adjectives and parti¬ ciples that are not attributive. 711 . A substantive which forms a part of the predicate and is connected with the subject through the medium of a copulative verb is called a predicate substantive. a. The verbs which serve to connect a predicate adjective or sub¬ stantive with the subject are the copula ei/xi, be , expressed or under¬ stood, and similar copulative verbs, such as those signifying to become , be named , be chosen , be made , be thought , and appear. 307 308 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. LESSON CII. Subject and Predicate. — Apposition. — Adjectives. 712 . EXERCISE. 1. 6(f>aLV€ro lyyr) av0pco7T(ov. 2. /cal e%et tt)V ’O povTov Svvapuv, tov T7)v fiaaiXecDS OvyaTepa e^ovro^. 1 3. ware to CTTpareupLa 'rrapuroXv ecjxivr). 4. ra d/cpa virep avTOV tov CTT paTevpiaTOS rjv. 5. ocra Srj iv Trj avaftacrei tt) pteTa K vpov oi r/1 EiWr]V6v r< p 7 rpoaOev Xoyop SeSijXcoTat. 2 3 6. TrjSe yap tt} rjpiepa^ pLVptovs o^jreaOe dvd ’ e^o? K Xeap^ovs. 7. K vpo<; eTretpaTo /caTayeev tovs e/cire- rTTTCOKOTa ?. 8. a/covco Se /coo peas elvat /caXas ov irXeov ehcocn GTaStwv dire^ovaa^. 9. TlapvaaTLS Sr] rj ptr)T7]p ecfrtXet tov K. vpov ptaXXov rj tov ftacrCXevovTa ’A pTatjepijrjv. 10. evTev- 6 gv e^eXavvet els K eXatvd<;, nroXtv oi/covpievrjv , peeydXrjv /cal evSalptova. 11. ayaOo 9 6 av/jp gcttiv. 12. e/crjpv^e^ Se tols f/ E XXtjo-l ava/cevd^eaQat. 13. /cal elSov tov<; Xocf)ov<; acrpte- vol. 5 14. iv Trj irpoaOev 7rpoa/3oXrj oXtyovs €%a)v 6 eiraOev ovoev. JLo. to o airXovv /cat to aXrjUes evopu^e to avTO too r/XtOto)^ elvat. 16. /cal to fiaaLXetov a'qptelov opav ecpaaav, aeTov Tiva %pvaovv. 17. 7rpo9 cncrjvrjv fjecrav tt/v Eevocfacov- TO?. 18. 'jraprjyyetXe too? (jypovpdp^ot ? XapLj3dveiv avSpas neXoTrowT/o-oou?. 19. eo? IT latSa^ e(3ovXeTO KOyoo? GTpaTev- eaOat. 20. Sea Se tovto 6 'rroTaptos /caXetTat M apavd<$. 21. eTL ovv av yevoio too ept oo dSeXtj )oo 7 ro\e/ooo?, eptol Se cplXos /cal ttoctto? ; 1 rod %x°vtos, him who has (371), 5 with pleasure. A predicate adj. in apposition with ’OpSvrov. is sometimes used in Greek where 2 The subj. of 5e8^A wtcu is the in- we should use an adv. or adverbial direct question oaa ... paxys (571 a), phrase. 3 Cf. 498,1. 5. 6 The partic. is concessive (379). 4 The verb implies the omitted 7 the same as (with) folly. See SUbj. 6 Kr)pv£. p. 115 4 . APPOSITION. — ADJECTIVES. 309 Examine in the preceding exercise the subjects of the finite verbs in 1, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 11, 19, 20, and note their case. 713. Rule of Syntax. — The subject of a finite verb is in the nominative case. a. The subject is often not expressed, especially when it is a pronoun. Examine 2, 6, 8, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 21. Examine the subjects of the infinitives in 7, 8, 12, 15, 16, 18, 19. Review 350. Examine the finite verbs and their subjects in each sentence of the above exercise, except 1 and 4, and note their number and person. 714. Rule of Syntax. —A verb agrees with its subject nomi¬ native in number and person. Now examine 1 and 4, and review 90. Examine the predicate substantives and adjectives and the corre¬ sponding subjects in 3, 11, 15, 20, 21, and note their case. 715. Rule of Syntax. — With the copula dpi and similar verbs, such as those signifying to become, be named, be chosen, be made, be thought, and appear, a predicate substantive or adjective is in the same case as the subject. Examine the first and second substantives in 9,10,16, and ’O povrov and tov 1\ovto<; in 2, and note their case and their relation to one another. 716. Rule of Syntax. — A substantive annexed to another substantive to describe it, and denoting the same person or thing, agrees with it in case. This is called apposition. Examine the adjectives, the article, the adjective pronouns, the par¬ ticiples, and the substantives (or pronouns) which these qualify, in 3, 4, 6, 8, 9,10,11,13,14,16,18, 21, and note their gender, number, and case. 717. Rule of Syntax. —Adjectives agree with their sub¬ stantives in gender, number, and case. This rule applies also to the article and to adjective pronouns and participles. Examine the adjectives and participles in 2, 7, 14 (SXtyovs, ovSev), 15, and observe that they are used substantively and generally have the article. 718. Rule of Syntax. — An adjective or a participle, gener¬ ally with the article, may be used as a substantive. 310 SUBJECT AND PBEDICATE. Examine the relative position of the article, substantive, and at¬ tributive (not only adjectives, but also dependent genitives, preposi¬ tions with their cases, adverbs, participles, and possessive pronouns, used attributively) in 2, 5, 9, 14, 16, 17, 21. 719. Rule of Syntax. — When an attributive adjective, or equivalent expression, qualifies a substantive which has the article, the order is commonly article, attributive, substantive , but it may be substantive, article, attributive. In the latter case the substantive may take another article before it. a. Dependent genitives often fail to follow the rule, and stand either before or after both article and substantive. 1 Examine the relative position of the article, substantive, and predi¬ cate adjective in 3, 11. 720. Rule of Syntax. —When a predicate adjective quali¬ fies a substantive which has the article, it never stands between the article and its substantive, but precedes or follows both. 721. EXERCISE. 1. And the gods are judges of the contest. 2. I will carry you safely over, if you will give me a talent (as) pay. 3. But the enemy on 2 the hill observed the march of the light-armed troops to 3 the summit. 4. Many of the foot- soldiers were slain in the pursuit. 5. And Cyrus said that the expedition was 4 against the Pisidians. 6. All urged Xen¬ ophon to go. 7. And she gave him much money. 8. The commanders are safe. 9. There is in this place a palace of the 5 great king. 10. Wherefore the king did not perceive the plot against himself. 11. Clearchus was a Lacedaemonian exile. 12. Cyrus at length determined 6 to proceed up country. 13. Cyrus remitted to the king the tributes that accrued. 7 14. He marched through Lydia three stages, twenty-two parasangs, to the river Maeander. 1 The gen. of the personal pro- 4 Eor the mood and tense, cf. noun, for example, always has this 712, 16 above. position. Cf. 517, I. 6. 2 67 rl with the gen. 8 67 ri with the acc. 6 See p. 144 8 . 6 It seemed best to Cyrus. 7 See 369. BEADING LESSON. 811 LESSON cm. Reading Lesson, 722. Anabasis I. i. 7-11. Cyrus lays siege to Miletus, with the intention of restoring the exiles whom Tissaphernes has expelled from this city (7). He ap¬ peals to the king in his contention with Tissaphernes, and thus de¬ ceives the king (8). Other Greek mercenaries are enlisted for Cyrus in the Chersonese by Clearchus, who makes this peninsula his base of operations against the Thracians (9). Still other Greek troops are enlisted for him in Thessaly by Aristippus (10), and in Greece, by Proxenus, Sophaenetus, and Socrates (11). I. ev MlXyrco Se Ticrcraffiepvrjs rrpoaicrOopevos ra 7 avia ravra fiovXevopevovs, arrocrrrjvai irpos Kvpov , rou? pev avrcov aneKreive tovs o egepakev. o be Kvpo?, imoXaficov rovs (f>evyovr a?, avXXe^as arpd- 5 revpa eirokiopKei Mikrjrov Kal Kara yrjv kcll Kara Oakarrav , Kal irreiparo Karayeiv rovs eKrrerrrto- kotcls. Kal avTTj av aXXrj npocfracrLs rjv avrco rov aOpoi^eiv crrparevpa. 7rpo? Se fiaepvei: with TvoXefxovvTa (cf. 274, I. 4). —13. cuStov: i.e. Cyrus, subj. (350) of fiairavav (354). —14. ov8«v, not at all (p. 70 8 ). — avTwv iroX.€- fjiouvTtov, because they were at war , gen. absolute. Cf. 706, 34, and note on 33. —15. Kal -yap, and (the more ) because , Lat. etenim. Cf. 706, 34.— 16. cSv: for as. The relative is sometimes attracted into the case of its antecedent. — 17. enryx a v€v «X wv i had (previously'), as it happened, possessed. Cf. 706, 5, and note. Tor the tense of iriyxauev, c/. ^dp.€vov c\av0av€v, was secretly supported J HEADING LESSON. 813 tov K vpov Kai aiTei clvtov €ls ol \ 5 O -\ / >/ k at rpuov prjvcov paauov^ w? ovtco TTepLyevopevos (p. 250 3 ). — 32. avrov, purGov: objects of a be? (p. 100 2 ).— els, for. The adj. phrase els . . . £ evovs and the following gen. qualify puadSu .— 33. cos ovt co ‘Trcpiyevopevos av, on the ground that (for ws, see 706, 33, and note) in this way he (Aristippus) would get the better of. irepiyevSyevos &v, if expressed by a finite mood, would be irepiyboiro &v, to which ovtw furnishes the pro¬ tasis (p. 104 10 ). — 34. avTicrTacruoTaJv: see p. 90 7 .— 36. avrov : cf. 356, I. 11. —prj: the regular neg. with the infill., whereas the indie, regularly has ov. — 37. Trptv av avuo a-vpPovXgvcrrjTai, until he should have consulted with him. — 41. cos PouXdptvos, on the ground that he (Cyrus) wished. Cf. 1. 33 above. — €ts, into the country of. — 42. cos . . . IIuri8cov, on the ground that the Pisidians were causing trouble. For the gen. absolute with d>s, see 706, 34. For Pisidia, see the map. — 44. ^evovs ovras Kal tovtovs, these also being his guest-friends, tovtovs is in apposition with ^oepalverov and 2a iKparyu. — 46. cos iroXtpTfcrcov: cf. 706, 16, and note. — ervv, with the aid of. Compare with this the preceding simple dat. Tiauacpepuei (p. 83 10 ). Make a special study of the prepositions in this Reading Lesson (dp^/, 12, 31, 36; ervv, 46 ; viro, 31) according to the directions given in Lesson CI. 314 PBONOUNS. LESSON CIV. Pronouns, 723. EXERCISE. 1 > »«• v Q « > / I \ \ \ »,»r/ . oo/c eg icrov, co plevoepoov, ecrfiev * x <70 yiteo yap e

evB 6 vds , /cat tootgo 1 2 3 Bcopuev clvtwv* apyvpiov , taa)? Ttoe5 (p>avovvrai tfcavol r/pas ox^eXeto. 6 . Xolttov piOL elirelv oVep tcaX pLeyiarov vopiifo elvcu . 7 . aXXoo tlvos 4 Set 777)05 rovrois ot 5 Xeyet. 8. ot arparn 7- yot, ot Sta TTLarews rot? ( 3 ap/ 3 apoLs eavrovs eveyeipiaav , 7 roXXa /cat /ca/ca rveizovdaGiv . 9 . 777)05 Se / 3 a< 7 tXe'a rrep^iroav Kopo 5 rj^Lov dBeX(p>os cbv avrov BoOrjvcu ot TaoTa5 ra 5 7 ro- Xet 5 * 10 . Ae^t 7 T 7 Toi/ Se /ceXeooo< 7 t Btaacbaavra avrois ra •Trp 6 / 3 ara , Ta p,ez / 5 avrov 6 Xafieiv , ra Se G(j)iaLV diroBovvai. 11 . 00^ copa earlv 7 )p!iv dpceXecv rjpicbv avrebvj aXXa / 3 oo- XeveaOao o n ^pr) nroielv e’/c rovrcov. 12 . aXXo Se arpa- revpua avrcp avveXeyero ev l^eppovrjcraj rf) Karavnirepas 'KfivBov rovBe rov rporrov . 13 . Kop05 rrapayyeXXei rQ> i ApiGTL r iT'Tr(p air o ire pity ai irpos eavrov o et^e arparevpia. 14 . <70 Te yap TAX770 et /cat rjpieis roaovrot 0 oore 5 00-005° <70 opa 5 . 15 . 005 000 ecopa eOeXovras /ctoSooeoeto, tootoo 5 apxovras eVotet ^5 /carearpe

ero ^copas. 16 . oyiceoo Se <70 1 The preceding pause prevents the recession of the accent. 2 I.e. the possessor of a sling. 3 /or £/tem, le. the slings. The thing bargained for is put in the gen. 4 something else. Cf. 508, I. 14. 6 t a yitev . . . ra 5e, some . . . £7iz> z'fii' aTro§ei'%6eLr) tlvcl %pr) rjyeiaOcUi ov/c av varepov fiovXeveaOcu rjpLas 8eoi, 19. el^e Se to pcev Be^cov Mevoov teal ol crvv clvtco, to evwvvpLov KXeap ^09 /cal ol e/celvov. Examine the subjects of the finite verbs in 1, 4, 14, 16 (erv), 17, and observe that they are all pronouns and are omitted unless emphatic. Review 514. Examine the uses of the personal pronoun of the third person and of avros in 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 12, 19. Review 515, 516. Examine the reflexive pronouns in 8, 11, 13, and note the subjects to which they severally refer. Review 528. Examine the uses of the demonstrative pronouns in 5, 7, 9, 11, 12, 15, 19. Review 540, 541. Examine the position of the demonstratives, with reference to the article and substantive, in 9, 12. Review 174. The rule applies also to oSe and ckcivos. Examine the use of the interrogative pronouns in 5, 17, 18. Review 558. Examine the use of the indefinite pronoun in 3, 5, 7. 724. Rule of Syntax. — The indefinite tU may be either substantive or adjective. It is sometimes nearly equivalent to the English a or an. Examine the relative pronouns and their antecedents in 8, 14, 15 (ovs), and note their gender, number, person, and case. Review 568. Examine the relation of the relative pronoun to its antecedent in 6, 13. Review 569. Examine the relative pronoun in 7, 15 (ys), and note its case and its relation to its antecedent. 316 BEADING LESSON. 725. Rule of Syntax. — When a relative would naturally be in the accusative as the object of a verb, it is generally assimilated to the case of its antecedent, if this is a genitive or dative. The antecedent may be incorporated into the relative clause. Examine the use of ocms in 11, 16. Review 570. 726. EXERCISE. 1. I am willing to carry you across. 2. Eor they are now themselves burning the king’s country. 3. But once the king’s army 1 invaded their country. 2 4. And beside these he had (those) whom 8 the king gave him. 5. But if anybody sees another better 3 4 (plan), let him speak. 6. And what sol¬ diers he himself had he commanded to follow. 7. Having persuaded his own 5 city, he sailed away. 8. But they at¬ tempted to induce him to return. 9. You neither love them 6 nor (do) they 6 (love) you., 10. He thinks the general sent back to him what army he had. 11. Cyrus set out with (those) whom I have mentioned. 12. He appointed the same man general. 13. They planned these same (things). 14. Who wounded Cyrus, the son 7 of Darius ? LESSON CY. Reading Lesson. Anabasis I. ii. 1-6. 727. Cyrus is now ready to set out inland. He collects his troops at Sardis, and announces, in order to conceal his real object, that his intention is to expel the Pisidians from their territory (1-3). The them. 1 a royal army. 2 threw, ( itself ) in upon {els') 7 The subst. vi6s may be omitted after the article, when a qualifying gen. is added. Cf. 161, I. 14. 5 Cf. 532,1. 2. 6 TTsp. c ir e T un c Use e/cetVos. 3 Use '6 re KXeap^o) XafiovTL rjKeiv ocrov rjv clvtco crrpdrevpia , /cat ra> *ApL(TTLnncp crvvaWayivTi npos tovs ot/cot cbro- nepxpcu npos kavTov o et^e arparevpa • /cat 3evia to) ’Ap/caSt, 09 avro) npoeicrTrjKei tov iv tcu<$ noXecn 10 feia/coi), rjKeiv napayyeXXei XafiovTa tov 9 aXXovs nXrjv onocroi Ikolvol rjcrav tcls aKponoXeis a 1. < iropcv€o-0ai: subj. of £8okci (352). — t-^v jjlev . . . PouXopevos, p'ave as Tus pretext indeed ( that he was going ) because he wished {cf 722, 41). fiev implies a clause with 5e, such as tt? 5’ aArjdeia eirl fiaaiKea eiropevero. — 4. s TrevraKoariovs, Tlacricov Se o Meyapeus TpiaKocriovs 25 yaet' 07 rXtra 5 , rpiaKoalovs Se 7reXracrTas nape- yeveTo 0 77^ Se /cat ovros /cat o Soj/cparys tcop dpcjrl MlXt)tov (TTpaTevopevaiv. ovtol pev els SapSets 4 avrft/ dfyiKovTO. Ticro’acjrepvrjs Se Karavorjcrds ravra, /cat pei^ova rjyr^crdpevos ett'at ^ c!>s e7rt 30 rttcrtSa? riyt' TrapaorKevrjv, rropeveraL cos /3acnXed fj eSvvaro ra^tcrra hnreds e\cov cos irevTaKocriovs. /cat ySacrtXeus pe^ S77 eVet rjKovcre Ticraafpeppovs 5 top K vpov c ttoXov, aPTLTrapecrKevd^eTO. object (569) /or which he was taking the field , he would not stop (p. 250 6 ) tm£i7 he restored them to their homes. —18, SapSas: see the map. — tovs ck twv TroXetov: for £k tu>v ivoAewv rot/s £v rats tt6As(ti. Cf. 706, 23. —19. dn-XiTas : in. appos. with tous £k tuv ndAeav. — ets: cf. 498, I. 12. — 23. w$: cf. 494, I. 23. — 26. ifv: cf. p. 232 7 . — twv (TTpaT€vo|iev€pvo\Js: gen. of the source. Cf. 498,1.1. NOMINATIVE , ACCUSATIVE, AND VOCATIVE. 319 K vpo$ Se e^cav ovs etprjKCL ooppaTo airo Sap- 35 Secov kcll i^eXavveu Sua tt)<; AvSids crTaOpovs Tpeis Trapacrdyyds clkoctl kcll Svo ini rov MaCavSpov noTapov. tovtov to eSpo? Svo nXeOpa • yicfrvpa Si inrjv i^evypevr) i tXolols. tovtov Sia/3a9 i£e- 6 Xavvei Sid <&pvyid<$ crTaOpov eva napcurdyyds 40 okto) els KoXocrcrds, noXiv oLKovpivrjV , evSalpova kcll peyaXrjv. ivTavOa epavev rjpepas inTa • kclI rjK€ Mevcov 6 ©erraXo? onXiTas eycov ^EXtou? kcll 7reXraaTafcei<; ovSe d/covcov pepvrjcrai. 3 . ol*to 9 5 c 5 avSpes, fiacriXev 9 eyeveTO tcov II epawv. 4 . 7ro- pevopevoc Se Sid TavTrp ; tt)? y^oopFis cifyacvovinai ini tov M dcncdv 7 TOTapov, to evpos 7 rXeSpialov. 5 . peivavTe 9 Se ravTTjv Tyv rjpepdv r-fj d\Xy 1 enopevovro. 6 . d\Xa pa tov 9 0601*9 ov/c eycoye avTov? Stco^co. 7. (TTpaTKOTds yap yrrjae 1 Cf. 167, 1.13. 320 nominative , accusative, and vocative. tov aaTpd'KTjv. 8 . TOiavra tov<$ e^Opov^ rjpcbv ol 6eol Trovfj- aovatv. 9. Sec tov o-TpaTioorrjv tyoftelaQcu paXAov tov ap'X'OVTa rj tow iroXeplovs, el peWet (f)v\a/ca 9 Ta^taTa 67 rl to a/cpov. 11. wcrre teal y^pijpaTa cri /vefiaWovTO avTao el<$ ttjv Tpocjorjv tcov 0i $€ iirelOoVTO. 13. direlxov Trjs XapdSpds o/ctoo aTaSlov 9 . 14. ’A pialos 8e, ov rjpel? rj0e- \opev /3a(n\ed /caOtaTavat, rjpas /ca/cov iroielv TveipaTai. 15. K Xeapxe teal Upo^eve, /cal ol aWot ol irapovre? ' y E Wrj- ve$, OVK L(TT€ 6 TL 7TO£6tT6. 16. TJCTaV $6 VTJ Ala /cal rjpOOV 4 ol eBeLcrav. 17. aXXl ov aTpaTrjyrjaco TavTrjv ttjv crTpaTrj- ylav. 18. /cal pe cjoevyovTa i/c tyjs TraTplhos Ta T6 aWa KO /709 eTiprjae /cal pvplovs eSco/ce hapeL/covs. 19. Trepdv tov T roTapov 7roX,t? (p/ceLTO peydXrj /cal evSalpcov ovopa K.atval. 20. lav be prj rjyepova &l8g), crvvTaTTobpeda ttjv Taxlo’Trjv. 5 21. ovtol rjpcoTCOv K vpov Ta 8o£avTa Q ttj aTpaTta . 22. ava- pvrjaco yap vpa<$ /cal tovs tcov irpoyovoov tcov vpeTepcov 7 /clv8v- vov$. 23. K vpov 8e peTairepireTat anro Trj<$ dp^yjs r }Aa/puytas oiKovpe- vr\v , peyaXrjv /cat evha'ipova. ivravOa K vpco /3a- cr'ikeia rjv /cat rrapciSeicros peyas aypiov Orjplcov 5 TrXrjprj 5, a iKelvos edrjpevev a7 ro lttttov , oirore yv- pvacrai fiovXoiTo eavrov re /cat rovs ittttovs. Sta pecrov hi rod napaSelcrov pel 6 Mataj/Spos 7rora- povyas i)(cov onXiTas ^tXtou? /cal 7reXracrTa5 ©yoa/cas o/cra- koctlovs /cal To^ords Kyo^ra? Sta/cocrtov?. apa Se 25 /cal Yohjis naprjv 6 2 vpaKocrios e^cov onXiTas ryota- koctlovs , /cal %o, /cal eye- vovto oi crvpnavTes bnX'iTai pev pvpiot /cat ^tXtot, c/! 6 MafavSpos 7 TOTajiis in 1. 7. —11. wo, under , the foot of. —14. iroSwv: c/. 498,1. 7. — evTaiJ0a . . . tas : c/. 517, I. 19. —16. Kal Kpepxurai, cmd tfo have hung up. Kpep.d Sovvai ^p^para 7roXXa. rfj S’ ovv arparta rore 30. d)i({>l tovs SurxiXi'ovs: cf. 498,1. 12. — 4vt cv0ev ... els rTcXrds : Cyrus now changes the direction of his march (see the map), probably with the double object of increasing his supplies and of getting on the main high¬ road to the east. — 34. rfo-av: irregularly in agreement with the predicate substantive arXeyyiSes, not with its subj. 50 a a. — 38. €VTev0€V . . . Tpia- icovra: these were forced marches. The object of Cyrus probably was to meet Epyaxa before his Greek troops became clamorous for their pay. — 42. irXc'ov: used indeclinably for irXeSvwv .— 43. IXir(8as Xeycov Sitj-yc, kept (Sirjye') expressing (or continued to express ) his hope (of paying them). — 44. SrjXos r|v avtw(x€vos : we should say, was evidently troubled. — ov -yap • . . airoSiSovai: cf. 640, I. 19.— 46. tov KlXCkcov (Bao-iXews : but above in 1 . 10 we have simply peydxov PaaiXws, without the art. See p. 144 8 . — 47. IXlyeTo Sovvai, she was said to have given. Cf. 11. 15 and 19. — 48. ovv, at any rate , i.e. however Cyrus got the money, he at any rate V •V. 326 GENITIVE CASE . aireScoKe K vpos pucrOov Terrapcov prjvdbv. el^e Si 50 v) KtAicrcra /cat <£i/\a/cas irepl airr^v KiAx/cas /cat 'AcnrevSiovs. certainly had it to pay his troops with. — Syennesis, as Xenophon calls him, was pursuing a double policy. He sent money to Cyrus by the hands of his wife, but at the same time he was endeavouring to propitiate Artaxerxes, being determined to keep his throne whichever of the two prevailed. Make a special study of the prepositions in this Reading Lesson (apupl, 30; curt, 5; Sid, 6, 9, 12, 17 ; els, 2, 13, 31, 37, 39; iv, 10, 16, 28, 33 ; 8, 18; €7 tI, 11, 42; irapa , 47; irepl , 16, 50; irp6s, 38, 44; vir6, 11) accord¬ ing to the directions previously given. LESSON CYIII. The Genitive Case. 742 . EXERCISE . 1. €7rl rat? /3aepvov? to dp^aiov. 23. rcbv Be M.evcovo? arpartcorcov %v\a ayiilfov ti? f^crt KXeap^ou rp aijtvrj • /cal ovro? ai/ToO rjpaprev, 24. tovtcov yap /coivcovgaavre 9 /cat 2 irpoflaTcov /cal dvBparrd- Bcov perea^ere, 25. 0 &e KaXXtp-a^o? go? opa avrov irapiovra ire Ckap$ aver at avrov rrj? tVoo?. 3 26. 7 ravre? y^/ 3 ovtol dvre- 7 tolovvto apery)?, 27. tovtov Be, go avBpe 9 , paBico 9 revijeaOe, 28. epcora avrov 9 et 7 rou fjcrO^vrai aWov arparevparo 9 . 29. tovtcov Be ovBel ? pepvrjrai, 30. /cat et? Kcopa ? 7ToXXgoi/ icayaOcov yepovcra ? r)\0ov. 31. BeBoL/ca yap prj eTrCkdOigaOe rrj? 01 /caBe oBov. 32. /cat twi; 7 rap’ eavrco Be /3ap/3apcov eirepekelro Kupo?. 33. 00 ^ copa earlv rjplv apekeiv rjpcdv avrcbv, 34. o tcoi/ ffapfidpcov cfyofio 9 7roXu? ?$i/. 35. /cpijirt? 0 i/Tn?!/ kiULvrj to yyo? et/coai ttoocov. Examine the genitives in 1, 2, 3, 4 (Ma/xrvov), 5 (raw Sta fiaLvov- roov), 8, 14, 15, 21, 23 (Mevtovos, trrpaTiauw), 25 (avrov), 34, 35, and note the nature of the relation which each sustains to the substan¬ tive, or equivalent expression, on which it depends. 743. Rule of Syntax. —A substantive in the genitive may depend directly on another substantive. This is called the attributive genitive and expresses various relations. Thus : — 1 (rwfvriveyiuLfva fjv, compound 2 aZso. form in the third sing., where , with wine (p. 47 3 * * 6 ).— 12. ... |idxi)v, as their custom (was) for battle. —13. onnrjvai, to take their READING LESSON. 381 n tj\ / . t N y \ur) 20 apparos /cat rj KtXto'cra evyov: i.e. ol iv rfj ayopa <£ep€TO Boa twv Ta^ewv iceva rjvLo^wv. 3. tovtov are ^rjXw. 4. rj Be oyjrcs twv ftaXavwv r/Xe/crpov ovBev Btefyepev. 5. p,a- Kporepov yap oi C P oBloi twv Yiepawv icrfavBovwv. 6. ovtco 7 repoyevoLTO av twv dvTiGTacnwTwv . 7. /cal 'iroXepLiov ovBe- vos /caTeyeXd. 8. tcl Be eirLTr}Beia yroTepov wveicrdai KpeiT- tov 1 etc Trjs ayopas rjs 1 2 ovtol irapeiyov , pl/cpa p,eTpa 3 ttoXXov dpyvplov , rj avTovs 4 Xap,/3aveLV ; 9. Btw^et yap ae aare- / 3eld ?. 10. epiireipoi yap rjaav tt)s y^wpas. 11. real 6 araTpdrrrjs p,aXa Ta%ews e£w j3eXwv (nreywpei . 12. K vpos 3’ ovv dve/3r] eirl tcl opr] ovBevos /cwXvovto tfcovTO els k do pas ttoAt \as 7roWuXaTT(ov tt^v €to-poXr(v: not with the intention of real opposition, hut to give colour to his asserted allegiance to the king. — 7. XeXonrws . . . ra axpa, had abandoned the heights. — wrct, since. — 9. oti, because. The order is, otl ^nove TapSov exovra (p. 250 5 ) rpi^peis irepiirAeovaas (369), because he heard Tamos was in command of the tri¬ remes that were sailing round, etc. —11. t&s . . . Kvpov: with rpiijpeis (719). —12. ovv, at any rate, i.e. for whatever reason Syennesis left the heights. Cf. 741, 48. — 13. Tas o-K^vas, the camp, antecedent to the relative adv. ov. — 4<|>vXaTTov, had been on guard. Cf. ^aav in 706, 35, and Myxavev in 722, 17, and notes. —16. epei: not the historical pres., but the pres, to denote the fact that was true at the 338 BEADING LESSON 20 crTaOfiovs rerrayoas 7rapacrdyyds irdvre /cat et/co- c tlv €t? Tapcrods, tt}s KtXt/ctas irokiv peyakrjv /cat evSat/tot'a, li^a ^ ra Svewecrtos ) 8 acrt- Xeta row KtXt/cctw /Sao'iXect/s • Sta pecrov Se tt)s 7 rdXeco 5 /Set noTapos KdS^os ovopa, eSpos Svo 7 rXe- 25 Opcov. TaVTTJV T7]V TTokiV i^iklTTOV Ot ivOLKOVVT€S 24 pera 'Zvevviai os ets \o)piov oj(vpbv iirl ra 0/377 77 X 77 // ot ra KaTrrjkeia e^ovreepeivav Se /cat ot irapa tyjv OakaTTav ot/cowres iv SoXots /cat iv ’icnrots. ’E7rdafa Se rj 'Zvevvicnos yvvrj 7 rporepa 25 30 Kvpov 7 reWe rjpepais ets Tapcrovs a<£t/cero • «/ Se 777 v7Tep/3o\yj T(ov opecov rrj eis to weSiov Svo Xo^ot rov Me/awos aTpaTevpaTos dncokovTO • ot piv ecjxxcrav dpird^ovras tl KaTCLKOTrvjvai vi to twv KiXt/ctot', ot Se vnokeicfrOevTas /cat ou Svvapivovs 35 eitpeiv to aXXo crTparevp a ouSe ras oSovs etra 7rkavcopevovs dirokitrOai • rjcrav S’ o5z/ ovrot e/ca- roz/ 07rXtrat. ot S’ aXXot € 7 ret ^/co//, 7771 / re irokiv 26 rovs Tapcrovs hirjpTTaaav y Sta to// okeOpov T(bv avcrTpaTLcoTcbv opyt^opevoi, /cat ra fia&'ikeia ra e// 40 avrij. Kvpos Se e 7 ret elayjkacrev ets tt)i/ irokiv , time when the historian wrote. So adpolCovrai in 706, 8. — 23. picrov: see 718. —tt]s iroXcws : see 743,6. — 24. irXl6po>v: limits irorapSs (743, 6). — 25. TavTTjv: c/*. 727, 27, and note. — ot Ivoucovvtcs: see 718. Cy*. ot I^optcs and ot oIkovvtcs in 1. 27 f. — 27. *irXi]V . . . €\ovt€$: sc. ou/c i^€\mov .— 29. ‘irpoTlpd . . . atK6To, reached Tarsi Jive days (p. 171 6 ) before (c/. cnovaai in 722, 28, and note) Cyrus (763). — 31. rg €ts to ircSCov: see 719. — 32. ot pcv . . . KaTaKomfjvai, some said that they ( i.e . the lost soldiers of Menon) had been cut to pieces (354) while committing some act of plun¬ der (732). — 35. etTa, then, taking up the two preceding participles, which qualify the unexpressed subj. of diroAeVflat. airoXeaQou is in parallel const, to KaraKoiTTji/ai. — 36. ovv: cf. 1.12.— 37. ot 8’ aXXoi: i.e. of Menon’s force. DATIVE CASE. 839 /Jt€T€7r 8e K.vp(p ravra eSo/cei coefreXipa elvai. 3. to 8e aTparevpa avrcp avareTapaypevov 2 eiropevero. 4. ovopa 8e rjv tjj 7ro\ei M€(77rtXa. 5. 7rat'Te? yap irorapol 7rpoiovcn s 7r^o? ra? 1 Sc. 6 (raXiriKT^s. 3 in. case of those going up stream 2 A participle of manner (379). (sc. ncrt). 340 DATIVE CASE. 7 rrjyaz Bca/3aTol ylyvovTai. 6 . viro^eiptoi Be pirjBenTOTe yevco- fieOa fcwz'Te? rot? 7roXe/z/ot?. 7. Ta Be /cpea tcov dyplcov ovcov rjv Trapa r nXr)cna Tot? eXatyeloLs. 8. ov yap /cpavyfj, aXXa crlyfj, 'jrpocrfjcrav. 9. evOvs evvoia avr o3 epuriirTei, To Kara - Keipiai; 10. yecj)vpa Be eirrjv e^evypievrj 7rXotot?. 11. rfj Be avrfj r)p>epa rjXOev errl tt\v Bta^aaiv tov TroTapuov. 12. oa(p av Oarrov eXOco, 1 tootovtco dirapaaKevoTepcp ftaaiXel pba^ov- pai . 13. tovtois r)(r6r) KOyoo?. 14. ol yap Linroi avTOts BeBev- tcu . 15. Travrr) yap irdvra Tot? #eot? viro^a. 16. avayvov ? 67 TL(TToXr)V avaicoivovTai 2c otcpdrei tco ’A drjvalw irepl tt}? 7 Topelas. 17. rrrpaypLaTa irapelyev ovto<; 6 ctvrjp rf) ipufj %copa. 18. KaTaTrr)Br)aa<$ diro tov ittttov TrepieTrecrev avrq). 19. ri /caXov eireirpaicTo vpuv ; 20. eav lcogl, p,ia6o<^opa earai tols c TTparLcbrai ?. 21. to5 (rarpairp tov pucrOov eve/ca vnrrjpeTOV- piev. 22. TrapeiceXeveTO rot? f/ EXX?7C7£ jropeveaOai. 23. e/zol fyap fez;o fior^OrjaavTa n roXXot? p^a/capUTTOv eirol^aev. 29. auTO) ol koXol Te tfal dyaOol evvoi rjaav. 30. u/ztz/ epuTroBcov elpu; 31. K vpo? ov/ceTi rjpuv pua6oBoT7]i ? ecrTiv. 32. €TV%e yap Tai;L<; avT

, Toaovrco), and observe that they are connected with comparatives and denote the degree of difference. 776. Rule of Syntax. — The dative of manner is used with comparatives to denote the degree of difference. Examine the dative in 19. Review 224. Examine the dative in 11, and observe that it denotes time. 777. Rule of Syntax. — The dative without a preposition often denotes the time ivhen an action takes place. The dative is used also with prepositions (94, 97). * 778. EXERCISE . 1. They shouted to one another not 1 to run. 2. But the soldiers were angry with their generals. 3. And many of the arms of the soldiers 2 were being carried on wagons. 4. And on the third day he called an assembly. 5. There Cyrus had a palace. 6. It is safer for them to flee than for us. 7. I, fellow-G-reeks, was both faithful to Cyrus, and (am) now well-disposed to you. 8. He kept warring with the satrap. 9. They feared that the enemy might attack them. 10. He hurls his axe 3 at him. 11. This wine is much sweeter. 12. But on the fourth day they descend into the plain. 13. Eor he did not envy those who were rich. 14. Shall we trust this guide ? 15. The arrows were useful to them. 1 See note on 722, 36. 2 See 769. 3 hurls with his axe. BEADING LESSON . 343 LESSON CXIII. Reading Lesson. 779. Anabasis I. iii. 1-7. A delay of twenty days at Tarsi is caused by the Greeks, who refuse to go farther. Clearchus attempts to force his own troops for¬ ward (1), and narrowly escapes being stoned to death. Then he calls them together, and addresses them as follows (2). “You must not forget what a friend Cyrus has been to me. And remember that the money which he gave me I spent on you (3). When our war in Thrace was ended, like loyal men we obeyed his summons (4). But you refuse to advance farther, and I must choose between you and him. Right or wrong, then, I cast in my lot with you (5). I will not abandon my comrades in arms, nor can I doubt that my interests are identical with yours (6).” Hereupon more than 2000 men leave Xenias and Pasion, and take up their quarters with Clearchus (7). 5 III. ivravOa epeive Kvpos ko! rj crTpand rjpepas 1 eiKocriv • oi yap crrparimrat, ovk ecfracrav levai rov npocrco * vnconrevov yap rjSyj ini fiacriked levai • picr0o)0rjvai Se ovk ini tovtco e^acrav. npcoTos Se K Xeap^os tovs avrov arpandoras ifiia^ero levai • oi oe avrov re epakkov k ai ra vnoLpyia ra eKei- vov , inel rjp^aro npoievai. KXeapx°$ rore pev 2 piKpov e^ecfrvye prj Karanerp(v0r\vai , vcrrepov S’ 1. c'(jlcivc : c/. in 727, 26, and see p. 232 1 * * * * * 7 .— 2. ovk 4'4>ao-av levai, said they would not go (354). The neg. is regularly attached to cprjA as the lead¬ ing verb where we attach it to the dependent verb. — tov irpo5 eya> ayaya/t' et 5 rou 5 fiapfiapovs, 77/30801)5 rou 5 ^EXX^^ag ttjv rcov /3ap/3apo)v tXtau etXoprjv, dXX’ e 7 ret £/ze t 5 e/x,ot om iOeXere iretOeaOai ou Se 6 eireaOat, eyco avv Vplv eijjopat /cat o rt af Sei? 77 €t- 35 aop at. vopiifA yap Vpas epol elvat /cat narptSa /cat <^tXou 5 /cat avppayovs, koX avv vptv pev av olpai elvat Tiptos 07rov av a >, ijpcov Se eprjpos o)V ovk av tKavos olpai elvat ovt av (j)iXov dx^eXrjaat our au eyupov aAegacrc/at. 035 e/xou ovv touro 5 40 ottiq av /cat C/xet5, our a) ttjv yvcoprjv eX ere - raura 7 etirev • ot Se arpaTtcoTai 01 re aurou e’/cetuou /cat ot aXXot raura aKovaavres iTrrjveaav • irapa hi Seutou /cat riacrta)uo 5 77 Xetou 5 ^ Stcr^fXtot Xa/ 3 oure 5 45 ra 077X0, /cat ra aKevocfropa iarparoTTehevaavro napa KXeap-^ov. \ (775), meaning wse in the sense of serve oneself. — 28. ct, whether. — 29. o ti av 8 £r), whatever I must (sc. 7 max^iv). — 36. av ctvai : by quo¬ tation (354) for ai/ efr?v. The protasis is implied in cruv v/fiV (p. 104 10 ), £.e. i/ / should follow with you. — 37. oirov av «, wherever I may be. — vjwov: with eprj/nos (760).—38. av clvai: representing efyv, as above in 1. 36. The prot. is here contained in # 1 / = el eX-qv (p. 104 10 ). — ovt av . . . ovt av: the av here does not belong to the following infinitives, but re¬ peats the &v with elvat. — co4>e\r|crai, aXcfjacrGai: with luavos (p. 219 * 1 ).— 39. cos qiov ovv Iovtos, since , therefore , I shall ( as I say , is) go, etc. The gen. absolute (762) is causal. Tor is, see 706, 33, and note. — 40. oirr| av Kal vjms, wherever you too may go (sc. X-qre). — 41. 01 : see 186 c. Make a special study of the prepositions in this Reading Lesson (avrt, 24; els, 17, 18, 31; i£, 15, 20; itrl , 3, 4; fxera, 20, 28; napa, 43, 46; np6s, 19,27; vnep, 20; vn6, 25; avv, 29, 34, 36), according to the directions previously given. 346 VOICES. — TENSES. — CAUSAL SENTENCES. LESSON CXIV. Voices. — Tenses. — Causal Sentences. — Imperative and Subjunctive in Commands, Exhortations, and Prohibitions. 780. EXERCISE. 1. rjpieis .Kt ? Ta^iara, el per) fiovXerai K Xeap%os airayeiv. 10. pn]8eh ? oleaOco pie tovto Xeyeiv. 11. av8pe ? GTpanwrai , yit?) davpia^ere on %aXe 7rw? cjtepco rot? 7 rapovGt irpaypLaatv. 12. a/covGare to vs Xoyovs piov. 13. puj piOi avnXe^rjs- 14. //,^ 7 roXepieire ahucov rroXepiov. 15. /coXa- auevTcov oe vvv agicos rps abi/aas. lb. et oe Tt? v/acoz' acw- /xet oVt r]puv piev ov/c eltrlv hnreZs rot? Se 7 roXepiiots woXXol TrdpetGiV, evOvpnjOrjTe on ol pivpioi iirirei ? ov8ev aXXo t) pivpiol cIglv avdpeoTroi. 17. OT&) 1 o5i/ ravra So/cel /caXcbs e%eiv, avareivarco rrjv %elpa . avereivav airavre , oi/re e/cew >09 ert rjp'uv pLcrOoSoTrjs. otl pevTOL aSt/cetcr#at vop'i^ei v<\> 10 rjpcov otSa • ft/crre /cat peTanepnopevov clvtov ovk 15 iOeXco iX 0 etv t to pev peyicrrov cdcr^yvopevos on crvvoiSa ipavrco rravra i\jjevo~pevo<; avTov, eireiTa /cat oeota/9 py) Xapoov pe olktjv eirtup cov vopiL,eL vtt ipov r)$us Ta eTriTrjoeia e£opev • avev yap tovtcov ovre arpaTrjyov ovre Kai vavTiKTjv r\v Travres opoicos opcopev re /cat em- arapeOa* /cat yap ov Se noppco 8 oKovpev pot a vtov e/c Se rod-13 apiaTov eivai. ravra enrcov €7ravcraTO. tov avicrTavTo oi pev e/c tov avroparov , A egovres a iyiyvcocTKov, oi Se /cat V7r 5 e/eeivov iyieeXevaToi , im8eiKvvvTes ola eirj rj airopia avev Trj<$ K vpov 40 rep fiapfiapiKcp cTTpaTevpari) /cat averKevai^ea6 at • 20. &os, as long as , while. — 21. avTov: adverb. — o-kctttcov ctvai: cf. 585, I. 3. — 22. t|8t|, at once. — 26. £ av £Xos fj, to whomsoever he is a friend. — 28. opotcos : with iravres, all alike. —29. avTow: with n6ppca (761), at a distance from him. — 30. wpa Xe-ytiv: sc. iari, and see note on 1. 19.— 32. XefjovTes: the fut. partic. expresses purpose (379), to say. — 33. €kc£voi»: i.e. Clearchus. — 34. ol'd . . . diropta, what the difficulty was. Cf. 571a.— 35. ds 8e Sri dire, hut one in particular proposed. Seven infinitives follow, containing the man’s successive recommendations, dependent on dire, the first of which is eXeadai. — 38. cl pn] Pov'XeTai, if Clearchus icas not will¬ ing. — prf: the regular negative in all conditions. — 39. rj 8’ cfyopa . . . o*TpctT€vp>Q>Ti: this parenthetical statement of the historian shows the IN TER BOG ATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. 351 iXOovr as Se Kvpov alrelp 7rXota, &>s diroirkeoiev • ea^ Se jttT) StSa/ raura, r^yepova alreiv Kvpov ocrrcs ta iX£a$: predicate adj. (sc. ovarjs ), that was friendly. — 44. tt]v Ta^C(TTT]v: sc. odov, an adverbial acc. (734). — 45. 0cur<«>(ri, that they might not get the start. — 46. KaTaXapdvTes: for the partic. with < peduu , c/. 648, I. 9. — 47. wv . . . dvrip-iraKOTcs: these words are in the exact form in which they were originally spoken, many of whom and much of whose property we have plundered and now have. — cxopev aviipiraKOTcs: equivalent to avT]pTuxKopev Ka\ e%o/xev. Make a special study of the prepositions in this Reading Lesson (5m, 43 ; ets, 5, 37 ; ev, 39; e|, 20, 31, 32 ; /xerd, 6, 48 ; trp6s , 10 (bis') j v-n6, 13, 18, 33), according to the directions previously given. LESSON CXYI. Interrogative Subjunctive. — Subjunctive and Future Indicative with ov [xrj. —Verbals. — Optative in tbe Expression of a Wish. 784 . EXERCISE . 1. cr/ceirreov icrrlv 1 07 ra)? dacj^aXearara pevovpev. 2. py toOto TroiodpGV; 2 3 . /3ov\et ovv tovto emaKOirMpev ; 3 3 Do you wish , then , that we should consider this? 1 See 584. 2 Shall we not do this ? 352 SUBJUNCTIVE WITH ov ptrj. 4. ov ptrj (re /cpvylrw 1 irpo<; ovrtva /3ovXoptat d? 7 retareov earl K\edp^o>. 4 8. p,r)S' epcoptat 6 oiroaov ircoXet; 9. oo 7rpo tt)? aXrjdetw; rlptr)T6o<; dvrjp. 10. ervv K Xeap^cp ireptircoptev robs ireX- raard ^; 11. ptiaOwcrdopteOa ovv KrjpVKa, rj airro? dvetrra); 12. Kara/3areov ovv iv ptepet eicdarw, 13. et7ra) olw orot to atrtov ; 14. em6vptr]reov earl roh dvOpdoirots t% dperfjs. 10. eu ZO"C7t OTt OU PLTJ7TOT6 (T€ a/COVTa Tfc? a£€t. lo. 7TO£ (j)VyCDpL€V ; 17. TL Scb e/cd(TT(p TCOV (ptXcov; 18. irorepov rovro fitdv (pcoptev rj pty (frwptev elvat; 19. irorepov ireparco- ptev nva<; rj iravres tcoptev iirl ro arparoireSov dprj^ovre<;; 20 . rjv re eh irfj SvvyOfj rwv Xo^cov iirl to drepov dvafirjvat, ovSeh purjicert pteivrj rcov iroXeptLooiV. 21. aXXa rovrovs ol Oeoi dirortaatvro . 6 22 . rjpteh yap av rotavra irdOotptev , 7 ola rov ? e^Opovs ot Oeol irotijaetav . 8 23. aw^oiaOe dartfraXd) 5 oirot OeXei e/caa*TO?. Review 265, 266, 267, 296. Examine 2, 3, 8, 10, 11, 13, 16, 17, 18, 19, and observe that each sentence is interrogative, that its principal verb is in the first person of the subjunctive, and that the sentence, if negative, takes prj. 785. Rule of Syntax. — The first person of the subjunctive may be used in questions of appeal, where a person asks him¬ self or another what he is to do. The negative is ptrj. a. The question is sometimes introduced by fiovXet or fiovXeaOe. 1 I will not (emphatic) conceal from you , etc. 2 The indirect question (570) is the second object of Kpi\p(a (737). 3 see in (this undertaking'). 4 See 768 a. 6 And may I not ask , etc. 6 May the gods take vengeance on them 1 7 See p. 104 74 . 8 as may the gods bring upon our foes (738). VERBALS. — OPTATIVE OF WISH. 358 Examine 4, 6, 15, 20, and observe that each sentence, or a part of it, is strongly negatived by ov fir}, and has its verb either in the sub¬ junctive or in the future indicative. 786. Rule of Syntax. — The subjunctive and sometimes the future indicative are used with the double negative ov fx-rj in the sense of an emphatic future indicative with ov. a. The subjunctive, when used in this construction, is generally in the aorist tense. Examine the use of the verbals in -reos in 1, 5, 7, 9, 12, 14. Review 583, 584. Examine the optatives in 21, 22 (7roo?(mav), 23, and observe that each expresses a wish which refers to the future. 787. Rule of Syntax. — When a wish refers to the future, it is expressed by the optative. a. The optative may be preceded by eiOe or d yap, 0 that , 0 if. The negative of these clauses is p.rj. 788. EXERCISE. 1. The general must pursue the enemy. 2. What shall I say? 3. They will not await the enemy. 4. We must make, war on the barbarians. 1 5. For you will never make the vicious better. 6. We must not be dispirited. 7. Will you receive 2 him, or shall we go away ? 8. They will not be able to go up on the mountain. 9. We must not surrender these soldiers to the king. 10. With what 3 shall I begin? 11. Shall I pro¬ ceed with the army into the city? 12. Fellow-soldiers, we must make our journey on foot. 13. And may I not 4 answer, if some young (man) questions me? 14. The general must provide chariots and march against the enemy. 15. We must never do the state harm, but obey (her). 16. Do you wish, then, that I should answer them ? 1 See 773. 2 Use the fut indie. 8 With what, i.e. whence. 4 and not, cf. 784, 8 above. 354 BEADING LESSON. LESSON CXVII. Beading Lesson, 789 . Anabasis I. iii. 15-21. Clearchus declares that he will not lead them, but that he will be obedient to the man whom they put in command (15). Another speaker comes forward who shows the folly of the plan just pro¬ posed (16). “ I should distrust,” he says, “ any assistance that Cyrus might lend us. I could wish rather that we might get away without his knowledge. But that is impossible (17). We must, therefore, send and ask him what use he intends to make of us. If this under¬ taking is not different from his previous enterprises, let us follow him (18). But if we cannot approve it, let us tell him that he either must convince us of our duty to support him, or must let us depart in peace. When w x e get his answer, we can make up our minds (19).” This proposal is adopted. Cyrus answers that he wishes to march against his enemy Abrocomas, twelve stages distant, on the Euphra¬ tes (20). The Greeks agree to follow, but demand additional pay. Cyrus promises them half again as much as before (21). Trjytav [jLrjbeLS vp,o)v A eyerco • 7 roAAa yap evopa) oi *s\ ~ a epioi tovto ov 7tol7)T€ov • cog oe rw avopi ov av eXrjcrOe ireicropai rj Svvarov /xa A terra, Xva elSrjTe ort /cat apyeaOai € 7 rtcrra/xat rts /cat a\A05 1. «s H>ev . . . Xc-yeVco, let no one of you speak of me as about to assume this command. — 3. cos Se . . . paXio-ra: sc. ovtco a eyere (imv.) from the pre¬ ceding /at) Ae 76 Tco. — 4. -if SvvaTov jiaXio-ra, to the best of my ability. Sc. icn-lv. — 5. on . . . dv0pco7Tcov, that I know how also to submit to authority as well as any man that lives. ^aAto-ra auepAirwv (743, 6 a), in the highest degree (lit. best of all men), repeats and emphasizes the thought of 8>s ns Kal &\\os, (as well) as any other man whosoever (sal being emphatic). READING LESSON. 355 KeXevovros, cocnrep iraXiv tov cttoXo v K vpov ttolov- pevov, imSeLKvvs Se o>s evrjOes eir\ rjyepova airelv 10 irapa tovtov m XvpaivopeOa ttjv irpa^iv. el Se koX rep rjyepovt TncrTevcropev ov av K vpos §(p, tl KO)\v€L KCU Ta OLKpCL TJpLV KeXeveIV K vpov TTpOKOLTCL- XafieZv; eycb yap okvoltjv pev av el<$ ra 7rXota 17 ip/3atveiv a rjplv 80177, prj rjpas rat? Tpirfpecri 15 KaTabvcrrj, (joofioLprjv 8* av tS rjyepovL q> S0177 enecruai , prj rjpas ayayrj ouev ovk ecrT&i egeA- Oelv * ftovXotprjv S’ av a kovtos airtcov K vpov Xa- 6eiv avTov aireXOoov * o ov Svvarov icmv. aXX* iyco Vop,€v, intend to trust. The fut. indie, sometimes expresses present intention. — t£ . . . irpoKaTaXaPttv: i.e. if we intend to trust the guide, we might as well show confidence in Cyrus himself directly, and urge him to secure the heights for us in advance. The ques¬ tion is ironical. — 14. p/q . . . Kara8iicrr|, lest he may sink us (280) with his triremes (775). — 15. a>: for ov (725). — 16. 6'0ev: i.e. (eneTae) odev, (into a place) from which. —17. dicovTos Kvpov: sc. ovros. The gen. absol. (762) expresses manner (379), against his will. —dmwv: equivalent to el b.irloifu. (379). —Xa0€iv avTov dircXOwv, to get off without his knowing it (p. 250 3 ). —19. 8 ok€i 8 e poi, I think it best , I would recommend. The subjects of S 0 K 6 ? (352) are the infinitives that follow, ipwrav (1.21), e-ireadai (1. 23), Aval (1. 24), a£iov v (1. 27), a.Tra’y'yeiKai (1. 31), and fiov\eve(r6ai (1. 32), each with its modifiers. —20. dvSpas: subj. of iparav .— on-ms, such as are (sc. elalv). —21. t £. . . xP'no’Scu, what use (732) he wishes to make of us (p. 83 4 ). The same use of the cases occurs below in oUirep 356 BEADING LESSON. olairep kcll irpocrOev i^prjro rocs £epois, enecr0cu Kal rjp a5 Kal prj kclklovs elpai rcov npocrOev rovrco 25 crvpapa/3apro)p • iav Se /aet£a>v rj jrpdtjis rrjs rrpo- 19 cr0ep (jxtLvrjTCLL Kal eirirropoirepd Kal e7riKip$vpo- repa , d^iovp r) rretcrapra rjpids ayeip rj TreurOevTa 7T/D05 (j)i\iav a(j)L€va t • ovto yap Kal kiropLevoi av (ftiXoi avTG) Kal 77 po0vp,o l €iroipie0a Kal amopres 30 acn£aXd)5 ay a,77tot/aev • o rt S’ a p 77/005 ravra \eyrj dirayyetkai Sev/oo ' rj^as S’ aKovcrapTas 77/005 ravra /8ovA.evecr#at. eSofe ravra, Kal apSpas eXo/xevot 20 arvp KAea pyco rrep^rrovenp ot 1 )p(oro)P K vpop ra Sofavra rfj errpana. 6 S’ aneKplparo on a/covot 35 ’AfipoKoyidp eyOpop apSpa irrl to JLvi€vai: the subj. refers to Cyrus.—28. cirdp.cvoi, amoms: equivalent to el eirolp.eda , e l airloipiev (379).—29. <|h\oi irpoOvpot: predi¬ cate adjectives. —34. on axovoi, that he heard. — 37. Kav piv rf ckci, and if he should be there. —38. rjv 8e . . . pov\«v i.e. they suspected. For Tois 5e, cf. 6 5e in 1. 34. — on ayoi, that he was leading them. — FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. 357 Scocreiv ov nporepov ecf>epov, avn Sapeucov Tpia 45 rjpuSapeLKa rov prjvos rw ctt pcLTiooTT) * on Se em /3a? aafyaXearara pevovpev, el re rjSy So/cei dirievai , ottgx; datyaXearara ampev, /cal 07T(o$ ra emTTjSeLa e^opev. 8. rr)v Se 'FiXXrji>ucr)V Svva- ptv rjOpoi^ev to? pdXtara eSvvaro eTTL/cpyiTTopevos, oVo)? on dirapaa/cevorarov Xa/3ot fiacnXed. 4. oVo)? Se /cal vpeis epe eiraiveaere epol peXrjaei. 1 5. teal 7repl tovtcov epvrjadrjv, iva pr) ravra Trddrjre. 6 . oi Oeoopevot ecj)o/3ovvTO prj tl Tradrj. 7. toS e diroOavovra 9 avrorceXevaTOL oi f/ E XXrjve? y/ciaavro, co? on (f)o/3epd>TaTov rot9 'iroXepLois elrj. 8. 07ra)9 S’ dpvvovpeda ouSeb? eTTLpeXeirai. 9. dXXa 8e8oi/ca pr) wenrep oi XcoTO(f)d>yoL e'lriXaOoopeOa rrjs ol/ca8e oSov. 10. (f)iXo<; ej3ovXero elvcu T 0 Z 9 peyiara Svvapevoi 9 , Iva cl8ucmv pr) 8i8otrj 8lkt)v. 11 . /cal 6 H(D/cpaTr)<; virdnrrevae prj tl 7T/309 rr )9 1 The clause with ottws is here the subj. of p.e\riaei. 358 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. 7roXeo)? eiraiTiov ecrj K vpco cfrikov yeveaOai. 1 12. /cat ere ovk rjyeipov, iva go? rfCiara /cauevbr)?. lo. ebeccre fir) emirkev- acoatv ai zd)e?. 14. efiovXevero 07rs AlyvnTios it; ’E cfrecrov, eyp)v vavs erejoas K vpov nivTe Kal €lkoctlv, als inoXiopKei MtXrj- tov , ot€ TLcr: for the case, cf. avrcfi in 727, 28. The fie'et, which here effects a junction with the land forces of Cyrus, preparatory to his march into the interior, is the one already mentioned in 765, 9-11. — 11. ij-yciTO 8’ avTcus, conducted them , i.e. the ships (769). —12. ’Etjjeo-ov: the Lacedaemonian ships under Pythagoras had joined the fleet of Cyrus at Ephesus. —13. at$ eiroXiopKei, with which he (i.e. Tamos) had been besieging. So 17, and note. — 14. ot« tjv, since it had READING LESSON. 361 15 Kvpcp npos avrov. naprjv Se /cat Xet/Ho’ot^os 3 Aa/ceSai/xotaos eVt to>v vecov , perdnepnro^ vi to K vpov , kirTOLKocriovs i^cov onXirds, & icrTpaTyjyei napa Kvpco. at Se ^rjes coppovv napa rrjv Kv¬ pov crKrjvrjv. ivravO a /cat ot 7 rap’ ’A/3yoo/co/xa 20 pucr0o(j)6poL ''EWrjves anocrravres fjXOov napa Kvpov TerpaKocrioi onXlrai /cat crwecrrparevovro ini /3acriXid. ivrevOev i£eXavvei crraOpbv iva na- 4 pacrayyas nivre ini nvXas rrjs KtXt/ctas /cat rijs %vpia s. rjcrav Se ravra Svo ret^, /cat to pev 25 icrcoOev to 7rpo ttJs KtXt/cta? Xvivvecns et^e /cat KtXt/ca/t' (j)v\aKTj , to Se efw to 7ipo ttJs ^vpids fiacnXicos iXiyero cjyvXaKrj c^vXdrreiv. Sta picrov Se /Set TouTa/t' norapos Kapcros ovopa , evpos nXi- 0pov. dnav Se to picrov rcov ret^cov rjcrav Xai9, onep cpero noirjcreiv 6 Kvpos top 5 AfipoKopav, eyovra noXv crTparevpa. ’AfipoKopas Se ov tovt 40 iTTOiTjcrev , aXX 5 inel rjKovcre K vpov iv KtXucta oVra, avacTTpe\\jd<$ Ik <&olvlkt]S napa fiacriXea amjXav- vev, e)((ov , co? iXeyero , TpiaKovra pvpiah a? crTpa- tlols. evrevOev i£eXavvei Sta %vpids crraOpov eva 6 napacrayyd 5 nevre eis Md/Ha^So^, noXiv oiKovpe- 45 ^77^ V7TO ^olvi'kojv enl rrj OaXaTTrj • epnopiov S* rjv to yoipiov Kal coppovv avToOi oXkol Sev\aTToi€v, fu case £/iey should be keeping guard. —38. oirep, just the thing which , referring to the thought of the preceding clause.— 39. 4'xovTa: causal partic. (379). Make a special study of the prepositions in this Reading Lesson (did, 27, 43; 6 Is, 6, 31, 44 ; iv, 40; e’£, 9, 12, 41; iirl, 2, 4, 7, 10, 16, 22, 23, 32, 37 ; irapd, 18 (bisj, 19, 20, 41; irpo, 25, 26; 7 rp6s, 15; vn6, 16, 45), accord¬ ing to the directions previously given. LESSON CXX. Conditional Sentences: Present and Past Particular Conditions. 796. EXERCISE. 1. el v/jlgls eOeAere e^oppav, eneordat v/jllv fiovXopai. 2. el ravra enpa^av, /caAco? eayev. 3. el ravra enpa^av, /caXco 9 av ecryev. 1 4. ehrep e/xo? dSeA.o? ecrrov , ov/c apayel ravr eycb Xrj^opac. 5. KXeapyo? roivvv el napa tou? opicovs 1 If they had done this, it would have been well, an unfulfilled supposi¬ tion. Note that the apodosis has &v. PRESENT AND PAST PARTICULAR CONDITIONS. 363 eXve ras cr7rovBds, rrjv BIktjv e^ei. 6. dXXd, el /3ovXeb, pbeve errl rco arparedpban, eycb S’ eOeXco 'jropevecrdcu • el Be XPV& L< >> 7 ropevov eVt ro opo<;, eyed Be pbevco avrov. 7 \ A * 1 . /cai av tclvt eiroleby el ecopa r)pbas amovra 9. 1 8. dXX' el j3ovXecr6e ervva- 'irievab, rj/cecv /ceXevei vpbas t% vv/ctos. 9. ov/c av rcov vgcrcov e/eparei, el pbi] tl vavn/cov etyyi'. 10. el Be re aXXo /3eXrIov, 2 roXpbdrco /cal 6 IBtcbrys BiBaa/ceiv. 11. errparpyovs eXcopceOa aXXovs 009 ra^io-ra, el pbr) /3ovXerai K-Xeap^os airayeiv. 12. el puevrot Tore 'irXelov 9 cvveXeyrjcrav, e/cbvBvvevaev av Bba(j)6ap7]vai 7ro\o rod ctt pared pharos. 13. el rovro rreirohr]- /cas, eiraivelaQab a^hos el. 14. el re f}Br) Bo/cel dmevai, a/ceizreov earlv or-cos dacfaXearara ampbev. 15. rj ttoXls Traaa Bhecpddprj av, el avepbos eireyevero. 16. teal rjpblv y av rpiado-pbevos ravr errohet /3aacXed 9 , el ecopa rjp,ds pceveiv jrapacr/ceva^opbevovs. IT. ol Be r/ FiXXrjves, el ns /cal a6vpbo- repos 3 rjv 7rpos rrjv dvafSacnv, d/codovre 9 rr\v K vpov dperyv rjBlov /cal 7r poOvpLorepov avveiropedovro. Examine 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 11, 13, 14, 17. Observe that these sentences are conditional, consisting of a prota¬ sis and apodosis (272); that the protasis is introduced by el, if, and has the indie.; that it states a particular supposition in the present or past, and implies nothing as to its fulfilment; and that the apodo¬ sis assumes a great variety of forms (being expressed here, e.g., by the indie., present, past, and future, by the imv., by the subjv., and by the verbal in -reos). e 797. Rule of Syntax. — When the protasis simply states a present or past particular supposition, implying nothing as to the fulfilment of the condition, it has the indicative with el. Any form of the verb may stand in the apodosis. Such conditional sentences are designated as Particular Supposi¬ tions of the First Class (I. 1). 1 He would he doing this , if he 2 better plan. Sc. earl, saw, etc., an unfulfilled supposi- 3 even («af) somewhat discour- tion. aged. 364 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. a. The negative of all protases is regularly prj, that of all apodoses is regularly ov. Examine 3, 7, 12, 15, 16. Observe that the protasis is introduced by el, if, and has a second¬ ary tense of the indie.; that it states a supposition in the present or past, using respectively the impf. or aor. indie., and implies that the condition is not or was not fulfilled ; and that the apodosis has a secondary tense of the indie, with dv . 798. Rule of Syntax. — When the protasis states a present or past supposition, implying that the condition is not or was not fulfilled , the secondary tenses of the indicative are used in both protasis and apodosis. The apodosis has the adverb av. The imperfect refers to present time, the aorist to a simple occurrence in past time. a. The imperfect may refer to an act as going on or repeated in past time. Examine 9, which refers to the past. Such conditional sentences are designated as Suppositions of the Second Class (no- 799. EXERCISE. • 1. But if anybody sees a better (plan), let him speak. 2. If he had restrained himself, he would now be king. 3. And if yon had not come, we should have proceeded against the king. 4. If you have the money, pay it to the soldiers. 5. If this is so, I will go away at once. 6. If the general had wished to go, the soldiers would have followed (him). 7. If he went ii?to the city, he received the gold. 8. He would not have done this, if I had not bid him. 9. If you say this, you are deceived. 10. If he wrote the letter, he did well. 11. If he had done this, he would have injured me greatly. * 1 12. If the citizens had been wise, they would then have put this tyrant to death. 13. If you have not done wrong, why are you about 2 to flee ? 14. It would he much more wonderful, if they were honoured. — 1 /ueya, see 732. 2 be about, \\u>. BEADING LESSON. 865 LESSON CXXI. Beading Lesson. 800. Anabasis I. iv. 7-11. At Myriandus Xenias and Pasion, in jealousy of the increasing in¬ fluence of Clearchus, desert by sea. The rumour spreads that Cyrus is in pursuit of them (7). But he, calling his Greek generals together, announces that he shall not do this. “ Let them go, traitors though they are and though their punishment would be easy, since formerly they were true to me (8).” This decision pleases the Greeks, and they accompany him with greater alacrity. Cyrus proceeds eastward, crosses the Chalus (9), and reaches the sources of the Dardas, where he destroys the park and burns the palace of the Syrian governor (10). At Thapsacus on the Euphrates he announces the real object of his expedition (11). IV. / - ivravO * epeivav ijpepas enra • /cat SezAas 6 7 ’ApKas crTparrjybs /cat IlacrtW 6 WLeyapevs ip fiavres els uXoiov /cat ra nXetcrTov a^ta ivOepevoi aTTeTrXevcTav, ojs pev to'ls 7r\etoTot9 eSo/cow, <£t\o- 5 Tipr)0evTes ort tovs crTpoLTLcords a vtcov tovs irapa KXea px op iireXOovTas cos diriovTas els TTjv 'EAAaSa Trakiv /cat ov npos /3a5 SecXovs ovtcls a vtovs Xrjcfrflrjvai, ot S* 4. jj.€v : the correlative clause with 5e is omitted, but /xeV implies that there was another opinion in the camp. — 48 o'kovv : they seemed, the per¬ sonal const. We should use the impersonal const., it seemed. —4>iXoti- |at]0€vt€s, since they were jealous (379). — 5. oti . . . d'd Kvpos: also causal (781). For the facts see 779, 43-46. — o-TpanwTds: obj. of exetv in 1. 8. — 6. «s dirioVras: purpose (706, 16, and note). — 7. k0Tjvai, that they might he 366 BEADING LESSON. MKTeupov el aXcocroLVTo. Kvpos Se cruy/caXecras 8 tovs crrpaTyyovg elnev, ’AnoXeXoindcnv rjpids Se- vids Kal Ha (Tidin'. aXX’ ev ye /xeWoi emcTTacrOaiv otl ovre anoSeSpaKacnv • oiSa yap onrj ol\ov- 15 rat • ovre dnone^evydcnv • e^co yap Tpirjpe 19 ftJcrre eXeu' to eKeivo)v 7 tXoiov • aXXa /xa tous Oeovs ovk V s \ O / /- »£*»'■' > O \ e >\v eycoye a vtovs occogco, ovo epet ovoets povpovp,eva • aXX’ ovSe tovtcov crrepijcrovTaiy aXX* anoXrjxjjovrai rrjs npocrOev eVe/ca Trepl e/xe a perrjs. 25 /cal 6 ptev raura etTre^ • ot Se ‘^EXX^i'es, ei tis /cat 9 a OvpLorepos rjv 7 rpos rrjv avafiacnv, aKovovres tt)v K vpov apeTrjv rjSlov Kal 7 TpoOvpoTepov crvveno- pevovTo. /xera raura Kvpos e^eXavvet crraOpLovs rerrapa? 30 napacrayyas eiKocnv ini tov XaXoi' noraptov, ovra to evpos nXeOpov , nXyjprj S’ l^Ovcov peyaXcov Kal caught, because they were cowards. d>s shows that the reason assigned is that of the subject of ri^X 0t ' T0 - See note on 706, 33. —11. el dXwroivTo, if they were to be captured. —17. ovS’ epet ovSets: emphatic negation (p. 202 2 ). — e»s civ Traprj tis, so long as anybody stays by me. —18. eimSav Pov'Xtjtcu, when he wishes. —19. avTov's: plur., although referring to r\s. Cf. 706, 24. — 20. Iovtcov: imv. — 23. povpcvp,eva : neuter, although it limits both t4kvcl and yvua?Kas, since these are regarded as articles of property. — By this unlooked-for clemency Cyrus got the good-will of the Greeks and lost little ; for, although the two generals deserted, their troops re¬ mained, numbering some 5000 or 6000. — 29. p.€Ta Tavra: see 727, 27, and note. — 31. irXc'Gpou: see 744 a. So below in line 37. BEADING LESSON. 367 npaecov, ovs oi 'tvpou Oeovs ivopitpv Kal aSiKecv ovk etcoVy ov8e Tas nepicrTepds. at 8e Kcopat ev a Is icTKTjvovv HapycraTiSos Tycrai' els ^cvvrjv SeSo- 35 pevai. ivTevOev itjeXavvei CFTaOpovs nevTe irapa- 10 crayyas TpiaKovra ini Tas nrjyas tov AapSaros norapov, ov to evpos nXeOpov. ivravOa rjv ra BeXecruo? /3acriXeta tov 'Zvplas ap^avTos, Kal napa- Seuros ndvv peyas Kal koXos , e^cov ndvra oca 40 ibpai cpvovcn. K vpos S’ a vtov i^eKoxpe Kal ra /3a- alXeia KareKavcrev . ivTevOev i^eXavvei crraOpovs 11 Tpeis napacrdyyas nevreKaiheKa ini tov ^v^paTrjv noTapov, ovTa to evpos TeTTapcvv crraSiW • Kal noXts avToOi cpKeiTO peyaXrj Kal ev8aipo)v Saxpa- 45 kos ovopa. ivravOa epeivav rjpepas nevTe • Kal K vpos peTanepxjjapevos tovs CFTpaTTjyovs rw v *E\- Xrjvoiv eXeyev otl rj o8os ecroiTO npos /3acnXed peyav els BafivXojva • Kal KeXevei a vtovs Xeyeiv TavTa tols OTpartarrats Kal avaneldeiv eneaOai. — 32. ovs, Ocovs: see 739. — aSnceiv: sc. nva as subj.— 34. HapiuranSos tjo-av, belonged to Parysatis (744 a). — 38. tov apfjavros, who had been ruler. Note the tense. Belesys had probably fled on the approach of Cyrus. — 47. on tj oSos 4'o-oito, that the expedition would be. The fact here announced must have been apparent to the Greeks for some time. They had kept on, however, intending, when they arrived at the Euphrates and Cyrus announced his real object, to demand a bounty. Make a special study of the prepositions used in composition with verbs (127) in this Reading Lesson (dm-, 49 ; awo-, 4, 6 (bis) , 12, 14, 15, 18, 20, 24; 5m-, 8 ; eV, 2, 3 ; i£-, 29, 35, 40, 41; Kara -, 41; pera-, 46 ; napa-, 18 ; aw-, 11, 19, 27), carefully consulting the General Yocabulary. Note the meaning of the simple verb, the force of the preposition when used in composition, and the meaning of the compound verb when the two are united. The prepositions were originally adverbs, and it is chiefly as such that they appear in composition with verbs. 368 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES . LESSON CXXII. Conditional Sentences: Present and Past General Conditions. — Iterative Tenses. 801 . EXERCISE. 1 . oi Oeol i/cavol elcn too? pcl/cpov ?, /cav iv Secvocs oxtl, 1 awfeto eo7reTco?. 2. Ta? 8e om'3a? av tc? ra^y aviary, 2 ecrrc Xapc/3dvetv. 3. rjv iirucovpypca two ttoSoov, et Tt? ryv vvktcl V7T0XV0LT0. S 4. T}V TL 4 7 T6pl rjpLCLS dpLapTCLVCOCTL, 7T6pl Ta? eaoTwo yjrv^a<; dpcapTavovo-L. 5. 7 repl TrXelcrTov iirocecTO K opo?, et tw (T'TreicrcLi'To 5 /cal et tw 07 jocryoiTo tl, pcySapcM^ yjrevSecrOaL. 6. /cal el' tc? aoTw So/coly two 7rpo? tovto reraypLevcov fiXa/cevecv, ircXeyopcevo 9 too iircTyhecov eiracaev ao. 6 T. et 3e r Tcoa 0/00077 Kopo? Becvov ovra ol/covopcov, ovBeva av TTGOTrore dcpetXeToJ dXX' del irXeLoo 'rrpoaeBiBov. 8. pclael, ov/c rjv tls tl 4 aoToo aSc/cy, dXX ’ e’ao Ttoa vTroivTevay /3eX- rtova eavrov elvac. 9. el By 7tot€ iropevoLTO, Trpoa/caXcbv too? (plXovs iaTrovBacoXoyecTO . 10. el' Ttoe? IBocev iry too? cr<£eTepoo? eTriKparodvra ?, dveOappycrav av. 11. e’ao tc? Tt dyaOov rj ica/cov Trocyay avrov, 7 8 vc/cav TzecpaTac. 12. doa- Xapc/3dvoov aoTwo Ta TrocypcaTa BcypcoTcov av . 9 13. eZ i^eXav- vol 'AaTvayys, i(p> lttttov %ovaoyaXivov Trepcrjye tov Kopoo. 14. /cal too? oVoo? ov/c rjv Xa/3ecv, el pcy Bcao-TavTes oi t7r7ret? Oypwev BcaBe^opcevoc. 15. /cal 7 raoTe? 3’ ot two /3ap/3dpwo ap^ovres pceaov e%ovre$ to aoTwo yyovvTac, vopcc^ovTe^ ovtc o /cal iv dcrcpaXeaTarw elvac, 10 rjv y y la^o? aoTwo e/carepwOe v. 1 even they are, etc. 2 owe sfartfs them up, etc. 3 if one took off his shoes, etc. 4 See 732. 6 if he made a treaty , e£c. 6 he would heat him. 7 used to rob (hv acpelAero), etc. 3 See 738. 9 I used to question them. 10 See 354. Their thought is, o#tco Kal iv acrcpaAeardrci) ia/xiv, fyv $ 7] la'xys Tj/uoUv eKaripcodev. 4 i PRESENT AND PAST GENERAL CONDITIONS. 369 802. Suppositions are to be distinguished as particular or general. a. The protases of the examples given to establish the rule in 797 are all particular suppositions, i.e. they refer to a definite act supposed to occur or to have occurred at some definite time. b. But a supposition otherwise similar to those referred to in 797, i.e. a present or past supposition which implies nothing as to the ful¬ filment of the condition, may be general. Such a general supposition refers indefinitely to any act of a given class, which may be supposed to occur or to have occurred at any time. The apodosis expresses a customhry or repeated action or a general truth in present or past time. E.g., if ever he receives anything, he ( always ) gives it; if ever he received anything , he ( always ) gave it. c. This distinction of suppositions as particular or general is seen in all classes of conditional sentences, but it is only in the First Class (I.) that the distinction is indicated by the form of the sentence. Examine 1, 2, 4, 8, 11, 15. Observe that these general suppositions are all present; that the protasis is introduced by iav (or rjv or av, for which see p. 90 *), if, and has the subjv.; and that the apodosis has the pres, indie, or its equivalent. 803. Rule of Syntax. — Present general suppositions have iav with the subjunctive in the protasis, and the present in¬ dicative (or some other present form denoting repetition) in the apodosis. Such conditional sentences are designated as Present General Sup¬ positions of the First Class (I. 2 a). Examine 3, 5, 9, 13, 14. Observe that these general suppositions are all past; that the protasis is introduced by d, if, and has the opt.; and that the apodo¬ sis has the impf. indie. 804. Rule of Syntax. Past general suppositions have a with the optative in the protasis, and the imperfect indicative (or some other form denoting past repetition) in the apodosis. Such conditional sentences are designated as Past General Supposi¬ tions of the First Class (I. 2 b). 370 BEADING LESSON. Examine 12, and the apodoses in 6, 7, 10. Observe that the irnpf. or aor. indie, here has av, and expresses customary action. 805. Rule of Syntax. — The imperfect and aorist indicative are sometimes used with the adverb av to denote a customary action. a. This iterative use of the secondary tenses of the indie, with av must be carefully distinguished from apodoses with av expressing non-fulfilment (798). Observe that 6, 7, 10 are past general suppositions (804). 806. EXERCISE. 1. If any soldier ever stole, he was punished. 2. He is always angry, if he sees anybody doing wrong. 3. If he promises anybody anything, he never deceives him. 4. But it was a protection, if one journeyed with something black before his eyes. 5. If we ever attacked the enemy, they es¬ caped with ease. 6. If the soldiers march in good order, he praises them. 7. If anybody perjures himself, they impose a penalty on him. 8. He used to beat his soldiers. 9. If he suspected that anybody was plotting against him, he put him to death. 10. They would not let the late-comers approach the fire, unless they gave them a share of their provisions. LESSON CXXIII. Reading Lesson. 807. Anabasis I. iv. 12-19. The Greek troops refuse to go on without extra pay (12). Cyrus agrees to give each man five minas, when they get to Babylon. Menon, in the mean time, urges his troops to cross the Euphrates before the others decide, and so win the favour of Cyrus by seeming to be the most zealous in his service (13-15). They comply, and Cyrus ex- BEADING LESSON. 871 presses his satisfaction (16). Cyrus then crosses the Euphrates with the rest of his troops, and proceeds to the Araxes, where he remains three days (17-19). apSpl iKaaTco ScoaeiP 7reVre a pyvplov pvas, ini)v cravres ovre noprjcrapres todp aAAcop nAeop npoTi- 2. cxaXc'iraivov: the anger of the soldiers was doubtless feigned, to force from Cyrus the greater pay. — 3. tlSoxas, though they had known, concessive (379).—4. rls: the reference is, of course, to Cyrus.—5. uxTircp: sc. eScoxe, as he had given it .— toi$ TrpoTe'pois dvaf3da-i, to those who had previously gone inland, vporepois is a predicate adj. with the force of an adv. Gf. irporepa in 765, 29, and note. The reference is to the 300 Greeks mentioned in 706, 10-12. — 6. Kal ra^Ta, and that too. Sc. evo'n](reu. — 7. tovrwv : sc. iicelvuv, referring to ro?s a.va&aiXoi Tevijec Oe Kvpov. aKovcravTes raura eneWovTo Kal 8ie/3rjcrav nplv 16 tovs aXXovs dnoKpivacrOai. K vpos 8* enei rjerOeTO SiafiepyjKOTas, rjcrOrj re Kal tco (TTpaTevpaTi nip - xjjas TXovv elnev , ’Eyco pev , a) avSpes , rjSrj vpas 35 enaivco • oncos Se Kal vpels epe inaivecreTe epol peXrjcrei^ rj prjKeTi pe Kvpov vopi^ere. oi pev Srj 17 CTTpaTicoTai iv iXniai peyaXais ovTes rjvyovTo a vtov evTvyrjaai, Mevcovi Se /cat Sdpa eXeyeTO nepxjjai peyaXonpencos. TavTa Se noirjcras Siefiaive • crvv- 40 eineTO Se Kal to aXXo (TTpaTevpa a vtw dnav. Kal to)v Sia/3aiv6vT(ov tov noTapov ovSels efipeyOrj \a»v (TTpancortUv: see 763.—24. tov Sia|3aiveiv: cf. 742, 10. — 26. lirCara- Tai: sc. x^P lv o.iro8i86vai. —ns Kal a\Xos: cf. &s ns Kal &Wos in 789, 5. — 27. Tovp.'iraX.tv: i.e. t b i/xiraKiv (p. 55 4 ). — 28. cos fxoVois ir€i0op,€vois, because you alone were obedient. — 'irio-roraTois, as most trustworthy , predicate adj. —29. a\\ov . . . 8€T]cr0e, whatever else you want (749).— 30. t€\'^€(t 0€ Kvpov, you will get from Cyrus (p. 188 J ). — 33. 8iaPcf3r]Ko'Tas, that they had crossed (p. 250 5 ). — 35. oircos . . . i«\t]o*€i: cf. 790, 4.— FUTURE CONDITIONS. 373 dvcorepa) rcov pacrratv in to tov 7 roTapov. ot Se 18 SaxjjaKTjvoL ekeyov ort ovnanroO * 087*05 o 7707 *a/xo 5 Sta/ 3 aro 5 yivoiTo Tretfl el pr) Tore, aXXa 77X01015, 45 a Tore * AfipoKopas irpo'icbv KareKavcrev , tVa /xt) Kvpos oiaprj. eooKei or) veiov eivai /cat cracpcos v7ro^(oprjcrai tov norapov Kvpco <05 fiacnkevcrovTi. ivrevOev i^ekavvei Sta rrj 5 ^vplas araOpov^ ivvea 19 napacrdyyds irevripKovTa • /cat dcj)iKvovvTai 77/305 50 toi> * Apa^rjv irorapov. ivravOa rjcrav /crn/xat 770 X- Xat pearcu ctitov /cat oivov. evravOa epeivav r)pepd<; 773615 /cat eVecrtrtcrai'TO. 43. on . . . yevoiTo, neve?* before had this river become passable. — 44. €l |xil tot€, except then , emphasizing oviruTrore .— 45. KaTekauo-cv: plup. in force.— Iva fir) 8iaf3rj : see 791.—46. c’Sokci . . . Pavyrj, r\pels itcel 77/005 ravra / 3 ovkevcr 6 pe 6 a. 2 . el ovv opcorjv i>pa<; (rcoTr/ptov tl / 3 ov\evopevov$, ekOotpt av 77/005 vpa* ?. 3 . ovtco 1 eOeXco, to avhpes, Bcaj3Lj3dcraL v/ias, dv ipuol tov heoptat VTT7]p6TTj(J7}Te KCtX TaXaVTOV pUaOoV 7T0pL(7r)T6 . 5 . VVV CiV, €L /3ov\olo, av re rjpLcis 6vr)arcu<$ /cal rjpieis ae peyav 7TOL7]acufiev. 6. kclltol el apid t eXevOepo ? eir)<; /cal n tXovgios yevoto, tlvo? dv heoto ; 7. tt\v eXevOeplav eXolpLrjv dv dvrl ©v 1 2 eyco irav- Ttov. 8 . el Se adXa 'irpoTtOetri tv?, ttoXv dv n rAe/ov? hid tovto epuropevoiVTo. 9. ovS’ el nravres eXOotev Uepaat, 'rrXrjOei ye ovy 2 vnrepfiaXoipieO' dv tov /cat eiropbevoi dv (f)iXoi avTto eTTolpueOa /cal d'KiovTes dapaT7]v iroTapov iv Se^td e^cov araOpovs iprjpovs nevre irapacrdyyds rptaKovra Kat Trevre. iv tovtco Si rip TO7T0) rjv pev rj yrj ireSiov dirav opaXis 5 cocnrep OaXarra, axpivOiov Se 7 rXrjpes * el Se tl koli dXXo ivrjv vXyjs rj KaXapov , diravra rjcrav evcvSrj 4. airav: cf. 263, I. 3. — 6. a-n-avTa, if there was anything else , they were all, etc. Cf. 706, 23, 24, and note. —rjo-av : see 90. This plur. occurs BEADING LESSON. 877 V »/ 0/0 ’S' J ^ ' S' n c ocrnep apoopara* oepopov o ovoev evrjv, uiqpia oe 2 iravToia, nXetcrTOL opol dypioi , noXXal Se crrpovOol al peyaXai • ivrjcrap Se /cat cortSe? /cat Sop/caSe? * 10 TavTa Se ra OrfpicL ot innels iviore iSicoKov. /cat ot /tez' oz'ot, e7T€t rts Stco/cot, npoSpaptopres eVra- craz' * noXv yap toop Inncop erpeyov Oarrov • /cat ndXip , e7T€t nXrjaid^oLep ot t7T7rot, TavTov inoiovv , /cat oG/c ^ Xa/3etz/, et jit?) StaaTaz/res ot inne^s 15 drjpcoep ScaSe^opepoi. ra Se /cpea rwz^ aXicncope- poop rjv napanXrjcr ia rot? eXac^etot?, dnaXdrepa Se. *jTpovOov Se ovSels eXa/3ep • ot Se Sico^avres toop 3 Innecov ra^u inavovro • 7toXG ya£> dnecrnd (j)ev- yovcra , rot? jitet' 7rocrt Spopco, rat? Se nrepv&p 20 alpovcra iocrnep Icrricp -^pcopeprj. ra? Se cortSa? a^ rt? ra^u apLCTTrj, ecrrt Xap/3dveLP • neroprai yap /3pa^y cocrnep nepS~u7TO toG Mar/ca kvkXco. ivravO * epeivav rjpepds rpets /cat inealricrapTo. evrevOep etjeXavvei crraOpov ? ipyjpovs TpLCTKaCSeKa 5 30 napaaayyas ivepyjKovra top ^vcjypaTrjp norapov ip frequently in Xenophon. — 7. ScVSpov: emphatic by its position. — 8. irXei- pa • ot oe evot- 35 / couz ^ re ? 0V0U9 aXeras napa top norapov dpvTTovres Kal noiovvTes eis BafivXcbva rjyov Kal incoXovv Kal avrayopa^ovres alrov itpv. to Si (TTparevpa 6 6 crtro? e 7 reXi 7 re, /cat npiacrOai ovk rjv el prj iv Trj AvSta ayopa iv tco K vpov fiapfiapLKco, ttjv Kani- 40 Orjv aXevpcov rj olXc^ltcov rerrapoiv aCyXcov. 6 Se criyXo 9 Svvarai inra ofioXovs Kal rjpio)/ 36 Xiov ’Ar- tlkovs * rj Se KairiOrj Svo yoiviKas ’Arn/cas i^copeu. Kpea ovv icrOlovres ol (TTpanooTai SteyCyvovTO. rjv 7 TovTcov tcov crTaOpcov ovs navv paKpovs rjXav- 45 vev , 07 T 0 T 6 ^ 7rpo9 vSa )/7 fiovXoiTO SiareXe'crat, 77/709 ylXov. Kal S 77 770T€ crTevo^coplas /cat nrjXov avevTos rat 9 apa^ais SvcrnopevTOV inecrTrj 6 KG/709 crvv tols nepl avrov aplaTOLS Kal euSat - 33. aXXo, either. — 35. ovovs aXeTas, mill-stones. From the ass, as a beast of burden, the term ovos came to have various derived meanings, as here the upper mill-stone. — impd tov iroTapidv: note the acc. and cf. 751, 3.— 38. Kal. . . rfv, it leas impossible to purchase it. — 39. rqv KairCGqv . . . on-yXwv, namely the capithe of flour or barley (gen. of material, 743, 4) for four sigli (758).—41. Svvarai, is worth, with acc. — 43. Kpea eo-Gtovres: by eating (379) flesh , i.e. on flesh. — qv... ovs: equivalent to ^aav rives rovrwv rS)v o-rad/uiaiv ovs , there were some of these marches (743, 6) which , etc. In the same way emv o'l signifies simply some (= sunt qul in Lat.). The phrases became fixed and the verb remained in the sing., without regard to the number of the unexpressed subj. Translate V ovs simply some. The acc. is cognate (732) after h\awev. — 44. p.aKpovs: predicate adj.— 45. o-iroT€ (3ovXoito, whenever he wished .—46. Kal 8q itotc, and once in particular , adding a special fact. — av£vros: gen. absol. (762). The partic. agrees with the nearer subst. — 47. Tats dp.d£ai$ 8v9 rdyicrra. 11. /cal ervv vpuv o rt av Bey TrelcropLaL. 12. orrov arparyyh 9 crw9 ex? 7 , tox» crrparyyov irape/cdXovv. 13. OL 8k avBpes elalv ol TTOiovvres 6 n av ev rax9 pedya/s yiyvyrai. 14. 6 x 9 ra 7 rXola rov 9 Te daOevovvras eveftlfiaaav /cal rcov a/cevcov ocra puy dvay/crj yv eyetv. 15. C 09 epoO oSi/ X 0 W 09 orry av /cal vpcels, ovreo ryv yveopuyv eyere. 16. eirepare yap ffi/covs otvov , d7ror€ 7rdz/a Xd/3ox. 17. ovrtvos B * 380 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. av Ser)(T06 olBa on &>? (j>l\oi rev^ecrOe K vpov. 18. a firj e/3ov\ero Bovvai , ov/c av eBcotcev. 19. to Be Xolttov ireLpoa- jievoi TavTTjs t% ra^ecos /3ov\evcr6pLe0a o n av del /cpanarrov Botcr elvai. 20. el ovv vvv airoBei^Oelr] rtvas %pr) rj^elaQai tov ifKaialov, ovtc av oirore ol 7 roXeguoi eXOoiev ^ovXeveaOat, rjpids SeoL. 21. avBpl e/cdarco Bcbaco irevre dpyvptov pivasi 67 rrjv els "BafivX&va rj/cwpiev. 22. ovB ’ epel ovBels ft>? eycb eiretBav amevai /3ov\rjTal ns o-vWaj3cbv avrovs /ca/ccos iroioi. 812. Relative clauses are to be distinguished according to the nature of the antecedent of the relative. a. The antecedent of a relative is either definite or indefinite. It is definite when the relative refers to a definite person or thing, or to some definite time, place, or manner; it is indefinite when no such definite person, thing, time, place, or manner is referred to. Both definite and indefinite antecedents may be either expressed or under¬ stood. b. A relative clause with an indefinite antecedent has a conditional force, and is called a conditional relative clause. Its negative is always fxrj. c. A conditional relative clause differs from an ordinary condi¬ tional clause not in force but only in form. It substitutes for the ordinary conditional particle et, if, a relative pronoun or adverb, but with the added idea of the person, thing, time, place, or manner con¬ tained in the relative. E.g. in the sentences given above oto>, to whom¬ soever, in 1, is equivalent to et Tin, if to anybody; oiroTe, whenever, in 2, to et 7 Tore, if ever, a, which, in 3, to et ravra, etc. Review 797, and the observation which precedes it. Examine 1, 6, 10, 14, conditional relative sentences of the First Class, expressing particular suppositions (I. 1). Review 803, and the observation which precedes it. Examine 13, 22, conditional relative sentences of the First Class, expressing present general suppositions (I. 2 a). Review 804, and the observation w r hich precedes it. Examine 2, 5, 9, 12, 16, conditional relative sentences of the First Class, expressing past general suppositions (I. 2 b). CONDITIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES. 381 .Review 798, and the observation which precedes it. Examine 18, a conditional relative sentence of the Second Class (II.). Review 273, and 272 a. Examine 4, 7, 8, 11, 15, 17, 19, 21, conditional relative sentences of the Third Class (III.). Review 300, and 299 a. Examine 3, 20, conditional relative sentences of the Fourth Class (IV.). 813. Rule of Syntax. — Conditional relative sentences have four classes, two (I., IT.) containing present and past, and two (III., IV.) containing future conditions, which correspond to those of ordinary protasis. Class I. has two forms, one (1) with particular suppositions, the other (2) with general sup¬ positions, either present (a) or past (b). 814. The following table gives a summary classification of both ordinary conditional and conditional relative sen¬ tences : — I. Present and Past suppositions implying nothing as to the fulfilment of the condition: — 1. Particular: — • Protasis has el Conditional relative has relative Apodosis has Antecedent clause has j- with indicative, any form of the verb. 2 a. Present General: — Protasis has edv 'f Conditional relative has relative with dv j su ^j unc ti ve - Apodosis has ) Antecedent clause has f preSent mdlcative ‘ 2 b. Past General: — Protasis has el Conditional relative has relative Apodosis has Antecedent clause has t with optative. j- imperfect indicative. 382 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. II. Present and past suppositions implying that the condition is not or was not fulfilled: — Protasis has d Conditional relative has relative Apodosis has Antecedent clause has with past tense of indicative, past tense of indicative with - with optative. [• optative with ar. 815. EXERCISE. 1. But we must suffer whatever shall seem best to the gods. 2. And I should fear to follow the guide whom he might give us. 3. But if anybody shall hinder us from our journey, we shall fight it out with him 2 as bravely as possible. 3 4. He (is) a worthy friend, to whomsoever he is a friend. 5. But I grant you, said he, whichever you wish to choose. 6. And in com¬ pany with you I shall be in honour wherever I shall be. 7. He hunted on horseback, whenever he wished to exercise himself. 8. Whenever anybody wished to go away, he permitted him. 4 9. And whenever it was necessary to cross a bridge, each com¬ pany hastened. 10. (Those) who 5 were not able to escape perished. 11. Whatever 6 arrows were taken were useful to the bowmen. 12. Whenever it shall be (the) proper time, I will come. 1 See p. 375i. 2 Use oStos, and see 773. 3 Lit., as we shall be able most bravely. 4 Of. 811, 22 above. 5 Use ocros. 6 Lit., how many (use SirSaos) of the arrows (743, 6 a). READING LESSON . 383 LESSON CXXVIL Reading Lesson. 816. Anabasis I. v. 8-13. The work progresses slowly, and Cyrus bids the noblest of the Per¬ sians about him to lay hold. With splendid discipline, they instantly obey (8). The march of Cyrus across the desert has been rapid, for he hopes by a quick and vigorous attack to take the king at a disad¬ vantage (9). On the way the soldiers cross the Euphrates, on rafts made of skins, to Charmande, where they purchase food and wine (10). Here a dispute arises between the troops of Clearchus and Me non, and Clearchus narrowly escapes being killed (11, 12). Greatly in¬ censed, he calls his men to arms, and advances against Menon’s divis¬ ion, who are thrown into consternation by his attack (13). y. € 7 T€t S’ iSoKOVV CLVTCp CT^oXcUto? TTOIEIV , COCFTTep 8 opyfj iKeXevcre rou? irepl a vtov Uepcrds tovs KpaTicrTovs (JvveiricnrevcrcLi ra? a/xafas. evda S rj pepos tl Trjs evTOL^ids rjv OeacracrOai. ptxfjavTes 5 yap tovs 7 Topcfrvpovs kolvSvs ottov tTvyev eKacrros ecrTrjKcos, fevro dxnrep av Spa/xot tis irepX vlktjs Kal ptaXa Kara irpdvovs yrjXocfrov, l^o^re? tovtovs re tov 5 7 ToXvreXecs yirdv a? /cat ra? 7rot/ct\a5 dva- fjvpi&as, evioi Si Kal ctt ptTTTovs 7repl tols rpaxy- 10 Xots Kal xfjeXta irepl rat? yepcriv • evOvs Se avv tovtols elcnrrjSyjcravTes ets tov 7 ttjXov Oolttov rj 1. okrircp opyfj, just as if in anger (775). —6. wnrcp . . . vfiajs, just as one would run (i.e. in a foot-race at the public games) to get the victory. — 7. Kal polka . . . ‘yTj\dou, even dozen a very (^aAa) steep hill. — c'xovtcs . . . ava£vp£Sas, having on both the costly tunics and coloured trousers which they are in the habit of wearing, tovtovs marks the dress as one well known. —11. Oarrov . . . av wero, more quickly than (omit us, as, in 384 READING LESSON. res dp cocto peTecopov<; i^eKOfJuorap ras dyuafds. to Se avpirap SrjXos rjp K vpos &)? (nrevhoiv irdcrap 9 ttjp 6Sop kcll ov ScaTpificop onov p ,rj eTricriTLcrpov 15 epeKa 77 tipos dXXov apayKaiov iicaOe^eTo, popl^cop, oaco pep Oolttop eX#oi, toctovtco airapacrKevoTepcp fia ctlXci payeicrOai, ocrco sa cr^oXaiTepop, toctovtco ttX4op crvpayeipecrdaL fiacnXeL crTpaTevpa, kcll crvviheip S’ r\p rw TrpocreyopTi top povp rj fiacriXecos 20 dp)(rj TrXrjdei pep ycopas kcll dpOpconcop la^ypa oScra, rocs Se pyKecrc tcop oScop kcll t&> Stecnra- ordai ras Svpdpas dcrdeprj 9 , el res Sea to\1(op top TroXepop e7TOC€cro. 7repdv Se tov Ev^yoarov iroTa- 10 pov /card tovs iptfpovs (TTaOpovs rjp 7roXcs evSai- 25 pcop Kal peyaXrj , opopa Se XappdpSrj • e/e TavTTjS oi (TTpcLTicoTai rjyopa^op Ta eTTcr^Seca, cr^eScacs English) one would have thought. This indie, with # 1 / expresses past pos¬ sibility, and is called the potential indie. — 12 . peTecSpovs I^Kopicrav: i.e. lifted and carried out. —13. SrjXos . . . cnreu'Swv, Cyrus himself (d>$ with the partic.) showed that he was making haste. — 14. 080 'v: see 735. — ov Siarpt(3cov: with 8rj\os $v, it was evident he did not delay .—oirov jitj, except where , lit. where not. —16. ocr

) less prepared , etc. —17. ro- o-ovt a) . . . o-TpaTcvpa, the greater the army that was collecting for the king. Note the tense of owayeipeadai, expressing an action in progress.— 18. Kal. . . ovtra, and further (/ecu) an attentive observer (rep .. . rbv vovv, 771) could see that the king's empire was powerful in respect to extent of territory and number of mhabitants. awideiv is introduced as subj. of it was possible to see, and the natural const, to follow would be tV dpxV ‘Vxupa v overav (p. 250 5 ). But after rbv vovv the writer’s point of view changes, and the rest of the sentence is constructed as if for o-uviSeiv ?jv the nearly equivalent 877 Ap ?jv (cf. 1. 13) had been used. — 20. to yap 771/ ei> 7-77 X^pcL nXcL&Tov. dp^/tXefat/Ta/t/ Se' tl ivTavOa tq)v 11 re tov MeVa/i/os Tcov /cat ra/t/ tot) KXeap- 35 x ov > o KXe'ap^os Kplvds dSiKecv tov tov MeVa/t/os as ivifiaXev • 6 Se iXOcov 7rpos to iavrov crrpaTevpa eXeyev * a/codo-az/Tes Se ot o-TpaTta/Tat iyaXinaLvov kcll cvpyi^ovTo Icr^vpco^ rS KXeap^w. ttJ Se auT# ^pepa KXeap^os iXOcbv ini ttjv Sta- 12 40 fia0€pds, x o, p TOV: see 749. — o-TcydcrpaTa, as coverings (716).—29. cos H aiTTcorBat: the infin. with is (as with ware) expresses result. — KapT)s: see 746.—31. Ik, diro: respectively cw£ o/, off of. — 32. tovto . . . ‘irXeurrov, for this (thing') was very abundant in the coun¬ try. tovto is neut., although referring to peA.fi/yjs.— 33. dptfjiXelavTcov rt, having had some dispute (732).—35. dSiKetv . . . Mlveovos, that Menon's soldier (probably two soldiers, one of Menon, the other of Clearchus, had begun the quarrel) was in the wrong (354). — 42. crvv . . . avrov, with few about him , lit. with those about him few , bxlyois being a pred. adj. — 46. avrov: see 746.—X(0co: sc. tijai .—48. KaTac^evya, flees for help .— 386 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. napayyeWeu els rol oirXa * /cal rovs p,ev on\t - 50 tocs avroi) iKeXevcre peivai ras dcrniSas npos ra yovara Oevras, a vtos Se Xaficov rovs ©yoa/cas /cal tous inneds, ot rjcrav avrco ev rco ’ fipcas ep^eo-Qe; 16. Kal nrapijyayov ev Tpiatv rjpepai 9 ea >9 iirl Ta opia KaTeGTrjaav tov 9 r 'FiXXr)va<;. 17. 0 he KXea/ 3%09 Icr^vpo)^ KaTeTetvev , ecr tg hieirpa^aTO irevTe pev (TTpaTrjyovs levat , gXkogi he Xo^ar/ov<;. 18. Kal 'iroXepoov hceyeveTo KXeap%09 pixP L KOpo 9 eherfOr) tov GTpaTevpa - T 09 . 19. eKaGTOTG irepiepevopev ecos ftaGLXev? nrapeXavvoc, 20. hiaTeXoi7]v av r rroXepcbv e&>9 ra9 raw 7 rapahoirjGav. 21 . iraVTas ovtco hiaTidels direrrepireTO cogtg avTcp pidXXov cfrlXov? elvau fj paaiXel. 22. vpas XPV SiafivvaL tov nroTa- pov nrplv hrjXov elvai S tl ol aXXoi ''J^XXrjves anroKpiVOvVTai. 23. eav koXcos KaTanrpa^co ecf) a GTpaTevopat , ov nzpoaOev nravaopai 7 rplv av vpas KaTayayco oiKahe. Examine the relative clauses in 5, 9 (two illustrations). Observe that these clauses express purpose and have the fut. indie. 818. Rule of Syntax. — The relative with the future indica¬ tive may express a purpose. Examine the relative clause in 14. Observe that this clause expresses result and has the indicative with ov. 388 CLAUSES WITH em?, eare, pexph A $L> coo-re. 819. Rule of Syntax. — The relative, generally with the indicative, may express a result. The negative is ov. Examine the relative clauses in 11, 15. Observe that these clauses express cause and have the indicative. 820. Rule of Syntax. — A relative clause may express a cause. The verb is in the indicative, as in causal sentences (781). Examine the temporal clauses in 16, 17, 18. Observe that these clauses are introduced by temporal particles meaning until, that they refer to the past, and have the indicative. 821. Rule of Syntax. —When ?o)s, ccrrc, and p.eypi, until , refer to a definite past action, they take the indicative, usually the aorist. Examine the temporal clauses in 1, 4, 6, 10, 12, 19, 20. Observe that these clauses follow the construction of conditional relative sentences. 822. Rule of Syntax. — The particles Iws, tore, and p-typi, until, follow the construction of conditional relatives in both forms of future conditions, in unfulfilled conditions, and in present and past general suppositions. Examine the clauses with irpiv in 3, 7, 13, 22, 23. 823. Rule of Syntax. — The particle irpiv, before, until, is followed by the infinitive, and also (like ecus) by the finite moods. a. With the infinitive irpiv means before , and the leading clause is affirmative. With the finite moods irpiv means before or until, and the leading verb is negative or implies a negative. Examine the consecutive clauses with wore in 2, 8, 21. 824. Rule of Syntax. — wo-tc, so as, so that, is used with the infinitive and with the indicative to express a result. a. With the infin. (the negative being parj), the result is stated as one which the action of the leading verb tends to produce; with the indicative (the negative being ov), as one which that action actually does produce. BEADING LESSON. 389 825. EXERCISE. 1. They waited until the men left the city. 2. They are getting arms together with which to defend themselves. 3. Let the truce be in force until I come. 4. He had not come; so that the Greeks were anxious. 5. He was not will¬ ing to go, until his wife persuaded him. 6. They command the heralds to wait until the general shall be at leisure. 7. But the rest of the soldiers struck 1 and stoned and reviled the man until they compelled (him) to take 2 his shield and proceed. 8. Generals have come to collect an army for Cyrus. 9. When they had heard this, they obeyed and crossed before the rest made answer. 10. He will not stop fighting against his opponents until he has consulted with you. 11. You are happy, since you have ancestral gods. 12. For I have tri¬ remes, so as to capture their boat. 13. I shall delay in Sardis until the general arrives. 14. If I had known this, I should have waited until the general had arrived. 15. We will go forward until we join Cyrus. LESSON CXXIX. Beading Lesson. 826. Anabasis I. v. 14-17 and vi. 1-5. Proxenus comes up and endeavours to persuade Clearchus not to make an attack (15). Then Cyrus comes (16), and in sharp and vigorous language shows the Greeks the folly and danger of a quar¬ rel (16). Clearchus comes to his senses, and withdraws his troops (17). As the army advances, traces of the king’s cavalry are observed. Orontas, a Persian noble, turning traitor to Cyrus, offers to go for¬ ward with a thousand horse and cut off the cavalry that are laying the country waste by fire. To this Cyrus consents (1, 2). Orontas 1 Use the historical pres. 2 Use the partic. ’ 390 READING LESSON. then writes to the king, saying that he intends to desert with his command. But his messenger betrays him and carries the letter to Cyrus. He arrests the traitor and summons seven Persian noblemen and Clearchus to his tent to try him (3, 4). Clearchus afterwards relates how the trial was conducted (5). T. 6 Se Tipo^evos (eTv\e yap vcTTepos 7 rpoaioiv teal 14 rafts avTco enopevr] tcov oi tXItcdv) ev9vs ovv els to pecrov dpcfroTepcov aycov eOeTO ra 07rXa /cat eSetro tov KXea px ov PV iroieiv ravra. 6 S’ i)(a\eTraivev 5 ort avrov oXiyov SeqcravTOS KaTaXevaOrjvai irpacos Xeyot to avrov 7rd0os, eKeXevcre re avrov e’/c tov pecrov eftcrracr^at. iv tovto) Se inyei /cat K vpos 15 /cat invOeTO to irpaypa • evdvs S’ eXafie Ta 7raXra ets ras ^etpas /cat ervv rots irapovcri tcov tti- 10 cttcov rjKev eXavvcov els to pecrov , /cat Xeyet raSe. KXeayo^e /cat Ilpofet'e /cat ot aXXot ot irapovTes 10 ^EXX^^es, ovk tore o rt rrotetre. et yap rt^a dXXrj- Xois pd^qv crvvdxjjeTe , vopC^eTe ev TjjSe tj) r)pepa ipe Te KaTaKeKoxjjeaO at /cat tfp-a? ou ttoXu e’p,oi/ 15 vcrTepov * /ca/crns yap rmi/ rjpeTepcov iyovTcov irdvTes ovtol ovs opare fiapfiapoi 7roXepicoTepoL 'qp'iv ecrovTai toiv Trapd /3acn\ei ovtcov. aKovcrds 17 ravra 6 KXeap^os eV eaurm eyeVero * /cat iravcrd- pevoi dpcjooTepoi Kara ydpdv eOevro ra 07rXa. 1. €tvx€ . • • irpoouwv, happened to he coming on later (p. 250 1 2 3 ). — 2 . Taf-is: sc. ervxev. —ovv: resumes the narrative, after the parenthetical statement. — 5. ort. . . \4yoi, because, when he (i.e. Clearchus) had barely escaped , lit. had wanted little (749) of (762), being stoned to death , he had spoken lightly .— 12. et s Stcr^tXt&jt' LTTTTCOV. OVTOi TTpOLOVTeS €KaoV KOU )(tXoP KCLL 6t 71 a XXo xPV (TL l Ji01/ V Vt 'Opovrds Se Ueporrjs avrjp yeve t re npocnjKoou / 3 ac rtXet /cat ra iroXepia Xeyo- 25 pei /09 et> T0t9 apto*TOt9 Ilepow iTTiftovXevei Kvpco, kcu irpocrOev 770X67x77 era 9 , /caTaXXayet 9 Se. o?to 9 2 Kupft) €t7r€^, 6t CLVTCp Soirj LTTTreds ^iXlOVS, OTt TOV9 7rpoKaTaKaovTa<; t 7777 ea 9 ^ KaraKavoi av iveSpev- cra9 ^ ^aivTCLS 7roXXov? avrdv dv eXot /cat KcoXycrete 30 rov KCLeiv 677 tdpTa 9 , /cat 770177creiez/ wore 7x7777076 SvvacrOaL clvtovs lSovtcls to Kvpov crTpdrevpa fiacnXei StayyetXat. 7pa - crat tois eavrov Imrevcni' itceXeuev a>9 fyiXiov avrov vnoSexecrOcu. ivrjv Se ev rfj 67710*70X77 /cat 7779 40 7 Tpoadev <^>tXta 9 vTropvnjpaTa /cat 77to*rea)9. Tav- 20. Ivtc {J06V : from the camp opposite Charmande. — irpoiovTcov: sc. avTwv (762). — 24. ‘ycvei: c/. 816, 20. — to uoXefua Xe-yo'iuvos, reckoned , matters pertaining to war (733). — 27. ct avTw 8 o£tj: the apodosis to this protasis (300) contains four verbs. The particle is expressed with the first two and is to he supplied with the others. — on: the position is unusual. We should expect to find ort just after efrrev .—30. tov kcwiv tinoVras, from attacking (Myras limits the subj. of Kaeiv) and burning (753). — cIhttc |iTjiroT€ 8vvcur0at: see 824 a.—33. Tavra: subj. of eS^Kct. — 34. ifycpovttv: i.e. the Persian commanders.—36. on. . . irXefo-rovs. {to the effect ) that he would come with as many horsemen as he should be 392 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. T7)V TTjV iTTLCTToXrjV SiScOCTL 7TLCTTM avSpl, 0)$ jy- yeiXe to'ls (J)lXols tt\v Kpicriv tov * Opovra a>5 eye- pero • ou yap airoppr^Tov rjv. ea €n(TTo\rjv, lie says that he is writing a letter. SIMPLE SENTENCES. ti fiovXeaOc; what do you want? ipura tl (or 6 tl) fiovXeo-Oe, he asks what you want. Tt €L7r(o; what shall I say ? airopei tl (or 6 tl) eon/, he is at a loss what to say. Observe in these examples that a simple sentence, in the form of a statement or question, is quoted indirectly , i.e. that its original words are made to conform to the construction of the sentence in which they are quoted. This involves in some of these examples a change in the person of the verb of the quoted sentence. Whether the person changes or not depends on the connexion, as in English. It involves also the use of on or ok, that , to introduce the indirect quotation and may involve a change of the interrogative pronoun to the general relative (570) in the indirect question. 828. Examine the following: — ZXe£ev on (or ok) ypafioL lirLaToXrjv, he said that he was writing a letter. rjpuTrjo-e tl (or o n) /3ovXoL? ae cnroSpw. 1 5. So/cel Se fiot rjfias epcorav K vpov tl ftovXeTat rjfiiv %prjadaL. 6. ovk e^o) 2 '6 tl ercd(TT(0 tmv (ptXcov. 7. dirofcpiveTat '6 tl TauT av hroirfcrev f]fia<$ l8cov. s 8. \eyet eo? 7 repl 7 rXet- (TTOV av rroLTfcraLTO (Twaat rjfias. 9. iireSetKVV 00 ? evrjOe? el'rj 1 In the original, tt&s rj Tore. 23. rjpcoTcov el hoiev av TOVTCDV TCL TTLCTTa . 24. /cal KOpo? eXeyev '6 tl r/ 0 S 0 ? ecoiTO 7rpo<; fiaaiXea pueyav els B afivX&va. 25. /cat ovttot€ epei ovhels &)? 67 ft) 7 rpohov? vpucis Trjv tmv fiapfiapcov fyCXiav elXopirjv. 26. eyvco otl ov hvvijaeTai tou? aTpaTMOTa? filar aaaOai levai. 27. evOa hrj ol ''JLXXrjve? eyvcoaav otl 7rXal~ c tlov ladjrXevpov 'irovrjpa tcl^l^ eirj. 28. efiovXevovTo el Ta cr/cevo(f)6pa evTavOa ayoiVTO 7 ) dirloiev eirl to aTpaToirehoVo 29. efiod /cal fiapfiapi/ccbs /cal 'HLXXrjvi/ccbs otl fiaaiXev? avv v (partic. of manner) iiroir\ ’Opwra, ecrriv 7 o n ere r)$LK 7 ]cra ; aneKplvaTo otl ov. nd\iv Se o K vpos rjpooTa, O vkovv varepov, a>9 avros ; /cat ravd’ oopoXoyei 6 ’Opovras. Tt 8 20 oSt', i(j)r) 6 Kupos, a§LK7)6els vn ipov vvv to rpt- tov im/3ovXeva)v pot (f>avepos yeyovas ; elnovros oe rov Kjpovra on ovoev aot/a^aei?, rjpooTrjcrev o Kvpo? avTov , 'O/xoXoyets ouz^ 7rept ep,e aSt/cos ye- yevrjcrdai ; yap avdyKr), i(f)r) 6 ’OpcWas. e/c 25 tovtov naXiv rjpdoTrjcrev 6 Kvpos, v Ert ow az^ yevoio rep ipco aSeXcfxp noXeptos, ipol Si tXo 9 /cat mcrros; o Se aneKpivaro otl ov S’ et yevoiprjv, is accented. —14. 6 ti cSvvoo, in what (733) you were able. — 16. Svvajuv: the context shows that this means here lack of power , weakness. — 17. |i€Tape\€iv o-oi, that you repented (354). — 21. errifilovX.cvcov ... yt-yovas, are you so manifestly plotting against me? —eIitovtos ’Opo'vrd: see 762. — 22. on ovScv dStK^OeCs : sc. im^ovXeiicov airrcp (pavepbs yeyove .— 24. *H yap, (I confess ) for in truth, etc. — avdyta]: sc. iariu. — 27. o'ti: BEADING LESSON. 399 OLTTCH o5 ra^tcrra, o>5 /x^/cert Serj tov¬ tov (jyvXdTTeo-Oat , aXXa ct^oXt) rj rjfjLLV to Kara 35 tovtov eivai tov 5- eOeXovTas (friXovs tovtov 5 eS noieiv. TavTTj Se tt) yvdprj ecf)rj koI tovs dXXovs 10 npocrOecr 9 at. /xera raura, 6(^77, KeXevovTos Kvpov eXa/ 3 ov Tp 5 ^dvrjs tov *0 povTav ini OavaTco dnav- re5 OLvcMTTavTes Kcu 01 crvyyeveis ■ eira Se i^rjyov 40 avTov oi5 npoo'eTayOi 7. e7rel Se elSov avTov olnep npocrdev npoaeKvvovv , /cat rore npoaeKvvr]crav , Kamep etoore5 ort ern uavaTov ayoiTo. e7rei oe 11 €t5 TTjv 5 ApTanaTOV aKTjvrjv elo’y]\ 0 r] tov mcrro- Tarov tcov Kvpov (jKr^nTovywv, /xera tclvtol ovTe 45 £ aWa ’ OpovTav ovt€ TeOvrjKOTa ovSels elSe ndnoTe ovoe 0770)5 aneuavev ovoeis €too>5 ekeyev • eiKa^ov oe aAAot aXXo)5 * radvrj. here introduces a direct quotation, and is not to be translated. — 34. to Kara tovtov clvat, so /ar as /Ms fellow is concerned. The infill, may stand absolutely in parenthetical phrases, but in certain instances of this use it seems superfluous, as here /cara tovtov eivai means no more than / ccn-a tovtov (lit. as regards what pertains to him). t6 with the word for thing understood (p. 83 9 ) is an accusative of specification (733).—35. 40eXov- Tas : note the accent (a subst., not iOe\ovTas, partic. of ide\oo). — 38. c'XaPov . . . ’OpoVrav : verbs signifying to take hold of may be followed by the simple gen. (746), or, as here, by an object acc. with a gen. of the part taken hold of. — 39. Kai, even. —40. ols Trpoi\ov dxpeXrjcrai ovr av e^Opov ake^ao’Ocu. 22, ev avpfiovXevcrai ? ecfydvrj 6 avrjp, 23. olpucu yap hv fjpas roiavra rraQeiv ola tou? i%0pov$ oi Oeol rroir)~ aeiav. 1 24. K i/pos S’ eVet rjcOero robs gt par mot a? Siafieftr)- Koras, rjcrOrj. 25. vmayyelrai avrois pr) irpoaOev rravaeaQai TTplv av avrov 9 /carayayy oi/caSe. 26. €7 reiBrj Se rov 9 j3ap - / Sapov? ov irpoaiovra '? ecbpcov ol r/ l^\XrjV€ rropi^opevov^ ra €7 rirtfSeia. 28. eZ o£z> opqygv vpa 9 acorripiov n fiovXevopevovs, eXOoipi av 777305 vpa<;, 29. €7 nftovXevcov rjplv (f>avepo9 e(j)aaav ol/celv dvd ra oprj /cal 7 ToXepi/cov<; eivai, /cal fiao-i- Xea)? ou/e d/coveiv , dXXa epftaXeiv 7 totc et 9 avrov 9 ftaaCEed, 836. Indirect quotations are expressed not only by on or ws and a finite verb (830), but also by tbe infinitive , and some¬ times by the participle. In examining the sentences cited below, convert each indirect quotation into its original form. Examine the infinitives in 2, 3, 9, 12 ( KaraKOTrrjvai, aTroXctrOai), 16, 21 (av elvat, av civ at), 23, 25, 30. Observe that these infinitives follow verbs of saying or thinking or the like, that they represent indicatives, or optatives with av (21, 23), in the original, and that the tenses have not been changed. If the original had av, the infinitive retains it. Review 354. Examine 4, 6, 11, 15, 17 (SerjOrjv at), 18, 20. 837. Many verbs of this class, especially Xcyw in the pas¬ sive and 8 ok€ o), seem, while allowing both the personal and the impersonal construction, are generally used personally. 838. Of the three common verbs meaning to say, — a. fftrj/xL regularly takes the infinitive in indirect discourse. Ex¬ amine 12, 16, 30. 1 See 787. 2 The original was, Uv iropi^ol^da. 402 INDIRECT DISCOURSE . b. cL7rov regularly takes on or ws with the indicative or optative. Examine 829, 13. c. Aeyw allows either construction, but in the active voice it gen¬ erally takes otl or avepos tipi, cf>avepos ytyvo/mi, used personally. c. Most of these verbs may also take a clause with otl or ws in indirect discourse. Examine the negatives with the infinitives and participles in 6, 16, 21, 25, 26, 30. 840. The regular negative of the infinitive and participle in indirect discourse is ov , but prj sometimes irregularly occurs. 841. EXERCISE . 1 1. For he heard that Cyrus was 2 in Cilicia. 2. And he promised 3 that he would deliver over the Greeks to him. 3. He said that he had been ordered 4 by my brother to war with me. 4. The wife of the king is said to have taken refuge there. 5. For I know that pledges have been given. 6. For I knew that the soldiers had provisions. 7. And the great king dug 5 this trench when he learned 6 that Cyrus was 1 See p. 396 h 3 See p. 250 6 . 2 Use the participle in translat- 4 He said, ing this exercise into Greek wher- 5 made. ever the principal verb is one of 6 Use iirei^h and the indie, of those named in 839 b. Trwddvo^on. BEADING LESSON. 403 marching against (him). 8. I saw that you were suffering harm and were not 1 able to retaliate. 9. For they did not know that he was dead. 10. They therefore announce that in that case the Greeks would retreat. 11. And the Greeks knew the enemy wished to go away. 12. Do you think, 2 Cyrus, that your brother will fight ? 13. Let it not yet be manifest that we 3 have set out for home. 14. He accordingly showed 4 that the satrap had broken the truce. 15. He is conscious that he has broken 5 the truce. LESSON CXXXIII. Reading Lesson, Anabasis I. vii. 1-10. 842. Cyrus proceeds through Babylonia, and at the end of the third day’s march reviews his troops (1). The next morning he receives information about the King’s army, and summons the Greek generals and captains to council (2). He expresses his confidence in them (3), describes the manner of a Persian onset, and promises to reward them magnificently in case of victory (4). Gaulites says there are doubts as to the sincerity of Cyrus and his ability to fulfil his prom¬ ises (5). Cyrus thereupon describes the extent of country he hopes to conquer, and promises a crown to each Greek (6, 7). The Greeks are much encouraged by these assurances (8). Cyrus gives his decided opinion that his brother will not refuse to fight (9). The numbers of the Greeks and barbarians in the army of Cyrus are given (10). 1 Cf. 835, 26 above. 2 Use oKo/iai. 3 Cf. 835, 29 above. use of the reflexive pron. 4 Use Se'iKvv/uu. 6 Cf. 835, 13 above, and note the 404 BEADING LESSON . 5 eSo/cei yap els ttjv imovcrav eco rjtjeiv fiacriXea crvv rw cTTparevpaTL payovpevov • Kal eKeXeve KXe- apyov pev tov Seftou Kepoos r)yeicrOaL , Mevcova Se tov ©erraXot' row evcovvpov , auros Se rows iavrov Siera^e. per a Se ttjv eijeracnv apa rrj inLovcrr) 2 10 rjpepa rjKovres avropoXoi irapa peyaXov fiacnXecos dmjyyeXXov Kuyoa) 7repl rrjs ySacrtXeiu? oryocmas. K vpos Se crvyKaXecras tovs crTpaTrjyovs Kal Xo)(d- yovs to) v 'JLXXrjvcov crvvefiovXeveTo re 7ra>s av ttjv pax ^ ttoioito Kal avTos Traprjvei dappvvojv rot- 15 aSe. *12 av8pes ' / QXXr)ves> ovk avdpcoTrcov atropdov 3 /3ap/3apcov crvppd^ovs vpas aya), aXXa vopiCfov apeivovs Kal Kpeurrovs 7roXX(dv fiapfiapcov ipas elvaiy Sta tovto irpoviXafiov. oncos ovv ecrecrOe avSpes a^ioi rrjs iXevdepids t]S KeKTrjade Kal fjs 20 vpas iyo) evSaLpovi^co. ev yap tore otl ttjv iXev- deplav eXoiprjv av av6 * a>v e^co navTcov Kal aXXcov 7roXXa7rXa(TLa)v. onoos sa Kal el8rjT€ els diov ep- 4 ^eaOe ayaW, vpas el8o)S StSafaj. to pev yap TrXrjOos iroXvy Kal Kpavyrj 7roXXrj eiridfriv • dv Se 25 ravra avdo'X^o'Oey TdXXa Kal alor^veadai pot 5. cSokci, he thought. — cts ...ew: cf. 175, I. 9. —6. ixaxovpevov: fut. partic. expressing purpose (379). — Kal eKeXevE . . . Silage: the Greeks were next to the river, Cyrus and his barbarian troops on their left. — 13. irws av . . . paxoiTo : see 832. —14. iraprfvci. . . toioSc, exhorted and encouraged them as follows. —18. 8ia tovto : resumes vo/x ifav, because 1 thought, etc., on this account. — oirws ecearQe: an object clause (792) after (ricoireiTe, see to it, to be supplied. — 19. rfs, tfs: see 725 and 756. — 21. dv0* vyds 2a- 5 /uos, ttiotos Se Kvpco, eXne, Kat pi jv, w K vpe> XiyovcrC rives on ttoXXol vttlo'X vei vvv Sia to iv tolovto) elvac tov klvSvvov irpocrLovTos , dv Se ev 35 yevrjTCLL n, ov pepvyjcrecrdaL ere cfrdcrLv • evioi Se ouS* el pepvrjo re kcll /3ovXolo, SvvacrdaL dv ano- Sovvcu ocra uTrio^vei. a/coucras ravra eXe£ev 6 6 Kilos', AAA eern pev rjpiv , cu avopes, rj apx 17 7raTp(vd TTpos pev pear)p/3pLav pixP L °® Sia (lit. seem £o myself even to be ashamed — see 837) as to what sort of men (avOpdoirovs with emphasized contempt at the end of the sentence) you will discover those in our country to be ( [ovtcls , 839). The indirect question olovs . . . avdpdcirovs (571 a) follows alax^veadai. Its direct form would be 7 rotovs yvaxrSpeda rovs iv rfj x^P? ^rras avOphnovs ; — 27. vp.oov . . . “ycvopivttv: gen. absol. (762), the participles expressing condition (379). Freely ren¬ dered the thought is, only do you be men (cf. 1.18) and prove yourselves bold of spirit, and I will make, etc. — 28. -ujitov: with rbv 13ov\6pevov (743 a), which is the subj. of cnreKdeiv .—29. tois oI'koi, to those at home (771).— 31. twv of koi : neut. Cf. ra trap ip.oi just above. — ravXfTTjs . • . ttire: probably at the suggestion of Cyrus. — 33. 8ia . . . irpoo-ioVros, because you are (lit. on account of your being — cf. 524, I. 19) at such (a critical point) of the danger (743 a) that is approaching. — 35. tI: the reference to his present undertaking is purposely vague. — p.«|jiv'n e/oxcrra> tcov (friXcov, dv ev yevrjTcu, aXXa /xt) ouk e^co lkolvovs ols Soo. {jpdov u to)v *E WrjVMV Kal crTecfravov efcacrra) XP^~ crovv Scoaco. ol Se ravra aKovcravTe 5 carrot re 8 rjcrav 7 to\v 7 TpoOvpoTepoi Kal rot? aAAot? efr^y- 50 yeWov. elarjo-av Se nap ’ avTov ol re crTparrjyol Kal tg)v aWcov *E Wtfvcov Tives aftoiWes elSevai ti cr(j)LcrLV ecrrai , eap KpaTyjo’cocnv. 6 Se ipnlpnXas anavTcov ttjv yvcoprjv anenepne. napeKeXevovTo 9 Se avroj ndvres ocromep 8 teXeyovro prj pax^crOau, 55 CtA.X OTTLCrPeV eaVTOJV TCtTT6(T^Cti« 6Z^ Se TO) Kaupcp tovtco KXeapxos ooSe 7rco5 rjpeTO tov Kvpov Otet yap ctol pax^icrOai, , this, namely, that I shall not know, etc. —45. 6 ti 8co: see 881. — 46. &v tv "ytVrjTai: sc. ra irpay- p.ara. — d\\a . . . 8c3, but that I shall not have enough to whom to give. — 48. ol 8t': the generals and captains (see 1. 12) present at the council.— 53. 'iraptxtX.tvovTO . . . TaTT€o-0ai: had Cyrus followed this advice, the whole course of Persian history might have been changed.—61. cunrCs, shield, i.e. men, as we say ‘a thousand horse.’— The sum total of the COMPLEX SENTENCES. 407 Kocridy 7re\racrrac Se Stcr^iXtot /cal irevTaKOcnoi, tcov Se pera Kvpov fiapfiapcov Se7ca pvpidBes koI appLOLTa SpeTTavrj^opa dptcj)l ra eiKocri. Greeks here given does not tally with the numbers previously given. The reason for the discrepancy is uncertain. Make a special study of the prepositions used in composition in this Reading Lesson (r) ^prj^eiv emOelvai avr/p, rjv Be (j)vvXdrrobev eirl rat? Hvpiab*; irvXab*;. 22. eBelro avrov ptr) irpoadev KaraXvaab irpo*; rov*; avrbaraabcord ? irplv av avrp (TVpL/3ovXev(T7)Tac. 28. el? Be Brj eiire crrparrjyov ? pbev eXeaOab aXXov*; eo? ra^bara, el pur) j3ovXerai KXeap^o? dirdyecv • eXdovra*; &e IZvpov alrelv irXola • eav Be pbrj BbBqj ravra, rjyepbova alrelv IZvpov oerrt? Bba (f>bXid*; rrj*; %ft)/>a? aira^eb. 844. When a complex sentence, i.e. a sentence consisting of a principal and a dependent clause or clauses, is indirectly quoted, its leading verb follows the rules for simple sentences (830, 831, 832, 354, 839). But its dependent verbs are subject to the following law (845). 1 In the original tovto hv iiroirt- 3 Observe the shift to direct dis- av eXOoi), 8 (rjieoiev for rjieere). Observe that the dependent clause here follows a secondary tense, that its verb was originally in the subjunctive or in a primary tense of the indicative, that it has been changed to the optative, but that its tense remains the same, and that, when the subjunctive becomes the optative, av is dropped. Examine the dependent verbs in 2 (Kparrjo-uicnv), 3 (8iSa>), 7 (^kokti, KaTacTYjcrr )), 10 (eaovrai ), 14 (yevoovrai, a£ovcriv, cloven), 15 (Sm/yrai ), 17 (rj, vyyj). Observe that the dependent clause here follows a secondary tense, but that its verb has not changed its original mood and tense. Examine the dependent verbs in 1 (eefaepov) and 16 (Sol-tj). Observe that the dependent clause here follows a secondary tense, that its verb was originally in a secondary tense of the indicative or in the optative, and that it has not changed its mood and tense. 845. Buie of Syntax. —When a complex sentence is indi¬ rectly quoted, after primary tenses its dependent verbs retain tbeir original mood and tense. After secondary tenses, de¬ pendent primary tenses of the indicative and all dependent subjunctives may either be changed to the same tense of the optative or retain their original mood and tense. When a subjunctive becomes optative, av is dropped, iav becoming el, etc. Dependent secondary tenses of the indicative and depend¬ ent optatives remain unchanged. a. One verb of the quoted complex sentence may be changed to the optative, while another is retained in the original mood. Ex¬ amine 10, 14, 15. Examine the dependent verbs in 18 (aXwcroivTo for aAtocrovrat), 19 (Xeyoi for cAcye), 20 (el Se'oiro for eav Se'rjrai), 21 (el vXaTToiev for eav vXarT( 0 (riv) f 22 (avpffovXevcnjTai), 23 (fiovXerai, SiSov after the adv. in 826, 14. — rj^pais: see 776. — 412 BEADING LESSON. Kvpov ol avTopoXrj&avTes e/c rw v 7 ToXepCcov napa peyaXov fiacnkecos npo rrj 5 pa^rj^, koll pera 15 pdxf]v ot varepov i\yj(j) 9 rjcrav tow noXepuoiv tolvtol yjyyeXXov . ivTev 9 ev Se Kupo 5 i^eXavvei crTaOpov 14 eW napacrdyyds Tpe 15 crvvTeTaypevco tco crrpaTev- pari ttclvti koll rw 'EXX^ikoj zcai to) / 3 ap/ 3 apLK(p * gj€to yap tclvtt) rrj rjpepa pa^etadat fiacriXia' 20 Kara yap pecrov tov crraOpov tovtov Tacfrpos rjv opvKTrj /3a0eia, to pev evpos opyvial nevre, to Se /3a9os opyvial Tpeis. Trapereraro Se 17 Tapo 5 15 ai'co Sia to£> neSiov ini SdjSexa napacrayyas pe^pi tov M^Stas ret^oi;?. ev9a at Stajpu^es, a7ro tov 25 Tiyp^ro? norapov peovaat • ei5 €lko(tl no8d>v to eSpog * TavTT)v Se 16 ttjv Ta(f)pov ftacriXevs noiei peyas avTi ipvpaTos, ineiSrj nvv9av€Tai Kvpov npocreXavvovTa. TavTrjv Srj ttjv napoSov Kvpo 5 Te /cat 17 crrpaTia naprjX9e 14. Kal p.€Td. . . TfyycXXov : compare the order with that of the preced¬ ing sentence.—15. iroXciAtiov: with 0 '/(743, 6 a).—17. oTivTCTayi^vip Tip orTpaT€v'p.a.Ti, Ms troops in line of battle , a dat. of manner (775) ex¬ pressing the idea of accompaniment. —20. (iccrov: cf. 741, 7, and see p. 141 6 . — 21. opyviaC : in appos. with rdcppos, where we should expect opyvi&v (743, 5). Cf. the use of the adj. in 26. — 24. tov Mt]8£ds tcCxovs : see the map. — 8uopvx.cs : sc. elcrlv. — 28. SiaXcfarovori . . . irapa rrjs Ta^pov. ravTrj pev ovv rrj 17 rj^epa ovk e^a^eVaro fiac rtXet/ 5 , a\X’ inTo^copovv- TO)v (jyavepa rjcrav /cat lttttcov /cat avOpcoiroiv v)(yv) iroWd. ivTCLvOa Kupo? SlXavov /caXecra? rov 18 ApTrpaKicoTTjv pdvTiv eScoKev a vtco Sapet/cous rpicr- 40 ^iXtous, OTI TTf evSeKaTrj OL7T e/cetV/ys rjpdpa irpoOvo- pevos eiirev avra) otl fiacnXevs ov /xa^etrat Se/ca rjpepcoVy Kupos S einev, Ovk apa ext /xa^etrat, et ev tovtclis ov payeirai rat? rjpepais • edv S’ aXrj- Oevcrrjs, vmcrxyovpai croc Se'/ca raXavra. tovto to 45 XipvcrLov Tore aneScoKeVy eVet TraprjXOov al Se/ca rjpepai. enet 8 €7rt rij ra^pco ovk iKcoXve /3acn- 19 Xev? to K vpov arpareu/xa hiafiaiveiVy eSo^e /cat K vpco /cat to t 5 aXXot? dneyvoiKevai tov pd^ecrOai • cocrre r# vcrTepaia Kupo? eVopeuero rjpeXrjpevcoq 50 paXXov. trj 8e TpLTy ini re rov appaTos KaOyj- 20 pevos ttjv iropeiav eVotetro /cat oXtyoi /5 ev rafet e)((x)v TTpo avTody to Se ttoXi; aura/ avaTeTapaypevov eiropeveTo /cat rw oVXcot' rots arpartcurats 7 roXXa e7Tt dpa^cov rjyeTO /cat VTro'Qvyioiv. in the writer’s mind when he says TraprjAOe (sing.), the whole army when he says kyevovro.— 35. pfr: cf. rrj Se rplrT] in 1. 50.—37. iftrav: cf. 810, 6, and note. — 40. on .. . etirev: causal clause (781). — dir’, from , i.e. before. — 41. on . . . paxeiTcu: see 830.— 42. Tjpepwv: see 759. — In, hereafter, i.e. at all. — el ov paxeircu: ov for n"h (797 a), because Cyrus is consciously repeating the statement of Silanus. For the fut. indie., seep. 375 43. dX.Tj0€va-r|s, prove to be speaking the truth. The future apodosis (273) is SaxTeiv, to be supplied with vTrurxuovjuai. — 45. *irapTjX0ov: see note on 706, 7. — 47. e'8o£e, he seemed (837). — 48. an , eyvo)K^vai rov paxccr0ai, to have abandoned the intention of fighting (753 and p. 194 6 ). — 49. «o-Te liropevero: see 824. — 52. avrw: dat. of disadvantage, but crpaTidorous below, of advantage (769). 414 INFINITIVE. VIII. 55 /cat rj8rj re rjv dpcj)l ayopav 7r\yj0ov(rap /cat 1 7 t\tj(Tlop rjp 6 crraOpos ep0a e/xeXXe /caraXueti', rjVLKa Uarrjyvas aprjp Hepcrrjs tcov apL K vpov 7TL(TT(t)v 7rpo(j)aLPeTai iXavvcop dpa Kparos iSpovpn TO) LTTTTCp, KCLL eV0V 5 TTaCTLP Ot? €V€TVy)(OLVZV ifiod 60 /cat fiap/3apLK0)<; /cat 'EXX^i/t/ccos ort /3ao*tXet/s crut' err pared pan noWco TTpocrepyerai &>s et? pd^rjp irapecTKevacrpevo 5 . e/^a §<7 tto\vs Tapayos eye- 2 t'ero * avTLKa yap eSo/cow ot ^EXXrji'es /cat 7 retire? Se ara/crot? ct^lctlp irrnreaelcr6ai' Kvpos re Kara- 3 65 TrrjSrjcrds airo tov apparos top OcopaKa eveSv /cat avafias im top lttttop t a 7 raXra ets ras yeipas eXa/3e, rot? re aXXots Trao't rrapiijyyeWep e^onXC- £ecr0at /cat KaOCcrTaarOaL els rrjp eavrov ra^ip eKacrTOP . 58. ISpovvTi T

Biecnrar aOat 4 Ta? Bvvapeig acrOevrjg. 16. ovtol l/cavol rjaav rag a/cpo7ro\eig (pvXaTretv. 17. tovtov yap 0 6/X09 7 rarrjp eBco - /cev v7rrj/coov elvai epol . 18. at yap acpevBovai Bia to x ei P°~ 7 rXrjOecri rolg XiOoig crcfaevBovav 5 eirl flpaxv i^i/cvovvTai. 19. ai;T?7 ay aXXr) irpocfracng rjv avrep rov aOpol^eiv CTpa- revpia. 20. 7 roXXa viriXaydz/e 9 el? ^IXiou? napa KXeapyov ecrrrjo’av iv tco 8 e^6

oto) ivTvyyavoLev. 17 Se yvcoprj rjv ax; 35 619 T(X 9 TCt^’619 TOOT' 'EXXt^T'OOT' eXoivTa Kai Sta/co- xpovra. o pevTOL Kvpos 61776 ^ ore KaXeads nape- 11 KeXeveTO T019 ^EXXt^cti ttjv Kpavyrjv tq>v fiapfiapwv ave^ecrOaiy ixpevcrOrj tovto ' ov yap K P av yy uXXa crEy^ 009 avvcrTov Kal tjctvxj) iv icrco Kai / 3 pa 8 eo >9 40 npoarjcrav. Kal ev tovtco Kvpos napeXavvcov 12 avro9 9 /or a great distance. — 25. tovtwv: see 746.—28. iravTss . . . ciropcveTo, but these were all proceeding nation by nation , each nation (eKaarov rb eduos in appos. with ooroi) in the form of a solid square. iiropeveTo (for iiropevovTo ) is attracted into agreement with iQvos , which intervenes be¬ tween the verb and its subj. —30. app-ccra: sc. fy. — a-v\vov: sc. xcoptov ( 735 ). _33. SiaKo-irTciv: cf. 816, 29, and note. See also 824 a.— 34 . otw 4 vtvyx°^ v01€V : we m ight have had oto) hv ii/rvyx°- vwr), viKcbpejs, 7 TavO' f)fills 7reTrolrj~ 45 rai. opcov 8e 6 KXeap^o? to fiiaov oti<£o 9 /cal 13 olkovcov K vpov ££(0 ovtol tov 'E Wtjislkov evcovvfiov fiacnXed {toctovtov yap TrXrjOei uepirfv fiacrikevs cb(TT€ fiecrov to iavrov e^cois tov Kvpou evannspov ££o) rjv) — aXX* op, 0/9 6 KXeap^o? ovk rj6e\eis a770- 50 crndcrai duo tov noTapov to 8 e^iov /cepa9, (fsofiov- fi€iso$ fiYj KVK\co9eirj eKaTepcoOev , to) Se K vpco direKptisaTO otl a vtco peXoL 0770/9 /caXa/g e^ot. /cal 14 kv tovto) to) Kaipco to pev fiapfiapiKOTs orTparevpa opaXa /9 uporjeL , to Se 'EXX'/pi/cot' ere tco avTq> 55 pevov crviseTaTTeTo £k tosv £tl irpocnovTcov. /cal 6 Kupo9 uapeXavvcois ov uavv 7rpo9 avTO) tos, although he saw (con¬ cessive, 379) the compact body at the centre , i.e. the 6000 cavalry nlen mentioned in 848, 3. a/coiW is also concessive. —46. Kvpov, from Cyrus (p. 188 *).— ovTa |3ao-iX4d, that the king was (839). — 47. ‘irXijOci, in respect to numbers , a dat. of manner (775) expressing respect. —49. dXX’ dpcos, but still, resuming the narrative after the parenthesis, with emphatic repetition of 5 K Aeapxos .— 52. on. . . cxoi: Clearchus said, i/xol peAft ottcos Ka\a>s exV ( sc ‘ T “ 1 rpaypara). See 845. — 53. to |3ap|3apiKdv o'Tpa- T€vp.a: the king’s army. — 55. pc'vov: nom. sing. neut. of the present partic. — o"uv€toitt€to . . . -irpocridvTwv, was forming its line from those still coming up. — 56. ov -irdw irpo's, not very near , i.e. at some distance from. — 57. CKaTcpoxrc : with a7roj8AeVa'i'. — 60. ws o’vvavTrjo'ai: cf. 1. 33 above, and note. — cl n irapayycXXoi, whether he had any orders (830). — 61. 4m- PARTICIPLE. 421 ra lepa Kaka Kal rot crcjxiyLa Kaka. ravra Se 16 key cov Oopvfiov r\Kovcre Sia toov Ta^ecov lovtos, Kal rjpero ri 5 6 Oopvfios eirj. 6 Se K keap^os elnev otl 65 to avvdrjpa irapepyeTai Sevrepov rjhrj. Kal 09 edavpao'e tls irapayyekkei Kal rjpeTo o tl ecrj to avu0rjpa. 6 S’ aireKptvaTO ZET$ SOTHP KAI NlKH. cTT^cds, pulling up (sc. rbv I-kttov ).— 64. o 8« KXeapxos: Clearchus had ridden np in the meantime. — 65. Kal os, and he, i.e. Cyrus. The rela¬ tive is here used as a demonstrative. — 66. t£s irapayYcXXei, who was giving it out , without his approval. Make a special study of the prepositions used in composition in this Reading Lesson (Java-, 38 ; cb-o-, 32 , 49 , 52 , 57 , 67 ; 5 ia-, 30 , 35 ; eV-, 34 ; iiri-, 61 ; Kara-, 1, 13 , 57 ; irapa-, 36 , 40 , 56 , 60 , 65 , 66 ; -wept-, 47 ; irpo-, 54 ; irpcnr-, 40 , 55 ; aw-, 55 , 60 ; vtto-, 59 ), according to the directions pre¬ viously given. LESSON CXXXYIII. The Participle. 856. EXERCISE. 1. akk' vnro^oopovvToov (f>avepa rjaav Kal lttttcov Kal avOpoo- ttgov iX v V irokka. 2. rfj Se TpLTrj eiri Te tov apparos KaOrj- pevos ttjv Tcopeiav eVotetTO Kal okcyovs ev rd^et e^o)Z) 7 rpo avrov , to Se 7 rokv avrq) dvarerapaypievov eiropevero. 8 . 77877 rjv dpL(f)l ayopdv 'irkrjQovo-av. 4. ’Opovrav 7 rpo(T 6 Kvvrjaav , Kaiirep elSoTes on eVt Odvarov ayotro. 5 . Kal avkkapfiavei Kvpov a>9 cnroKTevwv. 6. TrvvOdverai ftacrikevs K vpov nrpoa- ekavvovra. 7 . eVetSr) TceiTTOOKOTa elSe K vpov, KaTa'rrrjSrjads diro tov imrov TrepieTreo-ev avTQ). 8. 6 S' e^atpe TavTa aKOVfov. 9 . 'rretOopevot 9 -Opuv ov peTapekrjaet. 10 . e’ya> ovv OV 7 TOT 6 eiravopigv ftaaikea paKapi^wv, StaOedpevos oarjv 422 PARTICIPLE. X<*>pav %X 0L ' H- o 7 rpeaftvTepos rrapbov ervyxctvev • 12. fiera tovtov aXXos dvearip emBeiKVvs ttjv evtfOetav tov tcl irXola alrelv KeXevovros. 13. teal BtereXovv XP ( * ) P €V0L T °fc T ^ v 7 roXeptoov TO^evpaatv. 14. fiovXoLprjv 3’ av clkovto 5 1 dmbov Kvpov XaOelv avrov cnreXObov. 15. oi Be fiapfiapoL inrireis kclI (joevyovres apa erirpcoaKov els TOviricrOev ro^evovres arro tw v L7T7T(0V. 16. irapriyyaXe tow efopovpdpxots Xapftdveiv avBpas on nXeiarovs cos €7n/3ovXevovTos T Lcrcracfoepvovs rals 7 roXeatv. 17. ol 'TroXeptoL ovBev eiravaavro Bt oXrjs rrjs vv- KTOS KVXlvBoVTeS TOVS XiOoVS. 18. KCLI KaTeKO^aV TLVCLS TOOV eaKeBaapevcov ev tco 7 reBicp. 19. tclvtcl t a eOvrj av Travaaipi evoxkovvra del rfj vpeTepa evBaipovla. _ 20. peTa ravra rjBr) rjXtov Bvvovtos eXefe rocaBe. 21. kul tow imrevaiv eiprjTO Oappovat BiboKeiv to? ecjoeyjropevrjs iKavrjs Bvvapeoos. 22. Tavra Be Xeyoov 6opvj3ov rjKovae Bid toov ratjeoov lovtos * 2 23. 7 rep ,-. rroopev Be 7rpOKaTaXrj^opevovs tcl aKpa, ottoos per) ^oOdaooaLV oi K lXlkcs KaraXaftovres. 24. ovtol Be Trpoo-eXOovTes Kal KaXecravres tovs toov f E XXtjvgov apxovras Xeyovariv on fiaai- Xevs KeXevec tovs ''JZXXrjvas, eVel vlkoov rvyxdvei kcll K.vpov aireKTOve, nrapaBovras tcl 07rXa iovras errl to? j3acnXeoos Ovpas evpLo-KecrOai av tl Bvvcovrai ayaOov. 857. The participle has three uses. First, it may express an attribute , qualifying a substantive like an ordinary adjec¬ tive ; secondly, it may define the circumstaoices under which an action takes place; thirdly, it may be joined to certain verbs to supplement their meaning, often having a force resembling that of the infinitive. Examine the attributive participles in 1, 3, 12 (imSeiKvvs), and observe that they are used as attributive adjectives. Review 369. 1 Sc. uvros. to denote the act in which an ob- 2 Not in indirect discourse. The ject is perceived, as here, heard a supplementary partic. may be used noise go. PARTICIPLE. 423 Examine the attributive participles in 12 (KeAetWros), 18, 24 (a pxovras), and observe that they are used substantively with the article after the analogy of adjectives (718). Review 871. Examine the circumstantial participles in 2, 4, 5, 7 {KaraTryhyaa.^), 10 (SuiOewpevos), 14 (6dva(raVy ovS* aXXo5 Se r5 i£y]X@V SicoKeiVy aXXa avvecrneipdpevrjv €Xas €ts kvkXoj- cnv. evOa 8 rj Kvpos Seiaas pr) biricrOep yevo- 24 40 pepos KaraKOiJjrj to 'EXXtjplkop iXavpei avrios • Kai ipfiaXcbp crvv rots efa/cocrtots viKa tovs npo fiacnXeais Teraypevovs Kal eis (jyvyrjp erpexjje tovs e^aKLcrxiXiovs, Kal anoKTeipaL Xeyerai avros rrj iavrov X €i P' L * Aprayepcrrjp top dp^opra avrwp. 45 cog ■ 8* 7] TpOTTrj iyepero , hiacnreipoPTai Kal oi 25 K vpov eijaKocnoi eis to Slcokelp opprfaaPTes, ttXtjp iravv oXiyoi apcf) a vtop KareXeLcfyOrjcrap, crx&bp oi opoTpaire^oL KaXovpepoi. crvp rovrots Se cop 26 KaOopa fiacriXea Kal to apcj) iKewop orthos * Acai 60 evOvs ovk rjpecrx 670 ) °lXX* cincbp Tov avSpa opa>, fero C7T* avrop Kal rraiei Acara to crreppop Kal TLTpcocrKeL Sta tov OcopaKos, co s (f>7]0‘L Knytnas o tarpos Acal ZacrOai auros to rpavpa cjyrjcn. irai- 27 ovra 8* avrop aKOPTi^ei tls rraXrcp vito top 6(j)0 aX- 55 pov )8tatcos * Acal ipravOa pa^opepot Kal /3acri\eus Acai Kupos Acal ot dp<£’ avrous V 7 rep eAcarepou, 0770 - . . . xPlfC°^v. —39. < Y£vo|&€Vos: £.e. ea^ yevrircu (379). — 47. a-\«B6v . . . Ka\ov|ievoi, chiefly his so-called table-companions. — 49. to dyi<|>* Ikcivov o-rios: the king’s fyioTpcbreCoi, probably, who, now that the 6000 had fled, rallied about him in a compact body (aricpos') for his protection. — 53. Kal tdo*0ai. . . T]i fiacriXea affiOvrjcrKov KrTycrtds Xeyet • Trap * iKeCvco yap 'rjv • Kvpos §€ avros re arriOave Kal oktgj oi dpicrroi rw v t repl avrov 00 €K€ivto in avrco. ’ApTaffaTrjs S’ o maroTaros 28 avT(p rd>v o’Krjffrov^cov 0epaffcov Xeyerai, iffeiSr) ffeffrcoKora eiSe Kvpov, KaraffrjSrjads dffo rov iffffov ffepnrecreiv avrco. Kal oi pev <^>dcri fiacriXed 29 KeXeva at nva emcr^xxfai avrov Kvpco, oi S’ iavrbv 65 ifficr<$>dt;ao-6ai cnracrapevov rov aKivaKrjv • el^e yap xpv&ovv • /cat crrpeffrbv S’ i(j)6pei Kal xjjiXia Kal raXXa coaffep oi apicrroi Uepcrcov • irertpyjro yap vtto K vpov 8i evvoiav re Kal 7 TLarorrjra. 60. o iruTTOTaTos avrw 0€paircov, the attendant most in his confidence. — 63. ircpiireo-ctv avTw, to have fallen about him (774), i.e. so as to embrace him. — 64. 4m(ra£cu avrov Kijpa>, to slay him (Artapates) over Cyrus (774), i.e. as a sacrifice. — lavTov €7ria-a£a ov [jSalj'w], not to be trodden ; of mountains or a country, impassable, for men or horses. ’Af3poK6pa$, a (Dor. gen.), Abro- comas, satrap of Phoenicia and Syria, and commander of one fourth of the king’s army. "ApvSos, i], Abydus, a city of Troas, on the Hellespont, ayayctv, dydy'g, etc., see &yw. ayaGos, i], dv, 469, good in the broadest sense (as opposed to kuk6s), brave, expert, upright, noble, useful, excellent; ayaddv, t6, good, good thing; pi., good things, blessings, supplies; KaXbs Kal ay adds, KaXbs Kay adds, noble and good, ‘gentle¬ man ’; iw' &yad$, for one's good. aypios ayapat, Tjyava n- d&vai, hold games. d‘ya>v££o|i.ai (ayiovid-), dycovcovpai, etc., iv. [435], contend, fight. d-ywvo-G^TTjs, ov [435, 638], judge of a contest, president in the games. a-Sciirvos, ov [fieiirvov], without sup¬ per, supperless (see deiwovj. aScX<]>6$, 6, brother. d-8c, a8uc!is, adv. [56\os, deceit], with¬ out deceit or treachery. d-8vva/ros, ov [SiW/wat], unable, powerless, impossible. act, adv. [Lat. aeuum, age, Eng. ever, aye], always, ever, from time to time. dcr6s, 6, eagle. ’AO^vat, Civ, Athens. I’AOijvalos, a, ov, Athenian; *A dy- valos, 8, an Athenian. I’AG^vqo’t, adv., at Athens. aOXov, r6 [a0\os, 6, contest, Eng. athlete], prize of contest, prize. d0pot£a> (adpoi8~), &dpol, &dv/jLii (atKtS-), comm, dep., abd- fopai., alKiov/xai, etc., iv. [ahcijs, shame¬ ful], outrage , maltreat, mutilate. atvla>, alvfooj, yve (a Ipe-, £\-j, alpJicrw, tThov, ypr]Ka, ypryxcu, -Qpidyv, 655, 1, viii. [di-aeresis, heresy], take, seize, cap¬ ture ; mid., take for oneself, choose, prefer, elect. atpw {ap-j, apu>, fjpa, fjpKa , ?)pp ai, ypdrjv, iv. [ met-eor ], raise, als, see 5s. alvQyv, 619, 2 , iv., shame ; mid. as pass, dep., feel ashamed, feel ashamed before, stand in awe of. clItIco, alri/a o>, etc., ask for, beg , demand. 737. - aMd, as, blame , censure. atri.dop.ai 5 oX<|>i,tov Jatridopai, alrtaaopLcu, etc., 255 a, blame, reproach, accuse, charge. jat'nos, a, op, to blame, responsi¬ ble; atn6s el/ju, be the cause; rd atnov, the cause. atxH>-d\a>Tos, op [564], captured by the spear, taken in war, captured; alxudXwToi, ol, captives. aKivatais, ov, a short sword. &ko\ou01 ( atcopTid -), &koptiu>, iv. [564], hurl the javelin, hit with a javelin, hit. dKovTis, y [564], javelin- throwing. aKOVTlCT^S, ov [564], javelin- thrower, javelin-man. &kovo>, aKovo-ofiai, rjicov (a\a\ay-), dXaXd^opai, 'yXdXalja, iv. [dXaX?j, battle-cry'], raise the war-cry. dXl£a>, dXQopai, i]\^dp.t)p, ward off; mid., ward off from oneself, repulse. d\£r»i$, ov [dXtco, grind], lit. grinder, only as adj. in the phrase 6pos dXtrys, upper mill-stone. aXcvpov, t6 [dXA>, grind], in. pi., flour, wheaten flour. ta-XfjOeia, as, truth, sincerity. td-Xij06vo>, dXydetiitov, fd, in pl*> barley meal. dXcDireKf) 6 dva-{3a(va> aXtOTTCKT], T)S [&Ac 67 TTj£, fox, Lat. uolpes, fox'], fox-skin, fox-skin cap. aXcMTO^ai, see aXiaicopat. ay.a, ady. [Lat. sem-per , always, Eng. same, some], at the same time, together ; apa -n? ypepa, at daybreak; apa rfj eTnovcrrj ypepa, as the next day was breaking. 773. 4a|i-a|a, 77 s [435], a heavy wagon, originally and generally with four wheels (and therefore with two united axles, as the name signifies). jdn-a|iTos, 6v [435], passable for wagons; dtibs dpa^rds, wagon-road. agapTavo) (apapr-'), dpapr^tropai, Yipaprov, ypapryKa, ypdpTypai, ypap- T’fjdrjv, 625, 2, v., miss the mark, miss, fail (in conduct), err, do wrong, commit error. 746. a-p-axeC, adv. [pdxv], without fight¬ ing, without a struggle. a-p.a)(T]TC, adv. [pdxv]i without fighting. ’Ap. < irpaKi(on , ]$, ov , an Ambraciot. ajxeCvcov, ov, gen. ovos, comp, of dyad6s, 469, better, braver, stouter. dpeX^au, etc. [/^eAet], be careless, neglect. 747. d-juXws, adv. [jueXei], negligently, carelessly, incautiously. d-p.Tjx.avos, ov [455], without means, impossible, impracticable. d|nXXdopai, apiAX^aopai, etc., pass, dep., 599 [dpiWa, contest ], contend, struggle, race. ap/ireXos, 77 , vine. d|JivV(0 ( apw -), dpvvu, tfpvva, iv., ward off, defend; mid., ward off from oneself , defend oneself. ancf>f, prep, [akin to dpcpco, cf Lat. ambi-, amb-, in composition, round about], orig. on both sides of, hence about, followed by the acc. and very rarely by the gen. With gen., about, concerning, of things. With acc., of place, round, about, of per¬ sons, countries, or things; of the object affected, api-Xc'yw, speak on both sides, have a dispute, quarrel. tdp.<)>dTepos, 6 ) ov, both. }ap.4>oT€pa>0€v, adv., on both sides, from both sides. dp4» w [akin to ap, bring back word, report. . dva-'yi'Yvwo’Ktt, know again, recog¬ nize, read. tavayKaj^w (avayKaS-), dvaynacrct), etc., iv., force, compel, oblige. tdvayKcuos, a, ov, necessary ; avay- Kaiiv ti, some necessity. dvd'yxt], 7js, force, necessity, con¬ straint; avayM) iari (more often without lari), it is necessary, one must, of physical necessity. 850. ava-yvovs, see dva-yiyvuxrKoo. dv-ayw, lead up, take up. dva-Oappc'co, regain courage, pluck up courage again. avd-0T]|ia, aros, t 6 [638], something set up, a votive offering. dv-aipe'u, take up; mid., take up one’s dead for burial. ava-Koivdw, make common, com¬ municate, consult a god; mid., con¬ fer with a friend. 773. dva-Kpd^a), raise a shout, shout, cry out. dva-XapPdvcD, take or pick up. dva-Xap/irto, burst into flames. dva-jie'va), wait for, await, Lat. exspecto ; intrans., remain, wait. dva-|U|iV‘]](rKa), remind of. 737. dvcd-vptSes, Itiwv, ai, trousers. aya-vavo), make to cease or halt; mid., desist, stop, halt, for the pur¬ pose of resting, rest. ava-irc C0a>, persuade. dva-7rvea>, breathe again. dv-ap'rrata), snatch up, carry off as booty , plunder. dva-a>, turn back, turn round, face about; pass., be turned back, rally. dva-v\dTTa), guard in turn; mid., guard oneself in turn. avTpov, t 6, cave. awoTo's, 6v [avow, accomplish ], to be accomplished, possible. dvco, adv. [, d^icacrci}, etc. [435], think fit, deem worthy or proper, expect; hence, claim, ask, demand. 758. d£ui>S) adv. [435], worthily,, fitly. 761. dgcov, ovos, 6 [435], axle. dir-ayye'XXw, bring back word, an¬ nounce, report. dir-ayopedw [dyope vw, harangue, say, dyopa], say no, forbid; in- trans., give up or out. dir-ayw, lead away or back. dir-aiTeo), ask from, demand, de¬ mand back. dir-aXXdTTw, change off, abandon, quit, go away, depart, withdraw, act. and mid. ; pass., be freed from, be rid of. airaXo's, v, 6v, tender, delicate. airag, numeral adv., 496, once. d-irapd(TK€vos, ov [wapaaKev-fi], un¬ prepared. a-iras, a. a a, av [544], all together, all, whole, entire; with the art. it has pred. position, as airav rb peaov, the entire space between. dir-€i|u ( elplj, be away or absent. air-cipi (eljui), go off or away, de¬ part. 9 d-irop€« d-ireipos a-ircipos, ov [661], without experi¬ ence, unskilled. air-eXa-uva), drive away; intr., march, ride, or go away. dir-cXGcov, See aTr-epxo/JLui. a-irep, see oa-nep. air-€pxop.ai, come or , make go off, disem¬ bark. diro-pXc'ira), look away from all other objects at one, look steadily. diro-yi-yvcSo-tco), give up the inten¬ tion of. 753. diro-8€(icvv|u, point out, make known, appoint; mid., set forth one’s views, declare, express. 739. diro-Stpw, take the hide off, flay , skin. d < iro-8i8pda’Ka), run away, desert, escape by stealth, abandon. dTro-8C8wp.i, give back or up, re¬ store, deliver, pay, fulfil; mid., sell. diro-0vrja"Kw, die off, die, be killed, be slain, be put to death, suffer death. diro-0va>, sacrifice in payment of a vow, offer a votive sacrifice. dird-Kei|iai, be laid away. diro-KXeiw, shut off, intercept. 757. diro-KoiTToi), cut off, beat off. diro-Kpfvop.cn, give a decision, make answer, answer, Lat. responded. diro-Kpa/irTco, hide from, conceal. diro-KTefvw, kill off, put to death. airo-KcoXijw, hinder from, hinder , prevent. diro-Xap.pdvco, take from or back, regain. diro-Xetirca, leave behind, forsake, abandon, desert. dir-oXXvp.i, destroy utterly, kill; mid. with 2 pf. and plpf. act., perish, die, be lost. ’AiroXXcov, oovos, 6, Apollo, one of the greatest of the divinities of the Greeks, god of music and poetry. drro-Xvw, loose from, acquit. 757. dir-oXtoXcKa, see cnr-bWvpi. diro-vo], voyage home. diro-iropcvopai, go off, depart. d-irop&o, b.TropT]a(o, etc. [561], be in doubt, be at a loss, act. and mid.; be in want of 749. d-iropCa 10 ap'ird^w d-iropCa, as [561], difficulty. a-iropos, ov [561], without means, impracticable ; of roads, mountains, or rivers, impassable, unfordable; airopov , t6, obstacle , difficulty. dird-ppTjTos, ov [^>a>], not to be told, secret. diro-(TKeSdvvv|Ai, scatter to the winds ; mid. and pass., be dispersed, straggle. diro-o-irdco, draw off, separate, withdraw. diro-o-TeXXo), send back or away with a commission, despatch, dismiss. daro-o’TpaTO'ireScvopai, camp away from. diro-(TTp6a>, turn back, induce to return. d‘iro-o*vXaw [, show forth ; mid., show one's own, declare, express. diro-€v'Y££ 0 p< ai i vote no, vote against, reject by vote. d-irpo (apira8-j, aptrdau, $}p7ra>Kds, i], 6 v [463], Jit to rule. dpx«j px 6 v v } 600, 1 [463], be first, in point of time begin, take the lead in an ac¬ tion, be the first to do it; in point of station rule, reign over, command, have command ; ’apxw, 6 , ruler, commander, leader, chief, a higher title than cTpaTi]y6s ; t b upxeiv, the government; ol apxo/xevoi, subjects, soldiers ; mid., begin, enter upon an action. 746, 748. apa>|ia, aros, to [aroma], spice, fragrant herbs. d-d\€ia, as, safety, freedom from danger, security. d-(ra\r|s, es [], not liable to be tripped up, safe, free from danger, sure, secure; iv ao-^aAe- c TTtpcp, in greater security ; iv aaa\Tos, v [asphalt], asphalt. d-ora\ws, adv. [ao-^aATjs], safely, securely, without danger. d-raKT6« [554], be out of order . d-TttKTos, ov [554], in disorder. d-Tipa^o) (ari^aS-), a.Tlfxa.au, etc., iv. [444], dishonour, disgrace. aTpC^ci) (aT/xiS-), a T/xiau, iv. [dr/xds, vapour], steam. a-TOiros, ov [to7tos], OUt of place, strange, absurd. *Attikos, h} 6v, Attic, av, adv., again, in turn, moreover. avXi£opai (aoAtS-), rjvA'iadrjv, iv. [a6A7?, open courtyard], lie in the open air, bivouac, lodge, be quar¬ tered. avrUa, adv., at this very moment , immediately, on the spot. avTo'01, adv. [518], in this or that very place, here, there. avTo-K^Xeoa-Tos, ov [518], self- directed, of one's own accord. avro'-paros, ov [518 ], self-impelled ; airb or (K tov avro/xaTOV, unbidden, voluntarily. avro-poX&o [518], desert, the regu¬ lar military word. avro-poXos, 6 [518], deserter. avro's, h, <*, 511 [518], intensive pron., self, same, him, her, it. 515, 516. avTov, adv. [518], in the very place, here, there. (lvtov, see eavroO. 12 &<{>* wf>' j S6G CLTT<$‘ davT]s, es [483], unseen, out of sight. a-c|>avi£(i> (a, 7)(pa- vicra, rj(f>duiKa [483], hide , &Zo£ ow£. a4>-apira£w, plunder , pillage. a<}>-€i(rTT]K€crav, see cup-larTipu. acj)-rj(rw, see a0ovos, ov [-tif]pi, send away, let go, let loose, let flow y vpbs -iKV€opxu, come from one place to another, arrive, reach, return. d-nnr€v« [564], ride back or off. d-£pi5XaKTOs, ov AaTT&»], un¬ guarded, unwatched. j.d-{j>uXdKTa)s, adv., unguardedly. *Axaios, ov, 6, an Achaean. tt"X®P l ov [x«p/Co/*at], ungra¬ cious, unpleasant. 4d-xa-p£v£d, as, Babylonia. tpd0os, ous, t6 [bathos], depth. Pa0vs, e7a, if, deep. PaCva) (0a-), Bnaopai, eBy^, B^Byxa, BeBap-ai, 4Bd6r)v, 646, 1, iv. and v. [Lat. uenio, come, Eng. come, ba¬ sis ], go, walk. |PaKTt]p£a, as, staff, walking-stick. PaXavos, y, acorn, date . pdXXa) (0a\~), BaXco, eBa\ov, 0e- 0\yKa, B^BXypai, iBX'fjOyv, 619, 3, iv. [480], throw, throw at, hit , hit with stones, stone. pairra) (Ba 469 [615], most desired, best, noblest, most advan¬ tageous. PeXrtttv, ov, 469 [615], more de¬ sired, better, nobler, more advanta¬ geous. Pv a, aros, t6 [Balvu], Stride. p£d, as, force, violence, Lat. uis. jPia^opai (Bia8-), Biaaopai, etc., 618, 3, iv., force, compel, overpower. !Pia£a>s, adv., violently, hard. pipd£a> (0iBa8-), BiBda [5Aa|, slack], be slack or idle, shirk. p\airr« (£Aa£-), £Acty&>, e0Aaxf/a, 0e0Aa, Po-rjo-o/xai, i06r](ra, shout, Call out, cry out. Porf, rjs, shout, call, cry. iPoif-0«ia, as, succour, aid, help. |Pot]-0cm, f}o7)d'tj], run to rescue at a cry for help, give assistance, bring aid, help, assist. 768. Boiun-ios, 6, a Boeotian. Bopcas, ov, contr. B oppds, a, Boreas ; Bopias or Hyejuos B opeas, the north wind. PoorKTjpa, aros , t6 [&6(TC 0 , etc. [f>\i>],plan, plot; comm, mid., form one’s own plan, plan, consider, deliberate, pur¬ pose, determine, settle on. 792. povXrj, 77 s [615], will, plan, delib¬ eration; senate. PovXopxu, &ov\ri, eBpel-a, 0e0peyfiat, e0pe'x&7iv, 600, 2, wet, pass, get wet. pporos, 6, a mortal. Bu£avTiov, t 6, Byzantium. P«p.os, o, altar. T. ^apos, 6 [bi-gamy, crypto-gam ], wedding, marriage. yap, post-positive causal conj., for ; when it expresses specifica¬ tion, confirmation, or explanation, because, indeed, certainly, then, now, for example, namely; in questions, then, or to be omitted in transla¬ tion ; koI ydp, Lat. etenim, and (this is so ) for, and to be sure, and really. ycumjp, rp6s, 57 [gastric], belly. rctuXtTTjs, ov, Gaulites. yi, enclitic and post-positive intens. particle, even, at least, yet, indeed, certainly, but often to be indicated in Eng. only by emphasis. •ycyevno-Oai, yeyova, see y'lyvogai. ■yeXaw, yeAdtro/uai, cyeKaaa, eye A d- aQpv, 441, laugh, Lat. rideo. py&tos, cot os, 6, laughter, roar of laughter. *y€p,tt, be full of. 749. ^€vvai 0 TT]s, T]ros, 7] [612], nobility, magnanimity, generosity, yivos, ovs, t6 [612], family, race. y/ppov, t 6, wicker-shield. f*y€ppo-<|>opoi, ol [658], light-armed troops with wicker-shields. ypttv, ovtos, 6 [gray], old man. ytvu>, y ever CD, eyevaa, yeyev/xai [Lat. gusto, taste, Eng. choose], give a taste; mid., taste. 747. ■y€<|>vpa, as, bridge; ye yys [apo-gee, geo-graphy ], earth, ground, country, Lat. terra, land as opposed to sea. Y^-Xoos 14 Sc£8a> j-yif-Xo^os, 6 [Aos], mound of earth, hill, hillock. ‘ytyvopxu, yevT] 392 [612], wo¬ man, wife. r (8avct8-), davelaco, iv., lend; mid., have lent to oneself, borrow. Sairavctw, da-navr/crco, etc. [dairdvi], expense], spend, expend. AapSas, otos, 6, the Dardas. fSapetKos, 6, daric, a Persian gold coin. It contained about 125.5 grains of gold, and would now be worth about f 5.40 in American gold. The daric was worth 20 Attic drachmas. Aapctos, 6, Darius, the name of many of the Persian kings. 705. 8 a.crp.ds, b, fax, impost, tribute. 8 ao-vs, e?a, v, thick, dense, thickly grown, rough. 86 , post-positive conj., but, mid¬ way in force between a\\d and Kai. Its adversative force is often slight, so that it may be rendered by and, to be sure, further, etc. pev is often found in the preceding clause, and pev . . . de then have the force of, while . . . yet, on the one hand . . .. on the other, or both . . . and, but generally these expressions are too strong to be used in translating into English, and the force of pev had better be indicated simply by stress of the voice (see pev). ko.\ . „. de, and (de) also, but further. - 8 «, suffix denoting whither, or with demonstrative force. ScSkos, S&ouca, see deldoo. 8 ^x 1 , 8€Ti0t]vai, Set, see deco, lack. SctSco, delaopai, Udeiaa, dedoiKa and dedia, 660, 3 (pres, not Attic), fear, be afraid, of reasonable fear. SeClCVVp.1 15 Sia-Xi‘yo|j,(u 8cCkvv|XI ( Sent -), 8et|co, e5ei|a, 5e- 5ei%a, 848eiyp.ai, iSelx^V^, 651, 1, V. [486], ow£, indicate, show. SeiXrj, ys, afternoon, evening. SeiXo's, v, 6v [8et5a>], fearful, cow¬ ardly, skulking, w7e. Seivo's, 7?, oV [Set5a>], dreadful, perilous, terrible, marvellous, skil¬ ful, clever; 8eiv6v, t 6, peril, danger. Seiirvov, t 6 , dinner , supper. 8e«ca, indecl., 496 [Lat. decern, ten, Eng. ten, decade~\, ten. Se'vSpov, t 6, tree, Lat. arbor. Segio's, a, 6u [602], right, Lat. dexter; tj 8e£id (sc. x € ' 1 p)> the right (hand), used either in indicating direction, or with Aa&tiv ko. 1 8oi>vai as a sign of confirmation ; to 8e^iov (sc. K€pas), the right (wing). tSe'ppa, aros, to, hide, skin. 8epo>, 8epu, *8eLpa, 8z8app.ai, eSapyv [Lat. dolo, split, Eng. tear, epi¬ dermic s], flay. Setrpo's, o [5eco, bind], band, strap. 8 €, 8i](Tw, edyaa, 8e8eKa, 8e8ep.ai, i840yv, 442 [dia-dem], bind, fasten, tie, fetter, shackle. 84w, 8eT](TO), eSeycra, 8e8eyna, 8e84yp.ai, iSeJjdyv, 605, 2, lack, want, need; comm, mid., lack, need, want, desire, beg, request; 8e?, used impersonally, there is need, it is necessary ov proper, one must, ought, should. 749. 8tj, post-positive intensive particle, now, indeed, in particular, accord¬ ingly, so, then, hut often its force is best indicated simply by emphasis. 8 -qXos, y, ov, plain, clear, evident , manifest. jS^Xod), 8r\\dxTO), etc., make clear. 8t]p.o, go over, cross. 8ia-(3aXXft>, throw over, throw at with words, slander, traduce. 8 id-Pcuris, ecus, 7] [8ia-/3atra>], a crossing, hence ford, bridge. Sia-pa/rds, y, 6v [S La-^aivu], forda¬ ble, passable. 8ia-Pi{3a£&>, make go across, take or carry across. Si-ayye'XXw, carry word through, bring word, report. Sia-ytyvopai, of time, get through, continue , exist, subsist. 859. Si-ayo), of time, pass, spend, live, continue. 859. 8ia.-8exop.ai, receive at intervals; Oypuai SiaSex^yevoi, relieve one an¬ other in the chase. Sta-8£8ft>p.i, distribute. 8ia-0eaopai, observe closely. Sia-Ko'irrft), cut to pieces or through. 8 id-KoVioi, ai , a, 496 [499], 200. Sia-Xayx^vft), assign by lot. Sia-Xe'yopai, 8ia-\4^ofiat, 8i-e'ihtyp.at, 8i-€\ex0r)v, converse with. 773. 8ia-X.€urw 16 8pe'rravi'p6pos Sia-Xciirw, leave a space between, stand apart, be distant. 8ia-v€p«, divide up among. Sia-vo€opai, pass, dep., be minded, intend, purpose. 8ia-TT€pir«, round. Sia-uXeca, sail over or across. Sia-iroXcpcw, fight it out. 773. Sia-irpdTTft), work out; comm, mid. , bring to pass, effect. 8i-apirdi;a>, tear in pieces, plunder, lay waste , sac&, spoi'Z, ravage. 8ia-orripaivw, poZn? out, indicate. 8ia-a-Kr|veto, encamp apart. Sia-o-irdw, draw apart, separate, scatter, of soldiers. Sia-crira'pco, scatter about, scatter. 8ia-o-a>£(o, bring through safely, keep safe, save. 8ia-TaTTco, draw up in array. Sia-TeXco), finish, complete the march , continue. 859. 8ia-r£0T]fjLi, arrange, dispose. 8ia-Tpe'4>«, feed well, support. 8ia-Tpf(3co, rub through, spend, waste time , delay. 8ia-4>€poVr«s, adv. [658], differ¬ ently from others, pre-eminently, peculiarly , surpassingly. Sia-e'pco, bear apart , quarrel, be different from, Lat. differo. 753. 8ia-0eip(o, destroy utterly, ruin, corrupt. SiSacricaXos, 6 [486], teacher. SiSoutko) (8i8ax~)i 8i8d£co, £8'i8a£a, Se8i5a%a, SedidayfiaL, £8t8ax0yp, 642, 3, vi. [486], teach, instruct, show, Lat. doceo. 737. 8 l 8 t)|xi, bind , collateral form of 8ea>, bind. SiSpacKO) (Spa-), 8pd0€pd, as, tanned hide, leathern bag. 8£-po$, o [499, 658], body of a chariot. 8iwkw, 8ic6£co, £8iw£a, 8e8£a>x“» £8u6- xQyv, 604, 4, pursue , go in pursuit, chase , give chase, prosecute. 755. |8£to|is, ews, 7), pursuit. 8i-iopi)|, vxos, y [St-opuTTw, dig through ], ditch , canal. 8ok€(i), 8d|a?, e8o£a, SeSoyjuat, £86- xQyv, 605, 3 [586], seem, appear, seem best or good, be voted, think. Ao'Xo\|/, oiros, 6, a Dolopian. Sofja, ys [586], reputation. SopKas, ados, y, gazelle. 8opv, ot os, t6 [Spvs, tree, Eng. tree], prop, stem of a tree, then shaft of a spear, and hence spear. tSovXEvw, £8ov\evcra, 8e8o6\evKa, be a slave, Lat. seruio. SovXos, 6, slave, Lat. seruus. Sovvai, etc., see 8i8wpu. Sovirew, £8ovTy, set, of the sun. See 86w. 8vo, Suolv, 496 [499], two. Svar- [ dys-peptic ], ill, hard. 424 c. Swr-iropcvros, ov [561], hard to get through, of heavy ground. 8vo), 8uv, deSvtca, 848vpai, i8v6r]p, 652, 1, make enter , intr. enter; mid., set, of the sun. 8plo|iai, Sa> privopcu, etc. [641], give a present, present. 8<5pov, t 6 [641], present, gift. E. eaXwKa, e'aXcov, see aA iaitopai. Idv, contr. dv or tjv, in crasis k&v for koL idv, coni. [et + did, if, with subjv. 273, 803. e-avTov, ijs, ov, reflexive pron., 527 [518], of himself, herself, itself 528. law, eaerw, efd], insti¬ gated. 4-y-K&j>a\os, 6 [i], dagger. ^7 - X €l P^ a) (X €l P L fi~)i 4y~xeipiovpai , etc., iv. [xef/>], commit to the hands of, entrust, ly-yfw, pour in. kyw, epov or pov, personal pron., 511 [Lat. ego, me, Eng. I, me, egoist ], J. 512, 513, 514. yco-yc [ 76 .], I for my part. i'Seura, see 8el8w. t40 €\ovtt{s , ov, volunteer ; as adj., of one's own free will. 404A.W Or 04X.W, e 0 eA 77 fra), h^iXyaa, r)0e\r]Ka, 605, 4, wish, be willing, volunteer. 4'0vos, ovs, to [ethnic], nation, tribe, Lat. ndtio. ft, conj., procl., if, w. ind. and opt., 797, 798, 300, 804; in indirect ques¬ tions, whether; el phi if not, except, unless, Lat. nisi ; el 5e ph, otherwise. «td, d'cura, see iaw. cISov, see opd.w. cIkcL^w (ei/caS-), eiKaerw, ef/cacra, ei- Kcurpcu, elKaaOrjv, iv., liken, suppose, conjecture, fancy. cI'koo-i, indecl,. 496 [Lat. uiginti, twenty, Eng. twenty], twenty. €l\rja, etc., see Aapfiavw. ctXov, €iXd|XT]V, see alpecv. € tpC [epi, give or deliver up. ckci, adv., there, in that place, thither. |, carry out. CK-Koirro), cut off or down. CK-Kvpaivo) ( Kvpav -), iv. [ndpa, bil¬ low], billow out, surge forward. CK-Xeyu, pick out; mid., select for oneself, choose. Ik-Xcittw, leave out, abandon, quit; intr. , fail, melt away. CK-ircTrXTj-ypivoS) see eK-TrAijrTu. cK-iriirTco, fall out or down , be driven out, be exiled. ck-ttX^w, sail out or away. CK-irXcoos, COV, gen. a> [ttijuttA rjjui], filled out, full, in full, complete. cK-irXifTTft), strike out of one’s senses, amaze, terrify. ck-7to8wv, adv. [7roy$], out of tha way. cK-iropiJ^D, furnish, supply. cktos, 77 , ov, 496 [e'l], sixth. € K-Tpeirw, turn out or aside. CK-Tp£&), bring up, rear. eK-(|)epft), carry out, report. kK-$e6y, fjAacra, eAr/Aa/ca, iArjAafxai, hAa6rjv, 624, 2, V. [e/asf/c], drive, set in motion; intr., ride, drive, march. cXd€ios, ov [eAa^os, deer], of a deer ; icpea iAarpeia, venison. cXaxurros, 77 , ov, 469, fewest, least , shortest, lowest. cXc'yx«, iAey^ca, tfAiy^a, iAr]Aey/xai, TjAeyxdrjv, 600, 3, investigate, exam¬ ine, convict, confute. IXeiv 19 4v-0vfJLT]|xa c'Xciv, € c X4 (eAePuy-'), rjAcAi^a, iv., cry iAeAev, raise the war-cry. t4Xev0€pid, as, liberty, freedom. 4X€v0cpos, a, ov, free, Lat. liber. j4X€v06pow, eAevOepwaw, liberate. 4X0eiv, 4X0wv, see epxo/J.ai. t*EXXas, ados, t], Greece. "EXXrjV, 7]V0S, 6 [ Hellenic ], a Greek. I'EXX^vikos, 77, 8v, Greek ; rb 'Ea- At)vikov, the Greek army. .j/EXX^vikcos, adv., in Greek. t'EXXri, throw in, inflict; intr., empty, of rivers, make an invasion, attack. 4p.-(3ipd£&>, embark, put on board. 4p.o'$, 77, 6v, 531 [Lat. mens, my, Eng. mine, my], my, mine. ep.-'ira.Xiv, adv. [ircUtr], with t6 (by crasis), Totf/xiraMv, back, back again. 4'p-Trtipos, ov [561], acquainted with. 760. 4p,-ire£pws, adv. [561], by experi¬ ence; imireipus avrov ex eit/ > be per¬ sonally acquainted with him. 761. \4p.-Tnp.TrXT]pi, fill full, satisfy. 749. 4p.-'7r£p.'jrpi]pi, set on fire. 4p.-irtirr«, fall upon, occur to. 774. 4'p.- , irXea)s, uv, gen. co \_TriiJ.TrArip.i~\, quite full of, full of. 760. 4p.-‘iroSwv, adv. [7rovs], before the feet, in the way ; i/xirob^v eivai, be in the way, hinder. 772. 4p.-'Troi4«, create or inspire in, im¬ press upon. 774. 4p,-‘>ropevop.ai [561], travel on busi¬ ness, engage in traffic. 4p.-‘iro'piov, t 6 [561], place of trade, emporium. c'p.-irpoo-Ocv, adv. [irpocrdev], before, in front of; 6 e/nirpoadev A6yos, the previous book. 761. 4v, prep. w. dat., procl. [Lat. in, Eng. in], in. Of place, in, among, in presence of, before, at, on, by; of time, in, during, within, at, in the course of; eV Tovrcp, meanwhile; eV cp, while. In composition £v signifies in, at, on, upon, among. 4v-o.vtios, a, ov [avrlos], opposite, in one’s face ; ra vavria, the reverse. 4 v-dirT<»), set on fire. cv-StKaros, 77 , ov, 496 [eV-5efca, eleven], eleventh. tev8o-0€v, adv., from inside. 4'v8ov, adv. \_ev], inside, within. 4v-8v«, put on. 4v-e8pevco, ev-ebpevao/iiai, ev--f]8pevaa, £v-r)8pevdriv [4v-eSpd, ambush, efipa, seat, see Kad-e^opai], set an ambush, waylay. 4'v-eip.i (el/j.1), be in or there. 4'veko. or 4'v£K€v, improper prep, with gen., post-positive, on account °f 4v€vr]KovTa, indecl., 496 [eVvea], ninety. 4v~c o*0i(o, eat quickly or hastily. 4v-€X€tpwra, see iy-xetpifa- 4'v0a, adv. [4v], of place, where, there, here; of time, then, there¬ upon. |4v0d-8€, adv., there, here, hither. jev0a-Trep, adv., just where. 4V-0EV, adv. [eV],/rom there, thence , whence. |4v04v-8e, adv., hence, from this spot. 4v-0vp4op.ai, ev-dv/JL-haoixai, iv-reOup. 77 - /uai, iv-edv/LL^d-qv, 599 [537], have in mind, reflect. 4 v- 0 vp. 7 ]p.a, aros, t 6 [537], thought, device , plan. tviavros 20 4ir-a£nos ivtauTos, <5, year , Lat. annus. 4'vioi, at, a, some. IvCotc, adv. [cf. evioi], sometimes. 4vv4a, indecl., 496 [Lat. nouem, nine, Eng. nine], m’we. cv-voeco, /tave in mind, often as pass, dep., consider, 6e anxious or apprehensive. 4'v-voia, as [644], thought. iv-oiK€co, live in, inhabit; oi ivoi- kovvtcs , inhabitants. 4v-opaa), see in a person or thing. € vos, ev£, see els. 4v-oxX4«, ev-ox^yau:, yv-dx^yua, yv-c&xXyKa, yv-a>xX ypcu, yv-eaxXyOyv [ox*°s> crowd], crowd upon, harass, annoy. 4vTav0a, adv. [, stretch or strain tight, inflict upon. Iv-tcXtjs, « [reAos, ewd], «£ the end, complete, in full. 4vt€v0€v, adv. [eV], thence, from this place, thereupon. ev-ri0rj[u [638], put in, inspire in. 774. cvto's, adv. [ev], within. 761. €v-Tvyx t u' <0 > chance upon, meet, find. 774. ’EvvaXios, 6, Enyalius, a name of Ares, god of war. 4£, before a consonant ix, prep, w. gen., procl. [Lat. ex,e]. Of place, out of, from, from within ; of time, after, as in tovtov, after this, here¬ upon, £k Traidwv, from boyhood; of source or origin, from, in conse¬ quence of, as etc tovtov, in conse¬ quence of this. In composition signifies from, away, out, often implying resolu¬ tion, strong intention, fulfilment, or completion. c£, indecl., 496 [Lat. sea;, six, Eng. six, hex-agon], six. 4|- a yy€XX, ask from, demand ; mid., beg off, save by entreaty. e|aKio--xtXioi, at, a, 496 m+ x i- Atot], 6000. c^a-KOtrioi, at, a, 496 [e'l+etcaTtlj/], 600. te^-airaraa), e|-a7raT7/, deceive grossly, mislead. ll-airaTt), ys [airaTy, deceit], gross deceit, deception. Id-airm]s, adv. [ &, arm ; mid., arm oneself. .[Id-oirXurid, ds, state of being armed; iv ttj i^ 0 Tr\iaia, under arms. 4£-op|ia, urge out, incite, arouse, intr., set out. 4'dw, adv. [e|, Eng. exotic], outside, without, beyond the reach of. 761. 4ir-ayy4XXopai, declare oneself, promise , offer. 4ir-aiv4, follow upon or after, follow, pursue. 773. eirav, see i-n-rju. 4ire£, temporal and causal conj., when, since. f4irei8-dv, conj. with suhjy. [£v], when, after, with or without rax^ra, as soon as. |€ir€i-8r], conj. [877], when. cTT-cifu (et/it), o?i or upon, 5e over. iir-eijw (eTjut), or come on, fol¬ low, advance, make an attack. erm-ircp, conj. [eVet], since indeed. 4'ir-tiTa, adv. [eTra], thereupon, thereafter, moreover. €7r-€K-0€, plan or plot against, design. 774. 4m-Pov\rf, rjs [615], apian against, plot, design. eTri-'yC-yvopai, come upon, arise. 4'iri-'Ypda>, write upon, inscribe. eiri-SciKvvpi, show to, point out, display, disclose; mid., show for oneself, show. em-Oeo-is, eats, y [638], attack. 4 < Tri-0vp.ea>, im-dvniTjaw, eTr-eQu/xyaa [537], have one's heart on, desire, long for. 747. 4iri-0u|Aid, as [537], desire. 4iri-Kd|ATrrc<> (/ca/*7r-), €7rt-Kaju\f/cv, iii., bend towards, wheel. €m-KaTa-ppi/7rra>, throw down after. 4irC-K6ipai, lie upon, attack. 774. Itti-kivSvvos, ou [/aVSu^os], danger¬ ous, perilous. eiriKOvpea), imKovpr](ra>, iTreKovpyaa [eVfooupos, ally~\, lend assistance. 768. j.4mKovpr]p,a, aros, t 6, relief, pro¬ tection. Itti-k pareco, get the mastery. em-KpvirTd), conceal, hide. 4'iri-Kvpod), e-iri-Kvpuxrcti \_Kvpos, r6, mighty, make valid, confirm, ratify. 4m-\apPdvd), take to oneself; mid., take hold of. 746. 4'Tri-\av0avopai, forget. 747. erri-XetTrco, leave behind; intr., fail, give out. teu-i-piXeta, as, care, thoughtful¬ ness, attention. H'lri.-p.eXeop.ai, em-peAricropLai, eirt.-p.e- peAypai, iir-epeA-fjdyu, care for, give attention to. 747, 702. eiri-peX-rfs, es [/xeAet], careful. eir^voe'd), have in mind, purpose. fem-opKeo), em-opicTja-co, eTei-wpKyaa, iiri-d>pKr]Ka, swear falsely, forswear or perjure oneself. 4ir£-opKos, ou [op-cos], perjured. em-u-tirra), fall upon, attack, as¬ sail ; of snow ,fall. 4'iri-TrXe'd), sail upon or against. eiri-rrovosj ou [580], laborious. lirC-ppuTOS 22 ?TCpOS €ir£-ppvros, ov flowed upon, watered , well watered. 4iri-aivo|A3i, show oneself to, ap¬ pear. €m-X€ip€ft>, eiri-xcipwo} [x e ‘p}> P u ^ one’s hand to, attempt. pour on or in. €iri-x«p6«, move against, advance. 4iri-t|ni£ttt, put to vote. . eir-oiKoSopew, build on or upon. eiropai, kxpo/jLcu, eoir6p.7]v, 604, 5 [Lat. sequor, follow - ], follow, accom¬ pany, pursue. 773. eirra, indecl., 496 [Lat. septem, seven, Eng. seven, hepta-gon], seven. _j.€TTTa-KO(rtoi, at, a [eKardv], 100. ’Eirva|a, rjs, Epyaxa. 4p-ya£opai (epyab-], ipyd (eptS-), tjpipa, iv. \_epis, strife], strive, contend, vie with. 773. tcpfrrjvevs, ews, 6 [hermeneutic ], in¬ terpreter. ‘Epprjs, ov, 178, Hermes, the Mer¬ cury of the Homans, messenger of Zeus. 4'pupa, aTos, to, protection, wall. jepvpvo's, h, 6v, fortified. epxopai (epx _ j «At/0-), ^A Oov, i\T]- Avda, 655, 3, viii. [pros-elyte], come, go. 4pw, see ehrov. t'pws, cvtos, 5 [erotic], love. 4pa>Taa>, ^pcor^orw, etc., 2 aor. hp&p-V v > ask a question, inquire. 737. €o"0tjs, tjtos, f] [ewvfu, clothe, Lat. uestis, clothing, Eng. wear], clothes, raiment. 4(r0uo (erjv, see rpe [et>5atjtts, adv., happily, comp. cvdaipovtarepov. ev-8a£p.o>v, ov, gen. ovos, [datpwv], of good fate or fortune, fortunate, happy, prosperous, flourishing. ev-e p'yt'njs, ov [468], well-doer, benefactor. tcv-rjOeia, os, simplicity, silliness, folly. «v-r(0t]s, es [^0os, t 6, character , Eng. ethics], of simple character, silly, foolish. cv0v$, adv., straightway, immedi¬ ately, at once, Lat. statim. cv-kXcws, adv. [€u-/fA.crjs, famous, K\tos, t 6, fame, Lat. clued, be spoken of, Eng. loud], gloriously. cv-voia, os [644] , good-will, fidelity. ev-vo'ucws, adv. [644], with good¬ will, kindly ; evvoiKws %x €iu > be well- disposed. ev-voos, ov, contr. etfvovs,ow [644], well-disposed, attached. ev-TTCTws, adv. [€u-7i‘er^s, falling well, easy, cf. ntnTw], easily. evpfcnca) (efy>-), evp^aw, rjvpov, i)%- pijKa, rjvpnpai, yvpedriv, 642,4, vi. , find, devise, procure. cvpos, ovs, t6 [eupvs, broad], breadth, width. cv-toktws, adv. [554], in good order. €v-Ta|ia, os [654], good order, dis¬ cipline. cv-ToXpos, ov [t<^\/io], of brave spirit, courageous. «i»-Tvx* w > tvTvxfiffu, etc. [554], have success. Evparr)s, ov, the Euphrates. evX.op.cu, eij^opat, ev^apTjv, 600, 7, pray, wish for, offer one's vows. €v-co8t]S) es [o£a>, smell, Lat. odor, smell], sweet-smelling, fragrant. ev-cawpos, ov [644], of good name or omen, euphemistic for the ill- omened word apioTepis, left; rb eii- (vwpov, the left wing. 4*, see i?rl. e^cryov, see iadiw. edvT]V, see cpalvw. 4'4>ao-av, eax€, see -eiropai, follow after, pursue. 773. w E(j>6T], €<|>T]-C-oSos, 7] [<3SJs], way to, approach. 4x0po's, a, 6v [e%0os, hate], hostile; e’xfyxfs, 6, enemy, foe. t \(0 ( and gx^w, cgxov, iaxn Ka i *, e\f/ , f](T(i), tfipTjtra, boil, iwpa, etopaKa, ecopcov, see 6paw. i'«$, eo), t] [Lat. aurora, dawn, Eng. east], dawn, east. ews, conj., as long as, while, until. 821, 822. Z. £aw, Cvgw [£a>T 0 S) ov [ftpurds, to be eaten, /3i&p(txrKu, eat, Lat. uoro, devour], half-eaten. ijpi-SdpeiKov, t6 , [Sapet/cJs], half- daric. ijpi-Serfs, es [Sew, lack], wanting half, half full. rjfw-dXios, a, ov [#Aos], containing the whole and half, half as much again. t||Ai(rvs, eta, v [y/xi-], half. tjpt-coPoXiov, t6 [oj8oA], death. _J.0avaTo«, OoLvaT, see iOi\u, -0ev, suffix denoting whence. Geo's, 6 ,77 [ theo-logy, theism], god, goddess. tGepairevw, depairevaoo [ therapeu¬ tic ], serve, wait upon, take care of, court. Gepairwv, ovtos, 6, servant. t©€TTa\id, ay, Thessaly. ©eTTaXo's, 0 , a Thessalian. 0eto (0u-), devaopai, 610, 1, ii., run, race ; of troops, charge. Gecope'co, deeopycrw, ede&pyaa, Tedeco- pyua [decopSs, spectator, cf. deaopai, Eng. theorem, theory], view, witness, inspect, review. 0T{pd, ay [fiyp, wild beast, Lat. fe¬ rns, wild, Eng. deer], hunt, chase. j07]pd(o, Oypacra), idypdaa, TedypaKa, iOypddyv, hunt, chase, pursue. j.G'Hpevw, 0 t ipevaw, etc., hunt, catch. |0r]p(ov, t6, wild animal, creature. 0t](ravpos, 0 [638], treasure. -0i, suffix denoting where. 0vrjo‘Ka> (0a v-), da.vovp.ai, edavov, t«- dvy -ca, 642, 5, vi., die, pf. and 2 pf., 660, 2, be dead, be slain. Go'pvjBos, 0 [epoos, noise], noise, dis¬ turbance, uproar. t0paKios, a, ov, Thracian. 0pa^, k6s, 6, a Thracian. Gv'ydrTjp, rpos, y, 291 [daughter], daughter. ©vpPpiov, t 6, Thymbrium. 0vjio-ei8fjs>&[537,663],M#/i-sjnn£ed. Gvpoopai, dvpucropxu, redvpcopai, idvpudyv, [537], be angry. 768. Gvpos, 6 [537], soul, heart. Gvpd, as [Lat. foris, door, Eng. door], door; eirl rais (3aai\{u)s ddpaLS, at court; so dvpai of a general’s head¬ quarters. Guo-id, as [538], sacrifice, offering. 0t>u>, Ovcroj, edvaa, rtdvna, rtdvpai, irvdyv, 442 [538], sacrifice; mid., 1 cause to sacrifice, offer sacrifice. 8»paKC£ 26 Ka0-r]8vTra0^a> t0 (0&>pa/ci5-), idupdiuffa, TfOoopdictffpai, idtopanladrip, iv., arm with a cuirass; mid., put on one’s cuirass. Owpag, olkos, 8 [thorax'], breastplate, corselet, cuirass. I. toCopai, idaopat, la adpr}v, IdOrjv, heal, cure. jtdTpos, 6, surgeon, physician. 184, tSelv, etc., see dpaa. tSios, a, op [idiom, idiosyncrasy], one's own, personal, private; els rb 18iop, for one's personal use. jtSiwTTjs, ov [idiot], an ordinary or private person, private soldier, private. ISpoo), Idpwcra [idpc&s, sweat, Lat. su¬ dor, sweat, Eng. sweat], sweat, reek with sweat. tUpctov, r6, victim for sacrifice. Icpos, a, 6v [hier-archy, hiero¬ glyphic], holy, sacred; Upd, rd, sac¬ rifices, omens from inspecting the vitals, in contrast to ucpdyia. fiUu (4-), too, 3)/ca, etna, eTpat, eWr)P, 667, 1, 702, send, throw, hurl at; mid., send oneself, rush, charge. 746. ttKavos, h, dv, coming up to, suffi¬ cient, able, capable, competent. fiKavws, adv., sufficiently, enough. iKveopai (in-), ’{{opai, Ik6/j.t}p, lypai, 627, 1, v., come. *Ikoviov, t 6, Iconium. fXcws, up, gen. w, 170, propitious. fXt| , vs [efAftj, press, hem in], crowd, band; of cavalry, troop. fva, final particle, that, in order that. wnrevs? das, 6 [564], horseman, knight, cavalryman , pi., cavalry. tinriKos, h> dp [564], for cavalry, cavalry-; Innindv, t6, cavalry, horse. liriro-Spopos, & [564], race-course, hippodrome. iiriros, 6, h [564], horse, mare ; anb or t [iso-sceles], equal; ovk Xirov iapdv, we are not on an equal¬ ity. ’Io-o-oC, ol, Issue. fo-rrjjn (erra-), CTTjaeo, caryo-a and ecTTTjP, e. ko.0’, see Kara. Ka0-l£op.ai (45-), KaO-edovpai , impf. iKad-e(d/j.r)p, iv. [Lat. sedeo, sit, Eng. sit, set], sit down; of a general, make a halt, encamp. Ka0-6vSft>, Kad-evbhao), lie down to sleep , sleep, lie or be asleep. Ka0-T]-y4opai, lead or show the way. KaO-TiSviraO^M, Ka6-r)5vnddr)cra [580], be luxurious, waste in luxury. 27 Kara Ka6-T)Ka> Ka0-T]Kw, come down, reach or ex¬ tend down. Kad-Ti|i.ai, 704, sit down, be seated; of soldiers, be encamped. Ka0-C, look down on, observe, inspect. icai, conj., and, Lat. et; influenc¬ ing particular words or expressions, also, too, even, further, Lat. etiam ; Kal . . . Kai or Te . . . Kal, both . . . and, rwt only . . . but also. Kaival, uv, Caenae. kcuvo's, i], 6v, new, strange. KaC-rrcp, concessive particle [feed], although, with the participle. Kcupo's, <5, the right or fitting time, opportunity, occasion. Ka(-Toi, conj. [»<*£+ro£], and yet. KaCo), see Kau. Kaiceivos, by crasis for Kal eKeivos. tKaKo-vovs, ow, 191 c [644], evil- minded, ill-disposed. KaKo's, 6v, 448, 469, bad in the broadest sense (as opposed to dya- 66s) , base, cowardly , hurtful; /ca/coV, r 6, harm, evil. |KaKovpyoS) 6 [468], wrongdoer. jKaKws, adv., badly, ill; nanus not- 6iv, do harm or damage to, injure, ravage; nanus *x eiv, > be badly off. KaX.ap.os, 6, reed, Lat. harundo. koXco), na\u, ind\eaa, nenAyna, ne- nA-npai, inA-fidyv, 442 [6^2], call, sum¬ mon, Lat. uoco, call, name; 6 na- a ov/j.evos, the so-called. KaXXCp.a\os, 6, Callimachus. koXo's, f?, 6v, 469 [hale, whole, calli-graphy], beautiful, fair, propi¬ tious, noble; KaAbs Kal aya06s, naAbs nayad6s, noble and good, ‘gentle¬ man.’ KaXvirro) (naAvft-), naAvipu, ina- Auif/a, nenaAv/i/xai, inaAvQOrjv, 613 , 5 , iii., cover. koXws, adv. [kua6s], beautifully, bravely, well, successfully, honour¬ ably ; naAus be well. Kap.V 28 kcXcvw merely strengthens the meaning of the simple verb, and often cannot be translated ; sometimes it gives a transitive force to an intransitive simple verb (c/. Lat. de-). KaTa-( 3 atvci>, go down, descend. iKcmt-Pouris, ecos, tj, descent, march down to the coast. Kara-ytios, ov (77?), underground. KaTa-yeXaco, laugh at, deride. 757. KaT-ayiro£vyia), i.e. make a halt, halt. KaTa-fiavOava), learn thoroughly. KaTa-|x^v», stay behind. KaTa-vo i, encamp, camp. KaTa-a-iraa), draw or drag down. Kard-o-TCuris, foos, n [649], state, condition. KaTa-o-Tpl<|>(o, turn down, subdue. KaTa-5 split down, cleave asunder, burst through, burst open. KdTa-Tctva), stretch hard, insist. KaTa-TC0r]pi, put down, lay away or up ; irapd nva Karadeadai, put into one's keeping. Ka.Ta-4>avT]s, es [483], clearly seen, in plain sight, visible. * KaTa-(j)€vya), take refuge. KaTa-pov€, hold down, restrain, check, control, occupy. KaT-rj-yopew, Kar-'qyop^au}, etc., 597 [KuT--fiyopos, accuser, ayopevca, ha¬ rangue, speak, ayopa^, speak against, charge, accuse. 757. KaT-i8o5v, see KaO-opd a>. Kavpa, aros, t6 [/caa>], heat. KcuKrrpov ireSiov, t6, Cayster Plain, Gaysterfield. Kaw (Kav-'), Katiaa', eKavca, Ketcavica, KtKavpai, iKavOpv, 620, 1, iv. [ caustic, holo-caust ], burn, kindle, cauterize ; 7rvp eKaov, they kept afire going. K€-yxp°S) <5, millet, millet grass. K£ip.ai, Kelaopai, 667, 2, 703 [Lat. ciuis, citizen, quies, rest, Eng. home, cemetery ], lie, be laid, lie dead. KeXaivaC, uv, Celaenae. keXcvci), KeKevaco, 4Ke\eviov, r-lifter], steal, embezzle. KXccSvupos, 6, Cleonymus. 1 kXip, *K\Iva, k4k\i- jxai , £ic\ldr)v and £k\Ivt)v, 619, 4, iv. [Lat. inclin’d, incline. Eng. lean, climate, en-c!itic\, cause to lean, bend. kX( 0 \|/, kAcOTTOS, 6 [/cAeTTTO)], thief. KVTjpts, tSos, 7] leg~\, greave. KOLjxdco, iKolfX7)(ra, iKoip.'fidnv [fce?- pat], lay to rest, put to sleep; mid. and pass., lie down, go to sleep, sleep. tKoivfl, adv., in common, jointly. koivo's, hi 6v, common , joint. ].koivoci), Koiudao), make common, communicate. f koivwvcw, KOLvwv-riaeo, have a share of, partake of. 745. Ikoivwvo's, 6, sharer, partner. KoXa£o> («oAa5-), KoAdaui, £k6 Aatra, /ce/coAaa'pai, iKoAaadrjv, iv., check, punish, inflict punishment. KoXoctraC, cov, Colossae. Ko'Xxot, ol, the Colchians. ko|u£ci> («opt 5-), KopuS), etc., iv. [ko- puEco, care /or], carry away so as to save, bring, convey. KOVlOpTOS, 6, cloud of dust. Ko'irpos, hi dung. KoVrd) (kOTT-), KO\pQO, CKOif/a, K€KOOS, 7), OV, light; %), etc. [471], be strong, have the power, be superior, master, overcome, control , conquer. Kpdrcjp 30 Xadctv Kpdrtfp, ijpos, 6 [Kepdwvpu], mix¬ ing bowl, punch bowl. KpcmcrTos, t], ov, 469 [471], strong¬ est, bravest, best, noblest; neut. pi. Kpdna-Ta as adv., in the best way, most bravely. icparos, ovs, t6 [471], strength, force, might, Lat. uis. Kpauyrj, rjs [622], outcry, shout, clamour, uproar. Kpeas, Kpeus, r 6 [Lat. card, flesh, Eng. creo-sote ], flesh, pb pieces of flesh, meat. KpeCTTtov, ov, gen. ovos, 469 [471], stronger, braver, better, nobler, more valuable. Kplp.ap.ai (fcpe/xa-), Kpep.'fiaop.cu, 647, 7, vii., intr., hang, be suspended. j.Kp6p.dvvv|M (Kpepa-j, Kpepu, inpe- paaa, iKpepaaOrju, v., trans., hang up, suspend. Kptfvri, vs, spring, well, Lat. fons. Kpiyirts, 7Sos, 7], base, foundation. Kpifs, Kp7]r6s, 6, a Cretan. KptOrj, t)s, in pi., barley. |Kpt0ivos, 7], ov, of barley. Kptvd> (/cptl/-), KpivS), ixplva, KCKptKa, KfKpip.cn, Skp'iOtiv, 619, 6, iy. [Lat. cerno, separate, Eng. critic, hypo¬ crisy ], divide, distinguish, decide, determine, be of opinion, judge, bring to trial. Kpio's, d, ram, Lat. aries. KpCoris, ecos, t) [Kpivco , Eng. crisis'], decision, trial. Kpovo), Kpovao), tKpovaa, KCKpovKa, KcKpoupai and K€Kpov-), Kpvif/O), €KpV\]/a, KeKpvppai, eKpv (ktcv-), ktcvco, fKTeiva, eKTova, 619, 6, iv., kill. KTT]p.a, aros, t 6 [ KTdopcu ], posses¬ sion, pi. property. kttjvos, ovs , t 6 [Krdopat], chattel, domestic animal, pi. cattle. Krrprtds, ov, Ctesias, a famous Greek physician at the Persian court. KvSvos, 6, the Cydnus. kvkXos, 6 [Lat. circus, circle, Eng. ring, cycle, bi-cyc/e, en-cyclo-pae- dia ], circle, curve, ring; kvkXcp, in a circle. jKvKXdci), KvK\d>s els kvkXohtiv, as if to encircle. KvXCvSa), iniXlaa, KeKvXZapai, iKv- \i(T07]v [cylinder], roll, roll down. Kvpos, 6, I. Cyrus the Elder , founder of the Persian empire, ac¬ cording to Xenophon the son of Cambyses and grandson of Astya- ges. II. Cyrus the Younger, the leader of the expedition against Ar- taxerxes. 705. Kvv, kw6s, 6 [Lat. canis, dog, Eng. hound, cynic], dog, hound, cur. KcoXva), kwXv (Aax*)i A h^opai, $Xaxov, efA7JX“j elXyypai, iX^x^V^, 626, 1, V., obtain by lot, get, obtain, be pos¬ sessed of, hold. Xayws, 6, hare, Lat. lepus. XaOciv, XaOwv, see A av&dvw. ' 31 Xurrqpos XcCOpq. Xd0p$, adv. [xavOdvu'}, covertly, without the knowledge of. AoxcSaifiovios, a, ov, Lacedae¬ monian ; A aKedcu/xivtos, 6, a Lace¬ daemonian. XaKr££a> (XaKTiti-'), XaKTiv, etc., iv. [ac£|, adv., with the foot, Lat. calx, heel], kick at, kick. AaKwv, avos, 6, a Laconian. jAaKwviKos, h, 6v, Laconian. Xap.{3av6> (\aj8-), Xh^o/xai, tAafiov, et\i)(pa, elXrjfificu, ixhTT]$, tjtos , hi splendour. Xd|Jurci>, \dfjL\pw, eXajuif/a, XeXajuva [Lat. limpidus, clear, Eng. lamp], shine, be bright, blaze. Xav0dvo> (a ad-), Xh, eA e£a, XeXeyjuat, 4\e- xOv v , 600, 4 [591], say, speak, tell, state, mention, relate, Lat. died, bid, charge, vote. 837, 838 c. Xcfarci) (\i7T-), Aetycw, eXnrov, Ae- Xoiira, AeAeifinai, i\ci, eXrj^a, leave off, end, come to an end. \T)£op.ai (A 775 -), iXrjad/xvv, iv. [AcCa, booty], plunder, pillage. 4.\fl(rrT]'s, ov, plunderer, robber. tX£0ivos, Vi ov i of stone. X£0os, <5 \_Htho-graphy], stone. Xip/qv, evos, 6, harbour, port. Xlp.o's, 6, hunger, famine. Xlvcos, a, ov, contr. oOs, rji °vv [xlvov, linen], linen. \ 6 ' yos, <5 [591], word, saying, state¬ ment, speech, discourse, debate, rumour, narrative. Xo'vx^ vs, point or spike of a spear, spear, lance. XoiSop&o, XoiZophau, etc. [A olSopos, abusive], revile, abuse. Xoiiro's, h, dv [AeiVaj], remaining, with the art., the rest; Xonrdv (sc. iorC), it remains; t b Xonrdv, for the future. 734. Xoo$, 6, hill, ridge, height. tXox-wyta, as [435], captaincy. tKox-a^o's, d [435], commander of a xdxos, captain. Xoxos, <5 [Ae'xos, couch, Lat. lectus, couch , Eng. lie, lair, log], ambush , men in ambush, a company. tAv8£a, as, Lydia. AvSios, a, ov, Lydian. Avkcuos, a, ov, Lycaean; ra Au- Kaia, the Lycaea, a festival in honour of Zeus. AvKdovld, as, Lycaonia. Avkios, <5, Lycius, an Athenian. Xvkos, 6 [Lat. lupus, wolf, Eng. wolf], wolf. Xvp.aCvop.ai (Xv/xav-), Av/aavovpat, iXvfxvvdixvv, XeAv/xac/ULai, iv. [Xv/mv, insult], outrage, destroy, ruin. tXvTr&i), xvTrrjoco, etc., grieve, dis¬ tress, vex, annoy, molest. Xvttt], vs, pain, grief, sorrow. iXimjpo's, a, 6v, painful, trouble¬ some, annoying. \va> 32 p£v X&o, Abaco, eAvaa, AeAvKa, AeAvyai, iAtdvv, 442 [Lat. luo, Zoose, Eng. lose, loose, ana-lyze] , Zoose, seZ /ree, release, break, break down, destroy; mid., loose one's own, ran¬ som. X«TO-d*yoi, oi [A&>t<$s, lotus, + 0a- ye7v, see iadlu], lotus-eaters. X(p'o)v, a <$ov, gen. ovos, 469, better, preferable, pleasanter. M. pa, intensive particle, surely, used in negative oaths. 736. MaiavSpos, 6 [meander ], the Mae- ander, a river in Asia Minor of wind¬ ing course. patvopai (yav-'), fj.avovy.ai, fj.efj.rjva, ifidvrjv, iv. [maniac, necro-mancy~\, rage, be mad. paKap££a> (/iowaptS-), eyaKdpnra, iya- Kaplodrjv, iv. [455], regard as happy. paicapiorTos, dj, 6v [455], deemed happy, enviable. paicpo's, d, 6v [455], long, high, tall; yaKpav ( sc. 6d6v), a long way; yaKpdrepov, adv., farther, at longer range. Maxpcov, (ovos, 6, a Macronian. paXa, adv., very, much, very much, greatly, exceedingly, Lat. ualde; comp. yd\\ov, more, rather; sup. yaMo-ra, most, especially. pavOavw ( yaO -), yaOdjaoyai, eyaOov, yeyddrjKa, 626, 4, v. [mathematics'], learn, find out. pavns, eas, & \_yaivoyai ], one in¬ spired, seer, diviner. Mapo-vas, ov, Marsyas, a satyr, tpapnip&o, yaprvpdjaco, etc., testify, bear witness, Lat. testor. tpiapTvpiov, t 6, evidence, proof. papTvs, vpos, 6 [martyr], witness. Mcutkois, a, 6, the Mascas. pao-rlg, lyos, rj, whip, lash. p.a€pvT]s, ov, Megaphernes. peycGos, ovs, t6 [455], greatness, magnitude, size. pi-yicrros, sup. of yeyas. p.€0* , see yera. ptC^cov, comp, of yeyas. pcCwv, Comp, of ylKpds. tpcXavta, as, blackness. pe'Xds, yeAaiva, yeAav, gen. yeAavos, etc., 338 [ melan-choly ], black. pe'Xei, yeXdjaei, iye,Arjcre, yeyeAvKe, impers., it is a care, it concerns; eyol yeArjaei, I will see to it. 792. fpeXcTGUO, yeAerdjaoo, eyeAervva, ye- ytAervica, care for, attend to, prac¬ tise. jpeX^Ttj, vs, care, attention , prac¬ tice. pcXCvt], vs, millet. pe'XXb), yeAAdjaca, eyeAAyaa, be about , intend , delay. pcpvV]o, etc., see yiyvtf< tko>. plv, post-positive particle, never used as a conj. to connect words and sentences, hut to distinguish the word or clause with which it stands from something that is to fol¬ low, and commonly answered by Se (sometimes by aAAd, yevroi, erreira) (Uv-TOl 38 |U)VVCl> in the corresponding clause, on the one hand, indeed, truly, but often it is not to be translated, and its pres¬ ence is to be shown merely by stress of voice; 6 p*v ... 6 5e, the one . . . the other, plur. some . . . others; a\\a p4v, but certainly. !|i£v-toi [to*], adv., really, cer¬ tainly, in truth; conj., yet, still, however, nevertheless. pivo), pevu, epeiva, pepevyua, 605, 6 [Lat. maneo, stay'], remain, stay, wait for, last, be in force. Mevcov, o ovos, 6, Menon. pe'pos, ovs, t 6, division, part, share, portion, Lat. pars ; p4pos n rrjs evra- Zias, an instance of their discipline ; iv p-epet, in turn. tp.6, Eng. meteor], raised from the ground, on high. perpov, t 6 [Lat. metior, measure, Eng. metre, etc.], measure. p.€xpi, improper prep, with gen., of time or place, up to, until; conj., until. 821, 822. prj, adv., not, used with the imv. and subjv. in all constructions; in all final and object clauses, except after ph, that not, lest, which takes ov ; in all conditional and condi¬ tional relative clauses, and in the corresponding temporal sentences after eus, irpiv, etc.; in relative sen¬ tences expressing a purpose ; in ex¬ pressions of a wish; with the infin., except in indirect discourse; and with the partic. when it expresses a condition. All of the compounds of ph follow the usage of the simple word. jpi]8ap(3s, adv. [ pytiap6s , none], by no means, Lat. nequaquam. jp.tl-84, conj. and adv. [5e], but not, and not, nor, Lat. neque, nec; not even, Lat. ne . . . quidem. jpt]8-€£s, pia, iv, 497 c [els], not one, none, no, nobody, nothing, Lat. nemo, nullus. ipTiSe-irore, adv. [7rore], never, Lat. nunquam. tMi]8£d, as, Media. Mrj8os, 6, a Mede. Mti'Sokos, 6, Medocus. Fi'e’, see pyre. p.Tj-K-€Ti, adv. [jUTj+ert], not again, no longer. Pt(kos, ovs, t 6 [455], length. prjv, post-positive intensive parti¬ cle, in truth, surely, truly, Lat. uero ; Kal pyv, and in fact, and yet; a\\a pyv, but surely, but still; h nhv, in very truth. p.ijv, pyv6s, 6 [Lat. mensis, month, Eng. moon, month], month. p.T]vv, pyvvo’u, etc., disclose, make known. |M]-1T0T€ 34 |jwj-iroT€, adv. [p-fj-^nore], not ever, never, Lat. nunquam. jiij-Tt, conj. [p-fi + re], and not; P'fjre . . . pijre, neither. . . nor ; pyre . . . t«f, not only not . . . but also, Lat. neque . . . et. Iirfrrip, prjrpSs, tj, 291 [Lat. mater, mother, Eng. mother], mother. p.£a, see els. p.f'YVvp.i (/U 7 -), pt£co, epi£a, peplypai, ipi X erjv and ipiyrjv, 651,' 3, V. [Lat. misceo, mix, Eng. mix], mix, mingle. M£ 8 ds, ou, Midas, a mythical king of Phrygia. MiGpiSdrrjs, ov, Mithriddtes. (WKpo's, d, 6v, 469 [, micro-scope ], small, little, Lat. paruus, of small account, insignificant; neut. as adv., piKp6v, hardly; comp, peluv, smaller, less; nent. as adv., peiov, less. tMi\r] ( pva -), pvficrco, epvTjaa, /.i4p.vrip.cu, ipvfjadrjv, 642, 6 , vi. [Lat. memini, remember, moneo, remind, admonish, Eng. mentor, mnemon¬ ics ], remind; mid. and pass., re¬ mind oneself, remember, mention, make mention , with pf. pep.vrjp.ai as pres., Lat. memini. 747. purlw, plarjaa, etc. [picros, r 6, hatred, Lat. miser, wretched, Eng. mis-anthrope~\, hate, Lat. odi. t(uo-0o-8<>TT]s, ov [641], paymaster, employer. 772. jucrOos, 6 [meed], wages, pay, hire, reward. 4.p.iopa, as [658], wages re¬ ceived, pay. tpio-0o-opos, ov [658], receiving pay; pur0oV, OV, gen. OVOS [pipvtfffKU)], mindful. 760. |ivT|, a Mysian. p.c5pos, a., ov [sopho-more], dull, stupid, foolish, Lat. stultus. N. vam], rjs, ravine, glen. tvav-apxps, d [463], admiral. vavs, vecos, rj, 388 [Lat. nauis , ship, Eng. nautical, cf. veto], ship (because it swims ). .{.vavrqs, ov, sailor. jvauriKos, 1], 6v, naval ; volvtik6v n, a naval force, a fleet. vea.vlas, ou [i/eos], young man. |v€av£(TKos, 6, young man. vtKpds, 6 [Lat. nex, death, Eng. necro-logy ], dead body, corpse; ol vetcpol, the dead. vlpco, vepw, eveipa, veiIprjua, veve- prjpai, tveprjdrjv, 605, 7 [509], dis¬ tribute, portion out, award, Lat. dis- tribuo, drive to pasture; mid., of cattle, feed , graze. 85 oySoTiKOVTa Wo* Wos, a, ov [Lat. nouus, new , Eng. new, neo-phyte], young, fresh. vce\t), 7]s [ve], island (as swimming in the sea). t vIkglo), viK7)), etc., conquer, pre¬ vail over, surpass, outdo, Lat. uinco. vtKT|, t is, victory, Lat. uictoria. voi (popub-'), vofuSo, etc., 618, 6, iv. [509], regard as a custom, pass., be the custom, be usual ; own, re¬ gard, consider, believe, think, Lat. puto. vojios, <5 [509], custom, law. vovs, vov, 6, 180 [644], mind, Lat. mens / ip pep have in mind, puipose. WKTO-v\a£, a kos, 6 [W£-|-0dA.a|], night-watch, picket. vvKTup, adv. [vu|], by or at night. vvv, adv. [Lat. nunc, now, Eng. now], now, just now, just, at present. vv£, pvkt6s, t) [Lat. nox, night, Eng. night], night ; pivai pvktcs, midnight. S. QtvCas, ov, Xenias. t^cviKo's, hi op, mercenary / rb len- k6p (sc. erTpcirev/xa), the mercenary force. |lvos, 6, stranger, foreigner, guest friend, guest, host, foreign soldier, mercenary. ^cvo()>wv, Copt os, <5, Xenophon, an Athenian, author of the Anabasis. Qep^is, ov, Xerxes, in particular Xerxes I., son of Darius I. £t|paiv« (l^pav-), £ Tjpapu, i^hp^va, impact/xai, i^7]pdp97]p, iv. [£77 p6s, dry], dry. £«|>os, ovs, r6, sword, Lat. gladius. t£vX££op,ai (£uA.i5-), iv., gather wood. t£vXivo$, t], op, of wood, wooden. £v'Xov, r 6, wood, piece or bar of wood; pi. timbers, beams, wood, fuel. O. o, hi r6, the definite art., 88, the, with demonstrative force in the ex¬ pressions 6 p\p ... 6 5f, the one . . . the other, this . . . that, pi. these . . . those, some . . . the rest ; 6 8e, with¬ out preceding 6 p.ip, and he, but he, and in pi., but they , the rest (never referring to the subject of the pre¬ ceding sentence, but always to some word in an oblique case). As the art., used sometimes in Greek where we should omit it, as with proper names and numerals. The art. may be used also to mark a person or thing as well known or customary, or with distributive force, as r ov /.i7]pbs rep GTpaTidoTri, per month to each soldier , or where we should use a possessive pron. to Kvpov, Cyrus's relations; ol iicelpov, his men j ol (pevyopTes, the exiles ,* 6 fiov- x6/j.epos, whoever wishes; ol oUoi, those at home / ol epbop, those with¬ in ,* ol irapa /SaaiXius, men from the king ,* ol 4 k tt)s ayopas, market men ,* ol ovp avT(p, his men. ojBoXo's, <5, obol, an Attic silver coin, worth about three cents. dySoriKovTa, indecl., 496 [oktcS], eighty. o'-ySoos 86 ovcCpaTa 07800s, 77 , ov, 496 [o/frco], eighth. 08c, ^8c, rdSe, demon, pron., 639 a [8 + -5e], this, the following. 540, 541. 080 's, v [Lat. solum, ground, Eng. ex-odus, meth-od, etc.'], way, road, Lat. uia; march, journey, expedi¬ tion. o- 0 €v, ady. [os], from which place, whence. ol, 01 , ol, see 6, 8s, ov. otSa, 2 pf. with pres, force, 661, 698 [663], know, understand, have knowledge of. 839. totica-Se, adv., home, homeward. t oIkcios, a, ov, belonging to one's house, familiar ; ol ohccioi, one’s fam¬ ily, kinsmen, friends. t oIk^ttjs, ov, house servant, do¬ mestic. t oIkcw, oIk4), oIko8o/xt}(T(v, etc. [Semico, build], build, construct, erect. tofxo- 0 ev, adv., from home. tofxoi, adv., 28, at home. foixo-vo'ixos, 0 [509], steward. oIkos, 0 [Lat. ulcus, abode, village, Eng. di-ocese, eco-nomy], house re¬ garded as a home. ottCTcCpb) (01/cTep-), oiKTipu, cpKTeipa, iv. [oIktos, pity], pity, Lat. misereor. otpai, see oiopai. otvos, 0 [Lat. ulnum, wine], wine; olvos (poiviicwv, palm-wine. otopai or otpai, olrjcropai, ($4\dr]v, 605, 8, think, believe, expect. olos, a, ov, of which kind, {such) as, Lat. qualis; oUs re, able, possi¬ ble; of what sort or kind. 571, 571 a. jotoV-ircp, airep, 6virep, just {such) as; neut. as adv., oToWep, just as. oftrw, see 4pco <, oi'xopai, olxhvopai, pres, with pf. force, have gone, be gone. oUovo's, 6, bird of omen, omen. toKV€a>, okv 7jcra>, &Kvt)- potca, opcopopai and dpdpoapai, b)p6- Qr)v and up6v\aK(d, as, command of the rear. ldiriv\a|, aKos, 6 [0dAa|], rear-guard. toirXiJco (o 7 rAt 5 -), Snr\iaa, Snr\iap.at, w^xladyv, arm, equip. oirXt'njS) ov, heavy-armed soldier, hoplite. oVXov, t6 [pan-op ly], implement, pi. gear, arms, armour; iv to?s ott- \ois, under arms. oiroios, a, ov, rel. pron., of which kind, {such) as, Lat. qualis, of what sort. 571, 571 a. oiroVos, y, ov, rel. pron., how much or large, how many, (as much or as many) as, Lat. quantus. 571, 571 a. oiron, conjunctive adv., when, whenever, since, because. oiroTepos, a, ov, rel. pron., ivhich of two parties, whichever, Lat. uter. oirov, conjunctive adv., where, wherever, Lat. ubi. oirros, 17 , dv, baked, burnt. dirws, conjunctive adv. and final particle, in what way, how, that, in order that. 1 opcwo ( opa-, 18 -, 07T-), oif/ojuai, eldov, edpdfca and idpaxa, etopapcu and S>p- p.at, &(pOi)v, 655, 5, viii. [a- ware, pan-orama ; 663 ; Lat. oculus, Eng. eye, ogle, optic, syn-opsis~], see in its widest sense, behold, look, ob¬ serve, perceive, Lat. uideo. 839. op-yip 77 s, temper, anger ; opyfi', in a passion. j.dpY(£op.ai (opyib-), dpytovp.ai, etc., iv., be angry, be in a passion. 768. op-yvia, as, fathom, six Greek feet. top 0 ios, a, ov, straight up, steep, in column. op 0 o's, v, dv [ortho-dox], straight, direct. dp0po S , 6 , daybreak, dawn. op0ws, adv. [ opdds ], rightly, justly. opia, rd [horizon'], boundary. opKos, 6 , oath. oppaa), opp.-fjcro), etc. [opp. irj, mo¬ tion], set in motion, hasten; mid. and pass. , set out or forth, start. oppeco [ c dpp.os, anchorage ], be moored, lie at anchor. op vis, opvidos, 6, y [ornitho-logy], bird. ’OpoVrds, a or ov, Orontas. dpos, ous, rd, mountain. topvKTo's, 17 , dv, dug, artificial. opvTTCi) (opvx~)i dpv£ 00 , topv^a, opd)- pvxa, bpdpvyjuai, wpvxdyv, 617, 4, iv., dig, Lat .fodio; quarry. opavo's, 1 ?, dv [orphan], orphan. os, tJ, b, rel. pron., 566, who, which, what, Lat. qui; 81 d, why; tv y, during which (time), mean¬ time; as dem., ko\ os, and he. 568, 569, 725. ooros, 17 , ov, rel. pron. , how much or great, how many, (as much or as many) as, Lat. quantus; neut. as adv., oaov, with numerals, about; bay, with comparatives, by how much, the. 571, 571 a. joVoo'-irep, t]tt ep, ovirep, just (as much or many) as. oo’-'jrcp, 7?7rep, oirep [os], just who , just what. OO--TIS, J^TiS, b Tl, 567 [os+tIs], who, whoever, whichever, whatever, which, what. 570. ot€, conjunctive adv., when, as, whenever, because, since. 38 iraXai OTl oti, conj. [neut. of oVns], that, be¬ cause, since ; used also to strengthen superlatives, as oti airapaiTKevSTaTos, as unprepared as possible. ov, ovk, ovX) adv., procl., not, Lat. non, used, to deny a fact, with the indie, and opt. in all independent sentences, except wishes; in indirect discourse after on and is; and in causal sentences; accented at the end of a clause or sentence. All of the compounds of ov follow the usage of the simple word. ov, conjunctive adv. [8s], where. ov, dat. ol, personal pron., 611, of himself, Lat. sui. 616. tov8a|i.Tj, adv., in no wise. tov8a(j.o'-0€v, adv., from noplace. ovSapo's; 4, 6v [ou5e], none. jovSojjiov, adv., nowhere. ov-8 i, neg. conj. and adv. [ov+5eXos, t 6, advantage, use. o<|>0aX|j.o's, 6 \_cf. Spacv ], eye. <>x&">, bxf] (oif/i 8-), diplo’ffyi', iv. [o^e, adv., late], be or come late; ol b\f/l- Covres, the late comers. o\J/i$, ecus, rj [cf. 6pdoi], look. n. ira0€tv, see irdvxu. iraOos, ovs, t 6 [580], experience, trouble, ill-treatment. < iraiav£t a> (iraumS-), i-naiaviffa, iv. [iraidv, paean], raise the paean. tiraiScia, as, training. tiraiStvw, noudevaa), etc., train up a child, educate. tiraiStov, r 6, infant, little child. irats, Trcuhbs, 6, y [Lat. puer, boy, child, Eng. foal, ped-agogue ], child, boy, girl, son ; £k iralSuy, from boy - hood. ira(o>, Tralccc, €Trai, lead along , lead on; ns tA irXayia, lead into position on either flank of an enemy’s force. trapaScuroS) b [paradise], park. |u, pass along to one, give up, deliver over, surrender, pass along. irapa-Spapciv, see irapa-rpix^' irap-aivew, recommend, advise. 768 a. ‘irap-aiTeop.cu, beg, intercede. , put things side by side, get ready, prepare, procure; mid., prepare or procure for oneself, make ready, provide. irapa-o-KtvTi, ijs [cr/ceu^], prepara¬ tion, equipment. irapa-a-KTjWw, encamp near or by. 774. irapa-TaTTw, draw up side by side ; ■jrapaTeTay/ievoi, drawn up in line. irapa-TcCvW} stretch out, extend. irapa-TtOinu, put beside, set before, serve. Trapa-Tpe'x w > run along or by. irap-cipi (et>0> neor or ^ e at a place, be at hand or present, have come; to irapdvra, the present circumstances. irap-6i|n (elp.i), go or pass by. irap-cXavva), march by or past, ride past, review. «irap-€pxopai, pass by or along. < irap-^x a) ) hold near, afford, fur¬ nish, render, make, cause, inspire. irap-oSos 40 irap-oSos, y [<58v, cdi >os, 6, Pasion. iracr\w (7r a6~), ireiaopai, ejradov, 'niirovQa, 642, 7, vi. [580], experience , suffer, Lat . patior ; ev TraOeiv, be well treated. IIaTT)Yvds, a, Pategyas. •iraTTjp, 7r arp6s, 6, 291 [Lat. pater, father , Eng. father] , father. jirarpts, tSos, y, native land. jiraTpwos, a, ov, ancestral, heredi¬ tary. irava), 7 rada-a>, etc. [Lat. paucus, few, Eng. few], make to cease, end, stop; mid., make oneself to cease, cease, stop, desist, give up, come to an end. 859. IIa\aYtdv, 6vos, 6, a Paphlago- nian. iraxvs, eta, v [pachy-derm], thick, stout. ireStov, t 6 [irebov, ground'], level ground, open country, plain. adv., on foot, afoot. Trejos, i], 6v [ttous], on foot ; irs£6s, 6, foot soldier, pi. infantry. iretOw (7 n0~), Treiaw, eneiaa, ireireiKa and irtiroiOa, weireiapai, eVetotbjv, 609, 2, ii. [495], persuade, prevail upon; mid. and pass., be prevailed on, yield, obey. 768. ‘ireipa, as [561], experience. impda), weipaaca, etc. [561], try, prove, comm. pass, dep., try, test, attempt, endeavour. 746. ireCtropai, see irdax^ and ireidca. ireurnfos, a, ov, verbal [495], to be persuaded or obeyed. irept tlleXoirovvTjo-ios, a, ov, Peloponne sian. neXoTrdvvrjaros, y, Peloponnesus. IleXTai, S>v, Peltae. tireXTacrr^s, ov, peltast, targeteer. tireXTao-TiKos, ??, 6v, belonging to peltasts ; rb TreXraGTiKbv ( SC. GTpa¬ rty pa), the peltast force. ttcXtt], 7 ]s, shield, target, small and light. Trlp/ira), Trepxpoo, eirepxf/a, Treirop surround, encompass . >) encircle. ircpwrTcpd, as, dove, pigeon . tircpiTTcva), i-irep'iTTeva-a, be over and above, reach beyond , outflank. 754. TrcpiTTos, v, 6v[rr e/>/], superfluous, unnecessary. IIcpa-Tjs, ov, a Persian. |ir€p [irepmd-], iv., speak Per¬ sian. jlltpcriKos, v, 6v, Persian. |ir€p (irteS-), meaco, errieora, eme- adt]v, iv., press hard, crowd; pass., be hard pressed. 'TrCp.'irX'qp.t (7rAa-), irXiftrco, ZirAr] a a, 7 T€Tr\r]ica, ireirArj/uat and ‘ireirArjo’p.ai, eirArjaOrjv, 647, 9, vii. [Lat. impleo, fill up, Eng. fill, full, plethora ], fill. 749. irC|rirpT]|n (it pa-), Trprfaa, errpriaa, %eirpr)p.ai, e7rprj(70r]v, 647, 10, vii., Set on fire, burn. (xopid-), xopia>, etc., 618, 7, iv. [561], furnish, provide, give; mid., get, obtain. iropos, <3 [561], ford, means. Troppw, adv. [573], far from. 761. < iropvpovs, a, ovv, 191b [porphyry], dark red, purple. -iroVos, v, ov, interr. pron., how much? Lat. quantus. 559, 559 a. Trorapos, <5 [hippo-potamus], river, •xort, indef. end. adv., at some time, once on a time, once, ever. irdTtpos 43 irpos iroTcpos, a, ov, interr. pron., which of two ? neut. as adv., in an alterna¬ tive question, v 6Tepov . . . fj, whether ... or, Lat. utrum ... an. itotov, r 6 [629], drink. | -irov, indef. end. adv., anywhere. irovs, iro8s, adv. [ 7 rpaos], lightly. irpliro), irpeipco, eirpeif/a, befit. irpeVPvs, fus, 6 [ presbyter, priest], old, reverend; comp, and sup., ?rpe- (xfivTfpos, irpfO'fivTaTos; irpfafifis, oi, envoys. irp£ap.ai, npo-Ovp.if, irpoa- e Kvvricra [kwccc, kiss],make obeisance to, salute. irpoc-XapPavco, take to oneself. ‘irpoiXc5s, adv. [

vXa|, aKos, 6 [^>yAa|], picket ., -irpwTos, v, ov [573], first, fore¬ most ; neut. as adv., irpurov, at first, first. •jnrepvf-, 1170 s, h [ ireTo/xai ], wing of a bird, flap of a cuirass. IIiJ0cryopds, ov, Pythagoras. iruKvos, v, <5v [jrvf], thick, close together. IlvXai, &v, Pylae. iruX^, 77 s, gate, pi. gate, pass. 7ruv0avopai ( nvO -), rrevs, adv., easily, readily. .j.pa-0vp,£d, as [537], easy life. p«M (pv-), pevcopai, ippvT]Ka, tppvriv , 610, 5, ii. [cata-rrh, rheum], flow. piyrwp, opos, 6 [cf. efTTov], speaker, orator . piirTco 45 ar6s fitirru (£iTjs, es [Lat. sapid, be wise, Eng. sap], of keen taste, clear, man¬ ifest. |«s, adv., clearly, evidently. -ce, suffix denoting whither. v, t6, signal, standard. crjcapov, t6, sesame. , ea/caif/a, ecruacpa, eaKappai, icrKdcprjv, 613, 10, iii., dig. o-KcSdvvvp.1 (tr/ceSa-), ovfeSa), iaice- 5aop4a>, CKevocpopifcroo [658], carry baggage. ja-K6vo-<}>opos, ov [658], baggage¬ carrying ; aKevocpdpa, ra, pack-ani- mals, the baggage-train, the baggage. t< tkt]V€c0, aK^vriau, iaKrjvrjaa, be in camp, aor. go into camp, encamp. (tktjvi], rjs [shed, scene], tent. _j., I^at. tuus, thy, Eng. thine, thy], thy , thine , your. 2oa(veTos 46 aCvcTos, 8, Sophaenetus. tcro4>£d, as, skill, ability. crowds, hi 6v [ (cnravib-), cnraviut, iv. [580], lack, need, want. 749. o-iravios, ov [580], scanty, scarce. SirdpTT], 7]s, Sparta. |2'rrapTidTTjs ) ov, a Spartan. tnrapTov, r 6, rope, cord. crcrdci), ecnraaa, ecnrana, eairaapai, iairaadriv, 441 [580], draw. (TircCpco (cr7rep-), , e(nretpa, eairapiiai, ia-iraprju, iv. [spurn, spo¬ radic], sow, scatter, disperse. cnrevSw, oireiaw, ecnreicra, ccrireicrjuai [Lat. spondeo, promise'], offer a liba¬ tion; mid., make a treaty. 773. o-ttctJSg), (ra, 600, 5, urge, hasten, be urgent. avos, 8 \_os, ovs, t6, mass, throng. o-TXcyyts, i8os, hi tiara. o-toXtJ, rjs [, Eng. stole], dress, garment, robe. ottoXos, & [crreAAw], equipment , armed force, expedition. o-Topa, aros, r6, mouth, van. tcrrpaTeCd, as, expedition. to-Tpareupa, aros, r6, army, troops, host, force, division, contingent. to-TpaT6va>, , make an exr pedition, make war ; dep. mid., take the field, take part in an expedition. ta-TpaT-Tj-y&o, dXios, 8, a Stymphalian. o"v, (rot), pers. pron., 511 [Lat. tu, Eng. thou], thou , you. 612, 613, 514. crvy - Y €v 'n s 47 , seize , arrest. p-PovX€v«, joZan advise, counsel, give advice; mid., consult with, deliberate. fjL-|xax,ia, as, alliance. triip-paxos, ov [/iax^]? *n alliance with y av/uifiaxos, < 5 , oZZ?/. ovp.irav, in general. (rup.-'irtp.'Tra), send with. orvp.-'irXccos, wp, gen. co [ttZ^ttAt/t-u], quite full, full, abounding in. 760. €p(i), collect, be of use. o-v'v, prep, with dat. [Lat. cum, with ], with, in company with, along with, together with, on the side of, with the help or aid of, by the favour of • In composition avv signifies with, along with, together, jointly, at the same time, entirely, at once. oruv-a/yeipw, collect together. o-vv-d*y«, bring together, call. , get together. ai, come together. o"w-0t)kt], 77 s [638], compact, agree¬ ment. d£«, collect baggage ; mid., collect one's own baggage, pack up. , draw or sew together. T iwttjs, fellow-soldier. o-vxvos, y, 6v, considerable, long. (r^dyiov, t<$ [tr^drrtw], victim ; pi., omens drawn from the movements of the victims, external omens in contrast with iepa. crd\\(o (craA-), dTTO> (acpa y-j, (T(pd£ci), eacpa^a, ^(Tcpaynai, icrcjxlyyv, iv., slay, sacnfice. o"4>6LSi see ov. ttr4>£v8ovaa), ia£vSdvr|, ys, sling, Lat. funda. |£T£pos, a, ov [creels], their own. or<)> Ctrl, see ov. (r4>d8pa, adv. [ a(podp<5s, violent ], exceedingly, excessively. (rxtSid, as, raft, float. trxfiSo'v, adv. [608], near, nearly. o-x^t" Ox<5-), eo-xta-a, iax'nrOyv, iv. [Lat. scindo, split, Eng. schism'], split. o*xo\a£cos, adv. [608], slowly; neut. comp, as adv., o-xoAai'repov, more slowly. o*X°Xt], ys [608], leisure; (trcoS-), aaxrco, etr&xra, (rtcooica, o-ffTca/xai and aeaooap.ai, icrcvOyv, 618, 8, iv. [o-cSos], save, rescue, preserve, ■keep safe ; mid. and pass., save one¬ self, be saved alive, escape, return or arrive safely. SwKpdTTjs, ovs, 6, Socrates. (r<5|ia, aros, t 6, body, life, person. pov€G>, (roopoos, <5 [flair™, Eng. epi-taph ], burial, burial-place, grave. rapos, 7) [0a7TTa>], ditch, trench. traxa, adv., quickly, forthwith ; in apodosis with &v, perhaps. t Tax^ws, adv., quickly, soon. t Taxos, ovs, r6, swiftness, speed. Tax vs, h 448, quick, swift, Lat. celer; 5ia rax^v, with speed; neut. as adv., raxv, swiftly , soon; T€ 49 TOiocrSe comp, earrov, more quickly; sup. rAx i, ereiva, rerana, Teraficu, iTadrjv, 619, 10, iv. [Lat. tendo, stretch, Eng. thin, dance, tone'], stretch, exert oneself, hasten, push on. tcixos, ovs, t6 [dike, ditch, dig], wall, rampart, fort. tckvov, t6 [564], child. tTcXevTatos, a, ov, last, at the rear; ol Te\euTaioi, the rear guard. fTcXevTaw, TeAeu'Hja’tt, end, finish, end one's life, die. tTcXcDTij, rjs, end, death. ItcXco), reAcD, £t eAetra, rere\eKa, t ereXecrpai, ireAeadyv, 441, complete, finish, fulfil an obligation, pay. tcXos, ovs, t6 [Lat. terminus, end, Eng. talisman ], fulfilment, end, re¬ sult; acc. as adv., re\os, at last, finally. 734. tcXos, ovs, t6 [rtfA/ust], what is im¬ posed on one, tax, outlay; pi. ra Wat?, the authorities, magistrates. T€}JlVft> (re/x-), TffXGQ, tTepov and tVa- pov , TerprjKa, rerpripai, €Tpi)6T]v, 624, 5, v. [Lat. temno, slight, ‘ cut,' Eng. a-tom ], cut. T^pas, aros, to, portent. tTCTpaKis, adv., 496, four times. lT€TpaKi£pvT]s, ovs, o, Tissapliernes. TlTpwo-KCO (xpo-), Tpuxrcti, erpwaa, rerpcapai, irpdodrjv, 642, 8, vi., wound. to£, end. intensive particle, in truth, verily, surely, of a certainty. Toi--yap-ovv, inferential conj. [toi-P ydp+ovv], therefore, accordingly. tol-vuv, post-posit, inferential conj. [ toI+vvv, now], therefore, then. roidcrSc, roidSe, roi6v§e, demon, pron., such, such as follows; eAe£« TOIOVTOS 50 vir-d/yco TotaSe, spoke as follows or in the following terms. 542, 542 a. toiovtos, roiavTi /, rotovrov, demon, pron., such, such as precedes. 542, 542 a. To'Xna, 77 s [Lat. tolero, endure, Eng. a-tlas], courage to endure. jToXnaw, To\fxr]aa>, etc., have the courage, venture, risk, dare. ToXfuSrjs, ov, Tolmides. To^evjjia, aros, t6 [554], arrow. to£cv(*>, tro^evaa, rerb^evpai, iro£ev- dr)v [554], use one's bow, shoot. Tofjiioj, rjs [544], archery. TofjOV, OV [544], bow. to|o'tt]s, ov [544], bowman. to'ttos, 6 [topic], place, region. too'oo'Sc, roarjde, roabvde, dem. pron., so much, so many. 542. too’ovtos, roaavrt], t oaovrov, dem. pron., so much, so many ; with com¬ paratives, Toaovrcf, by so much , the ; neut. acc. as adv., roaovrov, so much, so far. 542. totc, adv., at that time, then. TovjjnraXiv, by crasis for rb epna\iv. tovitutBcv, by crasis for rb omadev. Tpayr](JLa, aros, r6, sweet-meats. TpaXXciSj eaji/, ol, Tralles. Tpa-ire^a, 77 s [reTTapes-^-Trovs, cf. 7T6^s], table, prop, with four legs. Tpavpa, aros, t 6 [rtrpcixTKu], wound. Tpa^Xos, 6, neck, throat. Tpaxv's, eta, v, harsh, rough. Tp€is, Tpia, 496, 497 [Lat. tres, Eng. three, tri-pod ], three. Tpeirw, rpeij/cc, erpexpa and erparrov, rerpocpa, rerpappai, irpdrrpv and irpe- <0, 6pexj/ra, eOpexpa, redpappat, erpd(pT)v and idpecpdrjv, 604, 12, nour¬ ish, support, maintain; pass., be supported, subsist. Tpe'x« (rpe%-, 8pap.-), 8pap.ovp.ai, edpapov, 8e8papv Ka , beSpaprjpat, 655, 6, viii. [5pif, rjs [rptcpco], support, rvyx&vta (tvx~), rsvj^opai, irvxov, rervxVKa and rerevxa., 626, 6 , V. [554], hit, attain, get, obtain, hap¬ pen, chance. 746, 860. Tvpiaiov, to, Tyriaeum. tv'xt], 77 s [554], luck, fortune, chance ; Kara rvxvv, by chance. to), see r\s. Y. v'Swp, aros, to [Lat. unda, wave, Eng. water, wet, hydro-], water. vto's, ov [son], son. vXt), 77 s [Lat. silua, wood], wood, fagots. vpets, see (tv. jvp€T€pos, a, ov, 631, your. vir-aya), lead under, intr. lead on or advance slowly; mid., draw on, suggest craftily. 51 vir-apxos vir-apxos, o [463], lieutenant. vir-apx") 5^ undev as a founda¬ tion, be on hand, be, be on one’s side, support. 768. vjr-cur'jricTTTjsj ov [atnrL], shield- bearer, squire. vir-ci|u («V0, under or nnder- neath. vu-eXav'vw, nde under or up to. vir^p, prep, with gen. and acc. [Lat. super, over, Eng. over, hy¬ per-'], over. With gen., over, above, beyond, for, in behalf of, for the sake of, in defence of, instead of With acc., over, above, more than. In composition vnep signifies over, above, beyond, exceedingly, for, in behalf of. virep-paXXw, strike or pass over, surpass, exceed. iJircp-poXt], r,s [480], act of cross¬ ing, crossing, mountain-pass. vir€p-8€gios, a, ov [602], above on the right, above. vir€p-06v, adv. [ut rep], overhead. vir4p-pa>v, ov, gen. ovos [phv], high-minded, haughty, arrogant. vir-€, vaT€pr](Ta, vaCvo> 52 4>pd£o> $. 4>a£v« (cpav-), aXivos, <5, Phallnus. 4>av€pos, a, 6v [483], in plain sight, visible, manifest, open; iv t$ (pavepw, openly, publicly. 839 b. ao-Ka>, vi. [483], say, allege. (j>eiSopai (4p€vy w (

0dv<*> (cpda-'), pdrjaofiai and (pdd, e(p6yv and epdaira, 646, 3, v., get the start of, anticipate, outstrip. 860. 0e / 'y‘yop.ai, (pdey^o/uai, etc., 600, 8 , make a sound, shout, sound. <|>0€lp (< pdep -), (pdepoo, ecpdeipa, e- idXt], ys [phial, viaf\, drinking cup. tiX&o, iXo-pa0r|s, is [p.avddvw~\, fond of knowledge, eager to learn. 760. iXd-rtpos, ov [444], loving hon¬ our, ambitious. tX\jdp€o>, Xvap£a, as, nonsense, pi. bosh. 4>Xvapos, o, nonsense. t 4 >oP€pos, a, ov, fearful, terrible, formidable. t<}>o(3ea>, (pofi-fiaco, io[3os, o [hydro-phobia), fear, dread, terror, fright. toiviKovs, y, ovv, 191, purple, so named since this colour was dis¬ covered by the Phoenicians. foivtKT], ys, Phoenicia. t^oiviKio-T-rjs, ov, wearer of the pur¬ ple, a title of rank at the Persian court. oivt£, ikos, <5, a Phoenician. (Jxuvdj, Ikos, 6, palm, date-palm. 4>opcpd£ (c ppaZ -), cppaao), etc., iv. [Lat. inter-pres, explainer, Eng. phrase), say, tell. 53 <|>p 4 ap )^UtfV *|>p&tp, aTos, r6 [Lat. fervo, boil , Eng. brew], well. pTjv, pov^o>, , have understand¬ ing, understand, tainfc. |4>pOVT^O) (< ppovnh -), (ppOVTlU) , iv., take thought, 6 e anxious. f«|>povp-apxo$, [573, 463], com¬ mander o/ a garrison. tpovp4a>, (ppovpijcroo [573], watch, guard. tpovpiov, [573], £taard, garrison. povpos, <5 [573], watcher , tmard. t4»pv-yCd, as, Phi'ygia. 4>pv'£, u 7 <^s, o, a Phrygian. (jjvyds, a 5 os, d [525], fugitive, exile , refugee. c|>vyn, 77 s [525], flight, rout. t\)\aKT], t)s, a watching, watch, picket duty, garrison. t<|>vXa|, avos, 6, a watcher, guard, outpost; pi. bodyguard. v\aTT (, e^u- Xa£a, 7 T€uAaxa, TrecpvAaypat, icpvAa- x d V u, 617, 9, iv., stand #nard, #ward, wataft, defend; mid., be on oney guard, watch out against, Lat. caueo ; (pvAanas (pvAarreiv, stand guard. t«|>v 1 J«, (*>vrj, ys [483], voice, speech. X. Xa(pb) (x a P~)i x a ’ t P’7 <^a, , Ke X a P r ) Ka i icex° L P 7 ll LiaL an( i Ke X app.ai, ex^pyr, iv. [Lat. gratus, agreeable, Eng. yearn, eu-charist ], rejoice, be glad. 859. XoXScuoi, ol, the Chaldaeans. txo^-«' n ’ a ^ vw (X aA ‘ €7ra,/ ~)’ XaXe7rava>, ^X«Xe7r7jj/a, ixaAeTravOyv, IV., be an¬ gry, be severe, be offended or pro¬ voked. 768. XaXcirds, iu 6v, hard, grievous, difficult, dangerous, severe, stern, savage. jxa.Xcirws, adv., hardly, with diffi¬ culty, painfully. txaXKoiJs, y, odv, 191, of bronze, bronze. XaXtcos, o , copper, bronze, bronze armour. XaXos, o, the Chalus. Xa\vv|/, v&os, o [ chalybeate ], a Chalybian. XapaSpa, as, gorge , ravine. tx a P^ €t s, ecrcra, ev, graceful,pleasing. txap^op* 011 (x a P t5_ )» X a P l °vP- al i eiG -> iv., gratify, favour, please. 768. xdpis, itos, y [xatpaj], grace, fa¬ vour, gratitude , thanks; x°-P lv e ‘ Se " vai, x&pw *X tlv i 5® or feel grateful, x i y ., wanti need, de¬ sire. XP’npci) ot os, t6 [ xpao/j-ai ], a thing that one uses; pi. things, property, wealth, money. XP^vat, see xpv- Xpijo'ip.os, ■>?, ov, and os, ov [xpao- fxai], useful, serviceable. Xpiw, xptwi *XP lcra i K *XP~ L l ULaL an( ^ K^xp' L< rp- aL t £Xpi- , xupvao*') etc. [%, if/evcrcc, exf/evcra, etf/evcrpai, i^evadrir [pseud-onym ], deceive; mid., lie, cheat, deceive, act falsely. i[rrios, pebble ], reckon with pebbles ; mid., vote, resolve, determine. \j/iXo's, v, ov, bare, unprotected; oi if/iXoi, light-armed troops. 'ln>X T b rjs \_psycho-logy~\, life, soul, spirit. O. cS, exclamation, 0, with yoc. cSSe, adv. [o5e], thus, as follows, in the following manner. o--avTtt$ 55 &<{>l\ipOS |weA^^Xi|ios, ov , useful, serviceable. \ •y r ■ * II. ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. Consult the Greek-English Vocabulary for the forms and fuller meanings of the Greek words here given. The distinction of synonymous Greek words is here briefly indicated, if possible. But in all cases where there is a choice of Greek words, the Greek-English Vocabulary should be carefully consulted. That vocabulary is necessarily brief, but it gives the etymological meanings of the words and indicates the lines on which these meanings have been developed. Sometimes the synonymous words are interchangeable, but this should not be taken for granted. If in doubt, choose the word that is familiar. The aim has been to introduce no word into the English-Greek exercises that has not previously been given. Frequently the choice will be determined by the appropriateness of the word to the lesson in which it occurs. Each sentence in each English-Greek exercise illustrates the principles of the lesson of which the exercise is a part. Abandon Abandon, Adxu, 4k- AetVco, quit a place ; axoAeixa), KaraAeixw, desert a person; xpo- iepai, surrender, give up ; xpobldoopi, be¬ tray. Able, IkV. Accordingly, 5 ?j, olv. Account, on — of, did, eVe/ca. Accrue, ylyvopai. Accuse, Karriyopew. Acquainted, — with, epxeipos. Acquire, Kraopai. Acropolis, aKpdxoAis. Across, xepav. Addition, in — to, xp6s. Address, Aeyu. Admire, Oavpdfa. Advance, or make an —, xopevopai, xp6a- eipi. Advise, tKveopai, t dp- eijui ; — safely , vcp- £opou. Arrow, rd^evpa. Artapates, ’ ApranaTris. Artaxerxes, ’A pra- Zeptys. As, us ; (— much ) — , tiaos ] —. . • — pos¬ sible, on or us with the superlative. Ashamed, feel —, cu- cX^vopaL. Asia, ’A aid. Ask, ipurau, inquire; aiTiu, ask for. Asleep, lie —, Kardnu- pcu. Aspendian, ’Aandvdios. Ass, ovos. Assembly, eKKArjala. Assistance, give —, /3or)ddu, utpeAzu. At, iv, iirl, irpds. Athenian, ’AOrjvcuos. Athens, at —, ’A 0^- V7\(Tl. Attack, iirirldepai, ep- QdAAu ; make the —, iireipi. Attempt, ^Trtxe'peco, iretpaopai. Attention, give or pay —, npoaexto tov vovv. Await, Sexopai. Axe, a|tn?. B. Babylon, BajSuAcSi'. Babylonia, Ba&vAuvla. Back, irdAiv. Bad, xands , the general word; TTovypds, harm¬ ful, vicious. Baggage, pd f. Brick, xAivdivos. Bridge, ye, 4xot- tcodopeu. Bum, K&w, KaraKdu \ — up or — down, KaTaxau; — before, 'npoKa.TaK&u. Burst, — open, Kara- o-X*C"- Bury, ddxrw. But, aAAd, 84. Buy, ayopdfy. By, 4xl; vn6, with gen. of the agent, rarely xapd ; — the side of, xapd; — means of, dx6, did ; — land and sea, Kara yiju Kal Kard ddAarrav. Byzantium, Bv^dvriov. 58 c. Call, Ka\eu ; — out, fiodw ; — forth, xapa- Ka\€a; — together, . Canal, divpvi-. Cap, fox-skin —, d\o»- xckt). Cappadocia, KaxxaSo- ula. Captain, Aoxdyds. Captive, alxf^dAwros. Capture, apxdfa, alpdoc', be captured, a\laico- pai. Carduchi, Kapdovxoi. Care, take — of, depa- x cvw \ take — of in return, dvrexiptAio- pai. Carelessly, r)peAr]p4- VU)S. Carry, &yw; — away, apirdfa ; — over or across, Sia&i&dfa ; — on War, xoAepeu. Case, in that —, oVtws. Catch, drjpevw, Aap&dvoo. Cattle, f3ovs, ktjjvos. Cause, xapexoo. Cavalry, ixxeis ; — man, timers. Cease, xavopat. Celaenae, KeAaivai Centre, pdaov. Certain, a —, r\s. Chance, by —, koto rxixnv. Charge, lepai; — double quick, Sp6pcp dew. Chariot, appa. Confer Charmande, XappdvSrj. Chase, or give Suitew. Check, kuAvu. Chersonese, Xeppdvt)- . Confer, dvanoivdopai. Confess Confess, dpokoyev. Conquer, vindw, Kpareco. Conscious, be —, vi(ofxai. Contest, judge of a —, aywvodeTTjS* Contingent, be convicted , a \laKopai. Convoke, Toiew. Corrupt, 81 aTri. Counsel, etos ; — meat, to i\d Deliver, — over, irapa- 8 l8r?pi. Depart, diroxo>peco. Descend, KaraPalvu. Describe, ypa. Description, of every —, iravToSaTiis. Desert, avTop.o\eco, O7ro- Aeiirw, direpx°P- ai > through a —, epvp-os. Design, imPovAevo) iiriPov\i]. Desire, iiridvp.ew. Desist, ira\)opai, ava- iravop.a. 1 . Despatch, ottoo-tcAAco. Despise, Kara . Distance, at a — from, Trp6(ru. Distant, be —, cMre'xo). Distribute, 5 laStScopi. Disturb, rapdTru. Disturbance, 06pv&os. Divide, — up, Stavepu. Division, arparevp a, rd£is. Do, woiea>, wpaa-roo, in this sense used in¬ terchangeably ; — harm, 0AdirTs iroiew, — wrong , oSi/tew; — well by, ev iroieu'. Dog, KVCOV. Door, dvpd. Double-quick, charge —, 8 p 6 pcp 060). Draw, airdopai ; — up, raTTw ; — up in line, irapardTTw. Dread, onvew. Drinking-cup, (piaAr). Drive, — away, ave- Xavvoi. Dust, cloud of —, ko- vioprds . Dwell, otK€0). E. Each, €Kay. Easy, padtos . Eat, 6 . Educate, waideiu. Eight, okt(!). 60 Either, — ... or, ^. ff* Elect, alpeopai. Eleven, — thousand, pvpioi Ka\ , xf\iOL. Elsewhere, Hxxy. Embark, ippaivw. Emporium, epirdpiov. Empty, ip&dwu). Encamp, (rTparcnredevo - pa l ; — near, tt apa- . Ephesus, "Ecpeads. Episthenes, ’EtktOc- VT)S. Equip, (ttcXAoo . Equipment, Kdapos. Error, commit —, apapravoo. Escape, airixpedyu )— notice or the notice of, Xauddvco j — Or — safely, acp^opai. Especially, pdAio-ra. Euphrates, Eix^pdrys. Even, Kal; not —, ovde; in — line, SpaXcds. Evening, 5 e 1 X 77 . Ever, 7 tot 6 , irdiroTc ; if —, efirore. Every, of — sort or description, wavroha- Feel w6s ; everything, wav, wavroL, Evident, SijXos. Evil-minded, icaicdvoos. Exceedingly, l68pa. Exercise, yvpvdCv. Exhort, wapaKeXevopai. Exile, cpvyds, eKxewTco- K(t)S (See 6K7rtirTO)). Expedition, ardXos, odos, (TTpareid ; take part in an —, of}ep6s. Feel, — ashamed, al- axvvopai ; — grate¬ ful, xdpiv ex«. * Fellow 61 Grateful Fellow, &vdpci)iTos. Fellow-citizen, rro\i- T7JS. Fellow-Greeks, S> &v- Spes ‘'EAArjyes. Fellow-soldier, °f — i Xpv&eos. Good, ayadds. Good-will, etfvoia. Grant, Bldcopt. Grass, x^P T0S ‘ Grateful, feel —, x^P lv €XW. Great 62 Inhabit Great, peyas, of size; ttoXvs, of amount or number; in — num¬ bers, iroAAol ; with — difficulty, iravv x a ~ Aeirus. Greatly, peyaX.us, peya. Greece, 'E Was. Greek, *EA\riv ; 'EAA 17 - vik6s . Grieve, Avireu. Ground, — arms, rIde- pai ra SirAa. Groundless, kcv&s. Guard, cpvAaicfi, vA a|; — or be on —, (pvAarru. Guest, or guest-friend, £evos. Guide, nyep&v. H. Half, 7 )pnrvs. Halt, avaira.vop.ai, in order to rest; i mi the hands of, iirl ; a£ —, eyyvs ; 6e at —, it d- pcipi ; — over, irapa- SiScopi. Happen, rvyxdvu, yi- yvopai. Happy, evdalpuv. Hard, x^^^s ; be — pressed, me£opai. Hardship, undergo —, TTOVeU. Hare, Aayds. Harm, do —, fiAdirru, KaKus irotfu ; suffer —, nanus ird, elpi with dat. Hay, icdpcpi]. Head, necpaA-fj] be or stand at the — of, irpoeo’rijna. Headquarters, Qvpai. Hear, anovu. Heavy-armed, — men or troops, SirAXrai. Height, S\f/os, dnpov. Helmet, Kpdvos. Help, with the — of, avv. Helper, awepyds. Hem, — in, nvnAdu. Her, oblique cases of avri). Herald, nrjpv £. Here, ivravOa, avrov, avrddi, Sevpo. Hereon, in rodrov. Hereupon, ivravOa, be ToXlTOV. Hermes, C E pprjs. Hide, Seppa ; npvirru. High, panpds. Hill, A 6. Insist, Karareiya}. Inspire, napex*). Instead, — of, avrt. Intend, kv v$ €%«. Intercept, anonAeta). Interpreter, eppr\vevs. Into, els. Intrust, enirpena), irpo- iepai. Invade, or make an invasion , fafiaAAa). Iron, of —, aidiipeos. Island, vrjixos. J. Jar, Pinos. Javelin, iroA t 6 v ; — man, a.K0VTiOT-i]S. Join, avppiyvvpu. Journey, nopeta, 6S6s ; nopevopcu. Judge, Kpivu ; — of a contest, aywvoderris. Judgment, yvdpr). Just, Studios. Justice, SiKtuoovvT). Justly, diKalus. K. Keep, — safe, Siao-cp fa; kept, sometimes the sign of the impf. tense. Kill, nrelvo), anoKTetvo)', be killed, anodvyoKa). Kinds, of all — , nav- roios. King, f}a(n\evs ; be — , PaoiAeva). Knee, y6vv. Know, yiyvwaKw, olSa. 68 L. Lacedaemonian, Aa/ce- Saipdvios. Laden, peords. Land, 777 , Large, peyas , of ex¬ tent ; noAvs, of amount or number; how —, 07 r6aos. Last, at —, reAos. Late, come —, drptfa. Laugh, — at, Karaye- A aa). Laughter, roar of — , yeAa)S. Lay, — waste, . Life, pa. Light-armed, — sol¬ dier, yupuTjs. Lightly, npfas. Like, napanAdprios ; Pov- Aopai. Line, in even — , opa- Aws ; fall into battle —, awTaTTopai. Little, pinp6s, of size or amount ; oAtyos, of number. Live, (da). Living, Jdtos. Lofty, v\pi)A6s. Long, panpds, of space or time; noAvs, of time. Loose, Ava). Lose, crepeopau ; — courage, advpea). Loss, be at a —, dno- pea). Love, (piAea). Lycaonia, A vnaovld. Lydia, AvSta. M. Macrbnes, Mdt(pa)ves. Maeander, MatavSpos. Make, noiea) ; — an¬ swer, anoKpivopai ; — war, noAepea ); — an expedition, arpared a ); — known, pnvia ); be made, ytyvopai. Man, at'Tj p, Lat. uir; &v9pa)nos, Lat. homo old —, yepa)v ; young —, veavtas. Manifest, , neAevu. Orontas, ’O pdvras. Ostrich, arpovdbs n jue- yaAr]. Other, &AAos. Ought, xpt- Our, often by the arti¬ cle ; sometimes hp&v. Out, — of sight , acpa- vfjs ) — 0 / the way , iKTrodcav. Outside, e|a>. Outstretched, Zie —, Kardneipai. Overcome, Kpareu. Overpower, 0ia(opai. Ox, 0ovs. P. Pack, — up, (TUffneva- <* opai . Paean, raise the —, 7rcuaj/i£&>. Palace, 0aa'iAeia. Palisade, i'. Pass, — along, irapabl- doopi] — by, irapep- XopaL — the order along, irapayyeAXu. Pay, piadds ; T 6 Aew, diroblbupi, piffObv utro- didupt ; — attention, Trpo]S. Person, aupa. Persuade, ireiOu. Phalanx, — out of the way, £kTTo8(I0V noLeopat. Pylae, rii^Aot. Q. Queen, Qaaikeoa. Question, ipoordoo. Quickly, rax^, rax^oos. 66 R. Raft, ax^dla. Raise, — up, avlarript ; — a shout, avaKpafa ; — the war-cry, aka- kdfa ; — the paean , iraiavifa. Rampart, ava&okd). Rank, rd£is. Ransom, kvopai. Ravage, diapirdfa, na- KCOS TTOieOO. Ravine, x a P°tip<*- Reach, acpiKveopai. Ready, eroipos. Rear, oiipd. Rear-guard, oiriado)v. Run, rpex 00 , the gen¬ eral word; Oeoo, of bodies of men; — down, Karadeu ; — past, 7r apaOew ; — for¬ ward, irporpexv • Rush, Upai. Sack 67 Sooner S. Sack, titapirdCu). Sacred, tepds. Sacrifice, dvala ; Ovco. Safe, d, tiarXeu J — round, irepnr\4(a. Sailor, uavrrjs. Same, 6 avr6s. Sardis, 'Xdpdeis. Satrap, aarpaTrys. Satrapy, dpxm Satyr, ’Zdrvpos. Save, (rcpCco , 8ia; be seen, . Seer, fidvrts. Seize, apirdCeo. Self, aur; — the truth , 0A.7 ]devcc. Spear, xdyxvi 86 pv. Speed, at full —, ava Kpdros ; with all pos¬ sible — , cos Taxiv to. Spring, Kpd]vi]. Square, trxaiaiou. Stade, or stadium , 0-7-0- 8 iov. Stage, (TTaO/ads. Stand, '/ctt apai, earrjKa ; — round, TrepdcrTa- pai ; — wp, aviara- pai. State, Ae7co; 7 r^Ais. Station, aradpos. Stay, /leva. Steal, KA 67 TTC 0 . Stern, o-riryi'cfy. Still, €T 4 . Stone, Ai' 0 os; / 3 cUAw. Stop, irava), avairavopau) — fighting, KaraXtiai. Straggle, crKeSdvvvpai. Straightway, euflyy. Stride, Pijpa. Strike, iraico, Kpovu. Strongly, lax^pds. Stronghold, x (a P^ ov i Xwptov Icrx^pdp. Struggle, ayd>v. Success, have —, euru- Successfully, /caAdy. Suffer, 7 raoj/. Summon, KaAeco, CaZZ cri>7/caAeco, call to¬ gether , assemble ; pe- TcnTefXTro/uLcU) send for with authority. Sun, ^Aios. Superior, 6 e —, nepiyl- yvopou. Supper-time, 80pm]- 8e. Thymbrium, ®vp&piov. Tigris, Tiyp-qs. Timbers, a. Time, xp6 vos i th e & en " eral word; Spa, sea¬ son, hour ; proper —, Kaip6s ; — of full market, ayopa ir\i]- dovaa ) at that —, rdre ; each —, e/ca- (TTore; the third —, rb tqItov. Tissaphernes, Turaa- < pepvrjs. To, ets, eVi, irapd, irpds, cbs. Too, nal. Touch, cbr ropai. Tower, irvpyos. Town, &CTTV. Track, fx" 05 * Traduce, 8ia&d\\. JJse, or make — of, Xpdopai. Useful, xpfo l k- os ' V. Valiant, Kipos. Valour, aperi]. Van, ardpa. Venison, Kpea i\d, an aWdrropai. Within, evbov ; — the night, rrjs vvkt6s. Wonder, 0avpd(w. Wonderful, davpaards. Word, a 6yos ; bring back —, anayyeWu. Work, earn by hard —, noveoo. Worsted, be —, yrrao- pat. Worthy, &£tos. Wound, mpdanot. Write, ypd, see cSvv. CAiuiu rlopl 70. B 5; 7; 112, 114; euphonic changes, see Labials; aspirated in second pf. system 522. PaCvw 646, 1; second pf. of -fu form 660, 1 . PaouXevs decl. 388; used without art. p. 144 s . E 5; 7-11; augmented 76, p. 83 8 ; as variable vowel 153 ; lengthened to cl 233, 481; in contraction 241; lengthened to 77 254 b; changed to a 505, 552 a, 588 a; changed to 0 521 a ; added to theme 605. 74 GREEK INDEX. -e- tense-suffix 587. 'i pron. 511, 515. 4'8vv 650, 696. €i diphthong 12-14; augment of p. 77 1 ; as augment p. 83 8 . -eias, -6i€, -«tav in aor. opt. act. 297 c. el'0e, cl -yap in wishes 787 a. elp.1 pres, and impf. ind. 183-185, 188, fut. mid. and pres, subjv. 269, opt. 298, imv. 323, inf. 346, part. 365, complete 700, 664,2; as cop¬ ula 711 a, 715; w. pred. gen. 744 ; w. dat. of possessor 770. ctpi 701, 664,3 ; pres, as fut. p. 274 4 . Ik(ov decl. 262. IXirls decl. 230. -ev inf. ending 345 a. -c°/e- tense-suffix 473. -es- syncopated stems in 289-291. -€v decl. 449. t|8vs decl. 382 ; comp. 448. r)|xt- inseparable prefix 424 d. -y\ pf. mid. system 685. ‘ircipa decl. 70. TreXTatrTqs decl. 107. ircpC not elided p. 84 8 . Ilepcrqs decl. 107. irqxys decl. 358. •n-X^pr^s decl. 341. iroXis decl. 358. *iroXtTT]s decl. 107. irp 6 not elided p. 251 1 . P 5; 7 ; 112,113; can stand at end of a word 232; initial p doubled p. 166 2 . pao)v, p<£(ttos 469, 8. p^Ttop decl. 286. 2 5 ; 7 ; 112, 113; after mutes 215, 231; can stand at end of a word 232; v before a 287 (p. 59 4 ); v and a lingual before p.a decl. 236. T 5; 7; 112, 114; euphonic changes, see Linguals. -TaTos sup. in 446. tcX&o pf. mid. system 682. -Tcos, -t€ov, verbal adjs. in 581-584 rcpas decl. 236. -Ttpos comp, in 446. T(0T|p.i 636, 647,1, 689, 693. Ttp.aw inflexion, ind. 245, subjv. 283, opt. 310, imv. 335, inf. 347, part. 366, 367, 377, GREEK INDEX. 77 decl. 51. -t° / e - tense-sofifix 460. Tp6irov adv. acc. 734. Y 5 ; 7-11; augmented 76; length¬ ened to v 233, 477, 481; dropped 478 a, 492 a ; lengthened to ev 492. -v- stems in of cons.-decl. 358, 382. m diphthong 12-14. vlos omitted after art. p. 316 7 . -uvea denominative vbs. in 417. 4» 5; 7; 112,114; euphonic changes, see Labials. aCviXea> inflexion, ind. 245, subjv. 283, opt. 310, imv. 335, inf. 347, part. 366, 367, 377. ^ <|>Quos decl. 144. <|>plap decl. 236. <]>v\ag decl. 214. X 5; 7; 112,114; euphonic changes, see Palatals. XdM* decl. 214. XapCeis decl. 260. \dpis decl. 230. \pv improp. diphthong 12-14 ; by aug¬ menting oi- p. 77 1 . -co / v . as variable vowel in subjv. 268 a, 276 b. -ws substs. and adjs. in 169-171; in gen. sing. 358, 388. H. ENGLISH INDEX. Abundance adjs. exp. 415. Abuse vbs. sig. w. dat. 768 a. Accent 23-39 ; recessive 32 ; of pro¬ clitics 37, 186 c; of enclitics 38, 186, 187; in contraction 180 b c, 191 a c, 242, 243 ; of substs. and adjs. 44, 45, 52, 146, 170 a, 216, 338 c; of verbs 62, 185, 188, p. 83 7 , 297 d, 345 c, 364 c, 376 b, 490 a, 519 a. Accusative case 42, 43; sing, and pi. of cons.-decl. 213, 2,4, 5; con¬ tracted acc. and nom. pi. alike in cons.-decl. 341 a, 358 a, 382 b, 449. Syntax: 95-97; 350; 354; 355; p. 216 2 ; 731 (p. 10 6 ); 732 (p. 122 7 ); 733 (p. 115 8 ); 734 (p. 70 8 ); 735 (p. 63 2 ); 736 (p. 1944); 737 (p. 100 2 , p. 180 1 ); 738 (p. 94 2 ); 739 (p. 90 8 ). Accuse vbs. sig. w. gen. 755. Acknowledge vbs. sig. w. part. 839 b. Acquit vbs. sig. w. gen. 755. Action suffixes denoting 405. Active voice 58. Acute accent 23, 27, 29-31, 33; of oxytone changed to grave 34. Adjectives inflexion 87,144-147,191, 258-262, 338-341, 382, 385; for¬ mation 411-416 ; comparison 445- 449, 469 ; verbal in -tos and -tcos 581-584; attrib. and pred. 710 (56 Rem.); w. apparent force of adv. p. 308 5 ; agreement with substs. 88 b, 717; used as substs. 718; w. dat. 772, 773; verbal w. gen. 760 (p. 21 1 , p. 91 2 , p. 104 11 , p. 126 2 , p. 126 3 ); w. inf. 850. Admire vbs. sig. w. gen. 756. 78 Advantage dat. of 769 (p. 25 4 ). Adverbial acc. 734 (p. 70 8 ). Adverbs used attrib. p. 23 1 ; formed from adjs. 484; comparison 484 c; numeral 496 ; w. gen. 761 (p. 28 1 , p. 91 2 ); w. dat. 772, 773. Advise vbs. sig. w. dat. 768 a. Affection vbs. exp. w. gen. 756. Affinity of words 131-137 431-434. Agent gen. of 223, dat. of 224; substs. denoting 404 ; w. verbals in -reos and -Tcov 583, 584. Agreement of verb w. subj. 714, 90, p. 232 7 ; of pred. w. subj. 715; of adj. etc. w. subst. 88 b, 717. Aim at vbs. sig. w. gen. 746. Alphabet 5. Anger vbs. exp. w. gen. 756; w. dat. 768 a. Antecedent , see Relative; def. and indef. 812 a. Antepenult 19. Aorist 60, 61, see ; first aor. sys¬ tem 252 c, 436; of mute verbs 457- 459; of liquid verbs 481; second aor. system 437, 438, 489, 490; in -fjLi verbs 632, 635; first pass, sys¬ tem 252 f, 574-578; second pass, system 587, 688. Syntax: ind. 101, dependent moods 265-267, 355, part. 372, 860 a; aor. tense unchanged in indir. discourse 354, 828, 830-832, 839, 845; iterative aor. 805. Apodosis 272 ; neg. oi 797 a (273, 300); various forms of 814. Apostrophe (in elision) 21. Appear vbs. sig. w. part. 839 b. ENGLISH INDEX. 79 Appoint vbs. sig. w. two accs. 739 (p. 908). Apposition 716 (p. 25 3 ). Article definite declined 53, 88; pro¬ clitic in some forms 88 a ; w. prop, names p. 23 2 ; w. dems. 174, 539 end; omitted p. 144 8 ; in posses¬ sive sense 531 d (p. 23 s ); agreement w. substs. 717 (p. 10 3 ); position w. attrib. adj. 719, w. pred. adj. 720; w. inf. 852, 853. Ashamed vbs. sig. w. part. 859 a. Ask vbs. sig. w. two accs. 737 (p. 100 2 ). Aspiration transfer of p. 162 1 ; of final mute of theme in second pf. 522. Assimilation , see Relative. Assist vbs. sig. w. dat. 768 a. Association words of w. dat. 773 (p. 83io). Attain vbs. sig. w. gen. 746. Attic second decl. 169-171; fut. p. 169 2 ; reduplication p. 209 1 . Attributive prepositional phrases and advs. p. 23 1 ; adj. 710 (56 Rem.); position of art. w. 719; gen. 743; partic. 857. Augment 75, 76, 128, p. 77 1 , p. 83 8 , p. 232 4 . Barytone 36. Begin vbs. sig. w. gen. 746; w. part. 859 a. Belonging to adjs. sig. 412. Benefit vbs. sig. w. dat. 768 a. Black-face letter p. 40 5 , p. 155 1 . Blame vbs. exp. w. dat. 768 a. Borrowed words p. 40 5 , 432. Breathings 15-17. Call vbs. sig. w. two accs. 739 (p. 90 8 ). Cardinal numerals 496, 497. Care for vbs. sig. w. gen. 747. Cases 42, 43; case-endings 47, 212, 213. Syntax, see Nominative , Genitive , etc. Causal sents. w. ind. 781. Cause exp. by gen. 756 ; by dat. 775 (p. 141 6 , p. 221 1 ) ; by part. 379; by rel. clause 820. Cease vbs. sig. w. gen. 753; w. part. 859 a. Choose vbs. sig. w. two accs. 739. Circumflex accent 23-25, 29, 31, 35 Circumstantial part. 379, 857. Claim vbs. sig. w. gen. 746. Classes of verbs 440 a, 594, 655; I. 440, 595-600, 603-606; II. 492, 493, 609, 610; III. 460, 461, 613; IV. 464-466, 474-478, 616-620; V. 623-627, 651; VI. 642; VII. 647 ; VIII. 655, 656. Clothe vbs. sig. w. two accs. 737. Cognate mutes 114a; words 433; acc. 732 (p. 122 1 ). Commands , efc., 271, 325, 327. Comparative degree 445-449; w. gen. 451, p. 179 1 , 763; w. dat. 776 (p. 171 5 ). Comparison of adjs. 445-449; irreg¬ ular 469; of advs. 484 c. Complex sent. 844 ; dependent verbs of in indir. quot. 845. Compound verbs 127, p. 84 8 , 422; augment and reduplication of 128, p. 251 1 ; accent of p. 83 7 ; w. gen. 757 (p. 107 4 ); w. dat. 774 (p. 31 3 , p. 118 8 ); compound words 136, 396, 418-430; forms 207, 276 e, 307 d ; indirect compounds 422 ; compound negs. p. 202 2 . Conceal vbs. sig. w. two accs. 737 (p. ISO 4 ). Concession exp. by part. 379. Conclusion , see Apodosis. Condemn vbs. sig. w. gen. 755. Conditional sents., first class 797, 803, 804, second 798, third 273, fourth 300; summary of 814. See Apodosis , Protasis. Cond. rel. 80 ENGLISH INDEX. clauses 812 b c; four classes of 813, 814. Consonants classification of 112-115; final 232 ; see the various letters in the Greek-Eng. Index. Con¬ sonant-Declension, see Declension. Continue vbs. sig. w. part. 859 a. Contraction rules of 241-243 ; in vowel-decl. 177-180, 191; in cons.- decl. 316, 341, 358, 382, 388, 449 ; in verbs in -aw, -ew, -ow, ind. 241- 246, subjv. 283, opt. 310, imv. 335, inf. 347, part. 366, 367. Convict vbs. sig. w. gen. 755. Co-ordinate mutes 114 a. Copulative verbs 711 a. Coronis p. 55 4 . Crasis p. 55 4 . Crime exp. by gen. 755 (p. 110 3 ). Dative case 42, 43. Syntax: 94, 97; 224 ; 583, 584 ; 767 (p. 25 2 ); 768 (p. 84 1 ) ; 769 (p. 25 4 ); 770 (p. 21 2 ); 771 (p. 188 6 ); 772 ; 773 (p. 115 4 , p. 83io). 774 ( p . 3P, p . 118 8). 775 (p. 1416, p . 22D, p . 25 5 , p. 126 7 , p. 47 5 ); 776 (p. 171 5 ); 777 (p. 45 4 ); 853. Declension 46; substs. of first or A- decl. 48-52, 69, 70, 107-109, of second or O-decl. 79-82, 169-171; contract substs. of vowel-decl. 177-180, adjs. of vowel decl. 87, 144-147, 191 ; substs. and adjs. of third or cons.-decl. 210-218, 230- 238, 258-262, 286-292, 316-318, 338-342, 358-360, 382, 383, 388- 390,449 : irregular adjs. 385 ; par¬ ticiples 262, 363 a, 364, 367, 375 a, 376,636 d, 639 d, 645f, 650 d, 659b. See Article , Pronouns , Numerals. Defend vbs. sig. w. dat. 768 a. Degree of difference dat. of 776 (p. 171 s ). Demand vbs. sig. w. two accs. 737 (p. 100 2 ). Demonstrative prons. 172-174, 539- 542. Denominatives 397; substs. 404,408, 409; adjs. 412; verbs. 417. Dependent clauses in indir. discourse 845, 846. Deponent verbs 255. Deprive vbs. sig. w. two accs. 737. Desire vbs. sig. w. gen. 747. Determinative compounds 429. Diaeresis mark of (") p. 105 12 . Differ vbs. sig. w. gen. 753. Digamma p. 161 2 . Diminutives suffix of 409. Diphthongs 12-14; in contraction 241 g-j; augment of 76, p. 77 1 , p. 232 4 . Direct obj. 709, 731. Directions for reading 140, 148; for translating into Greek 149. Disadvantage dat. of 769 (p. 25 4 ). Displeased vbs. sig. to be w. part. 859 a. Do vbs. sig. w. two accs. 738 (p. 94 2 ). Doric fut. p. 174 1 . Double consonants 112, 115. Dual 41, 65 a. Elision 21,22 ; accent of elided word 39; in compound verbs 127, but 7 r epl and irpo exceptions p. 84 8 , p. 251k Emotions vbs. exp. w. gen. 756. Enclitics 38, 185-187, 348 a, 512, 513, 556. Endings personal 154-156,163,199, 322, 331; of inf. 345 a; of part. 364 a, 375 b ; in -pi verbs 632, 635; case-endings of cons.-deck 212 . Endure vbs. sig. w. part. 859 a. Envy vbs. exp. w. gen. 756; w. dat. 768 a. Exhort vbs. sig. w. dat. 768 a. Exhortations 271, 325. Extent acc. of 735 (p. 63 2 ). ENGLISH INDEX. 81 Fail vbs. sig. w. gen. 753. Fear vbs. exp. w. obj. clause 280, 304, 793. Fill vbs. sig. w. acc. and gen. 749 (p. 265 3 ). Final consonants 232; clauses 278, 302, 791. First Aorist system, see Aorist. First Passive system 252 f., 574-578. First Perfect system 252 d, 500-507. Fitness adjs. denoting 413. Forget vbs. sig. w. gen. 747 (p. 251 5 ); w. part. 839 b. Formation of words 396-430 ; of substs. 402-410 ; of adjs. 411-416 ; of advs. 484. Friendliness vbs. exp. w. dat. 768 a. Fulness adjs. exp. 415. Future 60, 61, see \ua>; fut. system 252 b; of mute verbs 457-459 ; of liquid verbs 473; first pass, system 252 f, 574-578 ; second pass, sys¬ tem 588, 688; fut, of some verbs in -ew p. 159 3 ; Attic fut. p. 169 2 ; Doric fut. p. 174 1 ; fut. mid. for act. p. 159 2 . Syntax: 100 ; fut. ind. in obj. clauses w. Onrus 792; in prot. p. 375 1 ; in rel. clauses exp. purpose 818 ; w. ov prj 786. Future Perfect 60, 61, 203, see ; pf. mid. system 252 e, 535. Gender 83-86, p. 18 1 ; A-decl. ferns, in -ci, - 77 , or -a 50, 69, mascs. in -as or - 7 ] s, 109 ; O-decl. 82 ; cons.-decl. 217, 234, 237, 292, 317, 359, 389. General suppositions 802; forms of 803, 804. Genitive case 42, 43. Syntax: 93, 96, 97 ; 743, 1 (p. 132 4 ); 743, 2 ; 743, 3 (p. 126 6 ; 743, 4; 743, 5 (p. 115 9 ); 743, 6 (p. 138 1 , 453); 744 (p. 132 4 , p. 138 1 ); 745; 746 (p. 243 8 ); 747 (p. 63 3 , p. 251 5 ); 748 (p. 83 3 ); 749 (p. 107 1 , p. 265 3 ); 753 (p. 60 2 , p. 1079). 754 ( p . oov); 755 (p. 110 3 ); 756; 757 (p. 107 4 ); 758; 759 (p. 74 1 ); 760 (p. 21 1 , p. 91 2 , p. 104H, p . 126 2 , p. 126 3 ); 761; 762; 763 (p. 179 1 , 451); 853. Grave accent 23-26; for acute in oxytones 34. Group of words how related 132. Hatred vbs. exp. w. gen. 756. Hear vbs. sig. w. gen. 747 ; w. part. 839 b. Hit vbs. sig. w. gen. 746. Hostility vbs. exp. w. dat. 768 a. Ignorant of vbs. sig. to be w. part. 839 b. Imperative 59, 321-323, 330-332, 335, 635 c d j. Uses: 325, 327. Imperfect 60, 61, see in pres, system 252 a, see Classes ; in -pi verbs 632, 635. See Contraction. Syntax: 73 ; in unreal conditions 798 ; with &v, iterative 805. Impersonal verbs w. inf. as subj. nom. 352 ; verbal in -reov 584. Inceptive or sixth class of verbs 642. Indefinite pron. rls 556, 557, 724; rel. ocrrts 565. Indicative 59; tenses of 60, 61; see Xdw, Contraction, -MI Verbs, and Present, Imperfect, Future, etc. Uses: in causal sents. 781; w. ov p-fl (fut.) 786; in obj. clauses w. ottws (fut.) 792 ; in prot.: pres, and past tenses 797, fut. p. 375 1 , sec¬ ondary tenses in unreal supposi¬ tions 798, in cond. rel. clauses 813, 814, in temporal clauses 821-823 ; in apod. : 797, 798, 803, 804, 273, 814; iterative tenses w. &v 805; w. rel. to express purpose (fut.) 818 ; w. rel. to express result 819; w. rel. to express cause 820; w. were 824 ; in indir. discourse 830, 832, 845. 82 ENGLISH INDEX. Indirect compounds (verbs) 422; re¬ flexives 515; obj. of verb 709, 767, 768 (p. 25 2 , p. 84 1 ); discourse 827, 828, 830-832, 836-840, 844-846. Inferiority vbs. exp. w. gen. 754 (p. 90 7 ). Infinitive 59, 345, 347, 635 e. Uses: 350, 352, 354, 355, 823, 824 (p. 210 7 ), 836-838, 850 (p. 219 4 ), 851- 853; w. p. 320 1 . Instrument dat. of 775 (p. 47 s ); suf¬ fix denoting 407. Intensive pron. 510, 511. Interrogative prons. 555, 557-559; subjv. 785. Intransitive verbs 709 a; cognate obj. of 732; w. dat. of indir. obj. 768. Iota or fourth class of verbs 464- 466, 474-478, 616-620; subscript 12 . Irregular adjs. 384, 385; compari¬ son 469. Iterative tenses w. &v 805. Judicial action vbs. exp. w. gen. 755 (p. 110 3 ). Know vbs. sig. w. part. 839 b. Labials 114; euphonic changes215a, 457, 460 a, 548, 575; aspirated in second pf. 522. See v. Lead vbs. sig. w. gen. 748 (p. 83 3 ). Learn vbs. sig. w. part. 839 b. Likeness dat. of 773 (p. 115 4 ). Linguals 114 ; euphonic changes 231, 233, 459, 465, 502, 551, 575. Liquids 113; v before p. 167 3 ; before l of tense-suffix -t°/ e . 475-477. Liquid verbs 254, 439, 472-477, 481, 500, 504-507, 521, 562, 577, 578, 587, 588. Make vbs. sig. w. two accs. 739 (p. 90 8 . Manner dat. of 775 (p. 25 5 , p. 126 7 ); w. comp. 776 (p. 171 6 ); exp. by part. 379. Material adjs. denoting 414; gen. of 743, 4. Means exp. by part. 379; suffix de¬ noting 407 ; dat. of 775 (p. 47 5 ). Measure gen. of 743, 5 (p. 115 9 ). -MI Verbs 632-636, 639, 645, 650, 659, 689-697 ; irregular 664, 667, 698-704. Middle voice 196-199; mutes 114. Miss vbs. sig. w. gen. 746. Mixed or eighth class of verbs 655, 656. Moods, see Indicative, Subjunctive , etc. Mutes 112, 114; euphonic changes, see Labials, Linguals, Palatals. Mute verbs 254, 439, 456-461, 464-466, 492, 493, 500, 502, 503, 519, 521, 522, 547-552, 575, 576, 587, 588. Name vbs. sig. w. two accs. 739 (p. 90 8 ). Nasals 113; nasal or fifth class of verbs 623-627, 651. Negatives compound p. 202 2 . See oti and jifj. Neglect vbs. sig. w. gen. 747. Neuter pi. w. sing, verb 90. See Gender. Nominative case 42, 43; sing, of cons.-decl. 213,1, 5. Syntax: 713 (p. 10 5 ), 714,729; inf. as 352. Noun defined 44 a. Number 41; agreement in 714 (p. 10 5 ), 717 (p. 10 3 ). Numerals 496, 497. Obey vbs. sig. w. dat. 768 a. Object 709, dir. 731 (p. 10 6 ), indir. 767, 768 (p. 25 2 , p. 84 1 ); clauses w. yi) and subjv. or opt. 280, 304, 793; w. forws and fut ind. 792. ENGLISH INDEX. 83 Objective compounds 428; gen. 743, 3 (p. 1266), 760. Omission of subj. of inf. 350; of subj. nom. 713 a; of prot. 808 end ; of antec. of rel. 812 a. Opposition words of w. dat. 773 (p. 83 10 ). Optative 59, 295-297, 307, 310, 635 b. Uses: 300, 302, 304, 787, 804, 813, 814, 822, 823, 830-832, 845, 846. Order of words 56 Rem., 68 Rem., p. 200 3 , 719 (p. 70 2 ), 720. Ordinal numerals 496. Oxytone 33. Palatals 114; euphonic changes 215 b, 458, 464, 550, 575; aspirated in second pf. 522. See v. Paroxytone 33. Participles 59, 363, 364, 366, 367, 375, 376, 635 f. Uses: 369, 371, 372, 379, 717, 718, 836, 839 (p. 250 6 ), 840, 857-860 (p. 250 3 , p. 265 1 ). Particular suppositions 802. Partitive gen. 743, 6 (p. 138 1 ). Passive voice 221-225; second pass, system 437, 438, 587, 588. Penult 19. Perceive vbs. sig. w. gen. 747 ; w. part. 839 b. Perfect 60, 61, see \6co; first pf. system 252 d, 500-507; second pf. system 437, 438, 519-522, 659- 661; pf. mid. system, 252 e, 534, 547-552, 562. Syntax: 116, in dependent moods 265-267. Perispomenon 35. Persevere vbs. sig. w. part. 859 a. Person 57; agreement of verb in 714, of rel. in 568. Personal prons. 510-515; position of gen. of p. 194 1 ; substituted for possessive 531 c. See Endings. Pertaining to adjs. exp. 412, 413. Pity vbs. exp. w, gen. 756. Place suffix exp. 410; advs. of w. gen. 761. Please vbs. sig. w. dat. 768 a. Pleased vbs. sig. to be w. part. 859 a. Plenty verbs of w. gen. 749 (p. 107 1 ). Pluperfect 60, 61,117, see Aita; first pf. system 252 d ; 500-507 ; second pf. system 519-522, 659-661; pf. mid. system 252 e, 534, 547-552, 562. Plural 41; neut. pi. w. sing, verb 90. Possessive compounds 430; prons. 531, p. 200 5 ; gen. 743, 1, 744 a (p. 132 4 ); dat. 770 (p. 21 2 ). Postpositives p. 15 2 , p. 43 3 . Predicate 708; adj. 710 (56 Rem.); subst. 711; agreement of 715; apparent adv. force of p. 308 5 ; position of 720; pred. acc. w. obj. acc. 739 (p. 90 8 ); gen. 744 (p. 132 4 , p. 1381). Prepositions 93-98; in compos, w. gen. 757 (p. 107 4 ); w. dat. 774 (p. 31 s , p. 118 8 ); w. inf. and art. 852. Present 60, 61, see A6w; pres, system 252 a; pres, stem, see Classes; in -fu verbs, 632, 635; reduplica¬ tion 606, 632, 642. See Contrac¬ tion. Syntax: 64, in dependent moods 265-267, 355, part. 372. Price gen. of 758. Primary tenses 61. Primitives 397; prim, substs. 402, 404, 405, 406; adjs. 411. Principal Parts of verbs 253, 603; of deponents 255 a b. Proclitics 37, 186 c. Prohibitions w. yy 327. Pronouns , see Personal , Intensive , Reflexive , etc. Pronunciation 5, p. 4 1 , 14. Proparoxytone 33. Properispomenon 35. 84 ENGLISH INDEX. . Prosecute vbs. sig. w. gen. 755. Protasis 272 ; neg. of /at? 797 a (273, 300); various forms of 814; exp. by part., adv., etc. 808 end. Prove vbs. sig. w. part. 839 b. Punctuation marks of 40. Purpose exp. by final clause 278, 302, 791; by part. 379 ; by rel. w. fut. ind. 818; by inf. 851. Quality substs. exp. 408. Questions dir. and indir. 558, 570, 827, 828, 830, 832; of appeal w. subjv. 785, 831. jReading the art of 138-140, 142; directions for 140, 148. Reciprocal pron. 529, 530. Reduplication 119-123, 128, p. 209 1 , p. 235 4 ; of theme in pres, stem 606, 632, 642. Reflexive prons. 526-528, p. 200 3 ; indir. reflexives 515, 528. Regular verbs 596. Relative prons. 565-571, 725; rel. clauses 818-820; cond. rel. clauses 812-814. Release vbs. sig. w. gen. 753. Remember vbs. sig. w. gen. 747 (p. 251 5 ); w. part. 839 b. Remind vbs. sig. w. two accs. 737. Remove vbs. sig. w. gen. 753. Repent vbs. sig. w. part. 859 a. Reproach vbs. exp. w. dat. 768 a. Respect dat. of p. 126 7 . Restrain vbs. sig. w. gen. 753. Result substs. denoting 406 ; exp. by rel. cl. 819; by wore w. inf. or ind. 824 (p. 210 7 ). Revenge vbs. exp. w. gen. 756. Root 135-137; changes of 399, 400. Rough breathing 15,16; mutes 114, 120, 332 b, p. 2639. Rule vbs. sig. w. gen. 748 (p. 83 3 ). Satisfy vbs. sig. w. dat. 768 a. Second aor., pf., etc. 438,489; second tense systems, see^lomi, Passive , Perfect. Secondary tenses 61. See vbs. sig. w. part. 839 b. Semivowels 112, 113. Separation gen. of 753 (p. 60 2 , p. 107 9 ). Serve vbs. sig. w. dat. 768 a. Share vbs. sig. w. gen. 745. Show vbs. sig. w. part. 839 b. Sibilant 113. Simple words 396. Singular 41; sing, verb w. neut. pi. subj. 90. Smooth breathing 15,16; mutes 114. Sound-changes 401. Space extent of w. acc. 735. Specification acc. of 733. Stem 47, 134,135. See Tense-stems. Strong-vowel or second class of verbs 492, 493, 609, 610. Subject 708; of finite verb 713 (p. 10 5 ); omitted 713 a; of inf. 350; neut. pi. w. sing, verb 90; several subjs. w. one verb p. 232 7 . Subjective gen. 743, 2. Subjunctive 59, 265-268, 276, 283, 635 g. Uses: 271, 273, 278, 280, 327, 785, 786, 791, 793, 803, 813, 814, 822, 823, 831, 845, 846. Substantives formation of 402-410; w. inf. 850. Suffix of opt. mood 297 a, 307 b, 310 a, 635 h ; in nouns 398, 401- 416. See Tense-Suflixes. Superiority vbs. exp. w. gen. 754 (p. 90 7 ). Superlative degree 445-448; w. gen. 453, 743 a. Supplementary part. 857, 859, 860. Suppositions particular and general 802. See Conditional. Surpass vbs. sig. w. gen. 754 (p. 90 7 ). Swearing particles of w. acc. 736 (p. 194 4 ). ENGLISH INDEX. 85 Syllabic , see Augment Syllables 18-20. Syncopated stems in -ep- 289-291. Syntax defined 707. Systems , see Tense-Systems. Take hold of vbs. sig. w. gen. 746. Taste vbs. sig. w. gen. 747. Tau or third class of verbs 460, 461, 613. Teach vbs. sig. w. two accs. 737. Temporal sents. 821-823. See Aug¬ ment. Tense-Stems 152, 252. See Tense- Systems. Tense-Suffixes 152, 252, 490, 519, 587. Tense-Systems 252, 436, 438; pres, system 252 a, see Classes ,• fut. 252 b, 457, 473; first aor. 252 c, 457, 481; second aor. 490; first pf. 252 d, 500-507 ; second pf. 519-522 ; pf. mid. 252 e, 534, 535, 547-552, 562 ; first pass. 252 f, 574-578; second pass. 587, 588. Tenses 60, 61, see Present , Imper¬ fect, etc. Theme of verb, 63, 151; vowel of modified 254 a b, 442, 476, 477, 481, 492, 503, 505, 507, 521, 535, 552, 576, 588 a, 635 i j, 642. Theme or seventh class of verbs 647. Think vbs. sig. w. two accs. 739. Threats vbs. exp. w. dat. 768 a. Time exp. by part. 379 ; acc. of 735 ; gen. of 759 (p. 74 1 ); dat. of 777 (p. 45*). Touch vbs. sig. w. gen. 746 (p.243 8 ). Transitive verbs, 709 a; obj. of in acc. 731 (p. 106). Trial o/vbs. sig. make w. gen. 746. Trust vbs. sig. w. dat. 768 a. Ultima 19. Unlikeness words of w. dat. 773 (p. 115 4 ). Value gen. of 758. Variable vowel 153; long in subjv. 268 a, 276 b; omitted in -pi verbs 659. See Tense-Suffixes and Classes. Variable-Vowel or first class of verbs 440, 595-600, 603-606. Verbals in -ros and -reos 581-584; verbal adjs. w. gen. 760; snbsts. w. dat. 772. Verbs principal parts 253, 255 a; defective 253 a, 596 ; kinds of 254 ; deponent 255 ; regular 596 ; in -pi and -w 633, 634. See Classes and -MI Verbs. Verb theme, see Theme. Vocabulary how to be acquired 137, 434. Vocative case 42, 43 ; sing of cons.- decl. 213, 3, 5. Syntax: 730. Voice 58, 196-199, 221-225. Vowels 7-11; contraction of 241 a-f. See the various letters in the Greek-Eng. Index. Vowel declension 81, 87, 144-147, 177-180,191; verbs 254,441,442, 478, 534. See Contraction. Want vbs. of w. gen. 749 (p. 107 1 ). Weary vbs. sig. to be w. part. 859 a. Whole gen. of (partitive) 743, 6. Wishes exp. by opt. 787. Wonder vbs. exp. w. gen. 756. Word-Grouping 132-137, 431-434. Words borrowed and cognate, 432, 433. Yield vbs. sig. w. gen. 753. ADVERTISEMENTS . ' • sg - ; m ./] ■ . _ GREEK TEXT-BOOKS -K >* Goodwin's Greek Grammar. Revision of 1892. By William W. Goodwin, Ph.D., Eliot Professor of Greek Literature in Harvard College. Revised and Enlarged Edition. . 12mo. Half morocco, xxxvi + 451 pages. Mailing price, $1.65; for introd., $1.50. POR thirteen years the second edition stood unchallenged as the best elementary Greek Grammar in the English language. Nevertheless it has been possible to improve it. 1 . The relative degrees of prominence that should be given to the various aspects of grammar have been carefully considered of late years, and the new edition of Goodwin will be found in accord with the soundest ideas on this subject. 2. Changes have been freely made where improvement could he effected. For instance, a great part of the section on the verb has been remodeled and rewritten. 3. Particular attention has been paid to improvements in the Syntax, and the chief increase has been made in this department. 4 . A radical and marked improvement has been made in the number¬ ing of sections. This is offered as the best Greek Grammar for preparatory schools and colleges that reasonably can be demanded in the present state of our knowledge and experience. It should be borne in mind that Goodwin’s Greek Grammar is entirely complete. It does not require the student to get the author’s Moods and Tenses, as it contains as much on these subjects as any elementary Greek Grammar does or should. No difficulty will be experienced in using the new edition of Goodwin’s Grammar with texts that refer to the former edition. A complete table of parallel references is given at the beginning of the new edition., The work is so favorably and universally known that it is not deemed necessary to print any commendations. A few figures however may be found of interest. In the year 1893, according to the best reports attain¬ able, the Grammar stood as follows in four representative states. Massachusetts . . 171 Schools using Goodwin. 24 Using the grammar standing next New York .... 233 “ “ 51 “ “ Illinois.60 “ 17 Georgia .... 57 “ “ 8 “ “ 60 GREEK TEXT-BOOKS. New Anabasis. First Four Books. Revised by Professor W. W. Goodwin, author of Goodwin’s Greek Grammar, and Professor John Williams White, author of Greek Lessons, The Beginner’s Greek Book, etc. With the Illustrated Vocabulary of Professors White & Morgan. 12mo. Half leather. With map and illustrations, lii + 274 pages. Mailing price, $1.65; for introduction, $1.50. points of the new edition are : The thorough revision of text; the large Porson type; summaries of the contents inserted in the page ; an introduction of 43 pages, containing all needed information about history and antiquities. The notes have been made on the conviction that the first Greek book read by a student must be used in part as a basis for drill in the ordinary construction of syntax, and that it is only by systematic study of syntax at the outset that a student can prepare himself to read Greek afterwards without constantly stumbling over common forms of syntax. The grammatical information is given chiefly by references to the grammars, but seldom without some hint as to the nature of the construction. This book, made up by the collaboration of three eminent scholars and specialists, can be most confidently recommended as able and thorough in scholarship, skillful in adaptation to the end in view, and free from all features that are merely “taking” and without real value. QOME the S. Waterhouse, Professor of Greek, Washington University, St. Louis, Mo.: For clearness of ex¬ planation, excellence in lexicon, relevancy of notes, and elegance of typography, the Anabasis is worthy of high praise. There is no better edition for the use of secondary schools. 0. D. Robinson, Principal High School, Albany, N.Y.: It seems to leave nothing to he expected in the way of excellency even if it could be desired. Martin L. D’Ooge, Professor of Greek, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich. : It furnishes every proper appliance to the begin¬ ner for reading Greek. Chas. C. Ramsay, Principal High School, Fall River, Mass.: I am de¬ lighted with it. The notes and vo¬ cabulary are unequaled. J. Irving Manatt, Professor of Greek, Brown University, Provi¬ dence, R.I.: It lacks nothing, and ought to leave room for nothing on the same ground in our schools. E. G. Warner, Instructor in Latin , Polytechnic Institute, Brooklyn , N. Y.: It not only gives satisfaction, hut positive, pleasure. GREEK TEXT-BOOKS. 63 Anabasis Dictionary. An illustrated Dictionary to Xenophon’s Anabasis, with Groups of words etymologically related. By John Williams White, Professor of Greek, and Morris H. Morgan, Assistant Professor of Greek and Latin, in Harvard University. 12mo. Cloth, viii + 290 pages. Mailing price, $1.35; for introduction, $1.25. Also bound with Goodwin and White’s Anabasis. By mail, $1.65; for introduction, $1.50. rpHIS is a new collection and examination of all the words in the Anabasis itself. It contains all words found in any of the principal editions now in use, with every meaning which each word has in the Anabasis , and with full references to the passages in which they occur. Greeh-English Word-List Containing about 977 of the most common Greek Words. By Robert Baird, Professor of Greek, Northwestern University. 12mo. Cloth. 43 pages. Mailing price, 35 cents; for introduction, 30 cents. rjpHE lack of a vocabulary is the greatest obstacle to the reading of Greek and the enjoyment of Greek literature. This little manual is designed to help the student master this difficulty. LATIN AND GREEK SCHOOL CLASSICS. See also the Announcements. Under the general editorial supervision of William C. Collar, Head- Master of the Roxbury Latin School, and John Tetlow, Head-Master of the Girls’ High and Latin Schools, Boston. For the Latin books of this Series, see page 47. The Gate to the Anabasis. With Colloquia, Notes and Vocabulary. By Clarence W. Gleason, Master in the Roxbury Latin School, Boston. 16mo. Cloth, iv + 107 pages. Mailing price, 45 cents; for introduction, 40 cents. rpHIS book is intended to do for beginners in Greek what the Gate to Caesar has done for beginners in Latin. Odyssey, Booh I/I. Edited by Charles W. Bain, Professor of Greek, University School, Petersburg, Va. 16mo. Cloth. pages. Mailing price, cents; for introduction, cents. rpHIS edition is intended to meet the wants of pupils just beginning Homer. The notes are copious, and all passages likely to present any difficulty are fully explained. . GREEK TEXT-BOOKS. (54 The Beginner's Greek Composition. Based mainly upon Xenophon’s Anabasis, Book I. By William C. Collar, Head-Master of Roxbury Latin School, and M. Grant Daniell, Principal of Chauncy-Hall School. Sq. 16mo. Cloth, viii + 201 pages. Illustrated. Mailing price, 95 cents; for introduction, 90 cents. rpHIS book is designed to offer a complete preparation for admission to college. It contains eighty-five exercises for oral and written translation based on the first book of the Anab¬ asis, with notes and numerous comparisons of Greek and Latin idioms and constructions. Following these are several miscella¬ neous passages of continuous English for translation into Greek, and certain Harvard admission papers suitably annotated. W. S. Tyler, Emeritus Professor of Greek, Amherst College : The plan is a good one and it is executed with wisdom and care. Edward B. Clapp, Prof, of Greek, University of California : It is the best book for the purpose which we have. George D. Lord, Prof, of Greek, Dartmouth College: Its method is sound. Its clear and compact treat¬ ment make it markedly practical. Edward North, Prof, of Greek, Hamilton College: A good example of recent advance in the teaching of Greek and Latin. Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the Greek Verb. Rewritten and Enlarged. By William Watson Goodwin, Eliot Pro¬ fessor in Greek Literature, Harvard University. 8vo. Cloth. xxxii + 464 pages. Mailing price, $2.15; for introduction, $2.00. A MOST careful revision and a judicious enlargement of the previous edition. Full use,has been made of all contribu¬ tions to the discussion of the subjects here treated, as well as of the author’s own further investigations and maturer judgments. The work is presented as something indispensable to all students and teachers of Greek. Goodwin’s Greek Reader. Edited by Professor William Watson Goodwin, of Harvard Univer¬ sity. 12mo. Half morocco. 384 pages. Mailing price, $1.65; for intro¬ duction, $1.50. QONSISTIXG of Selections from Xenophon, Plato, Herodotus, and Thucydides. GREEK TEXT-BOOKS. 6a Seymour’s School Iliad. With Introduction, Commentary, and Illustrated Vocabulary, by Thomas D. Seymour, Professor of Greek in Yale College. Books I.-III. Square 12mo. Half-leather. 371 pages. Mailing price, $1.35; for introduction, $1.25. Books I.-VL 478 pages. Mailing price, $1.75; for introduction, $1.60. rpHIS is believed to be without exception the ideal Iliad for school use. The introduction, which contains forty-five pages, pre¬ sents, in a concise but systematic form, the most important facts regarding Homeric life, the Homeric poem, Homeric style, syntax, dialect, and verse. The text is printed in the large and clear type that has distinguished the College Series of Greek Authors. The commentary has been adapted to the wants of beginners in Homer. The notes are copious for the first three books. They are less copious for Books IV. to VI., but the commentary on Book VI. is fuller than that on Books IV. and Y. One finds numberless evidences that the editor has done his work not only in a careful and in a painstaking and scholarly way, but with personal pleasure and with sympathetic regard for the difficulties of beginners. The vocabulary described below con¬ tains more than twenty wood-cuts, most of which are new in this country. A. H. Buck, Professor of Greek, Boston University : A positive and valuable help to an easy and ade¬ quate preparation for college work. A notable contribution to the cause of classical learning. Charles Forster Smith, Professor of Greek, University of Wisconsin: Universally conceded to be the best school edition of any part of the Iliad that has yet been put on the American market. Homeric Vocabulary. A Concise Vocabulary to the First Six Books of Homer’s Iliad. By Professor T. D. Seymour of Yale College. Square 12mo. Cloth. x + 105 pages. Mailing price, 80 cents; for introduction, 75 cents. rjiHIS Vocabulary has not been compiled from other dictionaries, but has been made from the poem itself. The maker has endeavored to give nothing but what is important for the accurate and appreciative reading of the Iliad, and yet to show the original and derived meanings of the words, and to suggest translations which should be both simple and dignified. GREEK TEXT-BOOKS. INTROD. Allen : Medea of Euripides Baird : Greek-English Word-List. Collar and Daniell : Beginner’s Greek Composition. Flagg : Hellenic Orations of Demosthenes .;.... Seven against Thebes, $1.00; Anacreontics . . . Goodwin : Greek Grammar (Rev. Ed.). Greek Moods and Tenses (Rev. Ed.). Greek Reader. Goodwin & White : New Anabasis, with Illustrated Vocabulary Selections from Xenophon and Herodotus . . . Greek School Classics Series : Bain’s Odyssey, Book VI. . . Gleason’s Gate to the Anabasis. Sewall’s Timon of Lucian. The Irregular Verbs of Attic Greek. Introduction to the Study of Homer. New Greek Lessons PRICE. $1.00 .30 .90 1.00 .35 1.50 2.00 1.50 1.50 1.50 .35 .40 Hogue: Jebb: Leighton: Liddell & Scott : Greek English Lexicon, $9.40; Abridged Parsons: Seymour: Sidgwick: Tarbell: Tyler: White: Cebes’ Tablet Homer’s Illiad (School Edition) with Vocabulary, Books I.—III., $1.25; Books I.-VI. Language and Verse of Homer. Paper, 60 cts.; Cloth Homeric Vocabulary, 75 cts.; Selected Odes of Pindar Greek Prose Composition. Philippics of Demosthenes. Selections from Greek Lyric Poets. Beginner’s Greek Book, $1.50; First Lessons . . . Oedipus Tyrannus of Sophocles. Passages for Translation at Sight, Part IV. White & Morgan : Anabasis Dictionary. Whiton : Orations of Lysias. Allen : Wecklein’s Prometheus Bound of Aeschylus, $1.40. Beckwith : Bacchantes of Euripides, $1.25. Bennett : Xenophon’s Hellenica, Books V.-VII., $1.40. D’Ooge : Antigone of Sophocles, $1.40. Dyer : Plato’s Apology and Crito, $1.40. Flagg : Euripides’ Iphigenia among the Taurians, $1.40. Fowler: Thucydides, Book V., $1.40. Humphreys : Clouds of Aristophanes, $1.40. Lodge : Gorgias of Plato, $1.65. Manatt: Xenophon’s Hellenica, Books I.-IV., $1.65. Morgan : Eight Orations of Lysias, $1.40. Morris : Thucydides, Book I., $1.65. Perrin: Homer’s Odyssey, Books I.-IV., $1.40; Books V.- $1.40. Richardson : Aeschines against Ctesiphon, $1.40. Seymour : Homer’s Iliad, Books I.—III., $1.40; Books IV.-VI., Smith: Thucydides, Book III., $1.65; Book VII., $1.40. Towle : Protagoras of Plato, $1.25. Editions of the Text are issued separately. Each, 40 cents. 1.50 1.12 1.20 1.25 .75 1.60 }.75 1.40 1.50 1.00 1.00 1.20 1.12 .80 1.25 1.00 ra © •H fn © C/2 © be © rH rH o o VIII., $1.40. Copies sent to Teachers for Examination, with a view to Introduction , on receipt of Introductory Price. The above list is not quite complete. GINN & COMPANY, Publishers, Boston. New York. Chicago. Atlanta. BOSTON COLLEGE 3 9031 V 94486 3 131011 DOES NOT CIRCULATE im\t V/mTF Jpfc lllWLkkiAfcL^ author )N COLLEGE LIBRARY UNIVERSITY HEIGHTS CHESTNUT HILL, MASS. \ ' Books may be kept for two weeks and may be renewed for the same period, unless reserved. Two cents a day is charged for each book kept I overtime. K you cannot find what you want, ask the Librarian who will be glad to help you. - The borrower is responsible for books drawn on his card and for all fines accruing on the same.